Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

"And now these three remain: faith, hope, and love. But the greatest of these is love." – 1 Corinthians 13:13

Trembling, crouching as low as he could, the silk merchant could only pray that the bandits didn't notice him. He could hear the sounds of his shop being ransacked and ruined—it felt like a stab to the heart whenever they broke something—he hated himself for being so cowardly, so powerless against them, but he knew that if he hid and stayed quiet, then the bandits would be content with his merchandise, and not his life. He just needed to be patient, and they'd get bored soon, and leave for someone else to plunder.

But they didn't. He heard them approaching. They were coming closer. They were laughing, calling out for him, taunting him. His heart sank as he felt the ground shake under their footsteps. There must have been at least eight of them. He squeezed his eyes shut and gnashed his teeth, refusing to answer them, refusing to move. Oh, if only they would give up and go away! Suddenly, the noises from outside changed. The bandits were screaming, calling out to each other, flying into a panic. They were engaged in a battle, but with who? With each other? Oh, if only that were so! Let them tear each other apart, then, the silk merchant thought to himself. But they weren't fighting each other: there was another party involved. The sound of swishing water overpowered their shouts, and then a great grinding crackle silenced them all. The merchant continued to hide, frightened and puzzled, not daring to move. When he finally poked his head out, he noticed his shop was in ruins, but empty—save for a pile of silk bolts in the middle of the floor. When he looked outside, he saw the bandits, encased in ice, being dragged away by an unknown force...

Further into the city, notorious members of the Stone Anarchists were breaking into one of the many missions spread across the city. They knew that people donated food, money, and other supplies to these places all the time, and had no compunction against robbing them. A few volunteers had already been gagged and tied up while the bandits picked the mission clean, jeering all the while. The bandits got about five steps outside the mission, just enough space to admire their ill-gotten gains in the moonlight, when they were viciously blasted with a torrential gale and flattened against the ground. They let out a cry but were just as soon silenced as a mysterious figure overcame them with a gust of air, recovered their loot, and placed it back in the mission, slicing the ropes off the volunteers.

Elsewhere, ten of the Stone Anarchists had cornered a wealthy couple in an alleyway, wielding clubs and knives. They demanded money, and would not take no for an answer. Shakily, the man threw his coin pouch on the ground, but that wasn't enough for the bandits: they wanted the woman's jewels. One made a grab for her necklace and ripped it off her neck; she screamed; the leader raised his cudgel to silence her. A terrific jolt stunned him as the weapon came crashing down on his own head, and soon all the clubs slipped out of their hands. Before the thugs even knew what happened, a large wooden pallet smashed into them, rendering them unconscious. Amazed, the wealthy couple took a moment to assess the situation before they ran for their lives.

Torch-bearing Stone Anarchists surrounded the Savings and Trust building. Five of their members were inside, plundering the town's wealth, while the others kept a close watch outside. As soon as the five bandits returned, the other Anarchists lobbed their torches at the building, setting it on fire. They scattered quickly, but were brought to a halt as the fire leaped from the building and formed a wall around them. A mysterious figure stood veiled behind the flames, guiding them masterfully, ensnaring the bandits. Before they could move, shots of fire danced from the wall and onto their clothes, forcing them to drop their goods and scatter for safety. The money was soon returned to the Savings and Trust building.

The rest of the Stone Anarchists, fifty in total, gathered outside the city with their loot in tow. Their leaders were pleased with the evening's haul, but noticed a sharp drop in membership. Thirty Anarchists in total were unaccounted for; theories about their absence ranged from mutiny to drunkenness to spiritual intervention (the guy swore he saw a demonic tree grab his buddy and swallow him whole). The leaders calmed their followers and agreed to give the others up as lost: whatever their fate was, the rest of the Stone Anarchists wouldn't share in it. They were just about to return to their hideout when they ran into a lone man dressed in full evening regalia, complete with a top hat, cape, cane, and a white lotus in his lapel.

"Good evening, gentlemen," he bowed. "Out for a bit of midnight thievery?"

"What's it to you, pretty boy?" they laughed. "Did you get stood up by your wife or something?"

"Not in the least. I just saw you fine people causing some mischief and thought I'd do my part to stop you." The group burst into laughter; the leaders signaled to five of their goons.

"Waste him!" The five bandits laughed cruelly as they closed in. The well-dressed man smiled confidently and waited for an opening; as the bandits lunged, he whipped his cane out, smashing one skull, then jerked his cane back, butting into another. He grabbed the third bandit and threw him against the fourth, then sniped the knees of the fifth, bringing him wailing to the ground before chopping his neck. The five bandits groaned helplessly on the ground while the man stood as calm as before.

"Shall we call it an evening, fellows? As you can see, you don't stand a chance." This caused the whole group to bawl out laughing.

"You're a good fighter, we'll give you that, but there's no way you can take us all on your own!"

"Who said I was alone?" he grinned smugly. "Look behind you." The bandits froze, turning around in confusion...and saw five girls run up from behind and leap into the moonlit sky.

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

When I get high I get high on speed
Top fuel funny car's a drug for me
My heart, my heart, kick start my heart

The five girls slammed into the bandits, issuing shockwaves of water, fire, wood, earth, and air, disrupting their ranks with a tremendous quake. They stood, beautiful to behold.

Always got the cops coming after me
Custom built bike doing 103
My heart, my heart, kick start my heart

"So this is what I missed the dance for?" called a blonde girl. "You guys are in for it—and if I break a nail, you're really in for it!" She barreled into the group, surrounding herself with a sphere of air, sending bandits flying left and right or flattening them under her stormy heels. Before they could recover, she blasted a shockwave of wind all around her, flattening them again. The girl danced wildly as she was surrounded by thugs, but her movements were so erratic and unpredictable that the bandits either missed her completely or ended up hitting each other instead. She called a swift breeze to lift herself into the air, just as two bandits collided head-first with each other, and came down with a vicious kick, flooring three more.

"Oh, good," she said as she glanced at her fingernails. "Still lookin' fine! I guess you guys get off easy!"

STARRING MINAKO AINO AS THE AIR-BENDER

Oh, are you ready girls? Oh, are you ready now?
Ooh, yeah, kick start my heart give it a start
Whoa, yeah, baby!

Whoa, yeah, kick start my heart hope it never stops
Whoa, yeah, baby!

"Well, she finally got her one-liner in for the day," muttered a dark-haired girl. She noticed three bandits heading her way and took a defensive stance. Thinking they were "only" going up against a girl, the three men grinned and brandished their weapons. The dark-haired girl smiled too, and kicked the legs out from the center bandit, causing him to fall. She picked him up by the ankles and swung him around, knocking the other two flat, then tossed her foe into the crowd. Another bandit came charging up on her left, but she raised her hand, igniting a shield of fire to block his attack. The fire spread to his clothes, and the girl's smile widened as he ran away screaming. She shot a volley of fireballs into the crowd, and dared them to attack her.

"All right, fellas, who wants to be chastised first?" She charged into their ranks, jabbing and striking and weaving, whirling away to smile at them as she raised her arm and snapped her finger. Bursts of explosive fire ignited where she had struck, felling the thugs as the girl stood triumphant.

REI HINO AS THE FIRE-BENDER

Skydive naked from an aeroplane
Or a lady with a body from outer space
My heart, my heart, kick start my heart

Ten bandits were surrounding the tallest girl in the group, but she kept a cool head and smiled at them. They all piled on top of her at once, but she burst through, sending them reeling back. Several of them were wearing wooden breastplates, she noted with a grin, so when they attacked her again, she scooped two into her arms and slammed them into each other. Taking the breastplates for herself, she volleyed them between the other bandits, slamming them one after the other, finishing with a flourishing sweep that saw all of them on the ground groaning. One of them leaped on her back and held a knife to her throat, but the girl just snapped her fingers, and the branches of a nearby tree lifted the screaming bandit off her back. She smiled and patted the tree.

"Thanks!"

MAKOTO KINO AS THE WOOD-BENDER

A blue-haired girl was sitting quietly by herself, drinking hot tea as she read through a newspaper. She hummed a soft song to herself as she turned the pages, content to enjoy herself in peace. Without so much as blinking an eye, she allowed herself another sip as she stuck her leg out, tripping one of the bandits. She casually moved the tea from her cup to the ground, froze it, and sat patiently while several more bandits slipped, fell, and made a pile. She then idly froze them in place and went back to her newspaper, lips curling in satisfaction.

AMI MIZUNO AS THE WATER-BENDER

Say I got trouble, trouble in my eyes
I'm just looking for another good time
My heart, my heart, kick start my heart

Fifteen of the Stone Anarchists had had enough. Their group was being massacred, and they didn't want to stick around any longer. Breaking off from the attack, they slinked into the woods, but were stopped as they ran into the well-dressed man again.

"Leaving the party so soon, boys?" he taunted them. The man tapped the ground with his cane and great rock monsters emerged, enveloping eight of the bandits in their embrace. The others turned tail, but the well-dressed man still wasn't finished with them, and hurled lotus-shaped stones at them, knocking them all down.

WITH MAMORU CHIBA AS THE EARTH-BENDING KING ENDYMION III

Yeah, are you ready girls? Yeah, are you ready now?
Oh, yeah, kick start my heart give it a start
Oh, yeah, baby!

Whoa, yeah, kick start my heart hope it never stops
Oh, yeah, baby

Very few Stone Anarchists were still standing by now. The girls and the man had them surrounded, and were closing in. Before the bandits could taste their wrath, a girl with blonde pigtails made her way to them. She gave off an iridescent, otherworldly glow in the darkness; her eyes were fiery, her voice was like a storm, her hair flowed like water, and the earth trembled beneath her.

"I am the Avatar! I fight for love and justice! I have been sent here to right wrongs and triumph over evil—and that means you!"

"Gaah! We give up! We surrender!" They laid down their weapons and kowtowed before her. The girl phased out of her Avatar State and stood there, blinking in amazement.

"Oh! That was easy!"

AND FEATURING USAGI TSUKINO AS THE AVATAR

1: Kickstart My Heart

As Usagi beamed proudly, the others went to work confiscating weapons and binding their prisoners. Tellurian officers were called in to formally process and arrest the bandits, take statements, and deliver recompense to those affected. The new Captain personally took Mamoru and Usagi aside to thank them, and not for the first time, Minako wished that Princess Unazuki had been given the job. Oh, Reika Nishimura was certainly competent—after all, she had been alerted to these bandit attacks and had helped organize a response team—but she couldn't help but feel that Unzuki would have brought a much-needed change to the old system. Well, it wasn't her decision, and from their talks, it sounded like Unazuki didn't mind, either. Still.

"What a night," Usagi gushed. "It took less time to track these Rock Guys down than it did to process them, and Reika still says they're not finished. Ugh, I'm exhausted!"

"What are you talking about, bun-head?" Rei retorted. "You hardly did anything at all! They only surrendered because you came at them in full-on 'shock and awe' mode."

"Hey, it was effective, wasn't it?" she grinned. Rei crossed her arms but couldn't argue with results.

"Yes, well, I still don't see how you can be so tired."

"Maybe because it's late, Rei!"

"So what? You'll just sleep in late again tomorrow like you always do." The two girls glared at each other and stuck their tongues out, tendrils of fire and lightning sparking between them. The other girls sighed. Unfortunately, they knew the beat of this tune all too well.

"Okay, you two, we've all had a long day," Makoto said as she physically separated them. "Let's all get some sleep so we can kick more butt tomorrow."

"Who are we going up against this time?" Minako said. "I thought we took care of all the major gangs."

"Yeah, but now all the smaller ones are stepping in to fill the void. There's at least three new factions that've popped up in the last week. They're emerging so quickly that I can barely keep track of their names!" Luckily, Ami had been keeping track. She opened up a registry of all the past, present, and future pockets of dissent they had encountered or heard about and read off the most recent three:

"There are Beryl's Fanatic Battlers, an anti-Endymonic group who have been stirring unrest in the hinterlands of Ba Sing Se; there are the Loyalists of Zoicite, who are basically just a small group of pirates; and there's the Cult of the Avatar, who've taken it upon themselves to enact retribution against those who oppose Usagi. So basically we have to save bad people from other bad people while we're fighting them."

"I hate that stupid cult," Usagi snarled. "I swear, if I ever see any of them in person, I'll set them straight, just you wait and see!"

"Something tells me they wouldn't listen," Makoto remarked. She yawned and stretched, too tired to worry about it now. "Anyway, I'm gonna hit the hay. I'll see you guys tomorrow."

"Yep, bright and early," Minako smiled. She pointed at Usagi and said, "And no sleeping in, okay? Don't make me sic Artemis on you."

"Don't worry, I have Luna for that," Usagi grumbled. Everyone waved goodnight to everyone else, leaving just the Avatar and the new Earth King. In spite of her weariness, Usagi sighed dreamily as she sidled next to him. "So, Mamoru, it looks like we're alone now. Do you think maybe we can steal an hour or two before bedtime?"

"I'd love nothing more," he replied sadly, "but I'll be burning the midnight oil again. The Tellurians did a good job, but since all of this happened in Ba Sing Se's...in my territory, I'll need to see it to completion. There'll be trials to arrange, sentences to pass, prisons to organize, not to mention holding these stolen goods as evidence. That's a lot of paperwork." He gave her an apologetic smile, but Usagi wasn't having it. Gently Mamoru took her into his arms and stared into her eyes. "We both have our work cut out for us. The Earth Kingdom is nowhere near the level of stability I'd like it to be, and the world needs its Avatar. Tonight was the closest we'll get to an actual date for a long time."

Usagi trembled. She had only seen Mamoru a handful of times since that blissful evening when they danced together, and it had usually only been for business. She knew he was more active than ever, trying to keep hold of a kingdom that was constantly in flux, while she was always off dealing with these roving bands of fanatics and thieves. Their lives were no longer their own; now they had to sacrifice everything for the greater good, for the people out there, who all deserved peace and stability after so many years of strife. There was no telling when, or even if, they'd get a chance to actually be together. It hurt them both, but it hurt Usagi the worst. At least Mamoru was accustomed to a life of responsibility and command, but up until a few months ago, Usagi had just been another regular girl, whose only major concern in life was keeping track of her studies.

And now she was the Avatar. Suffice to say it was overwhelming.

She'd swallow that bitter pill, because she had to—but that didn't mean she liked it.

"It's fine, I guess," she whispered, after a long introspective. "At least we got a little time together. And who knows? From the sound of things, it looks like I'll be in this part of the world a bit longer. Ba Sing Se's going to have troubles for a long time, isn't it?" She touched his face; he closed his hand over hers.

"If it didn't, you probably wouldn't even be here. I hate how broken things have gotten. I can't even say if Beryl improved things, or if she just made them worse and people are too used to it to know any better. But we can't think like that, can we? We're just going to have to work with what we have and try to improve things little by little. Having you here definitely helps." They smiled at each other, and were able to have a few more moments to themselves before their duties called once more. Mamoru kissed his lady's hand goodnight; Usagi exhaled somberly as she was left alone.

…...

Ami smiled to herself as she poked her head through the kitchen door. The local hotel had kindly offered their rooms to the five girls while they were in the area (free of charge, too), and Makoto wanted to take advantage of their kitchen. Minako and Rei were awake as well, one giving Artemis a good flying-exercise while the other went through her morning ritual of prayer and purification (the baths were rather nice, Rei had to admit). Ami loved to watch Makoto at work, no matter what she did; the taller girl was just that entrancing. Makoto noticed she had company and smiled.

"Morning!"

"Good morning, Makoto. Ah, that smells wonderful!"

"Thanks. Nothing tastes as good as a freshly-caught fish from a nearby river. As soon as I saw it, I knew I had to get my rod in there the first chance I got!" Ami giggled to herself; Makoto was certainly cute when she was excited. She offered to help, and was tasked with drawing in water from the river. She went outside and yoked two jars together, noticing Rei sitting cross-legged on a nearby rock, meditating. The wind played with her rich black hair, and the leaves rustled beneath her. She looked to be at peace with herself and all of nature; Ami did her best not to disturb her. As she filled her jars, she watched Minako and Artemis whirling around in the sky. Minako sometimes jumped off her mount and threw something at him, which he always caught; he then caught her, and the exercise was repeated. She waved at them as they swooped in low, and carried the jars back, humming softly to herself. She paused as she observed Usagi standing on the roof of the hotel, her long pigtails whipping in the morning wind. It was unusual to see their Avatar awake so early, so Ami called out to her.

"Good morning, Usagi!" Usagi broke free from what must've been a deeply contemplative gaze and looked down.

"Hmm? Oh, g'morning, Ami. Do you need some help with that?"

"No thank you, I can manage." She went back inside and helped Makoto in the kitchen; the fragrance of buttered fish and fresh fruit wafted out of the hotel windows and curled around Usagi's nose, pulling her further away from whatever thoughts had consumed her. Luna was also out on the roof, napping close to her feet. Usagi knelt down and scratched her head softly.

"Sounds like we have a busy day today, huh Luna? Hey, is it selfish of me to wish that I wasn't the Avatar? Or to think that maybe I was...well, not better off in my old life, because I've made a lot of great friends, but...I don't know. I guess it's just too much change too quickly. Maybe I just expected things to be peaceful a lot sooner. Silly, I know." She smiled sadly and climbed down the ladder to the main floor. Mamoru would join them for breakfast but was compelled to leave as soon as he was finished; Usagi decided not to prolong their farewells and, when the time came, simply offered a wave and a smile.

Going after the Cult of the Avatar was their next big mission. Ever since Usagi had been revealed to the world as Kalkin's successor, several fanatics from the Fire Nation and various Water Tribes had organized themselves into her devout followers. A select handful did go around doing acts of charity and goodwill in her name (even though she never endorsed any of it), but the majority were out for blood. They saw the Earth Kingdom as the Avatar's sworn enemy, and were going around committing atrocities in her name. "The Avatar demands retribution" was one of their favorite rallying cries, along with such fuzzy sentiments as "Allegiance or Death", "None will oppose Her", and the ever-popular "Heretics will be mutilated". Thanks to the tireless efforts of the Tellurians and several other spy networks, Usagi and her group learned that one of the biggest enclaves was, surprise, located right in the Serpent's Pass. With access to both the northern and southern Earth Kingdoms and a river that led out into the ocean, they had an easy gateway to several cities and towns, and could slip around (or away) with ease.

Because the Cultists were doing so much damage, both to citizens of the Earth Kingdoms and to the Avatar's reputation, they were top priority for Mamoru and Motoki. Motoki's land forces had already been marching through the Kolau Mountains while Usagi and her crew took care of the bandits; as soon as they got word from Mamoru, they entered the northern territories, and with the fleet of King Endymion III cutting them off from the sea, the Cult of the Avatar was quickly surrounded.

Between Motoki's army and Mamoru's navy, over a hundred fifty cultists were rounded up. Many of them demanded to be brought before the Avatar, insisting that her divine word was the only thing they answered to. Later that very same day, they got their wish, and for the first time, Usagi met her zealous devotees. Ami, Makoto, Minako, and Rei stood by ready to fight while Usagi faced the crowd. She was disgusted that so many would commit foul deeds in her name, and feel like their actions were justified and "good". She didn't bother trying to hide her anger.

"You've asked for me!" she shouted to the cultists. "Well, now I'm here." Before she could say another word, the masses cheered, bowed, praised her, and renewed their vows of holy war. Usagi screamed for them to be silent, throwing her arms in the air. "I didn't ask for any of this! This is not what I'm about! This is not what the Avatar is about! I'm here to act as a bridge between the physical realm and the spiritual, a balance of all things, the one who keeps peace and maintains order! What part of your sick plan involves peace and order? All you do is bully people and hurt them in my name!"

"Retribution for the Avatar!" they shouted. "Vengeance upon her enemies! Woe to the oppressors!"

"ENOUGH! If you really are devoted to me, then stop these violent actions at once! Submit yourselves to the authorities and make up for all the wrongdoing—"

"The Avatar is the ultimate authority! All the others are false! Death to the idolaters!"

"Okay, I'm through being nice," she grumbled, rolling her sleeves up. "If you're not going to listen to me, then you can all go cool off in a jail cell!"

"False! False! She is a false Avatar! We demand the true goddess of light! Kill the false one!" Usagi's throat constricted in rage, and she delved into the Avatar State, burning bright as a star. She slammed her fists into the ground, blasting huge fissures of rock that knocked all the cultists down. Motoki and Mamoru's forces were on them at once, capturing and restraining everyone they could get their hands on (more than a few people were punched or kicked for their efforts). The other girls leaped in to help: Makoto lifting several over her head and tossing them into a large net, Minako blew several into the air, Ami had to freeze a few groups, and Rei had to snipe seven or eight before they settled down. Usagi just glared at them, weathering their mixture of contempt and zeal.

"False! False! False! She is but a false mouthpiece!"

"They lie! You are the one true Avatar! I would die for you at the slightest word!"

"Slaughter her enemies!"

"This one is weak! This one is a deceiver! Do not listen to her!"

"Shaddap!" Makoto shouted, kicking one of the armored carriages they were being ushered into. The girls dusted themselves off once the last of the cultists were rounded up and carted away. Once again, Captain Nishimura of the Tellurians was there to process everything, write down statements, and clean up the mess. She was no Unazuki, but she was good at her job, and Motoki definitely trusted her. After bidding the girls farewell again, she and her crew rode off, the noise of the cultists gradually fading. Mamoru's forces also took their leave, though one officer stayed behind.

"I can give the king a message for you if you like," he said to Usagi. The girl just shook her head.

"It's okay. He's busy. Just tell him he's doing a great job as a king, and I'll always be there for him if he needs me."

"I'm sure he'll appreciate that," he replied. "His highness could use all the support he can get."

Usagi was left standing alone in the midday sun. While the other girls were recovering from the fight and chatting among themselves, Rei walked up to her friend and laid a comforting hand on her shoulder.

"Hey, you okay?" Usagi turned around, a crestfallen expression on her face. She was trembling, though she tried not to cry.

"Yeah, I guess so. I have to be, don't I? I mean, I'm the Avatar. The whole world's counting on me."

"You know you don't have to carry that burden alone," Rei replied gently. She walked closer and caressed Usagi's long golden pigtails. "I'm sorry I got mad at you earlier. After everything we've been through, you have every right to be tired. We all are. I can't say when any of this will get easier, but you're a strong person, Usagi. I know you can handle it." She smiled tenderly and put her forehead against Usagi's. The other girl smiled feebly and closed her eyes.

"Thanks, Rei. I'm sorry if I sounded selfish or whiny. I'll get better soon, I promise."

"It's okay. Even the Avatar's only human." Usagi's eyes opened, and they stared at each other, content with their lives and with each other.

"Yo!" they heard Minako shouting. "Are you two gonna kiss or what? You could at least get a room!" Usagi fumed and snapped at her.

"Oh, pipe down, Mina, we're having a moment!"

"You'll have plenty of time for moments later," Makoto said. "Don't forget, we still need to train you." Usagi paled and jerked back in horror.

"Wha? Hey, wait a minute, aren't we going after Zoicite's Loyalists or Beryl's Battlers next? W-w-w-we can't waste time training when there's still a job to be done...right?"

"Oh, so you consider your fire-bending training a waste?" Rei remarked cattily.

"What? No! Of course not! I just..."

"I think that's precisely what she said," Minako added, nodding alongside the others. She jammed a finger in Usagi's face and barked, "My air-bending style is deeply offended by your remark! For that, in the name of the Thunderbird, I shall punish you—by making you do fifty gale thrusts instead of twenty-five!"

"WHAT?!"

"And that's an extra twenty sit-ups, squats, and push-ups from me," Makoto chimed in.

"But that's not fair! You know I didn't mean it! Ami, you're the nice one! Won't you at least come to my rescue?" Ami pondered over it for a moment, idly tapping her finger to her mouth.

"It'll be at least a week before we rendezvous with Mamoru in Ba Sing Se to go after Beryl's Fanatic Battlers, and a week after that before his navy can meet up with us to fight the Loyalists of Zoicite. I'm sure we'll have more than enough time to train! So that's fifteen miles of swimming, I presume."

"You've gotta be kidding me," Usagi groaned, deflating until she hit the ground. The other girls just grinned at each other.

"You'd better make it seventeen miles, Ami," Rei remarked as she leered over Usagi's crumpled body. "We don't want to go too easy on her, do we? After all, this is the Avatar we're talking about!"

"Me and my big mouth," Usagi huffed.

The end of "Kickstart My Heart"

Next time: "How to Train Your Avatar"

Author's notes:

"Kickstart My Heart" is written by Motley Crue. If you're going to start something with an action scene, you may as well do it correctly.

Well, Book Two is now underway. If you're just coming into this new, please go back and read Book One: Chaos. Otherwise, you won't know what's going on. For those of you who have read my earlier work, "Sailor Moon Forever", you may remember I left the conclusion of that story on a cliffhanger (that, unfortunately, I will not resolve). I mention that because the opening sequence of this story is almost exactly the same one I had in mind for the opening of the sequel to that work (except the Sailors would be in a more modern setting, and it would involve creatures of some sort instead of regular people). It was an idea too good to waste, so here we are.

Minako's opening line is taken verbatim from the failed live action/animated mashup that would be known as Saban's Sailor Moon. Yes, really. There were plans to bring Sailor Moon over to America and give it the old Power Rangers treatment long before DIC got their mitts on it. There was even a line of toys in the works. Just to give you an idea of how bonkers this would have turned out, besides shifting from live action to animated segments, a red-haired Ami would have used a wheelchair (in and out of combat), Makoto would have been dark-skinned, Minako would have been Hispanic...and oh yeah, they'd all have their original Dic-dubbed names. So Serena, Darien, and Lita would have been hanging around (and yet a short-haired Rei would have stayed Japanese). I honestly can't say whether we dodged a bullet or missed something hilariously epic, but you're free to look into it on your own.

As for why Mamoru is King Endymion III, it's because Earth is the third planet from the sun. Simple enough.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

2: How to Train Your Avatar

Usagi had been having a perfectly good dream about riding a Thunderhorn when she was violently woken up by clanging metal and screaming. She jolted and felt her world thundering to life, and hated every second of it.

"Wakey wakey!" she heard Minako yell. "Rise and shine, bun-head! It's time to start your training!" Minako was banging a ladle against one of the metal pots the hotel had loaned them, and it was causing such a racket that even the dead would have stirred.

"Uuuuugh," Usagi groaned, burying her head in her pillow, "kill me now."

"No can do, Avatar! Now get out of that bed and get those legs moving! Come on: one-two, one-two, one-two!" Minako hurled the bed sheets away and pulled Usagi out, flapping her arms until she was coherent enough to do it herself. The girls had "generously" offered to train their friend in the ways of bending about two months ago, but opportunities had been rare thanks to all the bandits, cultists, pirates, and other ne'er-do-wells they kept running into. Since it was discovered that Usagi still had no bending ability whatsoever (unless she went into the Avatar State), the girls decided to change that—and it was Minako's turn to get her in shape today.

Usagi was at least given the chance to wash her face and clear away some fuzz before she started. Minako kicked things off with some basic air-bending exercises she had been taught by her father. She had Usagi do what she called "air thrusts", which were really just open-handed punches, but she swore to their effectiveness. After ten, Usagi was wide awake; after her usual twenty-five, she was perspiring; after the allotted fifty, she was sore, and no closer to a gust than before.

"Hmm," Minako pondered as she gave her pupil a break, "it usually works after the thirtieth thrust. Well, I guess we just have to keep trying! Okay, Usagi, next we're gonna work on your jumping. Try and stay in the air as long as you can!" To demonstrate, Minkao performed a few hops, floating higher and longer with each spring. Her last leap sent her vaulting over the hotel, but Usagi was still decidedly earthbound. Minako came sailing back to find her student jumping all over the place, just like a stag-rabbit, and tried very hard not to laugh.

"You'd think...being born...under the sign...of the Jackalope," Usagi wheezed, "would've given me better...jumping powers!"

"Don't worry about that, you're doing fine. Take five and we'll get into more advanced territory."

"Advanced?!" Usagi squealed. "I can't even blow leaves around!"

"Sometimes you gotta run before you can walk—and who knows, maybe it'll shock your system." Usagi groaned, but there was no avoiding this. The girls had time to spare on their trip back to Ba Sing Se and wanted to use it wisely. After taking her break, Minako asked Usagi to stand in the middle of an open field, and called a stiff wind to blow at her, changing directions randomly. Usagi's goal was to deflect or divert the wind, but all she accomplished was a lot of flailing. After an hour of this, Minako decided to take a step back and return to basics, giving Usagi a series of breathing exercises to do. She excelled at these, and even earned her breakfast, but when it came time to put her efforts into practice, she was no closer to air-bending.

"Well, it's said that some Avatars have difficulty with certain elements," Minako noted. "Kalkin had it rough with water, while Master Ou P'eng spent years trying to master fire. Then again, Master K'ung Ming had them all down when he was our age. Let's do a few more beginner drills and see where it takes us." Usagi groaned but had no choice in the matter. During lunch, Minako went over the various schools of philosophy that each of the four main temples taught (not surprisingly, possessing the most knowledge from the Western Air Temple). Usagi seemed to grasp these a little easier, but as always, couldn't make it work in practice.

Since they needed to be in Ba Sing Se in five days, the girls rode Artemis most of the way. They were in no hurry to get there, though, and since they had been traveling, fighting, and helping people almost nonstop for several weeks now, they took frequent rests (at least whenever they weren't training Usagi). Minako explained the history of air-benders during one of these long flights, and spoke of how the bisons bonded with the monks and taught them the art.

"So who taught the bisons?" Usagi asked. Minako had to think about that for awhile.

"I think it's innate. Nobody's really sure. They're born with the ability to fly, or at least they learn it when they're young."

"And how come only the Air Nomads do air-bending? Um, does that make sense? I mean, are there air-benders in the Fire Nation or the Earth Kingdom?"

"Not natively. Every single man and woman who controls an element is always born and raised in their particular country. They can move around, of course, but if you're born in, say, the Southern Water Tribe, you can never be anything else but a water-bender. Unless you're the Avatar." Usagi pondered this development quietly. Because her family had always been itinerant, there was no country she called home; she couldn't even pinpoint her exact birthplace on a map. Was that why she couldn't do any bending outside of the Avatar State? Minako saw her pensive expression and offered a smile.

"Hey, don't be afraid to ask questions! That's what we're here for. This is a learning experience for us, too."

"Right, I just...wondered why I was having difficulty."

"You don't learn bending in a day, or even a week. It takes a lot of time, practice, and dedication. For what it's worth, Usagi, you're a good student. You just need to be patient. It'll come, trust me." Usagi smiled faintly, feeling a little more assured. It all left her system very abruptly as Minako turned Artemis upside-down, dumping the other four passengers into the air. Ami, Makoto, and Rei all screamed, but Usagi's drowned them out; Minako swooped in and saved them before they could fall too far.

"Really? That did nothing? Nothing at all?" None of the girls appreciated this unexpected maneuver, least of all Usagi, and weren't afraid to express their anger.

"Jeez, Mina, you could've warned us before you did that! Don't ever pull a stupid stunt like that again!"

"Sorry," she grinned sheepishly. "I was sure that would work! My bad, note to self."

…...

The next day—bright and early again, to Usagi's annoyance—it was Ami's turn to help train their reluctant friend. She started out, as promised, by having Usagi swim laps in a nearby lake, and even swam alongside her for guidance. Usagi was already a terrible swimmer to begin with, and could barely tread water for half a lap. She coughed and sputtered most of the time, but Ami was both patient and kind. The slightest hint of improvement received her praise and compliments; any mistakes were corrected with a gentle tone. In the end, Usagi finally managed to do fifteen laps, and while her swimming had improved, her water-bending had not.

"Are you sure this is how you do it?" she grumbled during a break. Ami, of course, had no trouble in the water, and even without her bending, could swim circles around her student.

"It's a good way to grow accustomed to the element. Even if it doesn't help in your bending practice, it's always a good idea to know how to swim."

"Yeah, I guess so." Usagi laid back in the water and began to drift. The day was utterly still, barely a hint of breeze or cloud in the sky. It would be difficult to imagine a world still suffering on a day like this. "So, do you think you could teach me how to heal?"

"I'm not sure. There aren't too many people who are cut out for it. I suppose anybody can learn, but it takes...hmm, how do I put it? I don't want to suggest that there's any talent or special skill behind it, but..."

"Willpower?" Usagi offered.

"Yes, you could say that. I've never heard of an Avatar being able to heal, though, even the ones who were born in the Water Tribes. Perhaps being a healer is one thing and an Avatar is another." She had Usagi do two more laps before getting out. Ami was able to dry herself off by bending the water droplets from her body, and asked that Usagi do the same. The best she could do was shake a few drops off.

"Sorry," she winced, "no luck."

"Try again. Focus on just one drop. Even if you can only manage a little bit, that's still something. Makoto says she can't earth-bend very well, and yet she can at least move dust around. Try it." Ami put a stray droplet on her finger and offered it to her friend. Usagi glared at the globule with all her might, straining herself as she growled and gnashed her teeth. A full minute later, the water was no closer to moving. They both sighed, and Ami helped dry her friend.

"This is odd. I've seen you water-bend before; you have a natural knack for it."

"Yeah, when I'm in the Avatar State. Right now I don't." Ami pondered this unusual turn of events until Usagi was dried; they changed into their clothes and sat by the lake for the next lesson. Ami showed Usagi how to make ripples and waves by weaving her hand back and forth, and while Usagi gave it her best shot, she just couldn't make it work.

"I've been pondering something rather nebulous," Ami remarked as she issued little columns from the lake. "You're born under the sign of the Pronged Hare, correct? According to mythology, the Pronged Hare is closely associated with Tui and La, who also share a connection with the moon. Water-benders depend greatly on the moon and its effects on the world; I just thought that might give you some advantage."

"Nope," Usagi sighed. "Being born under the Jackalope can't even help me jump." Ami hummed softly to herself.

"You also said you were born on a boat in the middle of the ocean. That led me to theorize that maybe you were meant to be a water-bender. I have heard of small tribes of water-benders who split off from the main groups and emigrated into rivers, lakes, and swamps, so I suppose you could be an offshoot of them—but that would make it impossible for you to be the Avatar. Kalkin's predecessor was a native water-bender, and if the cycle is correct, then you shouldn't be. It's all very bewildering."

"Now you know how I feel," Usagi gestured. Ami nodded quietly and ended her tutorial. She jumped to her feet, called out a large block of water from the lake, and froze it solid. She then climbed onto the block and offered Usagi her hand.

"I have one more thing I can teach you, and I think you'll like it. Want to have some fun?" Usagi grinned.

"Hey, you just said the magic word!" She hopped onto the block, and with a little help from Ami, Usagi learned how to ride around on a block of ice. She still wasn't very good at it, but Ami made sure she didn't fall off. When they returned to the main camp, Ami promised that if Usagi ever wanted to try that again, all she had to do was say the word.

…...

The next day had her training with Makoto—again, at the most ungodly hour of the morning. Usagi cursed herself for befriending so many early birds, and wondered how anybody could be so freakishly addicted to waking up before sunrise. Makoto took no lip from her and made her do squats, sit-ups, push-ups, and pull-ups until she was too exhausted to talk. She knew that she could never teach her friend any meaningful earth-bending, and doubted that Usagi could wood-bend (nobody else did, as far as she knew), but she could definitely toughen the young woman up. Aside from her warm-ups, and a copious amount of jogging, Makoto trained Usagi in grappling and martial arts, and was constantly sparring with her whenever they had a free moment. As grueling as her workout regime was, Usagi actually showed more improvement under Makoto than anyone else. She still tried to earth-bend, but found as little success there as she had everywhere else.

"Hey, don't worry about it," Makoto said, giving Usagi an encouraging tap on the shoulder. "We all have something we're good at—we just need to find your specialty. Maybe you can do some weird form of bending that nobody else knows about, like...glass or molten lava. Or maybe you can bend gravity and make people float around like balloons!"

"I doubt it," Usagi laughed, "but that would be fun to try!" They took a quick break before moving on to judo throws. Makoto was very gentle with her student, and made a few wooden practice dummies for Usagi to toss around, even offering her own body on occasion. Usagi didn't have much in the way of physical strength, but she had stamina and plenty of heart. As long as she wasn't second-guessing herself and had plenty of breaks, she was a good pupil.

Late in the day, after dinner, the other girls were cleaning up the dishes while Makoto and Usagi took a walk. There was a large cluster of boulders and flat rocks not far from the campsite; they headed there and Makoto took perch on the highest one. She idly played with a few pebbles while Usagi looked up at the darkening night sky. She could already point out a few early constellations.

"Which one is the Thunderhorn?" Makoto asked. Usagi pointed to the horizon.

"It already sank low in the west a few weeks ago. You won't see it in this part of the world for at least eight or nine months. My zodiac sign's gone, too. If those trees weren't in the way," she said, pointing to the southeast, "you could see Rei's sign. The one most prominent in the sky right now is the Flying Tortoise." Makoto smiled softly to herself.

"Oh, really? Motoki would like that. Both he and Unazuki were born under that sign."

"Is that so? But they're not twins." Makoto laughed.

"You don't have to be twins to be born under the same sign as your sibling. They were born four years apart but both in the same month."

"Oh." A thought suddenly came to Usagi's mind. "Say, I've always been curious about something. You and Motoki seem awfully close—you even call each other by your first names."

"Well, yeah," she gestured, as if it were the most normal thing in the world. Usagi looked puzzled and Makoto hopped down to her level. "Wait, didn't I tell you? I could have sworn I told you."

"Told me what?"

"Remember when I said I was in an arranged marriage? Motoki's the man I'm betrothed to."

It took Usagi a moment to make the connection—and less time to shriek.

"BWAAAAH?! YOU MEAN YOU'RE GETTING MARRIED TO THE KING?!"

"Um, yeah," Makoto winced. "I guess...I forgot to mention it?"

"No kidding!" she exclaimed in surprise. "And I know I asked you before! Wait—how can you be in an arranged marriage with the King of Omashu? Aren't you...I mean, you're not really...um, wow, there's no polite way to say this, is there?"

"You mean I'm not royalty?" Makoto offered. She offered an apologetic smile. "I guess that's another thing I forgot to mention. My mother and father were a Duke and Duchess of Kolau. They'd been friends with the Furuhata family for years. They thought it would be a good idea to unite the families, so both sides made a pact that the firstborn son from one side would marry the firstborn daughter from the other. When I came out five years after Motoki, the deal was set."

Usagi could've been knocked over with a feather. This blew her mind on so many levels; she'd probably need at least another week just to let it all sink in. So Makoto was going to marry Motoki, and she was a Duchess! That at least explained why they were so familiar with one another—but it still left Usagi wondering why someone like Makoto, who was supposed to be royalty (or close enough as to make no difference), was roughing it in the wilderness when she should have been sitting in a palace, or studying in a preparatory school. But Makoto had never been cut out for that sort of life (though she had tried, and even enjoyed it to a degree). She was an avowed tomboy, and was proud of who she was.

"That's not to say I don't like wearing dresses or practicing diplomacy," she winked. "You'll remember how effortlessly I blended into the crowd at Mamoru's coronation ball. I hold as many dancing, cooking, and ice-skating championships as I do wrestling, fishing, boating, and wood-chopping. You'd be surprised at the number of skills that transfer."

"I'm still surprised you're marrying the king!" Usagi balked. "So who else knows?"

"Mamoru and Minako, obviously. I think I told the others at one point or another, but I might need to double-check on that. Can't have any startling revelations pop up at inopportune moments, now can we?" Usagi smiled and proudly pounded on her chest.

"Hey, if we didn't have those, then I wouldn't even be here today!"

"I guess so," Makoto laughed. She looked up at the sky, then at the pebble she had been playing with. She managed to wiggle it around on her hand, but couldn't move it any further. After taking a deep breath, she placed it on the rocky surface and hopped down.

"Usagi...please don't treat me any differently. I really like just being Makoto. I don't want you to think of me as a Duchess or a future Queen. I'm just...your friend." Usagi smiled warmly at her, stood up, and lightly tapped her stomach with her fist.

"You haven't been paying attention, Sifu Kino! Just look at how I treat Mamoru and Rei. They're royalty, and I still treat them like friends." Makoto beamed warmly and closed her eyes.

"You're right. I'll do my best to return the favor, bun-head."

"Now you're talking! Ooh, speaking of buns, do we have any left over? I could really go for a late-night snack!" Makoto just laughed and pulled Usagi, her friend, into a headlock.

…...

Rei's turn at training the Avatar came last, so she had plenty of time to learn from her predecessors and formulate a plan. She believed the key to Usagi's fire-bending was motivation. Their flaky friend had been fairly adamant about training so far, and when Rei remembered that Usagi had given her history classes an equal amount of loathing, she decided that maybe an incentive was all that was needed. The solution came to her as they were flying over Lake Laogai: a trip to the beach. The weather was warm and clear, perfect conditions for fire-bending, and if fire was indeed dependent on energy, then Usagi would have more than enough once they settled in.

There was eye candy as far as they could see. Dressed in her swimwear, Usagi gawked at all the young men on the beach.

"So...this is fire-bending training, huh?" Rei gawked too.

"Yeah. I figured you could do with a, uh...change of scenery."

"And you want me to go out and have a good time?"

"Yup. You've got your pick of the litter." Usagi swallowed and grinned.

"Rei, you are officially the best friend EVER." They gave each other a high-five and Usagi dove right in. Rei left her to her devices for about two hours while she found a quiet spot to lay down and soak in the sun, but didn't stay lonely for too long as several boys her age started to take an interest in her. Having been raised as a fire priestess, Rei had little knowledge about how to interact with the opposite sex, and tried though she might to stay cool, she oftentimes stammered her way through conversations. Luckily, she had charm to spare, and eased into her role as the center of attention after the first hour. Her only regret was that she'd have no time to go on any dates...and sadly, neither would Usagi. After another hour passed, she stood up and searched for her friend, but couldn't see her anywhere.

"Where has that bun-head gone off to now?" she grumbled. Rei excused herself from her admirers and started to jog down the beach before an idea hit her. She turned back to the crowd of boys and said, "Hey, I need to find a friend of mine. She's a little smaller than I am and has long blonde hair in two pigtails. I'll go on a date with the first person who finds her!" The boys all stood at attention, saluted, and scattered in every direction. Rei huffed and crossed her arms, beaming with pride.

"I am nailing it with this motivation angle!" She ran off as well, first coming across Ami, who was taking a break from swimming to watch Makoto surf. The tall brunette had fashioned a sleek wooden surfboard and was pirouetting through the waves like a true master; sometimes Ami even helped her by bending a particularly thrilling crest her way. The girls were called in to help search; Minako was still unaccounted for.

"She's probably gliding around somewhere, or else flirting with boys like Usagi," Makoto suggested. Ami and Rei promised to keep an eye out as they split up. Rei decided to search the food carts, figuring her voracious friend was having an early lunch, and noticed a small cluster of boys around a kebab stand. Curious, she peered over the crowd, but was startled by a familiar scream. She distinctly saw two golden pigtails (along with a pair of arms) fluttering over the group, then the screaming stopped, followed by cheering. Rei wedged her way through and saw Usagi standing at the front of the stand, an empty skewer in one hand and a flavored ice treat in the other.

"That was nothing!" she boasted. "Gimme a spicier one! I'm training to be a fire-bender, after all!" The crowd cheered and one of the boys bought her a sizzling steak kebab, which she consumed whole. There was a pause...

Usagi screamed bloody murder and shoved the ice treat in her mouth...

Sighed...and the boys cheered again.

"For crying out loud," Rei sighed. She slipped her way to Usagi's side and got the other girl's attention. "Usagi, what are you doing?"

"Oh, hi Rei! I thought I'd eat the spiciest thing on the beach so I could breathe fire! It's not working out the way I'd hoped, but I'm only on my third kebab. And they're delicious, too!"

"That's not how it works!" she snarled. "You'll get indigestion if you keep eating this stuff!" Usagi grumbled, feeling hurt.

"Hey, you can't fault me for thinking outside the box."

"No, but I can fault you for how stupid this is. Eating spicy food will not make you breathe fire!"

"Oh yeah? Prove it!" Usagi grabbed the deadliest skewer the vendor had to offer, labeled "Ultra Lethal Volcanic Eruption, consume at your own risk!", and thrust it at Rei. Flustered, surrounded by curious onlookers, her pride on the line, Rei swiped the food away.

"Fine! I'll show you how ridiculous this is!" She swallowed the meat whole, whipping the empty skewer out for all to see. The crowd leaned in...

Rei began to tremble...

"YAAAAAAAHHH-HAAAAAH-HAAAAAAH-HOOOOWW!"

Everyone jumped back as, sure enough, flames shot out of the fire priestess's mouth. She quickly consumed all of Usagi's ice treat and had to eat two more before finally calming down. The crowd roared with applause and carried Rei off in victory.

"Whoa, hey, put me down! Ow, watch where you're grabbing! Ack! Usagi, this doesn't make you right about anything! I'm a fire-bender, I can—waah—do that sort of thing all the time! Uh...hey, whoa, seriously, put me down, I think I'm g-getting s-s-sick!"

"Bye, Rei," Usagi waved as her friend, and the crowd, completely abandoned her. She looked around and noticed her sudden isolation, still holding an empty skewer and cup. The wind blew bitterly.

"Do you still want another kebab, ma'am?" the vendor asked. Usagi sighed and threw her trash away.

"No thanks. I think I'm over my fire-breathing phase. Plus, I...I'm out of money."

"Oh. Well, enjoy the rest of your day, then."

"Thanks, you too."

…...

The girls arrived in Ba Sing Se earlier than expected, with at least two days to spare before they could mount a proper offensive against Beryl's Fanatic Battlers. Ami was immediately put to work in the medical ward while Minako, Makoto, and Rei scouted the area. That left Usagi to help Mamoru in any capacity she could, a job she both enjoyed and took seriously. Mamoru welcomed her with a bow and an elegant kiss on the hand; she just slapped his back and grinned.

"Hey there, stud, I missed ya! The girls and I had a rough time getting here, but we made it alive, well, and ready to kick some tail!"

"I missed you too, bun-head," he chuckled. "It's a good thing you're early: I've been receiving a lot of reports saying that the enemy will advance sooner than we thought. It's not going to be an easy fight." His countenance turned grim as he continued, "Based on what we know, these Fanatics have earned their title. They don't respond to negotiations and don't recognize my title. They're only out for blood."

"Oh, no," she groaned softly, "I was hoping we could clean up at least one mess without a fight. I swear, I wish I could talk my way out of every situation. I'd feel the same even if I wasn't the Avatar."

"So do I," he replied, gazing upon her longingly. "I anticipated some friction when I took the throne, but not to this degree. I'd hoped that people would be tired of all this...disorder. I'm almost of the mind that things may have been better off with Beryl, and that Kalkin fought for nothing. But I won't give up that easily." He gave her an assuring smile. "Despair is our greatest enemy right now. I know this might sound trite, but even the longest, darkest tunnels have light at their end."

"And if they don't, then we make an opening," Usagi added. Mamoru grinned.

"Spoken like a true Avatar! Oh, speaking of drilling through solid rock, how did your training go?"

"Badly," she pouted. "I learned how to swim, and Makoto says my fighting skills have gotten better, but I'm still just as awful at bending as I was a week ago—and the week before that—and the months before that, and the years..." Mamoru gently took her hand into his, giving her a warm expression.

"Neither of our jobs are impossible, Usagi. If I won't give in to despair, then I know you won't, either. It'll take a lot of time and hard work for us, but we'll pull through."

"Yeah, I guess you're right," she whispered. She then realized something. "Hey, that's the first time you've actually called me by my name! Every other time it's 'my lady' this or 'bun-head' that!"

He laughed. "Oh, really? It seems I'm either too formal around you or too personal. Tell you what: I'll add Usagi to the list of monikers I've stored up. Is that acceptable?"

"Hmm, I suppose," she smirked coyly. "Oh, before I forget, do you have some spare time for me today? I need to ask you a favor." He winked and kissed her hand again.

"As busy as I've been keeping, for you, Usagi, I have as much time as you need."

"Cool, cool. Meet me in that courtyard over there in a few minutes. I just need a place to put my shoes and I'll be set."

Barefoot, Usagi stood out by herself in the courtyard, stretching and warming up. As Mamoru came outside, he noticed a pile of stones on her left, and it didn't take him long to figure out what she wanted to do. He brightened up as she waved at him and asked him to come over.

"Hey," she greeted. "So, ah...Makoto's a great teacher and all, but she can't really...do it for me when it comes to earth-bending, so I was hoping maybe you could teach me?" She grinned awkwardly, but if anything, Mamoru was honored.

"I'd be glad to. But you won't need all those stones there; just one will do." He tapped the ground with his heel and a stone found its way to his hand. Mamoru gave the air a quick slice and a line formed in the ground about four inches away from Usagi's feet. "Stay on that side of the line, please," he instructed, then took five steps away. He stomped the ground harder, causing a crude pillar to rise from the earth, and placed the rock on top of the pillar.

"Your objective is to move the stone off this pillar without crossing that line."

"Ha! No sweat!" Usagi cracked her knuckles, but Mamoru merely returned to her side and adapted an earth-bending stance.

"Here, let me show you some of the basic maneuvers. Advanced earth-benders can work their skill with almost any movement, but it's best to start from the beginning until you're comfortable. Like this." He bent his knees slightly and thrust his fist out; Usagi copied him. Mamoru then bent his foot back, twisting his torso slightly, and raised his left arm; again, Usagi followed. He slammed his foot down and thrust both arms to the ground; so did Usagi. Mamoru went over about fifteen different stances for her to follow, and drilled Usagi in them until she could pull them off fluidly, one after the other.

"This isn't so tough," she remarked, smiling at him.

"These are the moves that the Tellurians taught me as a child. They're fairly universal as far as earth-bending goes, so they wouldn't be all that difficult. Now try focusing your thoughts on the stone as you perform them. Will it to move." Usagi took a deep breath and went into the first stance. Knees bent, fist out... Bend the foot, twist the torso and raise the arm... Slam your foot, thrust the arms down... She envisioned the stone leaping off the precipice, or hurtling away suddenly, or even just rolling off with an anticlimactic thud. Mamoru watched impassively as Usagi gave it everything she had, to no avail. He called for a break after she went through every motion three times, and gave her some water.

"Don't be discouraged. It took me several tries before I could do it."

"Yeah, when you were what, five? Seven? How does a bender even know they're a bender to begin with?"

"It usually manifests when they're very young. A breeze will emit when there's no wind, or candles will light themselves, or a statue might crack if one happens to touch it in a certain manner." He noticed her quizzical expression and added, "That last one was me. I was admiring one of the statues of King Motoki's father when I accidentally broke off part of it. Everyone was furious and demanded to know why I had desecrated it, but Motoki defended me at once. He said that it must have been an accident, and that only an earth-bender could have done that sort of thing without meaning to. His father asked me to do it again, and...well, to make a long story short, here I am."

"That sounds embarrassing," she chuckled. He nodded.

"It was, but I gained a friend for life that day, and a purpose."

"What happened to the statue?" Mamoru's face became distant and melancholic as he closed his eyes.

"I learned to fix it. That was my very first job as an earth-bender. I learned that every time we take from the earth, we must give back. Every mistake must have reparations; every hole must be filled; every furrow must be seeded." Usagi was allowed to ponder over this wisdom in silence for a moment. She drank more of her water and rubbed the rest on her face.

"All right, I'm ready to go again."

"That's the spirit." He smiled as she pumped herself up for another attempt, but she paused before moving into her first stance.

"Say Mamoru, if I make that stone move, would you...go on a date with me?" He nodded.

"I'd be honored."

"(And maybe take your shirt off to motivate me,)" she muttered salaciously.

"What's that?" he called. Usagi flinched and tittered.

"Nothing, nothing, don't worry about it!" Just an idea, she added mentally. This time she really went all-out. Usagi put forth all of her focus on the apple-sized stone, furiously willing it to move as she went through all the stances that Mamoru had taught her. She yelled, she screamed, her eyes bulged from her head. She concluded with a final, desperate thrust, roaring at the top of her lungs for the rock to budge, even just a little bit. A date with Mamoru was on the line!

"AAAAAAAAAAAA COME ON YOU STUPID ROCK MOVE JUST A LITTLE BIT GRRRRRRR RAAAAAAAAAAHHH PLEASE JUST A TINY LITTLE BIT AAAH—"

Usagi finally gave up, went into the Avatar State, and knocked the entire pillar over. The stone flew wild and nearly went through a window. She collapsed in defeat.

Mamoru gingerly walked over to her, not saying a word. He offered his hand and she took it, rising shakily.

"Sorry. I couldn't do it. I cheated." He studied the young woman for awhile—trembling, insecure, disappointed and frustrated... Usagi had given it her very best, and had completely failed. He smiled softly at her and touched her cheek.

"You know...I never said you couldn't use the Avatar State to move the stone. It may be a technicality, but I do believe I owe you a date." She wiped a smudge off her face, or perhaps a tear, and mirrored his warm expression.

"That's sweet of you, Mamoru, but I don't deserve to go on a date with you."

"But what if I want one regardless?" he pressed. She stifled a sad laugh.

"When? Beryl's Battlers will be here any day now, and after that, we still have Zoicite's whatever-they're-called to deal with. Even if one of us manages to get a day off, who's to say—"

"How about tonight?" Usagi gave a start, her face flashing pink. Nervously, she looked down, fidgeting with her hands.

"Tonight? Are you sure?"

"I'll make time. We could at least have dinner together, just the two of us."

Her face glowed hotly at the thought. She squinted out of happiness, looking fairly silly and not caring one whit.

"All right," she whispered, "tonight it is. Where do we meet?"

"Right here on this spot. It'll be our special place. You can get a good look at the night sky from here. We can have a moonlight picnic." Usagi grinned girlishly: what a romantic idea! She leaned in and sealed the agreement with a quick peck on the cheek. Usagi dreaded what the next day would bring, but tonight? It couldn't come soon enough.

The end of "How to Train Your Avatar"

Next time: "The Battling Angels"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

3: The Battling Angels

Even though she had a rather pleasant date with Mamoru that lasted well into the night, anxiety over the following day kept Usagi from getting much sleep. She found herself unusually alert before dawn, and had eaten, washed, and dressed herself in under an hour. Still too troubled by the thought of another battle, she took a walk to ease some of the tension, and found her other friends gathered in the training grounds. They were surprised to see Usagi up so early, and got some chatter in before the big event.

According to reports, Beryl's Fanatic Battlers were going to surround Ba Sing Se and lay siege to it. They had made it very clear that they would kill anyone who tried to go in or come out, and would not stop until the city had turned to rubble, or every member of their group had perished. To counter this, Mamoru's army would cut them off from the north while his navy met them from the south and east. He had requested aid from Motoki, but while Omashu's king still declared neutrality, and would not directly intervene, he would line his own army and navy on Omashu's borders, preventing the enemy from escaping. The plan was for Mamoru's forces to slowly squeeze the enemy into a single point, specifically the area where Usagi and her friends would be defending. He gambled that a small force would offer a better target and would draw the enemy in; then, while the girls met the main force, units from the city would ambush the enemy, and everyone would come together and snuff out the Battlers.

"In other words, we're bait," Makoto said. None of the girls were particularly happy about this plan, but Ami conceded to its logic. Minako was a little disappointed to hear Motoki's reply, but she knew that the king had to put the safety of his own people first. It was at least reassuring to know he'd be there in case the enemy decided to attack from the south or west.

"I know it sounds dangerous," Mamoru told them, "but I'd never ask you if I wasn't confident you could pull it off. You'll only need to hold them back for a minute or two."

"Even so, that's going to be a dangerous minute," Rei remarked. She took a deep breath and steeled herself. "Well, you're the king, and we're here to help. If you think this is the best way to take these guys out, then we'll follow you."

"And it's not like we're powerless," Minako smirked, giving Usagi a friendly nudge. "If the five of us could take out the queen fire-frog by herself, then the rest of the pond should be no problem." Makoto sighed and rubbed her forehead.

"Once again, you're getting your metaphors mixed up."

"Whatever, you know what I mean!" Mamoru was called out to battle shortly; he wished the girls good luck and gave Usagi an assuring smile before leaving. The girls went to their designated positions as well, and waited for the first sign of their enemies. Minako had reported that aside from siege weapons, there would be mounted units in the mix, most of them on badger-moles or sloth-monkeys, but a few were using Thunderhorns, perhaps in memory of Beryl's fondness for them (or perhaps as tools of vengeance, since a Thunderhorn had caused her demise). There was a bit of a choke point two miles or so from the city's main entrance, where a canyon had been drilled through centuries earlier by the first earth-benders to cultivate this land. The path was just wide enough for ten or fifteen people to march through, and had a number of trees and plenty of places for someone to wait in ambush. It had been one of the first natural defenses the city boasted before they erected their impenetrable wall, and now it would be used again.

"They're coming," Makoto said, her hand placed on one of the nearby trees. "I can feel them."

"Any idea how many?" Usagi asked. Makoto pursed her lips.

"A whole lot."

"Like hundreds? Thousands?" The ground started to shake under the advance forces, siege weapons, and mounts. Most of Beryl's Fanatic Battlers were earth-benders, and with a canyon wall on both sides of the path, they'd have no shortage of artillery. Usagi swallowed as smaller rocks were dislodged by the rumbling. "I guess it doesn't matter."

A cloud of dust could now be seen in the distance. The cries of the Fanatics were now very clear. More and more stones were dislodged from the walls, and some were being thrown. Minako batted a few away with a breeze, but the artillery was intensifying. There was no source of water along the canyon path, so Ami had brought several jars with her. A large metal container full of water had also been placed in the canyon; Makoto, Rei, and Usagi opened it while Minako shielded them from the hurling stones. With a grand sweeping gesture, Ami called out a flood and surged it upward, solidifying it into a thick ice wall just as the vanguard came into view. The wall slowed them down a little, but it was already being chipped away by stones, axes, maces, and flaming arrows.

"Get ready, everyone," Ami warned them. "They'll be breaking through any minute. We only have to hold them off for a little while."

"No problem," Usagi said, bracing herself for the onslaught. "We can do this." Hoping that her weeks of training could finally amount to something, she stood at the front of the line, ready for whatever was coming. The ice wall shivered, trembled, buckled, and finally shattered. Four Thunderhorns broke through and she flinched. "Oh, crap..."

Rei and Minako shouted as a furious wall of fire blew back the enemy forces, sending the Thunderhorns into a panic. Makoto uprooted two trees and slammed them into the crowd, felling one of the gargantuan beasts and crushing fifteen enemies. She gnashed her teeth and caused the tree's branches to ensnare the survivors, tangling one Thunderhorn and thirty more Fanatics. Ami called the chunks of ice to her and sent them flying back, pelting the enemy with frosty missiles. Usagi, who had no confidence in her bending abilities, chose to arm herself with a sword; she held off two enemies with her blade. A large stone came hurling her way; she batted it away deftly with her weapon, but it broke from the impact.

"Double crap!" she spat. She ducked as a mace came at her head, swerved to avoid arrows, and was cut slightly as a scimitar came narrowly close to eviscerating her. She tried bending the canyon around her, willing it to smash together, but only got a blow to the face for her troubles. In spite of all their successes, the girls were still being driven back as the enemy forces doubled and tripled in number. Mounted units scaled the canyon walls and overcame their flank; archers blackened the sky with arrows; the ground quaked as more benders ripped the canyon wall to pieces.

"Usagi, hurry! We need you to—" Usagi could barely hear at all, let alone make out who was talking or what they were saying. Shaking her head, she screamed and rolled out of the way as a badger-mole pounced on her. She tried blowing it away with a wind blast, but again, nothing came of it. The beast snarled at her and slashed with its claws; Usagi's arm was cut as she defended herself. Suddenly, Rei and Ami were buried as a portion of the canyon wall collapsed on them, and Makoto was brushed aside by a Thunderhorn's trunk. Minako held her ground, issuing a terrible gust that swept through the canyon and pierced the enemy ranks. She tried shaking Makoto awake and barked at Usagi:

"Go help the others, hurry!"

"R-right!" She ran over to the pile of rubble and flung off as many rocks as she could, but she didn't get very far before she was rushed by a spearmen. Usagi caught the weapon before she could be impaled, but the man was very strong, and pressed his attack. The tip of the spear grazed her abdomen and cut into the skin; Usagi gnashed her teeth and shoved with all her might...

The enemies were scattered before she knew what happened. A huge gust of air blasted them backwards, freeing Usagi from her attacker. She looked at Minako, but the attack hadn't come from her: dozens of air-benders were soaring through the sky on kites, launching blow after blow at the Fanatics. Usagi had no idea who they were or where they came from, but that didn't matter right now. She went into the Avatar State, lifted the rocks off her friends, and hurled them at the enemy. The water that had melted from the ice wall rose up and surged after them, and a burning column of fire chased them out completely. Before any of the Fanatics could mount a counterattack, reinforcements from Ba Sing Se arrived and successfully ambushed them. Fanatics either surrendered or were disabled, and the fight was over.

Going out of her Avatar State, Usagi knelt down to check on Ami and Rei. They were alive, but unconscious and terribly injured. Makoto was faring no better, boasting at least two broken ribs and plenty of bruises. She was conscious, though, and relieved that the battle was a success.

"I don't know if I'd call this a success," Usagi remarked, assessing all of the damage. Everyone was in bad shape, but the canyon had suffered the most. A few soldiers came by to help them; Ami regained consciousness as they lifted her into a stretcher, and called for water. Her jars had been smashed in the attack, so only a little puddle could be scooped up. That was apparently all she needed, for she swept the water over her body, mending some of the cuts and bruises. Her eye had been especially damaged, and she feared blindness would set in—but no, she acted quickly and saved it, though she kept it closed.

"I'm going to need more," she asked the soldiers. "Please bring some to the nearest clinic and I'll take care of the rest." Medical tents had been erected inside the city walls just for this purpose, so Ami and the others were carried there to heal. They spent all of that day recovering, and by morning the next day, were nearly ready to return to duty. Ami's eye was fine, but she was still worried about Makoto's ribs, and requested extra time to work on her. There were plenty of other officers and soldiers who had been hurt, though, so Makoto was confined to a bed until she could be tended to. Rei and Usagi volunteered to help, which left Minako to deal with the air-benders. There had been little time to interact with them yesterday; they had mostly helped with the wounded after the battle. Minako thought they were from one of the local missions, but as it turned out...

"Wait—the Northern Air Temple? But isn't that..."

"Yes, it is," the monks said. "Kunzite's territory." They squirmed uncomfortably and said, "Or at least it was Kunzite's territory. But much has changed since his...passing."

"I can imagine," she whispered. The monks sat Minako down and explained everything. When Beryl had saved their temple during the schisms and upheavals that had plagued the world, they had all pledged their lives and loyalty to her—and, to their shame, had helped in her mad desire for conquest and subjugation on more than one occasion. So powerful was her influence over them that they seldom even questioned their actions, until Kunzite and Beryl were killed and the truth of their deeds were exposed. The monks had been forced to reconcile with their evil ways, and were utterly ashamed at how low they had sunk...and how far from their creed they had fallen.

"This is why Air Nomads cannot extend loyalty to any one nation," they said. "If we were to favor one side over the other in any matter, be it conflict or peace, we would bring about a terrible imbalance, even ruin. It would not matter how good our intentions were: to put too much good in one hand would leave the other barren. So we have now severed all ties with Ba Sing Se; our appearance today settled the debt we owed. From this day forward, the monks of the Northern Air Temple will extend their hands to all nations. We shall make penance for our evil and neglect, for as long as it takes." They bowed prostrate, their foreheads touching the ground. Minako went to her knees, respectfully silent. After a period, they raised their heads again.

"Our greatest sins were committed against the Fire Nation and the Avatar. Therefore, we have decided that half our number will pledge two years' service to Kuni and Iku, while the other half serves the Avatar for as long as she sees fit. After that, we will open more missions, and serve any who require it until our deeds have been fully absolved." Minako felt her throat tighten, and bowed low.

"On behalf of the Western Air Temple, and the Avatar, I thank you. Go now, and may the wind carry you where you are needed most." She extended her hand, palm open and index finger pointing up; they returned her gesture. Usagi was still helping Ami when the monks explained their intentions to her, and she put them right to work tending to the wounded. They worked so eagerly and swiftly that Ami found herself with almost nothing to do—except make sure Makoto was doing all right. It was a fate she had been looking forward to.

"Hey," Makoto smiled as Ami returned to her bedside, "I heard you got some helpers!"

"Y-yes, Usagi kindly allowed the monks from the Northern Air Temple to assist me. They're quite skilled, you know. How are you holding up?"

"Badly. It stinks having broken ribs. I can't even take a walk outside." Ami smiled sweetly.

"Don't worry, we'll have you climbing mountains and surfing oceans in no...time..." She trailed off and tried not to drool as Makoto removed her shirt. Ami blushed and reminded herself that this was all a normal part of being a doctor, and it would be easier to heal Makoto's ribs if she had direct contact with her body, but still...

It was very distracting.

…...

About two days after Makoto got a clean bill of health, members of Zoicite's Loyalists were spotted off the coast of Crescent Island in the Fire Nation. The five girls and Mamoru flew there to settle the matter but found that most of them had been routed by Kuni's navy. They volunteered to stay behind and patrol the waters for a few days, which was a great relief to the Fire Lord. On their first morning there, unable to sleep, Usagi woke up early for a change. Breakfast wouldn't be ready for another hour, and with everyone absorbed in their own morning rituals—and Mamoru engaged in battle tactics with Kuni and Iku—Usagi needed some way to pass the time. She felt like going for a walk, so she announced her departure to her friends and wandered off.

How long had it been since Beryl's downfall? Two months? Three? Usagi and her friends had been so busy stabilizing the Earth Kingdom that it was difficult to keep track of time. And how much of that time had been spent going after rogue groups of bandits, pirates, zealots, and other pockets of violence and unrest? They never got to have a full day for rest or fun, and fighting was both dangerous and stressful. New factions were rising up to replace the old, and while her notoriety and popularity had grown, perhaps to unhealthy levels, there seemed to be just as many people who hated her, or felt they had been abandoned by her. Usagi remembered one day when a citizen offered her money for her services, while another threw rotten fruit at her. Discovering herself to be the Avatar had been difficult enough; living as the Avatar was another tribulation entirely.

She wished she could talk to Kalkin. Apparently Avatars could enter into a meditative trance and speak with their past lives, but so far, Usagi hadn't had any success with that—or really, anything at all. She could go into the Avatar State with relative ease, and could bend the elements while in it, but once she dropped it, she was just as ordinary and unskilled as ever. How was that possible? Even regular benders took to their abilities at a young age, and it was said that the Avatars acquired their skills even earlier. But nobody would ever mistake Usagi for anything other than a normal girl. She had excellent trainers who were kind, wise, and patient, and she genuinely was trying, but she couldn't seem to make anything work. Usagi knew full well the kind of burden that had fallen at her feet, so why couldn't she do her job? She felt more confused and helpless now than before, and was so desperate for answers, or even just relief, that sometimes she could barely hold herself together. The battle with the Fanatics had been the worst, though. Ami and Rei had almost been killed, Makoto had been seriously hurt—and Usagi hadn't been able to do anything! If they hadn't been saved by the Air Nomads...

Well...there was still the Avatar State, but...she needed to be more than that. And she was disappointed in herself because she couldn't.

Usagi stopped and looked back to see how far she had walked. There were at least three miles between her and the compound where they were staying; the beach was at least twenty more miles away. She closed her eyes and let the wind play with her clothes and hair. So many questions...and nobody around who could help her. She had great friends, but they couldn't understand, they couldn't relate... She opened her eyes and, as if an answer to a prayer, spotted someone approach her. It was a girl her age, blonde and blue-eyed, with long pigtails to match. She had fuchsia ribbons in her hair, and wore a skintight blackish-purple suit, with a pink tie and a white collar around her neck. She stopped as she spotted Usagi, and they stared at each other. The encounter was very strange—downright unusual, in fact.

"Um, hello," Usagi offered. The other girl's eyes glassed over.

"You're the Avatar, aren't you?"

"Hmm?" The question caught Usagi off guard. By now she was used to being recognized: as her friends had remarked on numerous occasions, Usagi was a very distinct young lady. "Oh, um, yes, I am. Can I help you with something?"

"No," she muttered in a raspy voice. Suddenly Usagi felt a terrible energy radiating from the girl, who bared her teeth and curled her fists. "You're not the real Avatar! You're just a freak accident!"

"Excuse me?" Usagi gasped. The girl drew closer, now positively brimming with a powerful force. "Wait, what do you mean, a freak accident? Do I know you? How would you know anything about that?" The girl stopped in her tracks, eyes ablaze with anger.

"How do I know?" she whispered, just as her eyes turned a brilliant shade of white. "Because I'm the real Avatar, and I'm going to kill you!" She ripped stones from the ground, breathed fire on them, and hurled them at Usagi, who barely careened out of the way. A vicious squall unbalanced her, knocking her flat on her face. The ground beneath her lifted up and closed around her; she flung herself away and was pelted from behind. The girl drew nearer, calling the dew from the grass, turning it to needles. She flung them at Usagi who took almost the full force of the attack, and was blown to the ground again before she could stand.

"You're nothing but a pretender," the girl snarled as flames enveloped her body. "You're a mistake! You shouldn't even exist!" She slammed her foot on the ground, causing the ground to erupt violently; huge fissures opened, issuing steam. She drew fire, stone, and scalding wind from the depths of the earth and held them over her head, her face contorted in psychopathic glee. She thrust her projectile at Usagi with a loud roar, but the missile was blasted to pieces, sending the girl reeling back from the shock. Usagi slowly rose to her feet, raising her head...

Light shining from her eyes.

"Who are you?" she demanded, calling forth fire and air, earth and water. "What do you want?" Shaking her head, the girl snarled at her mirror image.

"I'll never tell and you'll never find out." An immense fireball shot out of her hands; Usagi countered with a jet of water; the two energies collided and canceled each other out. The earth trembled beneath Usagi's feet; she vaulted into the air and blew the girl away with a crippling gust. Jets of searing water burst from the ground; Usagi redirected them, sealing the earth up as the girl was overwhelmed. She was enveloped by a stone tomb and surrounded by a wall of fire as Usagi floated close to her, white eyes staring into white eyes.

"Whoever you are, you clearly have great power. Surrender this foolishness and use that power for good!"

"I am using it for good," the girl replied as she struggled. Usagi called forth a sphere of water to cool her head, but was knocked back suddenly as the sphere attacked her instead. Before she could get back up, the ground beneath her shot out, and hands of rock assaulted her. She flew away, but was grabbed from behind by an unknown force.

"Hey, I got her, Suen! Did you see? I got the fake Avatar!"

"That's great, Ishtar, just great," the girl grumbled, temporarily releasing herself from her own Avatar State. Another girl had joined her while Usagi was being attacked, one with short crimson hair. She was cutting the first girl out of her rock tomb; two others joined her, a stone-faced girl with blue hair and a wistful-looking girl with pale green hair tied in the back. A fifth girl had grabbed Usagi.

"So this is the false Avatar?" said the blue-haired girl. "Hmm, impressive. She held her own against you, Suen."

"Nabu, I told you not to use my name in front of her!"

"But Ishtar already did," the green-haired girl said. "It's kind of irrelevant now, don't you think?"

"Shut up, Marduk, you're not helping."

"Oh, so it's okay for you to use our names, but not the other way around?" the redhead grumbled. The first girl, evidently named Suen, brushed herself off sourly.

"I didn't want to give her that information, Nergal! But now the panther-hog's out of the bag, I suppose. Hey, Ishtar, watch what you're—" The warning came too late as Usagi surrounded herself with fire, forcing her captor to back off. She was a long-haired blonde; they all wore tiaras, ties, and the same blackish-purple bodysuits, tinged with yellow, blue, pink, red, or green. Usagi's captor, Ishtar, shrieked and rolled on the ground in an effort to put the fire out. Nabu, the blue-haired one, grumbled and shot a blast of water at her companion.

"Did she forget she could just blow the fire out?" said the redhead, Nergal. Marduk shrugged.

"Evidently. Ishtar, you're wide open!"

"What?" Still trying to tamp out the flames, Ishtar was knocked back even further as Usagi hit her with a rock wall. Marduk glowered and summoned her own stone barrier; Usagi broke it apart but was struck by Nergal's flames. She tried shielding herself with an ice barrier, but it turned against her as Nabu took over. Finally, Suen resumed the fight, intensifying the attacks of her friends. Things looked very bleak for Usagi until a flower-shaped stone pierced through their attacks. Gasping for breath, Usagi looked up and saw Mamoru leaping from the sky; the ground rippled upon impact, knocking all five girls on their backs.

"Whoa," Marduk whispered, "now that's an entrance."

"I'll say," Nergal smirked. She rose and nudged the green-haired girl with a smirk. "Better call dibs before Ishtar does."

"Dibs!" piped Ishtar as she shot back up. "I call dibs on whatever we're—holy mackerel, what a stud! Super duper double no takeback dibs for me!"

"Aww, too slow," Nergal chuckled, patting her friend's back. Meanwhile, Mamoru was attending to Usagi.

"What an odd bunch. Who are they, anyway?"

"I have no idea," she said, shuddering from the pain of their attacks. "But they're strong. One of them..." Her eyes met his; there was terror and confusion within them. "Mamoru, she went into the Avatar State! That girl with the pigtails, Sue-something I think—"

"Suen!" she shouted. "Darn it, you guys!" Usagi nodded.

"She's the Avatar. I mean, she has the same abilities that I do, except...she can bend outside of the Avatar State, and I c...I can't."

"That's because you're a fake," Suen announced, going into the Avatar State again. "Not only that, but you're a fraud and a deceiver. You stood by while countless people died, and you have the gall to call yourself the Avatar? No—the world is better off without you."

"Oh dear," Mamoru murmured fearfully. "She really can..." He quickly hurled flower-shaped stones as Suen assaulted them with fire and earth; Marduk, Nergal, and Nabu added to the salvo, overwhelming them and forcing them to retreat.

"I think we're a little outnumbered here!" Usagi wailed. Mamoru smirked.

"Not for long. How do you think I got here so quickly?" He looked up, and before anyone could react, Artemis soared down from the heavens and slammed into the ground, forcing everyone away with a torrential blast. Minako, Rei, and Ami leaped off his back and immediately fought back, air and fire and ice going up against the five girls. Mamoru wanted to rejoin the fray but Usagi was wounded, and he didn't dare leave her alone.

"Come what may, stay close to me, my lady," he said, shielding her with his body. "I will protect you with everything I have." Usagi blushed, feeling safer already. A few stray shots found their way over, but Mamoru deftly deflected them all. Ishtar was the only one who decided to attack them head-on (if the love-struck look in her eyes could really be considered an attack), but Mamoru simply tripped her up and shoved her back. Usagi's three friends (and Artemis) were definitely holding their own, but there was no way they could match their opponents, especially with one fully utilizing the Avatar State. As they fought, something occurred to Usagi:

"Wait, where's Makoto?"

"She's preparing something special," Mamoru answered as he blocked another icicle dagger. "We just have to keep those girls distracted for awhile." Usagi nodded numbly, clutching her wounds as the battle slowly turned against her friends. The five girls pressed Artemis, Minako, Rei, and Ami back, until they had nearly joined Mamoru. He decided to step in at last, but before he could make much of an impact, shouted for everyone:

"Hit the deck!" He covered Usagi's body with his own as everyone flattened themselves on the ground. Suen and her group stood bewildered.

"What the...?" The looked up just in time to see an enormous tree hurling their way like a javelin, with Makoto riding it. As it sailed past them, she bent its branches to ensnare the five girls, and leaped off as the tree flew off into the distance, five girls tied tightly to its surface. Makoto bent over heaving with exhilaration, grinning from ear to ear.

"HOLY CRAP THAT WAS SO MUCH FUN!" she roared. The other girls cheered for her; Usagi could only smile. After awhile, she was rejoined by her friends, who all demanded to know who it was they were fighting, and why. Usagi had no answers, except...

"They called me a false Avatar. Maybe...maybe they're right. Maybe I'm just a counterfeit, and that girl...whoever she was...she was the real thing."

"That's nonsense, Usagi," Rei insisted. "That girl was the fake! I...I don't know how she could use the Avatar State, but I know there's only one Avatar in the world at any time, and you're..."

"But I'm not!" she screamed, squeezing her eyes in frustration. "Don't you get it? I've never been able to bend my entire life, even after you guys trained me! Even when your lives were in danger! I can't even talk to my past lives, like all the normal Avatars could. How? Why? What am I?!" Usagi was shaking where she stood, completely broken and distraught. None of the other girls knew what to say. They had no answers.

Mamoru immediately took her into his arms and stared her right in the eye.

"You are Usagi Tsukino." He then leaned in and whispered, "(And you're my favorite person in the entire world.)"

He always knew just what to say to her. Usagi finally broke down and began to cry, and Mamoru kept hold of her the entire time.

The end of "The Battling Angels"

Next time: "Summons"

Author's notes:

Suen, Nabu, Nergal, Marduk, and Ishtar are the Opposito Senshi from the video game Sailor Moon: Another Story (which is tough to recommend as it's so grind-heavy, but worth checking out). Suen's actual name is Sin, but seeing as how Sin (the Mesopotamian moon god) was also known as Suen, I'm deciding to go for that moniker instead. Basically, Sin and Suen are the same person. For further reference, Nabu is the god of science and wisdom, Nergal is the (former) god of war and current god of the underworld, Marduk is the supreme god, and Ishtar is the goddess of love. Senshi opposites are a staple of Sailor Moon (think the Witches 5 or the Black Moon women), but these five are the most obscure, and therefore the most interesting.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

4: Summons

Usagi was feeling a little better the next day, but she still kept her distance from everyone, and seldom spoke. It wasn't just confusion and frustration that caused this lethargy: she had overtaxed herself working, training, fighting, and moving from one trouble spot to another. None of the girls had had much rest but Usagi was receiving the worst of it. The fact that she had held out even this long was a testament to her willpower and fortitude, but she was almost burned out. Reports of new threats were still coming in for King Endymion, but he held them off, not wanting to concern Usagi more than she already was. She deserved at least one day to recover herself—it was just a pity she couldn't have more.

While Usagi was left to her own devices for the most part, the others convened to assess this latest danger. From what little they knew, five girls had shown up and attacked Usagi, claiming she was a false Avatar. One of the girls, Suen, had even went into the Avatar State, which should have been impossible. Mamoru asked the four girls if they had any answer to this unprecedented problem, but they were just as clueless as he was.

"From what I remember," Rei said, "the great spirit Raava forms a symbiotic relationship with the Avatar, although you could also say she 'inhabits' them or 'possesses' them. It's because of Raava's presence that the Avatar can bend all four elements, and it's Raava's power they use when they go into the Avatar State. When one Avatar dies, she moves on to the next one in the cycle, so there can only be one at a time."

"But could Raava have been split up somehow?" Mamoru posed. Rei pursed her lips.

"I don't know. My sources are more mythology than history. I know that Raava had a counterpart named Vaatu, but he was sealed away thousands of years ago. Even if he somehow broke out and formed his own symbiotic relationship with this Suen girl, she would have been a different Avatar, a Dark Avatar."

"So her eyes would have glowed black instead?" Minako said. Rei shook her head.

"Again, I don't know. There were very few records of this in my temple, and the ones that we had were mostly oral stories passed down over hundreds of generations."

"It still sounds like the only logical answer, though," Ami said. "We may need to look more into the history of Raava and Vaatu. I'd also like to know which country this Suen was born in. If she came from the Fire Nation..."

"Hold on!" Makoto shouted, slamming her hands on the table. "Who's to say this Suen girl's not the fake? She attacked Usagi, didn't she? The real Avatar would never do that!"

"But the real Avatar would also be able to bend all four of the elements," Rei reminded her softly, "or at least one of them. But Usagi can't."

"So, what, you agree with this nonsense?"

"No, of course not! I'm just saying that...urrgh, this is so confusing!" She batted her head with her palms and deflated. The group became silent for awhile. Then, suddenly, Mamoru remembered something he had picked up—or rather, been given—during their first journey together. He didn't have it with him at the moment, and hadn't had the time to look into it further, but now...

"Perhaps Wan Shi Tong will have the answers." The girls looked up at him in awe; Minako snapped her fingers.

"Of course! Wan Shi Tong is one of the greatest patrons and collectors of knowledge! He's bound to have something that will clear all this up! That's some clever thinking there, Flower King!"

"Thanks," he muttered, smiling humbly, "but the idea wasn't mine." He then explained the large blue gem that Bodmall had given him during their sojourn in the Taku Ruins. At first the girls wondered how he could have kept something like that a secret for so long, but given everything that had happened, it was understandable. The gem had been confiscated from Mamoru by Kunzite's people, but was since returned to him, and now enjoyed a place of prominence in his palace.

"It's as good a start as any," Makoto said. "We should tell Usagi the news. She'll want to hear this." They found her out by a pond, trying to bend the water. There was a determined look in her eye that spurred her to push through whatever obstacle was set before her, even if it seemed impossible. The girls watched her for a moment before getting her attention.

"You are one hardcore lady, ya know that?" Makoto smiled, putting an elbow on Usagi's shoulder. The blonde blushed a little.

"What can I say, I'm a stubborn girl. And I'm sorry for causing such a scene yesterday. I wasn't in a very good place."

"It's okay," Makoto replied tenderly, "we've all been there."

"Even Rei?"

"What's that supposed to mean?!" Rei shrieked. "I'll have you know I struggle just as much as everyone else!"

"Oh yeah? You weren't struggling the other day when you breathed fire! Did I tell you all that? About the time that Rei breathed fire?"

"It's a natural thing for a fire-bender to do!"

"Seriously, guys, the flames were at least as big as me. I'll bet you could've seen them from across Lake Laogai."

"They were not and you take that back!" The other girls couldn't help but laugh.

"It sounds like everything's back to normal," Ami remarked. Even Mamoru was smiling warmly.

"Yes, it seems our spitfire Avatar's returned to us. You are truly indomitable, bun-head."

"Stow it, Mamoru!" Usagi growled, "This is not one of those times you can use that name!" He laughed anyway, and in spite of everything, Usagi laughed, too. This release was just what she needed; it felt glorious to let loose and be—

...atar...

Be...be... What was that? Usagi stopped laughing and stiffened coldly. A tingle ran down her back, and she felt...she felt...

"Hey, bun-head, you okay?" Minako said, peering at her. She waved a hand in front of Usagi's face and snapped her out of it.

"Huh? What's that? Oh, sorry, I just thought I heard something. So what did you guys talk about in there?"

"We think we came up with a solution for our problems," Ami said. Usagi frowned.

"You mean my problems."

"Your problems are our problems, ya dingus," Makoto remarked. Usagi smiled and whispered a thanks.

"Anyway," Ami resumed, "Mamoru thought it would be a good idea to go see Wan Shi Tong about this, and I have to agree. But we also think there might be some clues in—"

...vatar...

"...might know of a few people who could help us." Usagi shook her head again. That same feeling from earlier had returned, but more pronounced this time. She looked around, but her friends were all focused on something else.

"And now that the Northern Air Temple's not our enemy anymore," Minako was saying, "I'll bet they could help us with this. It's like I've always said: Air Nomads are—"

Avatar...

"Do you guys hear that?" Usagi said. Minako was still talking but stopped to look at her.

"Hear what?" Usagi took a moment. She wasn't quite sure...

"I heard someone...or something... It sounded far off, but...never mind, maybe I'm just tired."

"We're sorry," Ami said genuinely. "We know you're exhausted, and we didn't mean to interrupt you with this. Maybe it can wait another day."

"No, no, keep going. I...I'm fine now, you guys, I promise. I just felt weird for a second."

"Maybe it's something you ate," Makoto suggested.

"Or how much of it you ate," Rei added. Usagi growled.

"I only had two bananas today, Rei! And some toast. And some of last night's fish. And one or two of the tarts that Mako made. And maybe I snuck a few chips in there as well. And a melon slice." The other girls gawked at her.

"Seriously, girl," Minako whispered, "how do you stay so thin eating all—"

Avatar.

"There! There it is again! Didn't you all hear that?" The girls jerked back. Mamoru stepped forward.

"We didn't hear anything out of the ordinary, Usagi. Can you tell us what exactly—"

AVATAR.

"There it goes again! You really can't hear that?"

They looked at each other warily, then at her. They shook their heads.

"Let's all be quiet for a moment," Ami suggested, and so they stood together waiting. Aside from the wind rustling through the grass and the rippling of the water, there wasn't a sound to be heard.

Avatar, come.

"I heard it again," Usagi murmured. "It's calling my name. I mean...it's calling for the Avatar."

"We didn't hear anything," Rei replied gently. She took a step forward. "But that doesn't mean we don't believe you. If you say that someone or something is calling you... Maybe it's Kalkin. Maybe he's finally trying to get in touch with you." Usagi nodded her head, though she felt very doubtful. Somehow she didn't think this was Kalkin. It didn't sound...well, human.

Avatar, come. Come to me.

"Maybe this is one of those special things that only affect the Avatars," Makoto suggested. "Maybe that's why she can hear it and we can't. Sort of like...a special spiritual message."

"And you know what else this means?" Minako said. She smiled at Usagi. "It means that you are, without a doubt, unquestionably, one-hundred and eight percent...THE ACTUAL REAL AVATAR!" Usagi laughed weakly. Perhaps she was right, and there was no reason to doubt. But still...

Avatar, come. Come to me. Come to us.

Whoever, or whatever, was calling out to her was calling her "Avatar". They would not have used that title unless they meant to. So they knew who she was, and they could reach her. Did this really make her the Avatar? Was Suen getting this message too? More importantly, who was calling her? Where was she supposed to go? How was she supposed to get there?

Avatar, come. Come to me. Come to us. Avatar, we summon you. Come.

"I have to go," she murmured. "I have to go meet them. They're calling me—I need to leave now." Without any further explanation, she headed in the direction of the beach like a girl possessed. The others called out to her but she didn't answer; she didn't even slow down. "I have to go," was all she said. Rei stood in front of her and barred the way. "Rei, please," Usagi murmured, "I need to do this."

"Do what? Where are you going? Who's calling you?"

"I...I don't know," she murmured, slowly shaking her head as if trying to wake from a deep dream. "I don't know what's going on. It's like I'm compelled... I have to do this, Rei. Please." She started walking around Rei, who went to grab Usagi, but checked herself. She had a feeling that no force in the world could stop Usagi from doing this. As she plodded on, Minako called out:

"Okay, so let us come with you. I don't feel comfortable letting you do this on your own."

"I can't," she replied without looking back. "Only I was called. You're not... None of you are..." She finally forced herself to stop, though it apparently took considerable willpower. Shuddering, she turned to face her friends, smiling morosely. "Guys, I'm sorry, but I really feel like I need to do this alone. I can't describe it any better than that."

"But that's nonsense!" Before Minako could go after her, Mamoru held her back, his face grim. He looked to Usagi, who gave him an apologetic stare.

"This is something the Avatar needs to do. We can't interfere."

"Thank you," Usagi whispered, before resuming her quest. The others stood by helplessly as she left them.

"How will you get there?" Ami asked.

"I don't know."

A transport will be provided.

"A transport will be provided."

"Does she mean a boat?" Minako wondered. "That's the only way anybody's getting off this island without an air-bison. Come on, let's at least see her off." She ran after Usagi, and the others followed. For miles and miles, Usagi plodded through the island until she reached the mouth of a river. There, conveniently, was a sturdy raft with an oar and sail. In all likelihood, it had been left there by a ferryman or a trader, but Usagi boarded it without saying a word. Rei let out a soft cry, but checked herself again.

"Okay, Usagi," she said forcefully, "we're trusting you. Just promise us you'll be safe, and you'll come back to us when you're done." Usagi looked back, smiling wistfully.

"Yes, of course. And...thank you for putting up with me. I'm...just sorry I can't explain any of this."

"It's okay," Makoto said, trembling as she held a tear back. "We get it. It's Avatar business. We'll hold down the fort while you're gone." Usagi unfurled the sails and pushed off with the oar; Minako and Ami guided her out with wind and wave until she was beyond their reach. Then, slowly, Usagi drifted away, gradually becoming dimmer and dimmer until she was lost in the horizon. Mamoru and the girls stood there on the riverbank for a long time, trying to make sense of it all.

"This doesn't feel right," Minako shuddered. She hugged herself as a cruel wind picked up and the skies clouded over. Makoto put a hand on her shoulder.

"She'll be okay. Rei was right to trust her. She wouldn't have done this by herself if there was any danger."

"We shouldn't be idle in her absence," Ami said. "I for one think it would be good of us to unravel this mystery while she's away. We should go to Wan Shi Tong's library and any other place that might have information on Avatars."

"Unfortunately, ladies, I must return to Ba Sing Se," Mamoru said. "I cannot be away for too long, and there are still many fires I need to put out. If you all would like to accompany me, then I'll entrust Bodmall's gem to your care." The others liked this idea, but Rei wasn't so sure. She knew they had to go out and investigate the dilemma of the false Avatar and Usagi's condition, but there were so many leads, and not enough time to go to them all.

"I wonder if we should split up," she muttered. Everyone looked at her quizzically as she explained: "Look, we need to do this, but I think we can be more effective if we go our separate ways. I'd actually like to go back home and take another look at the temple archives. I have a good feeling that if we're going to learn anything, it'll be there."

"But that's no reason to split up the team," Minako argued. She looked to Makoto, who seemed strangely indecisive. "Come on, Mako, back me up here. We can all go to these places together on Artemis. With those five girls running around, I'd feel a lot safer if we stuck together."

"That's true...but on the other hand, Rei has a good point as well. We'd accomplish a lot more if we split up."

"Okay, but how are you going to get anywhere? We only have one air-bison between the five of us."

"We could ask the monks from the Northern Air Temple to help us," Ami suggested. "They could escort us wherever we need to go, and we'd have the advantage in numbers."

"Not you too, Ami," Minako groaned. "Come on, Mamoru, you've always been sensible. Tell them that this is a bad idea."

"I'm sorry, Minako," he replied somberly, "but I can understand the argument from both sides. If I had any say in it, then I'd be traveling with you, but as it stands, you'll have to figure out what to do on your own. Forgive me."

"No, you suck," she pouted. Makoto crossed her arms impatiently.

"Come on, Mina, don't be that way. We'll figure out what to do on the way to Ba Sing Se."

"Oh no, no, the only people who're going to Ba Sing Se are me and Mamoru! ...And Artemis. If you all want to break up now, and go your own way, and probably get killed in the process, then that's fine by me!" Minako marched off in a huff, but she was the only one who left. Mamoru stayed behind; Minako noticed and spun around, unabashedly upset.

"Oh, so now you wanna stick together, huh? Fine! Then you can all take a boat or whatever! I'm leaving!" She marched off again; Ami ran after her and grabbed her shoulder.

"Minako..."

The young air-bender was trembling with grief. Tears were rolling down her face as she turned around.

"Please, don't do this," she whispered. "I'm begging you! I...I can't lose any more people I care about. M-my mom, Kunzite, Heihachi, Katiyama, Shimada, Okamoto, and now Usagi... I don't want this to be the last time I see any of you! And I hate that you guys...you guys are..."

Ami threw her arms around Minako and squeezed for all she was worth.

"We'll figure something out, I promise. Just have faith in us. Let's at least ride back to Ba Sing Se first, okay? All right?" She touched Minako's cheek and smiled tenderly; the other girl sniveled. Makoto walked up and offered a handkerchief, which was quickly put to use. Rei squeezed her shoulder.

"I'm sorry I upset you, but we need to do this in a way that helps Usagi the most. I don't want to do this alone any more than you do, but if that's what it takes, then I'm willing to do it. Maybe...maybe we can track down my cousins and ask them to help." Minako didn't say anything for a long time. She wanted to help Usagi, too...but maybe she was a little selfish in wanting to keep everyone together. If only she knew what those five girls were up to...if only the world could go back to being peaceful again...maybe she'd feel safer going solo.

"Let's just go," she said hoarsely. They made their way back to Artemis in silence, and climbed on. Minako paused before lifting off. Her voice was distant and hollow. "You're right, Rei. We need to do whatever we can for Usagi. I...I want to say that I'm willing to do what it takes, but..."

"Believe me, I understand. For now, let's just go back to Ba Sing Se. Like my grandfather says, we shouldn't worry about a bridge's integrity until we cross it."

"I thought for sure that expression went a different way," Minako said as they took off. It was at least a day's voyage back to the Earth Kingdom—more than enough time to plan their next move and, if necessary, say goodbye. All the same, Minako quietly asked Artemis to take his time, and he was good enough to oblige.

The end of "Summons"

Next time: "The Treasure of the Mountain"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

5: The Treasure of the Mountain

In what would one day be known as Roku's Island, the residents of a small farming village were abuzz with activity. Many were laboring in the fields, or pretending to labor while they chatted with each other; some were guiding their livestock with expert care, while others could barely get their six-legged oxen to plod a single step. Weavers dexterously fit baskets together, butchers were cutting meat, sections of the dirt road were being cleaned and renewed with fresh stone, and children were playing, all under the watchful gaze of the local sheriffs. All in all, it was a peaceful, quiet village, one slowly recovering from the dark days of Beryl's influence.

There was a bit of excitement in the air, though, as word had it that the prince and princess might be passing through on their way to the eastern mainland. Merchants were already building stalls and gathering their wares for the upcoming event; one of them was taking a break as he loaded another bag of produce. He happened to look up into the clear blue sky...and his smile opened into a gasp of horror as he saw something gigantic falling towards the village. He screamed for everyone to take cover and just barely managed to dive out of the way as an enormous tree crashed into the village square. As the dust settled, the merchant slowly stood up and looked around to see if anyone was hurt. His eyes darted from his neighbors, to the tree...and then to his produce stall.

"Gaaah! My radishes!"

"Forget your radishes, man, there's a tree in the middle of the market! How the heck does a tree fall from the sky like that?!" The rest of the townsfolk, unhurt from the impact but very upset all the same, crowded around the strange site to get a better look. They shrieked as fire burst out, followed by a fierce wind and a sharp blast of water. Some of the freshly-laid stones rose up and shot into the tree, and a beam of white light blinded everyone. When they could see again, five girls jumped down from the tree, all of them very disoriented.

"Is everyone okay?" demanded a green-haired girl as she dusted herself off. A blue-haired one grunted in pain.

"Surprisingly, none of my bones are broken. What about you, Nergal?"

"Ask me again in about five minutes. I think my stomach's still lodged in my feet somewhere."

"Just what the heck happened?" said a girl with straight blonde hair. "How did we all get caught in a tree and launched into the boonies?"

"I have no idea," grunted another blonde as she limped away from the tree. Her hair was a mess; she cringed as she tried fixing it into two pigtails. The green-haired one coughed and dusted herself off.

"Well, we're alive, at least. We can worry about that later."

"Guys, I think we're in trouble!" the long-haired blonde shrieked. More of the townspeople were gathering around them, and several were armed security officers. She then noticed the damage their "arrival" had caused, and gasped. "Ohmygosh, we are SO SORRY! I swear we had no control over this thing at all! Was anyone hurt? We didn't kill anyone, did we? Ohmygosh I hope not!"

"M-miss, calm down," one of the older men said. "Nobody's hurt and nobody was killed."

"Says you!" the radish-merchant shrieked, as he wept over his ruined produce. "I worked hard for months to get the perfect radishes..."

"I'm really sorry," the blonde said again. She approached the man and put her hand on his back. "I'll pay for them if you want. I...I'll even work for it if you need me to!"

"You're darn right you'll..." The man looked into the girl's crestfallen face, and immediately felt his heart melting. Not only was she beautiful, but she was sincere, too. He mumbled and told her not to worry about it—after all, they were only radishes.

"Look," said the pig-tailed girl, "we're sorry we caused all this trouble, but it's not our fault. We got into a fight and were...well, you'll never believe this, but someone threw a tree at us, and we got caught in the branches as it flew by. By some miracle, we weren't thrown into the ocean or flattened into goo when we crashed here. We'll all work to pay for any damages."

"Huh," the old man grunted as he stroked his beard. "You're right, young missy: I don't believe you. But you're perfectly free to make reparations. In fact, unless you're in some kind of terrible hurry, I'd say you should. We'll start with moving this tree out of the way." He called for as many strong men, carts, rope, and pack animals as could be found, as well as any earth-benders who might be visiting. The green-haired girl volunteered, and the old man smiled.

"Actually, we should start with introductions. My name's Bito but you can call me Geezer or Old Man or whatever you please."

"Hello, Bito," the green-haired girl replied. "I'm Marduk. The queasy redhead's Nergal, the cheery one's Nabu, blondie number one is Suen, and the radish-lover is Ishtar."

"Hi," Ishtar chirped. "I prefer artichokes, actually."

…...

With the combined efforts of the girls and the townspeople, they managed to get the tree out of the way, rebuild the market stalls, and even planted more radishes. The girls weren't shy about using their bending but Suen kept hers hidden for the moment. She wasn't sure whether this village was in support of the false Avatar or against her. Wherever they went, it was usually the former, and that meant trouble for them. Suen wanted to spread the word about herself, but she knew it would only confuse and anger the people, and would ultimately damage her cause. No, first she needed to remove the counterfeit, and to do that, she needed to find her again. When Suen went into her meditative trance, she could not only cross over into the Spirit World, but she could also locate the false Avatar, no matter where she was. This was how she and her team had found Usagi earlier.

The girls worked hard until they repaired all the damage they inadvertently caused; it only took them two days. They also got into the favor of the locals, and were even invited to stay there, if they wanted. The girls declined but did take them up on their offer for a place to meet in private; they gathered there the second night to discuss where they should look for the false Avatar next. Suen went into her trance, but to her surprise, couldn't find any trace of Usagi at all. She had sensed her on and off during their first day in the village, but now it was as if she had been removed from the world.

"Maybe she's dead," Nergal suggested.

"No, I would have sensed the power leaving her. It would have come back to me, or at the very least, gone on to inhabit some other body."

"Could she be hiding her power, then?" Suen snorted.

"I highly doubt it. Even I can't do that. Did you notice she couldn't even bend during our fight unless she was in the Avatar State? If she can't even do something as simple as that, then you can forget about her hiding herself."

"So what's the deal, then?" Ishtar pressed.

"How should I know?" Suen snapped. "The world's never had two Avatars before, fake or otherwise. It looks like we're stuck until she pops up again."

"Maybe she is sharing the same fate as Kalkin," Nabu suggested. "Think about it: Kalkin dies or disappears and the world has no idea what happened to him. Then, the two of you are born in the same year—she looks like she's sixteen, anyway. You said yourself you were not able to contact Kalkin when you meditated. What if the only reason nobody knows what happened to him is because he went beyond the reach of all mortal knowledge or power?"

"I dunno, Nabu," Marduk grumbled. "That sounds like a stretch to me."

"I am merely speculating. The similarities may be vague but they are still pertinent. I am of the opinion we should research this first. If we discover Kalkin's fate, then we can clear up a lot of mystery." Nergal grinned.

"Sensible as always, Nabu."

"Thank you," she said coldly.

"And still not using contractions."

"I usually don't." The thin razor of a smile graced her lips. Ishtar snickered.

"So where should we start looking?" Marduk said. "Ba Sing Se would be the best place to start. After all, Kalkin was born there. Of course, they've spent the last sixteen years combing the world for him, so I doubt we'd have much luck."

"Kalkin was close friends with an old Fire Nation General named Oboro," Nergal said. "Maybe he'd know something. Then again, Oboro was the first person everyone else went to when he went missing, so..."

"Gah, we're going around in circles!" Ishtar growled. "Somebody has to know! Where was the last place he was seen?"

"In the Eastern Air Temple, if I recall," Marduk said. "I remember hearing something about the monks having him over as a guest. He then went west, into the unclaimed lands south of the Si Wong Desert. That was a little over sixteen years ago."

"Would you know anything about that area?" Suen asked. Marduk shook her head.

"I spent most of my life in the Provinces. Until I met you all, I've never been further than a few miles from my home."

"I'm afraid I'm not much help here, either," Ishtar sighed. "I've only been to the Patola Mountains and the Southern Tundra."

"You weren't much help in the fight, either," Suen muttered. Ishtar pouted and sunk her head.

"That is unfair and incorrect, Suen," Nabu stated. "We had no idea what kind of opposition to expect. Even you could not stand up to the false Avatar once she retaliated. You will also recall we were outnumbered, and we faced a bender whose abilities were completely unknown to us. Under the circumstances, everyone fought as well as she could."

"Okay, I get it, I'm sorry," she grumbled. She glared at Ishtar and added, "I just wish she did more than run around like a fool ogling that man."

"She wasn't the only one!" Nergal snickered, ribbing her green-haired friend. "Right, Marduk?!"

"Shut up," she grumbled, pushing her away.

"Regardless," Nabu said, "it would behoove us to conserve our animosity for our enemies and not each other. I have vouched for Ishtar before and I will vouch for her again. We will be better prepared for the next confrontation."

"We'd better be," Suen grumbled. They all looked at each other warily for a moment. "So it's decided? We go to the unclaimed lands south of the Si Wong Desert next. After that, maybe we can backtrack to the Eastern Air Temple and Ba Sing Se." The girls all nodded, so with their next destination planned out, they said their farewells to the villagers (taking some supplies and gifts with them) and took the first southbound ship. With Ishtar's wind at the mast and Nabu's water at the keel, no vessel in the ocean traveled as fast as theirs.

…...

Even at the speed they were going, it would still take the girls at least two full days to sail to their destination. The first day was uneventful, aside from some chatter, though the night was marked by a school of whales that swam nearby. Nergal tried to imitate their song, but the whales ignored her. The next day, an enormous sea serpent appeared shortly after breakfast, and kept them company for several hours. One time its long head emerged from the water, and Ishtar gave it a friendly wave. The creature blinked idly, then sank back down into the depths. That appeared to be the end of the matter until a long fin shot out, leaning back and forth majestically. Ishtar laughed as she realized the serpent was waving back at her—then everyone laughed as she was splashed by its fin.

"He was still more charming than your last boyfriend," Nergal remarked. As the day wore on, clouds covered up the sun until the entire sky was shrouded. A dense fog rolled in, and despite Ishtar's efforts to blow it away, or Nabu's attempts at dispelling it, the mist clung tight and refused to budge. Nergal was called to the bow to offer a light, and the ship's speed slowed to a crawl while the crew waited for clearer weather. Unbeknownst to the girls, they were not alone out there. They very nearly crossed paths with Usagi, and might have seen her were it not for the strange fog. Even then, Suen could not sense her; in fact, all of their bending abilities left them for a brief moment.

"That's weird," Ishtar remarked as the wind died down. "It's like my bending turned off all of a sudden."

"Mine, too," said Nergal as she stared at her hand. Nabu frowned in contemplation.

"It would seem I am affected as well. Suen, try going into the Avatar State." She did, but found no more success than her companions. The effects wore off after a few minutes, and the fog parted as well, just as quickly and mysteriously. The girls looked around, baffled at the sudden change, and wondered if it was some kind of omen. Whatever the case, they pressed on, and arrived at the westernmost island by the following morning. Between the Southern and Eastern Air Temples, four islands lay unnamed and largely unclaimed (hundreds of years in the future, Avatar Kiyoshi would add a fifth island to the set). They were technically a Commonwealth of the Kingdom of Omashu, but ever since the time of Avatar Sung Chiang, nobody had given them any official name or even proclaimed ownership over them.

"Ishtar, you've lived the closest to these," Marduk said as they made landfall. "Is there any reason why nobody's named these islands yet?"

"None that I know of. Most people just call them the Hinterlands or the Southlands."

"We should name them right now," Nergal suggested. She smiled proudly and proclaimed, "I hereby dub this one Nergal Island!"

"Are you sure?" Nabu said. "This is the smallest of the four."

"Oh. Marduk, you can have it!"

"None of us are naming anything," Marduk retorted. "They belong to King Motoki. If he doesn't want to name them, it's his right. We should just focus on finding clues about Kalkin's disappearance."

"All right, fine," Nergal grumbled. With that settled, the girls began to explore the island; since they didn't know what they were looking for, where they could find it, or even if it existed, their hopes were reasonably slim. The Far West Hinterland, as they referred it to for convenience, was mostly a mountainous region with very little in the way of farmland. The girls ran into a tiny seaside village after an hour of walking, sparse and isolated but surprisingly rich. Its citizens claimed they got their wealth from the mountains, but wouldn't elucidate any further, nor did they have any information on Kalkin's fate (in fact, they still believed Kalkin was alive). The next village over was a little bigger but just as wealthy, if not more so. As there was very little farming and less manufacturing, the girls wondered how such a tiny, remote area could be so prosperous. Once again, the answer was "in the mountains".

"Maybe we should look into these mountains," Suen suggested. They decided to hold off on their search until they got a better understanding of the island. The third village they visited was really more like a town, and acted as government of the island. It was by far the wealthiest, with every citizen dressed in the finest clothes, eating the best food, and living in the grandest houses. They were so rich that the people refused all payment, and gave the girls food and lodging for nothing.

"I've never seen anything like this," Ishtar remarked during their dinner. "You all have so much that you can afford to give away your surplus. Haven't you ever thought about trading to other countries?"

"Oh, we do," the proprietor of their inn said. He had joined them for dinner and was quite happy about spending his evening with "five lovely young ladies". He went on to say, "We just trade with the wealth of the mountains."

"We heard the same answer from the other villages we saw," Suen said. "What exactly is this 'wealth of the mountains'?" The proprietor clammed up instantly.

"Just a local commodity, nothing more. I'm sorry, but it's against our law to speak of the mountains' wealth to outsiders."

"Sounds suspicious," Nergal remarked. "It's like you store drugs or contraband there."

"No, no, I assure you it's all legal," he tittered nervously. "If it'll help assuage your fears, we mine gems and jewels from the mountain. That's really all there is to it."

"Oh." She was content with that answer, but Marduk wasn't. As someone who had lived in the Earth Kingdom, and had seen more than her share of miners, she knew all this wealth couldn't have come from gold or diamonds. Unless these people were keeping the gems for themselves, or had devised a means of profit radically different from what she knew, there was something else in those mines. Marduk didn't press the matter, however, until they were all alone. Suen and Nabu agreed with her suspicions, and even Ishtar admitted there was more to this than a simple mining operation. The girls decided to go into the mountains that very night to try and uncover this mystery. It probably didn't have anything to do with Kalkin, but since Suen was the Avatar, it was her job to address the wrongs of society.

There wasn't much of a moon that evening, so Nergal passed torches around. The girls followed a well-worn path from the village into the distant mountains; the trip took the better part of two hours. Nabu marked the presence of cart tracks and stag-steer hoof-prints which would have been used to transport whatever treasures the mountain had to offer. Before the trail led them into what they guessed to be a mine, the girls were forced to put out their torches and proceed with caution, as there were guards posted at the entrance.

"Nothing to see here, folks," Marduk observed ironically, "just four guys standing around in front of a mine in the middle of the night. Oh no, we're not protecting anything dangerous or illegal here, no sir."

"They're probably there to deter looters," Nabu reasoned. Marduk conceded and a plan was formed. Ishtar ran ahead of the group, screaming and waving her arms frantically, getting the guards' attention. While they were focused on her, the other four struck, knocking the guards out. Marduk covered them in stone while Ishtar offered a very insincere apology; then, the torches came out again and the girls stepped into the mine. Nergal, however, declined.

"Hey, uh...shouldn't someone stay out here and cover the exit? You know, in case more people show up?"

"Yes, but we will need you in case these fires go out," Nabu said.

"That's what you've got Suen for!"

"I'm going to be helping Marduk with this mine," she replied. "Goodness knows how sturdy it is—we don't want it collapsing on us. And I can't believe I'm saying this, but we need Ishtar, too."

"You do?" Ishtar said. Suen nodded grudgingly.

"Do you want us to suffocate? Or worse yet, get exposed to toxic gases? Who else is going to clear the air for us?"

"Oh, good point. But I'd hate to ask Nabu to stand guard all by herself."

"She won't!" Nergal insisted. "It'll just be me! I'd be more than happy to stand out here and not go into that deep, dark cave where there's nothing around me but stone that might collapse at any moment and no air to breathe or any space to stretch out—hey, did I also mention there might be bats, or mole-people, or giant lizards, not to mention poisonous mushrooms, and foul things from before the beginning of history lurking deep inside the earth's bowels?"

Nergal was twitching and grinning nervously. The problem was easy enough to diagnose.

"Nergal, are you claustrophobic?"

"No!" she insisted; then, after a pause, "Maybe a little. ...Okay, lots."

"Well, get over it!" Suen snapped. "We're all in this together, okay? If this turns out to be nothing, I promise we'll head back at double speed!" Nergal trembled, still afraid to go any further. Marduk sighed and gave her friend a gentle push.

"Come on, I promise I won't let the mine close in on us, and Ishtar's got our air covered. Nabu's not afraid of anything, so if any scary monsters show up, they'll have to deal with her."

"That is untrue," Nabu stated; "I have a deep-seated and irrational fear of spilling milk on the floor. It is why you never see me walking with a bowl of cereal. It is also why I have never cared for a cat." The other girls gave each other a puzzled expression.

"That's...an unusual thing to be afraid of."

"I assure you, after you have spent the better part of a day cleaning up after it, you will have no greater terror. I would take spiderpedes, heights, or public speaking any day of the week." With that oddity out of the way, and more than a few supporting hands guiding Nergal, the group delved into the mine. It was Marduk's job to keep them from getting lost; she passed her hand over the stony wall as they walked, guiding them down passages or passing over them. Ishtar built a bubble of pure air around them, keeping the current flowing; Nergal trembled but kept the torches lit. Only Nabu was left without a task, so she kept watch around them. All of a sudden, as they rounded another corner, the air bubble surrounding them faded, and Marduk stopped.

"What's wrong?" Suen said. Marduk's face flickered in bewilderment against the torchlight.

"I...don't know. I somehow can't feel the earth."

"What do you mean, it's all around us!"

"No, I...I can't hear it; I can't sense it. I know it's there, but it feels...dead."

"I know exactly how you feel," said Ishtar nervously. "The wind isn't responding to my call. It almost feels like I'm suffocating."

"Will you two quit goofing off?" Suen snapped. "Get us back on track, Marduk! Ishtar, put that bubble back around us before we asphyxiate!"

"But I can't!" cried both of the girls. Before Suen could yell at them again, Nabu stepped up.

"Allow me to test something." There was a little pool of water at their feet; she knelt down and dipped her hand in it, but the water just dripped off. She dried her hand off and grumbled. "It would appear as though my water-bending is affected as well. Nergal, what about you?"

"I...I don't know. The torches are lit, but..." She focused on them, but they neither diminished nor expanded. "Nope, I can't do anything. It's like all our bending power went away."

"That's absurd," Suen snarled, and she tried her hand at it as well—with the same results. Panic started to overtake her. "Okay, uh, what's going on? Seriously, this is getting weird! First it happens on the way over here, and now this?"

"Wait," Marduk hissed, lowering her voice to a whisper. "(Do you hear that?)" The girls strained their ears, but could only hear the hollow emptiness of the mine. Gradually, though, they picked up voices—several voices, drawing nearer to their position. The torches were all put out and the girls hid as the voices grew louder.

"...ment. What do you think it's for?"

"I've heard there's going to be a penal colony build down here somewhere. Beryl's going to put some of her prisoners to work and she wants some 'extra security'."

"But don't these islands belong to Motoki?"

"Yeah, on paper, but when was the last time the Earth King came here? I don't even think his reps know what's going on out here."

"I guess there are benefits from being so far away from civilization."

"Ha, you said it! Anyway, rumor has it that the two countries might merge, and then the problem of ownership wouldn't even matter."

"What, is Motoki marrying Beryl or something?"

"Hey, ask no questions and hear no lies. What does it matter, so long as we're getting paid like this?"

"Ha, good point. And it's not like we should really care about a king we've never seen before." By now the voices had manifested into three men, which the girls ambushed as soon as they saw them. Even without their bending, the girls easily overpowered them and tied them up for questioning. The men were positively terrified, though, thinking the girls were cave spirits or monsters—or worse, Motoki's soldiers come to put a stop to everything. Marduk, who was the best when it came to intimidation, cracked her knuckles and demanded the men talk. As soon as they realized they were up against five teenagers and not spirits, monsters, or soldiers, the three men refused any further comment.

"Oh, really?" Marduk growled. "Tell me, which is scarier: a cave monster or me?"

"Oh, please!" they snarled. "You're just a punk kid who snuck in here to steal all the gems."

"Is that so? We overpowered the four men standing watch outside. Do you think typical mountain bandits could do that?"

"Listen, we don't care who you are or who you think you are. We ain't tellin' you nothin'!" Marduk lifted one of the men up by the collar of his shirt and glared at him.

"How about I beat it outta you instead?!"

"Go ahead," he sneered, "I still won't talk!" She snorted and tossed him back on the ground; evidently this was a dead end. She looked to her friends, who were out of ideas.

"I strongly doubt we would get much information from them," Nabu surmised. "Their isolation has helped them evade detection from the authorities, but it has also kept them woefully behind the times. Gentlemen, Queen Beryl is dead and a new king has taken her place."

"Horsefeathers!" they laughed. Nabu's cold, stony expression stared back at them.

"Whatever plans for a penal colony she may have had are now gone, along with this operation you are involved in. The new king has no intention of making that sort of deal with your island. You may as well make a full confession, if you wish to avoid a prolonged prison sentence." The men just laughed at her.

"And who's going to turn us in, little girl? You?" Ishtar was about to announce that that was precisely what they intended to do when a noise from behind got their attention. Standing there were at least fourteen men, many of them armed with hammers, picks, hatchets, and shovels. They were pushing two carts full of what looked like unrefined sapphires.

"Hey, you guys, this ain't a brothel," grunted one of the miners. The tied-up men spat.

"Yeah, real funny. How about you get busy finding graves for these intruders, huh?"

"Sure, even though it seems like a total waste." The biggest miner in the group stepped forward, cracking his knuckles much louder than Marduk had. He was as huge as two of them, and wielded a sledgehammer as easily as if it were a toy. Nergal and Marduk stood protectively before Suen and called out fire and earth, but to no avail. All the miners laughed at them.

"Benders, eh? And pretty stupid ones, too. They don't know what we have here." The miners patted their haul proudly. The girls didn't know it at the time, but the men had been digging for the Tears of Apsu, mysterious gems that inhibited a bender's connection with the elements. Beryl had been trading with the people of the Hinterlands in secret, and had rewarded them greatly for their miraculous discovery. Suen glared and pushed past her friends.

"So just what have you been doing here? If you're gonna kill us, then you've got nothing to lose by telling us." The miners laughed and admitted they were right; then, they got the full story. All the girls stared in astonishment at the two carts full of bender-inhibiting jewels, and realized why their powers had been so muted—and how badly things had turned against them. Under normal circumstances, these miners would have been obliterated in seconds, but now...

"Sorry, girls," the burly man chuckled as he approached them, bouncing his hammer in his hand, "nothing personal." He swung hard; the girls scrambled out of the way, but were all caught by the miners. They struggled in vain as knives were drawn and pressed against their throats. Suen gnashed her teeth as the lives of her companions teetered on the edge of destruction...

Go into the Avatar State. You know how to do it. Its power...MY power is greater than theirs. Trust me. Save them!

With an earthshaking thrust, Suen burst free from her captor, and in a display of power that would not be replicated for centuries, bent the water in the cells of her enemies until their arms jerked back, freeing her companions. As they scrambled to safety, she issued a blast of wind that forced all the miners against the rocky wall, then summoned the ceiling down and buried them all, man and gem alike.

"Get out of here, now!" she called to her friends. "I'm going to collapse the entire mountain and destroy this operation once and for all!"

"Have you lost your mind?!" Nergal shrieked, but Ishtar had already grabbed her.

"Don't argue with her, just run!" She flew out aided by a gust of wind; Marduk and Nabu skated out on a large rock slab. They shot out of the entrance just as the entire mountain crumbled, and kept running as an enormous dust cloud billowed out, covering the entire island. The violent trembling could be felt as far as the Si Wong Desert, and didn't subside for a very long time. When it did, and Ishtar blew all the dust and smoke away, the only thing left standing in the ruination was a glowing figure, protected by fire and air, earth and water. Suen was frightening to behold, as frightening as the destruction she had wrought.

With a heavy sigh, she reverted out of the Avatar State. Her friends were afraid to approach her at first.

"S...Suen?" Nergal whispered. "Ah...are you okay?"

The silence felt interminable. Finally the girl drew a sharp breath.

"Yeah, I'm fine. We won't have to worry about those gems being used against other benders ever again."

"You killed all those people," Ishtar groaned, covering her mouth in shock. Suen winced.

"Yeah...yeah, I did. They were going to kill you all. I had to act."

"Yeah, but..."

"But what, Ishtar? Huh? Did you want me to drag them all out here? Or tie them up and ship them off to the authorities? Maybe you thought I could reform them."

"That will be enough," Nabu stated coldly. "Suen is the Avatar, and she may handle these matters in the way she thinks is best. Avatars have killed before in the past. Of course, we must also refrain from taking matters into our own hands when we are able. Personally, I am grateful for my life, and I cannot think of any alternate way she could have handled the situation." Her dauntless gaze shifted from Suen to the other girls and back again, neither condemning or condoning. A long silence held them in its grasp.

"In any case," Nabu continued, "it is clear there are no clues concerning Kalkin's fate here. We should find passage to the next island. I am not one for optimism, but I believe it was good of us to come here. We prevented a great evil from spreading."

"I guess so," Marduk said. She let out a groan and dusted her clothes off. "Still, I can't believe you destroyed an entire mountain! I've heard of desperate times calling for desperate measures before, but...yikes!"

"Tell me about it!" Nergal added. She attempted to smile and patted Suen's shoulder. "Remind me never to get on your bad side, girl!" The three of them reconciled and went in search of another ship, but Ishtar was still shaking. It wasn't the near-death experience that traumatized her, nor even the mountain's annihilation. She knew that horrible things happened, and in life or death situations, sometimes lethal force was required to protect those one cared about. She...was grateful to be alive...

But killing people, even in self-defense, just didn't seem like something an Avatar should do.

It definitely wasn't something Suen would have done.

The end of "The Treasure of the Mountain"

Next time: "The Guardian Kings"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

6: The Guardian Kings

Usagi could not explain how only she had been able to hear that voice, or why she was so compelled to follow it—in fact, she hardly even felt in control over her own body. It was as if a far greater force was not only drawing her to it, but forcing her. She felt no danger or fear, though, only a sense of cautious serenity. The ocean was at least cooperative, for the wind and waves carried her into the sea without any issue. Usagi had almost no sailing experience, so this was a relief; it was almost as if the ocean was doing the sailing for her. She never felt tired, bored, thirsty, or even hungry as she drifted onward, she just...was. It never even occurred to her to eat, or rest—she just operated on the belief that everything would be accounted for if she obeyed this missive.

Day gradually gave way to evening, then to night. Usagi could at least tell where she was going by looking at the stars. She figured she was heading due south from Crescent Island, veering very slightly west. This put her, quite literally, in the middle of nowhere, with nothing but ocean for days in every direction. The isolation didn't concern her in the slightest; in fact, she kept a sharp vigil all through the night, feeling no loneliness or concern. A part of her knew she should be frightened by all this, but it was impossible to feel anything but calm.

Dawn approached, and with it, a veil of fog. The mist permeated the air until the sky was covered, and soon Usagi couldn't see more than a few feet in front of her. There she was, utterly alone, stranded in the middle of the ocean, without any supplies or any way to communicate with her friends, an ominous mist surrounding her—and yet she still felt nothing but peace. The waves carried her forward, but there was definitely a destination in mind; she wasn't floating about willy-nilly. Whatever had summoned her was now directing her actions; she had but to stand ready at the mast and wait. Slowly, her raft came to a halt, and the waters became utterly still. The fog thickened until Usagi could barely see the ocean itself. The time she stood there waiting could not be measured. Even so, she didn't feel impatient or bored, just content to stand on that raft, as if she were the only person in the whole world. Then, far away in the haze, she saw something approach.

Whether she was creeping up on a mass of land, or the mass was inching its way towards her, the shape grew larger and larger. Even from a long way off, it looked positively gigantic, like a great hill or mound. Usagi idly watched as the shape grew even greater, until it was towering over her in one massive singularity. Then, it stopped. Usagi turned around, and saw another shape just like it approach from the south—and then one from the east, and another from the west. The three great shapes drew closer and closer, making only the slightest noise as the water rippled gently beneath them. They, too, came to a stop, and she was surrounded by four gargantuan masses. The fog lifted slowly, and she was able to see them for what they were: small islands teeming with life, animals and vegetation sprouting out in colors so vibrant that she was almost blinded by them. The islands were about fifty feet away from her in every direction, yet she felt constricted by them. Then, one by one, the islands began to shake, and part of their landmass rose up out of the water, higher and higher until they blotted out a portion of the sky. Usagi's eyes widened as the identity of these islands became clear to her at last. She had seen drawings of these creatures before.

They were lion-turtles.

Her mouth hung open in a long gasp as the enormous creatures stared down at her. These titans were the stuff of mythology, so rare that some scholars even debated their existence. They were supposedly ancient and very reclusive, appearing on the cusp of vision only every hundred years or so. According to legends, the lion-turtles were the ones who gave humanity the gift of bending the elements, and had even bequeathed their powers to the very first Avatar. Seeing them in person was a radically different experience from reading about them; seeing four at once was overwhelming. Usagi stood firm, though, even when one of their great heads lowered and she could see her reflection in its massive amber eye.

"Welcome, Avatar," it said, its voice deliberate, powerful, and steeped in great wisdom. "We thank you for answering our summons. We must apologize for any inconvenience or confusion we have caused, but we sensed that the time for our Meeting had come."

"You were the ones who called me," Usagi stated. The gigantic eye blinked.

"Correct. There is much to discuss, and you no doubt have many questions. We will do our best to answer them. Before we do, however, we believe that introductions are in order. As our two races measure time differently, we have decided that you should speak first."

"Thank you," she said. "My name is Usagi Tsukino, and...I'm the Avatar, or at least I think I am."

"That matter will be addressed momentarily. As your kind sees a meeting with ours as a matter of prominence, we feel the same regarding a meeting with Avatars. The last one we spoke to was Sung Chiang, and before him, it was Setanta."

"You forget Xuanzang," one of the lion-turtles said. The first lion-turtle lifted its massive head slowly, and let out a long sigh.

"Aaah, so I have. Yes, Xuanzang. We spoke with him on two occasions, if I recall. That was many hundreds of your lifetimes ago, Lady Usagi. May we call you that?"

"Yes, thank you," she answered. The lion-turtle lowered its head again.

"Very good. As for us, I am Vaishravana, 'one who is knowing'. I am the Guardian King of the North, the Winter, and the Water."

"I am Virudhaka, 'powerful one'," said the one behind Usagi, "I am the Guardian King of the South, the Summer, and the Fire."

"I am Dhritarashtra, 'one who maintains the kingdom of law'. I am the Guardian King of the East, the Spring, and the Earth."

"I am Virupaksha, 'one who sees all'. I am the Guardian King of the West, the Autumn, and the Air."

"Those are really long names," Usagi murmured. The lion-turtles grumbled softly.

"They are our Selves, Lady Usagi. If they do not suit your needs, you may refer to us however you see fit."

"Uh, sorry," she yelped, "I didn't mean to insult you! It's just...I'll never remember them!" The lion-turtles grumbled again. They were actually laughing, but it was very difficult to tell.

"Thus has it been with your kind. But if we had wanted to be remembered, we would not have chosen this lifestyle, as you humans once chose to venture away from our protection. Now, to business." Each of the lion-turtles spoke to Usagi, but their voices were so indistinct that it oftentimes sounded like all of them were speaking at once. It didn't help that their voices thundered across the ocean in every direction, and they usually finished each other's thoughts. Still, she could follow them very easily, and was too eager to hear what they had to say in any case.

"Know first that you are indeed the One True Avatar, Lady Usagi. Let there be no perplexity in that matter. Raava's spirit resides within you. The one known as Suen is the fraud. However, she is innocent in this misconception, for she is being deceived. And yet there is a small grain of truth in her claim as well, for in a sense, she too is an avatar." Usagi shook her head.

"Wait, that's...somehow even more confusing."

"Indeed."

"So is she like a...Dark Avatar? I heard that Raava had a counterpart..."

"Vaatu," the lion-turtles answered. "If Suen were possessed by him, then yes, she would be his Avatar, just as you are Raava's. But Vaatu remains sealed. Another being inhabits her and gives her its power."

"Wait, so there are other spirits out there who can give people these Avatar powers?"

"Correct, but they are very few, and almost none of them are interested in maintaining the type of relationship Raava has. The one we are referring to..." The lion-turtle hesitated, looking to its kin. They hummed gravely among themselves for awhile, sharing a single, dreadful thought.

"The one we are referring to is known as Apsu. I am sorry to say that even we do not have much information concerning her. She is ancient, though, even by our reckoning, and incredibly powerful. Indeed, if she is able to bestow someone with abilities similar to the Avatar, then she is a force to be reckoned with."

"So what should I do?" Usagi said. "I can't fight something like that, can I?"

"No, nor could you even if we four Guardian Kings were to join you. The enemy you are facing now is far greater than anything this world has encountered. To combat it, you must acquire a knowledge and power beyond ours. You must find the one who taught us the ways of bending the world. You must find our Master."

Usagi's mouth hung open, and she felt a shiver across her whole body. If there was any truth to the legends behind these creatures, then they were the first and ultimate authority when it came to bending. They had enjoyed and mastered the art eons before the first Avatar, and could give or remove it as they saw fit. She had thought that bending came innately to the lion-turtles—but now they had a Master? Usagi was amazed, bewildered, unable to grasp it.

All she could say was, "Who is your Master?"

"A great sage, and wanderer of the world. We could not tell you his name, for he had many names, and among us we only knew him as Master. But you will meet him one way or another. Either you must find him or he must find you."

"That doesn't help me at all!" Usagi exclaimed. "How am I supposed to find this Master of yours? Is he even alive? What does he look like? Where does he live?"

"Do not despair," they replied. "The universe has a way of putting the correct sequence of motions into action. Like will know like. You will find him, for he is meant to teach you, as he once taught us."

"Okay," she murmured, still concerned but willing to put it all on faith. "So you're saying that I shouldn't worry about it. Fine. But are you going to help me?"

"We have already helped you. The process has begun, but it is the Avatar's duty to see it through."

"But if this Apsa-whatever is such a threat, then I'm going to need all the help I can get!"

"True, but first, find our Master and learn from him."

"I was hoping you all would do something, too," she murmured. The lion-turtles grunted in deep contemplation.

"We have done all that we could. This is a matter for the Avatar and her allies."

"So you won't help me, even though you have a far greater power than I ever will?"

"You are deeply mistaken about that, Lady Usagi. You have a power that already exceeds our own. Once you meet our Master you will be greater still. But we cannot offer you our aid any further. We know you do not understand, but this is a matter for the Avatar."

"I definitely don't understand," she muttered. The lion-turtles bowed their heads sympathetically.

"In time, perhaps, you will. We must leave you now, Lady Usagi. A great Change is upon us, and we must prepare for it. Raava be with you."

"No, wait, hold on a second!" she cried out. "I still have a lot of questions! Why can't I bend? Why can't I talk to Kalkin? What happened to him?"

"Forgive us. This will all be revealed to you in the proper time, but now your concern is Apsu, and our Master. Find him and your path will be set before you." That seemed to be the end of the discourse, and the lion-turtles sank once more into the mists of legend, as quietly and spectacularly as they had arrived. Usagi found herself all alone, stranded in the middle of the ocean with nothing but a raft, her thoughts, and the clothes on her back. The skies cleared and she sat down. It was as if the meeting had never happened.

"Just great. Now what do I do?" Usagi was startled as the clear sound of a bell broke the silence, and she stood up to see something approaching her. Her spirits lifted and she let out a shout as she realized it was a ship.

…...

"Land sakes!" gushed the bosun as he helped Usagi on deck. "If you ain't the strangest passenger yet we've picked up today! Normally it ain't my policy to burden this ship with oddities, but that seems to be my fate today! Might I ask your story, young lady? I'm burnin' with curiosity to find out who, how, why, and all that."

"Oh, of course," she tittered nervously. An older woman approached the two, her wooden leg rapping smartly on the deck.

"Shevan, did I ask you to perform an interview?"

"Um, no, Cap, ya didn't," he saluted.

"Do ya recall what I did ask ye to do?"

"Aye, and that's to see to repairs. But this young lady—"

"Repairs it is, then. I'll see to the guest. Hop to it."

"Aye," he saluted again, giving Usagi a quick tip of the hat before running off. Usagi stood nervously in front of what she guessed was the Captain, a gray-haired woman burnt solid brown by decades of sea life. She had tightened muscles and scars from her face to her single foot, and was chewing on a thin piece of wood. She crossed her arms and gave Usagi a hasty appraisal.

"Got any sailing experience, girl?"

"Um, no ma'am."

"Can ye cook, do carpentry, navigate, or keep good account of inventory?"

"Yes ma'am, I can navigate."

"Good, we'll put ye to work in an hour. Once we hit port we'll let you off, is that clear? You'll not get a better offer'n that."

"Yes ma'am, thank you. Ah...might I ask where that port will be?"

"You tell me, you're the navigator." The woman grunted and softened a little. "Sorry, it's been an odd day for us. Port's near Hei Bai's forest. We won't be sendin' ye off on your lonesome at least: Bosun Shevan picked up some kid who got lost in the Su Wong, then not an hour out at sea, fishes some old guy out of his wrecked dingy. We'll be sendin' them off too. Bah, I've had the bosun on repair detail but it seems he can't help but find new flotsam for me. Beg your pardon," she apologized.

"Um, it's okay," Usagi answered, "I'm just glad I got picked up! I honestly had no idea what I'd do." The Captain frowned contemplatively.

"Ahuh. I noticed ya didn't have food nor drink with ya in your raft. How the devil ya got all the way out here on nothin' but gumption is beyond me, but we've got biscuits and water in the mess if you want. Fair warning, though: every bite's a minute o' labor!"

"Yes ma'am, thank you." Usagi bowed and was escorted to the mess hall, leaving the Captain to rub her chin and smile.

"Heh, at least she has manners."

The "kid" the Captain mentioned was already in the mess, helping peel potatoes and wash dishes. He was around Usagi's age, bronze-skinned and dark-haired, with a tan vest and an inquisitive lemur on his shoulder. He greeted the new passenger with a smile and invited her over. Usagi smiled back shyly.

"Hello! You must be the girl Bosun Shevan brought onboard."

"Yeah, I'm Usagi." He smiled and they shook hands. The lemur took her finger eagerly.

"I'm Ma-Ti, and this is Mochi. If you're hungry or thirsty, help yourself. We don't have much here, but what we have is yours."

"Thank you, that's very kind." Usagi had biscuits, potatoes, dried beef, and pickled cabbage; the water was a little stale, but after being adrift for goodness knows how long, it was extremely refreshing. Ma-Ti laughed as she downed her second potato.

"You must've been very hungry! Only a Thunderhorn eats that much."

"What can I say?" she replied, stuffing her mouth full. "Ehh cmm rummbrr huh huss hmm I—aah, ate!" [Translation: I can't remember the last time I ate.] As she washed it down, Ma-Ti offered to introduce her to Shevan's other "guest", a charming old man whom even the Captain had grown fond of. Usagi wiped herself clean and followed him around to the stern, where a lone figure was busy patching up sails. The very first thing Usagi noticed about the old man was his singing, for although it was gentle and put one at ease, it carried over the entire ship. He wore a great red cloak and a long cap, and had deeply browned skin that contrasted with the snowy white of his long beard. His eyes were dark and piercing, his arms strong but his fingers dexterous, and a long gnarled walking stick leaned against him. He was singing about sewing up sails, appropriately enough, and looked up from his work as Ma-Ti, Mochi, and Usagi approached.

"Ah, hello there, young master Ma-Ti! I see you've made a friend. Tell me, is this the girl that Bosun Shevan stopped the ship for?"

"Yes sir, and it's a good thing, too. She didn't have any food or water with her."

"Dear me, whatever for?" he exclaimed merrily. Usagi blushed nervously.

"It's sort of a long story, and I don't think you'd believe me."

"Is that so? But we'll have plenty of time to judge for ourselves, won't we? Captain Mathena—oh, that'd be her name; you see she's very good at maintaining her ship but simply horrible when it comes to social graces—yes, our dear Captain Mathena is heading for Hei Bai's forest, and it is there that she will deprived of four—yes, four, if I'm not mistaken—four of her passengers."

"Is that where you're headed?" Usagi asked. Ma-Ti shrugged.

"According to the Captain, it is. She doesn't like passengers, even ones who do a fair day's work. She'll dump us there whether we like it or not. Personally, I'm fine with it. I wanted to get to the Kolau region, and this way is much more pleasant."

"Yes," the old man pointed, "it's much nicer than burning yourself to death in a desert, and with all the trouble this part of the world has been seeing lately, I'll wager it's safer, too. But dear me!" he laughed, looking at Usagi, "I don't even know your name! I would be remiss if I were not introduced properly to such a charming young lady." Usagi chuckled and did the honors; the old man hesitated before giving his name.

"Now let me see...hmm. My own name... Well, you see, I'm very old, so I've accrued a great number of names over the years. Hmm, yes, you may call me Mariner for now, as I've been traveling the world by boat or ship for a long time. Yes, Mariner will do. Ha! That reminds me of a rhyme." He resumed singing, completely unconcerned with the outside world as he continued mending sails. Ma-Ti couldn't help but laugh.

"He's a funny old man, but he keeps great company. I hope you don't mind traveling with us for awhile."

"No, of course not," Usagi smiled. "I actually...got separated from my friends, and now I'd like to get back to them. I think they said they were going to Ba Sing Se."

"That's not terribly far from Kolau. I'm looking for my friends, too."

"As am I," Mariner said, never taking his eyes off his work. "I have an appointment to keep with someone very dear. By some extraordinary coincidence, she will be meeting me in Hei Bai's forest."

"It's good for people to keep close ties to their friends," Usagi remarked somberly. She embraced herself and said, "Now more than ever. It feels like the world's teetering on the brink of something perilous. I wouldn't want to face it alone."

"Well spoken," Mariner said. Captain Mathena called for Ma-Ti to go back to work, and Usagi to start with hers, so the three parted ways. According to her, they'd arrive at port in less than two days.

…...

Virupaksha, the Guardian King of the West, took one last look at his kin before they parted to the four corners of the world. He knew their hearts weighed heavily with regret, for although they had set the Avatar on her course, they had deliberately kept her blind, withholding far more than they had revealed.

"I do not feel good about what we have done," he sighed, issuing a breeze like a typhoon. "It is all well and good to warn the Avatar of Apsu, and to entrust her fate to our Master...but still. We should have done more."

"But what more could we have done? Even we cannot teach her to bend. We who manipulated the cycle to our own selfish ends..."

"We could have told her about Kalkin."

"She will learn of Kalkin in time." Virupaksha soured.

"We could have told her of her true purpose. We could have told her of The Bent One."

The four creatures simmered in shameful silence. Finally, Virudhaka spoke with a voice like fire.

"Apsu is dangerous enough. Leave well enough alone. There is yet time."

"Yes," Dhritarashtra said, its voice strong as the earth. "We have always had Time on our side. It is our one great advantage."

"For now," Vaishravana noted, roaring with the waves. "A Great Change is upon us. Apsu, Kalkin, the Avatar, our Master, The Bent One... What will it bode, I wonder?" They left the answer unresolved and drifted away from each other, and were not seen again for some time.

The end of "The Guardian Kings"

Next time: "Separation Anxiety"

Author's notes:

The Guardian Kings are Buddhist deities who assisted in the birth of Gautama Buddha, and reside in Indra's paradise. They are vaguely humanoid, and protect the various cardinal directions and seasons of the year (with some embellishment concerning the elements). As far as I know, the lion-turtles have no official name, but I feel like the mythological connection is appropriate. And yes, these are the same four who originally housed the four great civilizations of humans in Avatar Wan's time. I'm going to say that Virupaksha (West/Autumn/Air) is the one who gave Aang energy-bending in the animated series.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

7: Separation Anxiety

The girls were somber during the entire flight back to Ba Sing Se. They meant to discuss what they should do and where they should go now that Usagi was off on her own, but Minako's anger and fear was contagious, and it became a topic that nobody wanted to breach. They didn't want to split up, but it didn't seem feasible to stay together, either. Nothing was resolved as Artemis touched down in the palace courtyard, where Usagi's family was waiting. Mamoru wasn't looking forward to explaining what had happened to them.

"I'm glad you're all safe," Kenji said. "I think we're finally ready to leave the city. I'm almost finished writing up everything that's happened. Of course, now I'm two months behind on everything else..."

"It sounds like you're keeping busy," Mamoru said pleasantly. "I'm glad I was able to help you out. There's no need to rush if you're not finished, though. It's not like I'll evict you or anything." The four of them laughed; Luna just yawned. Once again, Usagi had left the poor cat behind.

"No, I think we need to get back on the road," Ikuko said. "We've been traveling so long that we're not used to staying in one place. Ba Sing Se is a wonderful city, but...we do feel a little restricted by it."

"I see. Well, if there is anything you require, you have but to ask."

"Where's Usagi?" Shingo said. He grunted and added, "Not that I miss her or anything." Kenji and Ikuko noticed that their daughter wasn't with the other girls.

"Oh yes, where is she? Wait, she's not..."

"No, Usagi is fine. But she..." Mamoru closed his eyes and braced himself. It was best that they knew the truth. "She had Avatar business to attend to. We all wanted to go with her, but she was adamant about doing it alone. I am afraid I cannot explain it any better than that."

"So what exactly happened to her?" Kenji demanded. Mamoru held himself steady. He was prepared for a backlash.

"She took a raft out to sea. We don't know where she went or when she'll be back."

"And you let her go out there all alone?"

"It was the will of the Avatar," Mamoru stated unflinchingly.

"But she's only sixteen! Aren't you all her friends? How could you let her do such a thing?!"

"Mr. Tsukino, I do not believe there is a force in this world that could have stopped her. We let her go because we trusted her and in her duties. Can you tell me that you would have acted differently?"

"Yes!" he shouted, before considering what Mamoru had said. "I mean...I don't know. This is all so new and confusing. I'm still getting over the shock of our daughter actually being the Avatar! She never showed any signs; how were we supposed to know?" Ikuko gently took her husband's arm and calmed him down; meanwhile, General Nephrite appeared in the courtyard. He gave Usagi's family a respectful birth and bowed to the king.

"Welcome back, your highness. I trust your encounter with Zoicite's Loyalists was successful?"

"Yes," he said thickly. "I don't expect them to resurface for some time, or be much of a threat if they do. Tell me, are the monks from the Northern Air Temple still here?"

"They are, sire, and they've been a great help to us. I must admit, I had my doubts, but they've been eager to regain our trust."

"That's good. I'd like to enlist the aid of a few of them, along with their bisons, if I may. I'd also like to take the large Tear of Apsu from my vault."

"That can be easily arranged. Shall I make accommodations for your companions?" Mamoru looked back; the girls were keeping a cold distance from each other.

"I don't know what their plans are, but set some rooms aside anyway. See to it that they are fed, rested, and supplied, at least for today. If they or the Avatar's family make any request of you, I'd like to see it fulfilled."

"Of course," he bowed again. "Any friend of yours or the Avatar's is always a welcome guest." Nephrite called for attendants to see to the girls' well-being, but Mamoru couldn't leave the Tsukinos alone just yet. He approached them respectfully.

"I cannot make any guarantees. These are times when uncertainty hangs over us all. In place of something more solid, we must have faith in those around us. I believe wholeheartedly your daughter will return to you alive, well, and stronger for her experiences."

"She had better," Kenji sighed, feeling defeated. He gave Mamoru a stern expression and added, "Because if she's not, then you'll answer to me."

"You will have to wait for my own conscience to berate me first. By your leave." Mamoru bowed and was escorted back to his audience chamber, where a long list of duties had piled up during his absence.

…...

The girls ate a small lunch and refreshed themselves before deciding what they should do; eventually it could not be put off any more. They were given a room all to themselves, and sat down pensively to discuss their future.

"Look," Minako began, "you all know how I feel about this...but Rei is right. We need to do what's best for Usagi right now, and if that means splitting up...then I'll do it."

"Maybe we can pair off or something," Makoto said. "I wouldn't mind going to Wan Shi Tong's or Hikawa Temple."

"You don't think you could find anything in Omashu?" Makoto shrugged.

"I could just ask Motoki or Unazuki to look into it. Also, didn't Usagi have friends there?"

"Yeah, Umino and Naru." Minako finally cracked a smile. "I actually took Umino out on a steamy date when I first arrived."

"Too much information," Rei muttered. The others chuckled.

"So where would you like to go?" Minako asked. As Makoto thought about it, Ami blushed.

"Um...well, since I'm probably going to Wan Shi Tong's in Mamoru's place, I'd, ah, really like it if I had some company. I mean, if Rei and Minako don't object."

"I'm fine with it," Rei said. "I can always enlist my grandfather to help me. He needs to get off his lazy old butt once in awhile, anyway."

"I was kinda hoping we'd have some best buddy time just for ourselves," Minako pointed, to Ami's dread. The blonde crossed her arms and added, "But I am worried about Ami's safety. I'll have Artemis, so I'll be okay, but... Um, no offense, Ami; I know you can take care of yourself!"

"None taken," she muttered, hiding a relieved smile. Makoto stretched her neck and arms.

"I'll think about it. It would be better if we rested for today and left early tomorrow morning. That should give us plenty of time to prepare." They all agreed and split up to pursue their own interests for the rest of the day. Ami, wishing desperately that Makoto would go with her, found herself wandering idly into one of the royal gardens, where a fountain stood burbling in the center. She dipped her toes into the water and let her mind drift off.

She liked Makoto a lot—in fact, she was almost certain she was in love with the other woman—and from the way Makoto acted, her feelings might not be entirely one-sided. Oh, perhaps she just saw Ami as a good friend, someone she could be at ease around and feel comfortable with. Perhaps she had a boyfriend, or at least a singular interest in boys, or else would not be interested in a relationship anyway. But she made Ami feel happy, and warm, like she could truly be herself. Makoto trusted Ami; she made her laugh; she was interested and excited by whatever Ami had to say. Ami wasn't sure whether this was really love or infatuation, and she was too young and inexperienced to know any better. She had never been able to talk about this sort of thing with her mother, and (up until now) had never been close enough to her peers to breach the subject, either. She wondered if...

"Yo, Mizuno!" She broke out of her trance to find Minako waving at her from across the garden. Ami meekly waved back. "You okay? You looked a little crestfallen earlier—I mean, not that I'm one to talk. Is all this getting you down?" She joined Ami at the fountain and sunk her feet into the water. Ami smiled and called out a sliver, suspending it in the air.

"A little. I've actually had other things on my mind lately."

"Oh. Are you homesick?" Ami shook her head.

"I'm much too excited to see what the world has to offer. I haven't even thought about home since I left it. It's...something personal." She let the water fall and looked away shyly. Minako peered at her carefully.

"You don't have to talk about it if you're uncomfortable...but I'm willing to listen. I know we haven't known each other very long, but I'd like to think that we're friends, and we can talk about these things."

"Thanks," Ami said, smiling brightly. "I'm glad to hear that. I was actually wondering if I really could talk to someone about this. You see, I...um, well, how do I put it? M...Minako, how would you feel if...someone you knew was in love?"

"I'd feel wonderful, of course. Even if they weren't in love with me," she added with a wink. Ami giggled.

"And...well, how would you feel...if that person were in love with...oh, someone of the same sex? I mean, what if you knew a boy who was in love with another boy?" Minako's face lit up and her eyes widened. Her grin expanded until it nearly reached her ears.

"Oh. I would be very intrigued!"

"So you'd be fine with it?" Her grin turned salacious.

"Yes. Yes I would."

"I see. And what if you knew a girl who...was in love with another girl?" Now Ami was blushing very brightly, to the point where Minako could star putting the pieces together. But she gave her friend the benefit of the doubt for now.

"Then I'd be happy for her, too, especially if the other girl felt the same way."

"You'd be all right with that?"

"Of course. Love is love, after all, and we can't help who we fall for. As long as it's consensual, love should be encouraged no matter what form it takes. There shouldn't be any stigma where gender's concerned, at least."

"I...suppose you're right," she whispered nervously. Gathering up her courage, fumbling with her fingers, Ami squeezed her eyes shut and took a deep breath: "I...I'm asking because...I think...I mean, I...there's a girl I like and I'm not sure how I should feel about it." Minako smiled very sweetly at the blue-haired girl and scooted closer to her. She put a supportive hand on her shoulder.

"I'm glad you could confide in me like that. I know it can't be easy. Some people...can have very restrictive opinions about that. But I think it's sweet. And I can empathize. After all," and here she paused to brace herself for her greatest leap of faith yet, "I've had quite a few crushes on girls myself."

Ami's face turned bright red, and she stiffened with a jerk.

"Y...you have?!" Minako nodded.

"In fact, I have strong feelings right now, for a girl you know."

Oh, no, Ami groaned internally, I knew it! She's in love with Makoto! Now what do I do?

"Wh-w-who is it?" she muttered despondently. Minako giggled.

"You have your secrets and I have mine. But no matter who you have your eyes on, I know she's a lucky girl." Ami found a little comfort with this and attempted to smile. She decided to change the subject and asked Minako about her life in the Western Air Temple, but was warned she'd get a mouthful. Ami was perfectly fine with that; she needed time to recover from her "ordeal". Minako's minutiae about daily life as an Air Nomad lasted into the late afternoon, and continued to an extent into supper. The girls got together after they ate to finalize their plans: Rei would return to Hikawa Temple, Minako would journey to the Air Temples, and Ami would go to Wan Shi Tong's library with Mamoru's large jewel in hand. Makoto had decided on going with Ami, partly out of curiosity and partly to act as her bodyguard. This pleased Ami and she nearly hugged the taller girl on the spot. She, Makoto, and Rei chatted among themselves for several hours after, while Minako hung back and watched them wistfully.

Yeah, she thought to herself, Ami is definitely in love with Rei. I can totally see it happening, too! Fire and water do make steam, after all, and I think they'd be a good match.

…...

Morning came all too soon for Minako; she was up before the sun like always, but spent her time grooming Artemis, away from the others. Two monks of the Northern Air Temple and their bisons approached her, their hands extended in greetings. Minako returned the gesture silently. Rei appeared shortly after, alongside Usagi's family (Shingo yawning heavily). The three of them (and Luna) approached Minako and greeted her.

"You're one of Usagi's new friends, aren't you?" Ikuko said. "I'm sorry, we've all been so busy these past few weeks that we haven't had time to get to know each other. It's so rare for Usagi to make friends that I've tried to make it a point to meet every one of them."

"It's fine, ma'am," Minako replied. She winked at Shingo. "I know at least one of you pretty well. Your son's an excellent dancer."

"Thank you," he muttered, blushing as he looked down. Ikuko laughed.

"We just wanted to meet you. We'll be going to the Fire Nation with Priestess Hino next. We've heard a lot of good things coming from there, and my husband wants to get in on the news."

"Prince Ittou and Princess Kotono are going to be huge in the next few weeks," he said enthusiastically, "just you wait!"

"We'd hate to see you go out there by yourself," Ikuko said regretfully. "We'll be with Rei, and Ami and Makoto will have each other, but..." Minako offered a watery laugh and ruffled Artemis's fur.

"Don't worry about me, I've got Aretemis by my side! Besides, I'll just be checking out the other Air Temples. I figure since I don't know too much about the Southern and Eastern ones, I might find something useful there."

"All the same, you should be careful," Ikuko said softly. "We wouldn't want anything bad to happen to any of Usagi's friends." Minako smiled sweetly at the sentiment. She had been too young to remember much of her own mother, but she wanted to believe she would have been something like this.

"Thank you, ma'am. I promise by the Thunderbird and the Four Winds that I'll take care of myself."

"You'd better," she heard Rei say. The priestess stiffened as she walked up to Minako. There was so much that needed to be said between them that neither one knew where to start. Rei decided to let her actions speak for her and enveloped Minako in an embrace. Minako shuddered a little and tried not to cry. When they parted, they offered the other a tender smile, which was ruined when Makoto abruptly slapped Minako's back.

"Don't worry, you two, we'll be fine! Just remember why we're doing this and who we're doing this for."

"Ow, good morning to you, too," Minako winced. "What happened, did you get lost or something?"

"Nah, Ami was just busy putting her makeup on. She wanted to look her best this morning."

"I was not!" Ami blurted as she rushed in to defend herself. She was carrying a melon-sized gem that glowed with an eerie blue light. "I was just taking this jewel from Mamoru's possession!"

"Oh, really? That's a lovely shade of lipstick you're sporting!" Ami turned bright red all over and wailed out of embarrassment—but was also a little glad that Makoto had noticed. The girls all had a good laugh, which was just what they needed to lighten the mood.

"So how long do you think this will take?" Minako said.

"We should all meet back up in a week or so," Ami suggested. "That should give us...and Usagi...enough time to do whatever we need to do. All right?" The girls nodded, and Minako drew both Makoto and Ami into a hug.

"I am going to miss you all the same. Take care of each other, all right?" She offered a wink; then, Rei hopped onto an air-bison with Usagi's family, while Makoto and Ami mounted another. The girls waved farewell to each other as they lifted off and flew to the far corners of the world. Minako forced herself not to look back, but she couldn't stop from crying.

"Darn it," she whispered, wiping her face. Artemis grumbled sympathetically. "I know, buddy, I know. It doesn't mean that I like it, though. Well, time to get this show on the road. Where do you feel like going first: south or east?" He let out an enthusiastic bellow and veered towards the great peninsula of Ba Sing Se. "East it is, then! Full speed ahead, batten down the hatches, don't forget your towels, and all that other stuff!"

Artemis merely rolled his eyes. His master could be such a dork sometimes...

…...

The earth exploded as Marduk slammed into it, creating a huge crater and knocking seven of the miners off their feet. Nabu froze them in place while Nergal set the ground on fire, scattering three more. Ishtar barreled into two with her arms and vacuumed two more who were attempting to run away. She slammed them hard when they came within range, and Nabu had four more to add to her collection. As soon as they were all rounded up, Suen lifted a large stone for everyone to hop on, and rocketed out of the mine. She shut the entrance with a grand gesture, then dusted her hands off.

"There," she announced, "that's the end of that! And nobody got killed—you happy?"

"Yes, thank you," Ishtar beamed. She stood over the defeated miners still trapped in Nabu's ice crystals, taunting them with her gaiety. "Now that we know what to look out for and how to overpower it, we've been cleaning up these mines left and right!"

"Yeah, I'm just surprised we ran into so many," Nergal sighed. "That makes the third one on this island, and we still have two more to go!"

"What's worse is we're no closer to finding out what happened to Kalkin," Marduk added. She leaned against a tree and stretched. "Think we should call it a night? I'm bushed."

"I'm still hale and hearty!" Ishtar said, flexing her arm proudly. "I feel like I could take out a whole nest of thugs on my own!"

"The feeling is mutual," Nabu remarked flatly. She looked at their leader and asked, "What do you say, Suen? Shall we rest or continue?" Suen didn't answer; she looked like she was focused on something completely different. She was fully alert and listening intently; the others approached her cautiously.

"Sue?" Nergal peered at her face. "Are you there, Sue? Hey, you're spacing out on us again!" Suen blinked abruptly, catching Nergal off guard. She drew a deep breath as a fire ignited in her eyes.

"I can sense her again."

"Hmm? Sense who?" Suen stared at Nergal wildly.

"The false Avatar. I don't know how it happened, but she just...appeared."

"Strange," Nabu remarked. "Where is she?"

"Sailing somewhere far northwest of us. She's..."

She's heading for Hei Bai's Forest.

"She's heading for Hei Bai's Forest!"

"Stranger still," Nabu said. "Why would she be going there?"

"Who cares, this is our chance! Wait—let me see if I can sense her friends."

"You can do that?" Marduk whispered in awe. Suen nodded.

"Being the real Avatar has its benefits. Now let me concentrate..."

Her friends are not with her. She's helpless.

"They're not with her."

They've scattered to the four corners of the world. Now's your chance. Kill her!

"They're all over the place! Two are heading to Wan Shi Tong's library, one's near the Eastern Air Temple, another's going to a temple in the Fire Nation..."

"That's impressive," Ishtar gasped. "Should we split up, too?"

"No, we'll join forces and attack her all at once. She'd never stand a chance."

"Can you sense any civilians with her?" Nabu asked. Suen frowned.

"No, I can only tell where someone with bending power is, and only if I focus. But that forest is sparsely populated, so as long as we're careful, we should be able to draw her out and finish her off."

"Wait," Ishtar groaned, feeling ill at ease. "I don't like this. Why do we have to kill her? Can't we just...tell her to stop, or...oh, I know! We can join forces! Even if she is fake, she still has powers! We could do more for this world with that on our side, right?"

"Maybe," Suen replied distantly, "but think about it: what sort of creature could give her those powers? How do we know it's a good spirit? What if it's some malevolent force we don't understand, and it's just using her for its own nefarious purposes? Wouldn't you want to stop that?"

"Of course I would, but...I wouldn't want to kill her!" Suen's face grew dark.

"It's because of the Avatar that my parents died, and I lost my little brother."

"We've all lost someone we loved," Marduk reasoned, "and the Avatar stood by and did nothing to help. Suen was given this power to correct that mistake and set the world back on the right path. That's something I can fight for."

"The same with me," Nergal added. "My parents were killed at Lord Kuni's tournament, and I was put in a prison. I may not always agree with Suen, but it's thanks to her that I'm free today. If she thinks this is the right course of action, then I'll follow her."

"Ishtar," Nabu said, "if you feel this squeamish about it, then I would recommend you return home. Our mission leaves no room for indecisiveness." Her expression softened a little and she added, "But I would much prefer it if you stayed with the group." Ishtar gave Nabu a pained expression.

"And what would you do if I left?"

"I would go with you," she answered immediately. The others gasped in surprise, especially Ishtar. Nabu just shook her head. "Do not misunderstand. I have as much commitment to this as anyone else. I would simply not feel comfortable letting Ishtar go off on her own."

"But would you really give up everything else just for me?!" Nabu nodded solemnly. Ishtar dwelt on this for a moment before fortifying her resolve. "Then I'm going with you, Nabu. I'd be a real jerk if I asked you to do something that I wouldn't do myself."

"You should not make that kind of decision just for my sake," she warned her. Nevertheless, a smile forced its way to her stony face. "But I am glad all the same." Overcome with emotion, Ishtar thrust her arms around Nabu and hugged her tightly.

"So am I," Suen said. "And who knows? Maybe we can purge whatever evil spirit has taken over that girl's body."

"Definitely," Ishtar said, nodding as she wiped a tear from her eye. "That sounds like something the real Avatar would do." It was settled, then: the group would put their current mission on hold and pursue the false Avatar. They would do everything in their power to help remove whatever malicious entity had taken over Usagi's soul, but if they couldn't...

You would do whatever was necessary, wouldn't you, my Avatar?

If it came down to it...they would kill her.

The end of "Separation Anxiety"

Next time: "Spirit of Decay"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

8: Spirit of Decay

Even though her heart was still heavy from the separation, Rei couldn't help but smile as the bison touched down on familiar territory. She had seen the pink tinge of cherry blossoms that surrounded Hikawa Temple from the sky; the wind picked up their fragrance and wafted it up to her in greetings. As their guide tended to his mount, Rei stared up at the long stone staircase that led up to the temple, and the large Torii at the base (with a second one waiting for them at the summit). Even though she had walked up and down this hill many times, it still filled her with a sense of austere wonder, like she truly was being taken from the physical plane to the world of spirits. Shingo Tsukino was a little less enthusiastic about it.

"Aww, man, do we really have to climb all those stairs? Couldn't we have landed at the top?"

"Quiet, young man," their guide snapped. "You disrespect this sacred place. Either ascend the slope on your own or do not go at all."

"That sounds fine by me!" he snorted, resting his hands on his head. "I'll just wait down here while you guys go up."

"Shingo, it won't be so bad," his mother said patiently. "We'll take our time and enjoy the scenery. You're not in a rush, are you dear?"

"No, but..." Kenji cut himself off as a terrifying shriek pierced the tranquility. Rei and the monk immediately went on the defensive, their eyes darting around. There was very little wind that day but a nearby grove shivered, perhaps in fear. Rei's focus was drawn to a particular tree...

Suddenly a monstrosity burst out of hiding, attacking the closest thing to it. Rei had been prepared and jumped back, raising a plume of fire to defend herself. The creature flew right into it but leaped away before it could suffer much injury. Rei got a split second to study the thing—small, with gnarled green skin, skinny arms longer than its legs, and what looked like a featureless paper mask over its face—the creature lashed out again, aimless and wild. Her palm shot out a concentrated bolt, knocking the monster back until it crashed into the trees. She ordered the monk to watch over Usagi's family while she went to check on the creature, beating the bushes with a heavy stick to scare it out of hiding.

She came face-to-face with the monster as it cowered in the overgrowth. It roared and lashed out with fingers like sickles, shredding her kimono but nothing else. Acting before she could think, she let out a bigger blaze, completely roasting the monster along with a small part of the forest.

"Oh, shoot!" she cursed. Rei focused her energy and drew the flames away from the foliage, but was interrupted as the Tsukinos screamed. Five more of the gnarled monsters were bounding down the stairs, with nothing but a lone air-bender between them and their prey. Rei guided the forest fire to this new threat, but the beasts were very fast and nimbly soared away. They ran circles around Usagi's family and the monk, who blew two away before being tackled to the ground. Rei ran to help him and pried the monsters off, but now she was overwhelmed. Two more of the creatures emerged from the forest; she shot down another before a nasty blow to the head stupefied her. Trying to shake it off, she fired back blindly, unbalanced and woozy. She could tell by their screeching that they were still active; Kenji wailed on one as it attacked his wife; Shingo kicked another in the stomach as hard as he could. Suddenly a ring of fire enveloped the group, scaring the creatures away. Arrows found their way to two of the creatures while a third was sliced apart. Those who escaped to the forest were frozen as hatchets hurled at them, and the last one hesitated for a frightening moment before a spear found its way to its abdomen.

"Nasty creatures," said the voice of an old, world-weary man. "What's the spirit world coming to these days?" He withdrew his weapon, and the monster was immolated on the spot. A strong hand helped Rei steady herself.

"Lan sakes, priestess, tha' was a close call! I sure am glad our aim was true! Oh no, how I do go on while you're hurt like y'ar." Rei shook her head; as her vision returned and her mind unscrambled, she recognized her saviors. It was the group Fire Lord Kuni had sent to accompany her cousins, Kotono and Ittou.

"Yeah, sorry about that, Rei," Kotono said as she approached the other girl. She was carrying a bow and a quiver of arrows; her brother was going around burning the corpses of their foes. "We would have gotten here sooner if we could, but these little pests gave us a rather exhausting chase. You're not hurt, I hope?"

"Not really," she groaned, nursing her head, "just stunned. Is everyone else okay?" The Tsukino family had a few scratches to their credit, but that was the worst of it. They thanked everyone nonetheless. One of the group, the swordswoman Kartta, bowed humbly.

"I'm glad we were able to save you. More and more of these creatures have been sighted every day. Your arrival here could not have been more serendipitous, priestess."

"So these creatures, whatever they are, have been appearing suddenly around this area?" Kartta nodded. Rei took a deep breath. "You'd better fill me in on what's happening. Is there a safe place where we can talk?"

"We've secured the area around the Temple with Kasei's help," Kotono said, "but anything beyond that is a battleground." Rei nodded and took a few cautious steps forward. Finding her faculties more or less intact, she led the procession up. Along the way, Kotono and Ittou explained that they had arrived two weeks earlier, after successfully routing some of Zoicite's former followers. Their original mission to Fire Fountain City had been curtailed one month in, when pirates were sighted around the eastern archipelago. They had been making their way around all the islands in an attempt to drive them off when news of "demons and monsters" called them back. Kenji couldn't help but laugh in spite of the gravity of the situation.

"Heh, you've been moving all over the place, the same as us."

"Yes, we haven't had much rest in the last month," Kotono replied. "Luckily, we've got a strong team dynamic going on. Father was right to put us all together." She looked back and smiled as her brother and his friend Lark told stories of their past exploits to Shingo (who was starstruck to be in the presence of the famous prince). Oboro, who was taking lead, bragged of how they had been fighting various creatures even before they made landfall (with Suo, their boatswain, confirming accounts). He went on to tell of how they had cut through huge swaths of monstrous creatures on their way to liberate Hikawa Temple, and concluded with what was likely an exaggerated fight outside the temple itself, alongside Rei's grandfather.

"I'll say this about the old guy," he remarked: "when he's backed into a corner, Kasei Hikawa can fire-bend with the best of them. Even Lord Kuni and Lady Iku could learn a thing or two from him."

"And here I thought my grandfather was spending his time sleeping and ogling girls," Rei muttered. Oboro chuckled.

"Yeah, he did plenty of that, too."

"By the way," Ittou said, "weren't you with the Avatar?"

"Oh yeah!" Lark exclaimed. "Where is she? We could really use her help now!" Rei stopped in her tracks, her face drooping morosely. She tried to find the words to explain everything, but they weren't coming to her.

"She's not...traveling with us right now."

"What happened?" Kotono said gently. "Did you get into a fight?"

"No...nothing like that. She...had to take care of something on her own."

"What does that mean?" Rei clenched her eyes shut.

"Look, I'll explain later, all right? Let's just get to the top of this hill first." She pressed on, leaving the others to stew over this disquieting development. Oboro sighed and shouldered his spear.

"Right, moving on."

…...

Rei's grandfather was having a relaxing cup of hot tea with Salamander when the others finally rejoined him. He gave them a wave and a loud welcome and invited them over. The Tsukinos introduced themselves to him first while Rei hung back. Salamander eyed her as she finished her cup.

"Wassup? You know, holding down the fort with this old guy isn't easy. He made so many passes at me that I finally had to draw a knife on him to get him to stop. At least he knows his tea, though, and he's a pretty good conversationalist when he wants to be." Rei smiled thinly.

"Yeah, sorry about that. If I had known you'd be meeting him, I would have warned you about his lecherous ways. I know he wouldn't treat Kotono that way, but what about you two?" She looked at Kartta and Ku Sheng, who both shrugged.

"He just offered me a job working at the shrine. I told him that I was flattered, but unable to deviate from my mission."

"He didn't try'n flirt with me, priestess." Rei frowned.

"Well, it's not too late, so be on your guard." She dropped the "frustrated granddaughter" act as the old man noticed her. They smiled and bowed politely to each other—then went after each other like starving dogs.

"Rei, what's this I hear about you neglecting your training? You couldn't even fight off a few minor spirits, much less protect anyone?"

"Oh yeah? Who's been sitting on his rear end all day flirting with girls?"

"Flirting?! I'll have you know it's thanks to me that this temple is still standing! I must have taken out fourteen or fifteen of these monsters by myself!"

"In your dreams, grandpa! And what's this about trying to hire one of Kotono's friends? I thought I told you to stop that!"

"Hey, I need the help, all right? In case you haven't noticed, things have been completely insane here for the past few months! Ever since you left to follow the Avatar, I've had to look elsewhere for... And speaking of the Avatar, where is she? Weren't you supposed to be with her?"

"I was, but..." Rei's anger abandoned her, and her features darkened again. "But...she left...to go do something on her own." The old man rubbed his chin doubtfully.

"Left to do something on her own, eh? Hmm, maybe she got tired of how strict you are."

"That's not it at all," she countered defensively. "She was... It's...hard to describe. She said she was summoned by something and that it was Avatar business."

"Summoned, eh?" The old man's ire cooled and his eyes widened. He rubbed his chin more and meditated on the matter. "Hmm, summoned away on Avatar business... And you really couldn't follow her?"

"No, grandpa, and believe me, I tried. But she insisted on going alone." The entire group silently let this news sink in; Rei's grandfather in particular found it intriguing. Rei added, "That's partially why I came here. I wanted to help her in some way while she was gone, and I thought there'd be something in our archives."

"Possibly, possibly," he muttered. "Hmm, but if she was summoned away...and these strange spirits are spilling out into our world..."

"Do you think there's a connection, sir?" Ittou said. Kasei crossed his arms, deep in thought.

"I can't say for certain without knowing the full nature of this summoning. In any case, we can worry about that once we clear out all these evil spirits. They've been cropping up like weeds."

"Is there a specific area they spawn from?" Rei asked. Her grandfather shook his head.

"I've been placing ofuda everywhere, but haven't had much luck. At least we know that we can kill them." Rei took this into account as she tried to think of a way to exorcise the area. The Hikawa family had always been closely attuned to the spiritual world, and Rei had inherited that connection much more acutely. If anybody could stop these creatures from invading the physical world, it would be her.

"I'd like to see if I can find the origin point," she said. "Grandpa, if you can give me some time to meditate, I might be able to find out where these things are coming from. If you and...I'm sorry, what was your name?" She looked to the monk who had flown them there, who bowed.

"Yuichiro."

"If you and Yuichiro could protect the Avatar's family while everyone else stands guard, that would be a big help."

"Certainly," Yuichiro said, "but is that really something you can do?" Rei nodded.

"I've sensed a strange evil ever since I arrived here. I was distracted by my thoughts and was caught off guard, but if I focus, then I can do it."

"What do you need me to do?" her grandfather said.

"Draw a hot bath and prepare the sacred firewood. I'm going to find some fresh clothes. Keep spreading those scrolls in the meantime." Everyone went straight to work, leaving Rei to herself. Even without meditating, she could feel the evil energy surging...but from where? The concentration was too dense; it was like a thick cloud, permeating everywhere.

"I'll find you," she swore as she headed to her private bath.

After purifying herself and changing her clothes, Rei ignited the pile of logs and sat cross-legged before the fire, eyes wide and fully concentrated. She clasped her hands together and began chanting, calling out all the names of the Fire and all the spirits associated with it.

"Rin, Pyou, Tou, Sha, Kai, Jin, Retsu, Zai, Zen... Rin, Pyou, Tou, Sha, Kai, Jin, Retsu, Zai, Zen...! Rin, Pyou, Tou, Sha..."

A lifetime of training and practice gave her the discipline and fortitude to keep this up for hours—even an entire day, if necessary. The evil saturating Hikawa Temple was strong, and it left its mark everywhere, but after about an hour of concentration, Rei was able to pinpoint the source. There was an old swamp somewhere on the hill that had once been a flourishing wellspring, but now it was festering with a malignant energy. Rei was sure that under normal circumstances, she would have discovered this easily, but the fact that she had to put forth so much effort meant that whatever was making this disturbance did not want to be found.

Rei quickly made her report and the next stage in the plan was set. Yuichiro and Suo would stay behind and guard Usagi's family while everyone else, Rei's grandfather included, would hike over to the swamp and expunge the source of the evil spirits. The path to the swamp was infested with strange creatures, some even uglier and more twisted than the ones encountered earlier, but they proved to be no match for the group. Even Lark helped fight them off, calling lemurs, toad-monkeys, and exotic birds to swarm the enemy and drive them away. Rei had had misgivings about the boy's ability to defend himself until she recalled how Beryl and Kunzite had met their demise.

The rank stench of the swamp was a much greater obstacle. Normally it shared the same sweet fragrance as the rest of the temple, full of cherry blossoms and incense, but now the odor brought tears to the eye and bile to the throat. Salamander volunteered to go back and get Yuichiro to clean away the miasma, but Rei felt that the only way to really purify the area would be to destroy or seal away the source. They forced themselves to press on in spite of the offensive odor, but were stopped again as they encountered a pile of animal corpses. Lark turned aside and vomited as he saw the rotting creatures; Rei threw an indignant fireball into the pile, cleaning it out. More corpses littered the pathway, though, and the stench became unbearable. Just when the last of their willpower seemed to give out, they reached the swamp—by far the worst spot of them all.

There was no mistaking the evil emanating from the pool of gurgling green murk. Anything that settled on the water, even if it was a fallen leaf, instantly decayed. The surrounding plant life had long since festered away, and the land had turned sour. Breathing through her mouth, Rei ordered her grandfather and Ittou to surround the fetid water and unite their fires into a singular mass of purifying flame. Salamander looked confused as the three of them took their positions.

"Wait—aren't you going to join them?" She peered at Kotono, who was holding her nose. The other girl squinted but remained silent. "Don't you think they're going to need all the help they can get?"

"Three people will be enough, Sal," Ittou said. Salamander gawked while Kotono remained still.

"Ah...are you sure? This is some seriously evil power we're dealing with here! And I've been to landfills that smelled better than this! Maybe if you could just back them up..."

"I can't," Kotono muttered bitterly. Salamander froze and leaned closer.

"Eh? Whaddya mean, you can't?" Kotono stiffened.

"I can't bend fire." Salamander's mouth hung open in spite of the foul air. She gasped and regretted it as she coughed violently.

"Hold on a minute, did you say that you..."

"Yes," Kotono announced for all to hear, her face livid with anger. "I can't fire-bend at all." She then turned that anger onto Salamander and demanded, "Why, do you have a problem with that?" The visage of the princess was terrifying to behold, so much so that Salamander stood straight and saluted.

"Uh, no your highness, I don't!"

"Does anyone else have a problem?" The others looked at each other, then at the princess. She was far too awe-inspiring to feel anything but respect and devotion towards.

"Of course not," Oboro replied. "It makes no difference to me at all. I'm sorry if I ever said or did anything that offended you in the past."

"And there's nothing in the world that could make me admire you any less," Kartta said. She smiled and added, "In fact, I think I admire you more now. That must have taken a lot of courage to say." Kotono dismissed her sentiment airily.

"Yes, well, let's not dwell on it overlong. I have a feeling something nasty's going to come out of that pool." This sounded like good wisdom, so everyone braced themselves for the worst. Ittou, Rei, and her grandfather gathered their energy and directed it all on the pool, casting an enormous pillar of fire down to immolate the disease. A piercing shriek of otherworldly agony erupted, and from the flames crawled an enormous monstrosity. It vaguely resembled a lizard, but had six limbs and a sting at the end of its tail. Its head was an elongated bleached skull, and its teeth were unnaturally cruel and jagged. It was a Spirit of Decay, very powerful and very angry.

"There you are," Rei scowled. She brandished a sacred gohei in front of the creature, commanding it in a loud voice, "Spirit of Decay, this is not your place! Return to your realm at once! Return or you will be destroyed, for you do not belong here!" The monstrosity roared, flinging acidic spittle everywhere. Rei darted out of the way but got a little splashed on her arm; her grandfather immediately took over, waving his own gohei.

"Spirit of Decay, we beseech you to leave this world in peace! Go back where you came from and trouble us no longer! We are wielders of the sacred flame of Hikawa, of the royal bloodline of the Fire Lord! Leave this place or prepare to face our judgment!" The creature's tail lashed at him, cleaving his gohei apart and nearly cleaving his neck off. The monster barreled after Kasei, who could only scramble away a few steps before he fell to the ground, trembling.

"I guess negotiations are over," Kotono muttered. She, Lark, and Salamander took to their bows and fired, perforating the monster. The arrows disintegrated as they dug into its body but the wounds remained, oozing vitriolic fluid everywhere. Oboro dashed in front of Kasei before he could be killed and slashed at the creature's body, cutting it but eroding his spear in the process.

"Oh, now that's just unfair," he grumbled. He threw the useless shaft away and cupped his hands over his mouth: "Don't touch it with anything or it'll dissolve away! And whatever you do, don't let it touch your skin!" He ducked as the tail swiped by and plucked Kasei up, opting to retreat. Ittou drew its attention and its ire with a blanket of fire; the monster crashed through trees and gave chase, eroding everything it touched. Kotono, Lark, and Salamander relentlessly continued to pelt it with arrows until every shaft was spent; Ku Sheng took to hurling boulders, some cracking its enormous skull. Kartta swept in and saved Rei as a rotting tree fell near her; she was covering her wound with her hand, but it was beginning to fester and burn.

"That looks bad, priestess." Rei winced as she tried to ignore the pain.

"We can heal it back at the temple. I'm going to try and hit it with an ofuda barrage. Can you get it so that one side of its head is facing me?"

"I can certainly try." Kartta picked up a stick that was still whole and asked Rei to light it; she then waved her torch wildly, drawing the spirit's attention. Kartta threw the torch in its face and reflexively drew her sword while it roared in pain. She swung as one of its claws came at her and managed to cleave it apart, but her sword melted like hot butter in her hands.

"Wicked fiend! That one was a present from her majesty the queen!" She hurled the useless hilt at the beast and copied Ku Sheng's lead; meanwhile Rei's grandfather had recovered, and asked Oboro to put him down.

"We've got to keep trying! I've yet to encounter a spirit that can resist a prolonged exorcism!"

"I admire your confidence, sir, but I'm useless without a weapon. We're hurting it but we're also losing ammunition."

"Poppycock!" Kasei spat, clenching his fists. Flames burst forth and coiled up to his shoulders. "I have all the firepower I need right here. Just bring it my way and we'll see what this thing is really made of." Oboro stared at the old man in respect, and ran off to divert the monster's attention. By now only Ittou and Ku Sheng were still fighting it; everyone else was either struggling to survive or had backed away. Ittou wasn't letting the spirit rest: he set fire to the creature's feet whenever they touched the ground, and renewed attacks on its tail and head whenever he could. The monster was off balance thanks to Kartta's efforts, and was wearing itself out. Rei threw a handful of ofuda at its skull, chanting Akuryo Taisan, Youma Taisan—evil spirit be exorcised, monster begone! The ofuda were producing the desired effect: the creature was settling down, slowly retreating back into the swamp. Suddenly an enormous sphere of fire slammed into it, peeling off scales and flesh as it purified the spirit.

"Take that, harbinger of destruction! Haha! Evil spirit be exorcised, monster begone!" Rei spotted her grandfather dancing wildly, invoking the ancient ritual of exorcism. She quickly followed his example, and together they said in unison:

"Begone, spirit! Go back to your own realm or else face destruction! This is your final warning! Leave now or we shall cleanse you in the righteous flames of purity!"

The spirit of decay let out a defiant roar, but it was grievously injured and outnumbered. It slithered back into the swamp and sank deep inside, drawing all of the foul miasma with it. The swamp immediately dried up, and the surrounding land crumbled to dust, animal and vegetable alike. Rei collapsed from exhaustion, clutching her wound numbly. She watched as Kotono embraced her brother, then slowly approach her.

"Is it over?"

"Yeah, it's gone. We sent it back."

"Are you all right?" Rei forced herself to smile.

"I might need to take another bath or two. Don't worry about my arm, my grandfather can fix it right up. What about you? Anyone else hurt?"

"Just Kartta's pride." Kotono cast a sympathetic stare over at the older girl, who was standing off by herself, mourning the loss of her sword. The princess couldn't help but chuckle. "Silly fool, she knows I'll be happy to replace her sword. A gift from the princess should be just as good as a gift from the queen."

"It'd be better, I think," Ku Sheng noted. She smiled awkwardly. "Um, beggin' yer pardon, Koto. What I mean is...anything y'give her wun' be somfin' from a princess, but a friend—umm, if you take my meanin'." Kotono smiled warmly and nodded.

"Your wisdom was wasted in the fields, my friend. I have half a mind to promote you to a council position when I become queen." Ku Sheng's face lit up in astonishment as she backpedaled away.

"Oh no, Koto, I wun' want that! Thas' way too high n' mighty for me! I mean, beggin' your forgiveness, Koto, but that'd be bout' the only thing I'd refuse to do if ya ordered me!" Kotono laughed and promised never to give it a second thought. Eventually everyone convened together and stared at the devastation left behind by the spirit's departure. They had stopped its invasion of the physical world and had likely saved many lives, but the land would be a blighted sore for years to come.

"I suppose it can't be helped," Ittou sighed. "The way things were, I didn't think we'd be able to save much. I wonder if anything can ever grow here again."

"Oh, I wouldn't worry about that," Rei's grandfather assured him. "Hikawa temple is very closely tied to the spirit realm. With a bit of hard work and patience, we can cultivate it back to its original glory in no time. Speaking of which, your highness, might I interest your animal-trainer friend in a job? We sure could use an extra hand around here—or a feather, or a paw!" Ittou laughed.

"I can ask him, but I don't think Lark would like being away from us for very long. I certainly wouldn't like it." Kasei nodded his head humbly.

"I see. I can respect that, young sire. I'd never forgive myself if I was responsible for splitting apart a good friendship. Well, Hikawa's a popular place, and there are still a lot of people out there without jobs. I'm sure I'll rope a few helpers in eventually! Maybe even a few cute girls!" He and Ittou laughed, while Rei stood behind him, gnashing her teeth and clenching her fists.

"Grandpa, I think we need to have another discussion." She picked him up by the hem of his robe and dragged him away, despite his protests,

"What? N-no, wait! Hey, stop dragging me, Rei! Didn't I teach you to respect your elders? Uh—Ittou, Kotono, help! Sh-she's gone mad! Oboro, don't just stand there, do something! Th...this isn't funny!"

"Sorry, old friend," Oboro laughed. "I'm afraid you've had it coming for awhile."

"Indeed," Kartta added. "You should take your medicine and reflect on your behavior."

"So long, old man!" Salamander cackled. "Don't show him any mercy, Rei!"

"Oh, I won't," she called, as her grandfather let out one last yelp.

…...

Two days later, with her injury almost completely healed, Rei was poring over various scrolls and sutras kept inside the temple's archives. The day had long waned into night, and in spite of her zeal, she was growing tired. She decided to check out one more article before calling it a night, and picked something out of the pile she had laid out for herself. It was a record of previous Avatars—incomplete, unfortunately, but a promising start all the same. Information concerning Avatars from more than ten generations ago was scarce, and relied more on mythology and oral tradition than facts or research. There was nothing on Nami, the first female Avatar, except for a few stanzas in a long poem, and as for Veruna, the second fire-bender, she could only find records of a battle with an ancient spirit called Vasuki. There was a story of Vamana, the shortest Avatar, and how he had reclaimed the entire world from a demonic entity; there was Avatar Kurma, who had negotiated the Great Water Tribe Schism; Avatar Xuanzang, who had underwent an incredible journey around the world spreading his teachings; and of course, plenty of documents about Sung Chiang, arguably the most famous Avatar. Very fascinating material, but unfortunately, very useless.

She was about to give up when she came across a passage about Avatar Han, whom she had never heard of. There were the usual wild stories to sift through, a few poems, and maybe one or two battles that some historians could verify—but one passage stood out among the rest. Rei read it over and over again, slowly, so she could fully understand it:

"By degrees Han and his companions arrived at a peculiar cavern that seemed to burst with jewels. They stared in wonder at this marvel and said to Han, 'Lo, let us partake in this treasure, for the labor is easy and the profits are great'. But Han would have nothing to do with the cavern or the jewels, and dismissed their pleas, preferring to continuing his journey. Upon the morrow those who ventured into the caverns did not return, and though Han did search for them day into night, he found no sign of them until he returned to the cavern. There he discovered his bending rent from him, and a horror greater still. Han escaped with his life, but perhaps not with his mind or heart, and spoke not of this adventure save at his death-bed."

"A 'horror greater still'," Rei mused. "I wonder what that could mean. And...his bending was taken from him? Kotono told me there was something like that in the prison she was kept in. I wonder..." She took a deep breath and read on, but the account ended there. Without any further lead, Rei decided to go to bed and mull over what she had learned in the morning.

The end of "Spirit of Decay"

Next time: "Thunderbird and Bee-Wolf"

Author's notes:

As far as I know, Rei's grandfather has no canonical name, so I have decided to call him Kasei (which is the Japanese name for "Mars"). A torii is a large red gate situated before a Shinto shrine which acts as a symbolic barrier between the physical and spiritual worlds. Ofuda are talismans, usually made from paper, with sacred writing on them; Rei uses them to ward off creatures in the anime and manga. Gohei are the sticks with paper attached to them that shrine priests and priestesses wave in their rituals. Needless to say, this chapter was very heavily influenced by Shinto practices, which I do not feel are out of place in the Avatar world.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

9: Thunderbird and Bee-Wolf

Minako tried to forget about separating from her friends as she and Artemis flew towards the Eastern Air Temple. Deep down she knew it was for a good cause, and probably the best way they could've handled the situation, but it still didn't sit well with her, even after a full day of flying. She was distracted with worrying about them, and herself, often to the point of not paying attention to her surroundings. Artemis veered off course once or twice and she had to snap out of it and steer him back. She thought she was lost again when, around noon the next day, she noticed a fleet of ships puttering around the eastern border of the island, and soared down for a closer look. They responded with cannon fire, arrows, and flaming barrels launched from a small trebuchet; Minako was taken completely off guard and jerked Artemis away out of instinct.

A deep, throaty cry wrenched her stomach as Artemis moaned in pain. Blood seeped out and trickled over the ocean; Minako immediately noticed he had been hit by several arrows and tried desperately to move away from the fleet. The swiftest among them pursued her, their archers still firing, one shot making its mark. Minako stood up and blew a ferocious squall their way, completely capsizing a small boat and sending two more careening into each other. Artemis was sinking fast, groaning in pain; Minako tried to comfort him as she scanned the horizon for a landing spot, and found a wooded area just off the coast. She kept the projectiles away from her mount but didn't have time to brace herself as he smashed through the trees and skidded onto the ground, leaving behind a nasty trail of blood. Artemis moaned helplessly while Minako dismounted to examine the wounds. There was one harpoon lodged dangerously deep in his body, but the rest were insignificant arrows that barely broke skin. Minako studied the harpoon morosely, her heart breaking from the sight of it.

"It's gonna be okay, buddy," she said, her voice breaking as she caressed Artemis's fur. "Don't worry, we'll get you through this. It'll be okay, I promise." Having no way to fulfill that promise, Minako could only search around for resources—maybe some herbs and large leaves to dress the wound. She hardly took three steps away when Artemis groaned again—and shots from the ships rang louder. Scattered voices arose, followed by the sounds of brush being cut away. Whoever these fiends were, they were getting closer. Not wanting to leave her friend to whatever filthy machinations these people had in store, Minako had no choice but to stand her ground and fight them off.

"Don't worry, buddy," she stated, shielding his body with her own. "I won't let them hurt you. I'll fight off every last one if I have to." Minako expected some burly barbarian corsair to come bursting through the foliage at any moment, but froze as she saw a hailstorm of flaming flotsam falling at her. She summoned a strong wind and turned the projectiles away, but more rained down on her. The forest collapsed just as she dismissed the third wave, a force of at least fifteen bloodthirsty brigands all armed to the teeth bearing down on her. Minako gawked in surprise and prepared to lay down her life for Artemis when a surging typhoon came blowing in from the sea, picking off nearly all of the pirates. The only one left had hunkered down; he and Minako stared at each other before she blasted him away. Once the space around her was cleared, the blessed sight of air-bisons greeted her, all of them bearing a number of monks. One of them, a girl her own age, jumped off and grumbled something under her breath, presumably a curse aimed at the corsairs. She then noticed Minako.

"It seems we were not too late in saving you. We noticed you were in trouble and came to help. But my goodness—your friend, he is hurt!" The girl rushed over to Artemis and combed through his fur, cooing softly. "I am sorry we could not prevent this from happening. We will do all that we can to help him."

"Thank you," Minako whispered. Even though there was so much more she wanted to say, when it came down to it, this was all she could manage. She swallowed and bowed deeply, hands clasped. "My name is Minako, from the Western Air Temple. This is Artemis. We owe you a great deal."

"Air Nomads carry no debt with one another," the girl replied. She bowed as well; Minako noticed that she, too, was a blonde, but had tied her tail back in a ponytail. "I am Linka. If Artemis thinks he can manage a short journey back home, we will see to his injuries. Then maybe you can tell us what brought you here." Minako thanked her again, and tried to smile for Artemis.

"Whaddya say, pal? Think you can do it?" He grunted slowly, and though he didn't dare move, obliged himself to be carried by the other air-bisons; Minako rode with Linka.

"This one is my brave Ivanushka," she said proudly, referring to her own air-bison. "He is a great braggart, though, and usually not polite to strangers."

"I think we can work on that," Minako said. Ivanushka snorted and gave a rude jerk as he lifted off. The ride over to the main temple took only a few minutes, and Artemis was immediately entrusted to the local veterinarians. Minako gave him one last snuggle before leaving him, and set off making new acquaintances. Linka explained that the ships she had seen were part of an alliance of several local pirate gangs joining forces alongside Zoicite's Loyalists. Minako was quick to recall her own experiences with the fanatical followers of the former General, and had assumed them defeated and scattered not long ago. Linka assured Minako that, while they may have been defeated, they were by no means scattered. Even now, they were going around recruiting more pirate factions for their cause, and had already caused trouble to several local ports.

"We have reason to believe they are amassing for a blockade. Part of their forces are stationed around the channel between here and the southern peninsula of Ba Sing Se, and more are gathering in the channel at Si Wong. If they can take control of those two points, they will have nearly the entire eastern section of both Earth Kingdoms under their control. Our Eastern Air Temple is the only thing standing in their way!"

"I know for a fact that King Motoki's navy has been increasing their security along their southern coasts," Minako argued.

"That may be," Linka said, "but we have received very little assistance out here. Word has reached us that a new leader had taken the throne in Ba Sing Se, but so far, they have not helped us, either."

"Well, he's been really busy lately," Minako whimpered. Linka looked at her oddly.

"It sounds as though you know him personally." Minako grinned bashfully.

"Uh, yeah, you could say that! I actually just came from there."

"Ah, good! Are we getting any more reinforcements?"

"You might," she winced, "but I kind of doubt it. Mamoru's—I mean, King Endymion's had his hands full for months trying to keep his kingdom together. My friends and I have been helping him, but it's been very slow going." Linka hummed to herself and crossed her arms. She seemed disappointed by Minako's response.

"Well, I suppose one extra pair of hands is better than none, and I am always glad to have another air-bender. As soon as you are rested, you will be given an assignment. Until then, if there is anything you require, please let one of my lieutenants know."

"Your lieutenants? Wait, are you in charge of all this?" Linka laughed politely.

"No, I am merely a second-in-command. My cousin Boris is in charge. I hope you do not mind taking orders from him whenever I am not around." Linka waved farewell, leaving Minako to ponder it all. She knew the monks of the other Air Temples were very different from one another, but she never expected them to be so...severe. Linka struck her as the kind of person that could've stood up to Beryl without even flinching, so she wondered what sort of person her cousin was.

…...

As it turned out, Boris laughed at her when she explained everything.

"My cousin Linka would take great pride if you called her 'severe'," he said. "That is, quite paradoxically, her greatest strength and most embarrassing weakness. She is direct to a fault, and has very little in the way of what doctors call 'bedside manner'. But she is honest—maybe too much—and unquestionably faithful. You can rely on her as you rely on the air you breathe."

"I figured as much. Just so you know, sir—"

"Sir? What is this sir?" he scoffed. "I am only five years older than Linka, and you look to be her age as well. I know you are only being polite, but please, you will call me Boris."

"Okay," she tittered, "Boris then. Just so you know, I came here looking for answers concerning the previous Avatar and the current one. I heard somewhere that Kalkin may have visited this temple at one point..."

"Yes, that is true, many years ago during my father's time. But as you have noticed, this is not the time for such pursuits. I do not mean to dissuade you from your search, but we are in a very grave pickle now, as you would say. Linka was very presumptuous in thinking you came here to help us, and I will see to it that she apologizes for this error." Boris leaned forward and became more serious. "But if I am being honest, Minako, I would very much appreciate any help you could give us. I will not ask you to do anything you are uncomfortable with, and if you insist on declining, then we will not force the matter any fur—"

"Whoa, whoa, whoa! Stop right there!" she exclaimed, waving her hands at him. "What kind of person do you take me for?" He froze, puzzled.

"Excuse me?"

"I'm an air-bender," she emphasized. "Helping people is what we're about, right? We don't need to be paid, asked, or thanked, we just do. Of course I'll help you out."

"You will?!" Boris laughed at his enthusiasm and relaxed. "I'm sorry, I became overenthusiastic. But you have my deepest gratitude, Minako." He held his palm out, index finger pointing up, and she returned the gesture.

"Besides, despite what you say, I feel like I owe you for saving Artemis. And honestly, I...I need something to take my mind off another matter. I want to be put to work, as soon as possible."

"Good!" he gushed, then laughed again. "I need a brave volunteer to help patrol the western border between here and the Hinterlands. Lately there has been much suspicious activity in that area. You will not mind working with Linka, I hope?"

"Not at all. Intense people can be pretty fun to work with." Boris laughed louder.

"I will let her know you said that! She will be most upset with me, but it will be worth it to see the look on her face!"

Minako was given one hour to rest and eat before she was briefed on her mission. The "suspicious activity" Boris had mentioned concerned a sharp increase in mining and trade around the Hinterlands. Normally the nomads wouldn't have bothered with something so trivial, but with the commerce came pirates—and they almost never attacked the merchant ships. Boris suspected there might be contraband smuggling involved, so he was sending Linka, Minako, and four more volunteers to investigate. They were ordered to not attack the pirates or even interfere with their activities unless driven by necessity, and even then, to retreat if possible. Linka wasn't too happy with that condition.

"So you do not want us to fight the pirates, and to run away if they attack us? What manner of cowardice is this?"

"It is prudence, dear Linka, not cowardice. You are going there to scout the area, not start a fight. That is why I am only sending six people." She snorted indignantly and crossed her arms.

"Pah! Six people can conquer."

"Do not be foolish, Linka. I do not like pulling rank with you, but I will if you will not listen to reason. Simply have a look around and report on what you see." Linka didn't like it, but orders were orders—and even the other monks who went with her agreed that this was about being smart, not aggressive. There would come a time where she could prove herself against the pirate forces, but right now, this mystery needed clearing. Minako was at least grateful she wouldn't have to get into a fight, especially since she wouldn't have Artemis with her. The bison would survive but he would take a long time to recover, and not being with him made her feel uneasy, even downright vulnerable.

"I know exactly what you mean," Linka said to her as they flew over the ocean. She scratched her mount's hide affectionately. "If something bad were to happen to my Ivanushka, I would not know what to do with myself. I would be like a leaf on the breeze. Hopefully soon your Artemis will join us in a grand assault against these wicked scum!"

"You're awfully violent for an air-bender," said Minako, laughing uncomfortably. Linka gave her an odd expression.

"I will have you know I am gentlest of all nomads in the east! I do not even swat at a fly. But one cannot be gentle with evil. How does saying go? 'Give them a hand and they will take a foot'. Do not tell me you have been so blessed that all your conflicts have been solved peacefully."

"I can't say that they have," she confessed. "It's a fine, perilous line to walk. Knowing when to extend a hand and when to curl it in a fist is a tricky art."

"That is true, and nobody will do it perfectly. But we have spoken about this long enough. We are close to where most of their business takes place. Look." Minako peered at what Linka was pointing at, seeing the easternmost island of the four unnamed Hinterlands in the southern Earth Kingdom. Not so long ago, Suen and her friends had busted up one of the mining operations that had thrived in that area, but since they had only cleaned out one of the four islands, trade and commerce was still thriving. Minako could see ships regularly entering and leaving all the various port towns of the island, and even saw a few corsair ships watching them from afar. The pirates kept a respectable distance while the merchants left and entered port, only moving rarely. One of the merchant ships even weighed anchor next to one of the corsairs, evidently to conduct business.

"Look," Minako pointed. "You think they're bribing them?"

"Bribing, or trading," Linka said. "Either way, I do not like it."

"If we only knew what they were trading," Minako mused. Linka smirked at her.

"That could be arranged. Boris did trust us with gathering information, did he not? Fortune favors the bold, so let us court her."

Girl after my own heart, Minako thought. Linka signaled for the other monks to remain aloft while she and Minako went in for a closer look. She made absolutely no attempt at subtlety, swooping in and jumping off Ivanushka right onto the deck of the nearest ship. Minako followed, impressed by the brash behavior, but something felt a little...off. She couldn't quite put her finger on it, and in any case, was too distracted by Linka's abrasive manner.

"You will pardon us for intruding," she all but commanded the awe-stricken crew. "I could not help but notice there were pirate vessels on the water today, and my friend and I were wondering if we could help. If you are in danger, we will keep everything confidential." The crew was still disturbed by the interruption and gave the two girls a wide berth. A man who was presumably the captain came on deck shortly, clearly in no mood to deal with trouble.

"Go on, be off with ye! We don't need no monks interferin' with our business!"

"We do not interfere. We saw pirates and feared the worst."

"The corsairs don't bother us and we don't bother them. Now mosey along if ya know what's good for ya!"

"Pirates that don't bother merchant vessels? That sounds suspicious in my book," Minako countered. Linka agreed.

"True. If you are their enemy, then we are friends. However, if you have made arrangements with them, and are in league with them..."

"It ain't none of your business either way, girl! Last warning!" The captain drew a blade, as did everyone onboard. Minako tensed, and looked to Linka for guidance. She was hoping that the other girl's thirst for battle would remain parched. Slowly, Linka raised her hands, showing she meant no harm.

"We are from the Eastern Air Temple, so we are your neighbors. If you are working with criminals, it is our business to protect ourselves and those around us. But if they are your enemies, then we should work together and rid these waters of—" Somebody fired an arrow at Linka from up high; she rolled aside and thrust her arms out to blow the sniper away...only to find her bending didn't work. Surprised and horrified, she tried again with the same effect. The crew laughed cruelly at her: every one of them wore a necklace with a cold shining stone inlaid.

Minako had never seen the Tears of Apsu, but had heard enough from Rei's cousins to recognize them.

"I think we should take their advice, Linka," she stated, her voice laced with fear. The crew drew closer, a wall of barbs poised to skewer.

"Ohoho, it's too late for that, little girl. You know our secret. Now, I wonder what a bender would do if their bending power was taken away from them." The captain gestured, and bolas lain with the jewels were thrown around the girls. Linka had her arms pinned while Minako's ankles were held fast. With a wall of swords around every corner, there was nowhere else to go but overboard. Linka managed to shove her way through the crowd while Minako vaulted over, kicking one or two of them in the face. They crashed into the ocean, Linka struggling to keep her head above water.

"Help! Koff-koff! Y-you must c...carry me, friend! I...koff-koff...cannot swim!" The cords binding Linka were too tight to remove, so Minako instructed Linka to wrap her legs around her waist. Minako could still kick and swim a little, but it did them little good as the crooked merchants were still firing arrows at them—and worse still, the pirates had spotted them and were closing in. There was nowhere left to retreat; even the wind had been stolen from them. As the rain of arrows drew closer, and a cannonball sank dangerously close to their location, a swift breeze kicked up, and the merchant ship was thrown off balance. Minako cheered as the monks Linka had instructed to stay behind were attacking the ship from a safe distance. They continued pelting it with blow after blow until it toppled over, tossing everything not nailed down into the sea, merchant and contraband alike.

There was still the matter of the pirates, though, and the cords binding their legs and arms. Luckily, air-bisons can float just as easily as they fly, and in no time, the monks and their mounts had fished the girls out of the water. They cut their binds but were tempted to keep them as proof of the dirty dealings going on. Minako strongly advised against doing that, and explained what the jewels did. In any case, the bisons were unable to fly away until the monks cast the jewels, with some regret, into the sea. The pirates fired a salvo at them, but they were too late: Linka, Minako, and their crew had already taken to the skies and were returning back to base full speed.

…...

Boris sat patiently while his cousin and Minako gave him all the details of their discovery. Minako was certain that he would be angry with Linka for her reckless behavior, but evidently he was used to it, and didn't give her too much of a hard time.

"I am just glad you are okay," he said, hugging her firmly.

"You can thank Minako for that. This girl saved my life, you know."

"Oh?" Minako saluted humbly.

"Like you said, we Air Nomads carry no debts with each other."

"True and well-spoken," Boris said. "In any case, your boldness provided us with vital information. Now we know what we are up against."

"I will try not to let it get to my head," Linka remarked slyly. He grinned back at her.

"You will want to rest now after an exhausting day, yes?"

"Who, me? Ha! I could keep going for days."

"I'm feeling a little too hopped-up on adrenaline myself," Minako admitted.

"All the same, you should take a moment to recuperate. In two hours, there will be a discussion in the main temple regarding our next move. I would like it very much if both of you were there."

"I would not miss it for the world!" Linka promised. Minako winked and saluted.

"Count me in too, sir—I mean, Boris!" With that settled, they were dismissed, with two whole hours to kill. The girls were far too restless to spend it relaxing, so Minako asked her hostess what sort of fun they could get into.

"You want fun? You have come to the right person! Tell me, do they have air football in your temple?"

"No, but they do have air-surfing." Linka smiled at Minako.

"You know, I have always been a fan of cultural exchange. I will teach you how to play air football if you will teach me how to air-surf."

"It's a deal!" she exclaimed, and they shook hands on it. "Incidentally," Minako added playfully, "is your cousin single?"

"Single? What do you mean?"

"You know what I mean," she sang, grinning lewdly. "Does he have a girlfriend or not?"

"No," Linka replied innocently, "not that I know of. Boris has been too busy as of late."

"I see," she answered softly, a little disappointed. They took a few quiet steps together. "So are you single?"

"Yes, but I do not see why you would want to know..." Linka looked at Minako, puzzled; the other girl shrugged impishly. Everything suddenly clicked for Linka and she blushed. "L-l-let us try your air-surfing, yes? It will take our minds off...things." Minako giggled as she followed Linka, letting her mind—and her eyes—wander where they may.

Maybe being apart from her friends for awhile wasn't so bad.

The end of "Thunderbird and Bee-Wolf"

Next time: "The Library of Wan Shi Tong"

Author's note:

The hybridization of bee-wolf is actually a reference to Beowulf; in Old English, the words translate to "bear", which is the national animal of Russia. And if you need to know why I'm associating Linka with the bear, well...isn't it obvious?

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

10: The Library of Wan Shi Tong

Ami wanted to spend the flight over to Wan Shi Tong's library chatting with Makoto and getting to know her better, but she was so transfixed by the enormous blue gemstone Mamoru had given her that even her greatest desires were forgotten. It was roughly the size of a melon, by far the largest gem she had ever seen, with such a perfect roundness to it that she doubted it had been shaped by human hands. A very slight protuberance curled around the sphere, like somebody had tried to carve an abstract representation of water—but the more Ami stared at it, the more it reminded her of an updraft, or perhaps a billowing column of fire. Yet another glance made her think of a stone monument, but then it looked like the crest of a tidal wave again—and all the while a faint white glow emanated from the gem's center. She was so intent on unraveling the mystery of this artifact that she didn't hear Makoto talking to her, or even take notice when they finally landed. She had to be shaken out of her trance; Makoto looked concerned when she finally came to.

"You okay? You looked like you were under a hypnotic spell." Ami let out a ragged breath and rubbed her face.

"It feels like I might have been. I...I'm sorry, I don't know what came over me. I just wanted to take a look at this thing, but then I couldn't stop looking at it."

"Can't say I blame you," Makoto replied; she, too, was gazing intently at the orb, and had to forcibly prevent herself from being drawn in. "Boy, it's...really something strange, isn't it?" Their monk guide put a cloth over it, and the spell was broken.

"Whatever this is, it has a powerful effect over people," he said. "Where did King Endymion say he found this?"

"In Taku," Ami said, "and it was a gift."

"A gift? From whom? I didn't even know that forsaken place was populated."

"Oh, it's got people, all right." Makoto shuddered as the memory of all those strange creatures resurfaced. The monk looked at her quizzically but didn't press the issue; the Great Library loomed before them in any case and the doors were, for the moment, open. The three cautiously went inside, but only got to see a glimpse of the interior before an enormous white figure, vaguely resembling an owl, descended before them. The creature had such a mastery of flight that not one pinion was plucked out of place, nor a single leaflet of paper scattered. Ami, Makoto, and their guide stood in awe as they beheld the master of knowledge, Wan Shi Tong.

"Greetings, travelers," he said, his voice melodic and wispy. "Welcome to my storehouse of knowledge, where I keep all that is fit to know and learn about."

"Greetings in return, great one," their guide said, and the three of them bowed. "We have come here to research matters which perplex us and our friends. We are hoping that by indulging in your magnificent stores, we may enlighten them and solve many mysteries." Wan Shi Tong's plumage ripped and he flapped his wings with a cooing laugh.

"Ho hoo, fine words, nomadic one! While I encourage people to visit me in the pursuit of knowledge, know that I have three inflexible rules: first, you must not remove any item you find here, though I will produce a copy if you so desire; second, you must give me an artifact of knowledge in exchange for this privilege; and third, and most important, under no circumstances will you use what you have learned here for violence or warfare. I have devoted myself to the betterment of society and the world, not its destruction."

"I hope you consider us worthy of your esteem," the monk said, bowing again. Ami shyly approached the great spirit, holding the large gemstone aloft.

"Ah...excuse me, O great one. M...my name is Ami Mizuno, a-and I come here on behalf of...of the, uh, the Northern W-Water Tribe, and King Endymion III. I, uh...I was asked to g-give you this..."

"Those from the Water Tribes are welcome. Ah, and what do we have here?" The spirit extended his long neck and examined the jewel closer. He paused, blinking quickly, and drew back suddenly with a gasp. "Oh! Oh, my goodness! My word, child, where did you find this?" Ami hesitated, petrified by the gargantuan creature before her, but Makoto put an arm on her shoulder, nodding. Ami swallowed and explained the whole story, or at least all that she knew of it. Wan Shi Tong listened very intently, moving only to scratch himself with his talons. When Ami finished, he drew in a deep breath and grunted softly.

"I see, I see. You have kept this treasure well, young one. Please, step into my domain. I require no further gift from any of you. This is an artifact worth a lifetime of visits, for you and those you know." He bade them enter; they thanked him, though the monk remained.

"O great Wan Shi Tong, though you have declined any further gifts from me, I nevertheless feel compelled to bestow you with a copy of our sutras. The scrolls I have here contain the latest teachings of the monks of the Northern Air Temple, such as they are." He handed the spirit a bundle of three scrolls, which was received gladly.

"Hmm, hmm, yes, new editions are always welcome here. You and your temple will be held in high esteem, monk. Please, avail yourself of my treasures." The monk thanked him again and began exploring the enormous library. One cannot easily describe the contents of Wan Shi Tong's legendary collection. Amassed over hundreds, perhaps thousands of years, it contained the knowledge and lore of nearly the entire human (and most of the spiritual) history. Even if someone wanted to research the most esoteric or obscure topics, there would still be at least an entire shelf (ten feet high and twenty wide) filled with books on the matter. Wan Shi Tong spent most of his time putting his collection into order, and knew where nearly everything was. The monk declined a tour, wishing to browse on his own, but Ami and Makoto had something more specific in mind.

"Sir," Makoto said when the great spirit approached them, "we were hoping to find information about previous Avatars. We're friends with the newest one, and...well, she has a unique problem."

"Considering you bear the treasure of the Fomorii with you, I would not doubt it."

"Is that what that is?" Ami asked. Wan Shi Tong had already placed the gemstone in a shrine of great reverence, and looked upon it longingly.

"Yes. It is...a reminder, of days long gone by. You could also call it a 'pact' or a 'symbol' between the Fomorii and their successors."

"I've never heard of the Fomorii before," Ami said. Wan Shi Tong's plumage rippled.

"No, I expect you would not. Their civilization ended long before the first Avatar drew breath, and any remains of their culture have eroded over time. That you encountered any member of their kind, much less a great number, is a miracle. I suspect there are designs at work far beyond the reckoning of mortals and spirits. Otherwise, your King would not have been trusted with this gem."

"Can you tell us more about them?" Makoto pressed, suddenly very intrigued. Wan Shi Tong chuckled slowly.

"But I thought you had come here to seek advice on the Avatars."

"We did, sir! We just..." She hesitated, looking to Ami. "There's a lot we don't know, sir. Our friend is the Avatar but she can't bend unless she's in the Avatar State, and there's this other girl out there who claims she's the real Avatar. She can bend and go into the Avatar State."

"I see," he said thoughtfully. "That would not be possible under normal circumstances. I sense that Vaatu is still imprisoned, so this could not be his doing. I may have some records that could help you, if I can remember where I put them."

"That would be enormously helpful, sir," Ami bowed. "We're also trying to figure out what happened to Avatar Kalkin. He disappeared over sixteen years ago and nobody's been able to find out how, where, or when he died. The only reason we even know he's passed on is because...well, our friend..."

"Yes," Wan Shi Tong said, "your friend would not be the Avatar if Raava's spirit had not left her previous incarnation. This at least is a fact. Unfortunately, though I have records of Kalkin's activities, I never met the man, nor could I offer any clue to his demise. All the same, they might be useful to you. I shall return shortly, and when I do, you will learn of the Fomorii." Wan Shi Tong flapped away, leaving the two girls alone. Ami stood pondering all that he had told them while Makoto paced around.

"This is getting intense," she remarked. She grinned and slammed her fist into her palm. "I'm kinda getting excited! It's scary and thrilling, too, like we're digging deeper than anyone else has before."

"I know what you mean. A part of me wants to stay here and immerse myself in everything around me, but even if I had a hundred lifetimes, I'd never be able to do it." Makoto laughed at her "bookworm" friend, remarking how very different they were. She was honestly more comfortable outdoors, engaged in some sport or act of daring, but conceded that she wouldn't mind burrowing into a few cookbooks. Ami actually found a few while they were waiting, and their fingers brushed together as she handed them over, causing her to blush. Makoto didn't notice and found a place where she could settle in. Wan Shi Tong returned with a large stack of scrolls and tomes, and laid them on a table before the girls.

"These pertain to Raava, Vaatu, and any Avatar surrounded by unusual circumstances." He nudged one stack of books aside, separating them from the other stack. "And these are all the documents concerning Avatar Kalkin. I have also taken the liberty of retrieving the Lineage of Avatars, one of the great treasures of this archive. It records the names, births, deeds, and deaths of every Avatar from Wan to Kalkin. I dare you to find anything else in the world so comprehensive!" Wan Shi Tong said this last part with blatant pride, even puffing his chest out, and Ami requested a copy be made.

Going over the names of every Avatar in history would be an undertaking on its own. Most of the names were unfamiliar, and none of them would be of any real help. Still, Wan Shi Tong was right: this was probably the only existing chronology of the Avatars in the whole world. Many of these names and deeds had been lost, muddled, embellished upon, or flat-out lied about over time. This information needed to be made public, if only to clarify and preserve history.

"Hey, look!" Makoto said, grinning from ear to ear as she pointed at a name. The words AVATAR MAKOTO appeared boldly next to a brief description of his life and deeds. Ami grinned.

"Well, how do you like that? But it says he was born a fire-bender."

"I never said he was perfect," the brunette winked. They laughed and studied the list a bit longer before settling on Kalkin's predecessor, the water-bender Bitasu. She was Riverfolk, a member of the rogue water-benders who had forsaken the poles in exchange for warmer climates. Among her accomplishments were "gator hater, skeeter beeter, boar wrassler, and swamp stomp", whatever that meant.

"Sounds like a colorful woman," Makoto noted.

"Are y'all readin' about Avatar Betty-Sue?" Startled, Ami and Makoto jerked around to see another girl standing behind them, one hand on her hip and smiling. She had creamy skin and short black hair, and wore shorts and a blue jacket over an orange shirt. Ami and Makoto looked at each other warily before answering.

"Uh, who?"

"Avatar Betty-Sue! Only the best Avatar to ever crawl outta the crick!"

"Wait, do you mean Avatar Bitasu?" The girl cringed and crossed her arms.

"Tha's what people outside the crick call her—you know, them highfalutin types who walk around like they know who they daddy is. But Betty-Sue's her proper name. Here, see?" The girl walked up to the table and pointed at something in the lineage. In parenthesis next to Avatar Bitasu's name was a much smaller text that read "aka Betty-Sue".

"So it is," Ami observed. "Do you know her?" The girl grinned proudly.

"I oughta, seein' as how we's kin n' all."

"So you're related to an Avatar?"

"I surely am! Maybe not by blood, but she's from the crick, and that means she's family."

"I see." Ami blinked in bemusement and looked at Makoto again. The girl became a little serious and backed off.

"Sorry, I ain't been very hospitable, have I? I done gone and broke your concentration without even a hello or how do ya do. I sincerely do apologize, and reckon I best innerduce m'self. The name's Gi! Well, my folks christened me Gang-Mul Moon, but most people just call me Gi." She spat in her palm and extended it, grinning; Ami and Makoto cringed and wondered what they should do. They gave their names, and Gi instructed them to spit in their palms and shake her hand—standard greetings in "the crick" (which turned out to be the Swamplands of the southern Earth Kingdom).

"That isn't quite how we do it in the Northern Tribe," Ami muttered. Not wanting to offend Gi, she did as instructed and wiped the spittle off discreetly. Gi brightened upon hearing of Ami's origin.

"Say, you's from the North? Well heck, that makes us cousins! What about you, beanpole?"

"Who, me?" Makoto winced. "Uh, I'm from Omashu."

"Well ain't that a hoot? We's neighbors! It's enough to make a lady believe in serendipitous happenstance, I reckon! So what'ch'all doin' here? Didja come all this way just to read about Avatar Betty-Sue?"

"No, we...uh...we're here to help a friend." Gi persisted in knowing everything, so Ami and Makoto explained their purpose. Gi sobered as she heard their story, and whistled reverently when they were through.

"Sounds like y'all gotta whole lotta whistle-bees in yer britches. And here I am buttin' into what ain't no business o' mine. I do sincerely apologize."

"It's all right," Makoto said kindly. "May we ask why you're here, Gi?" Gi scratched her nose roughly.

"I wanted to bring back more stories of Avatar Betty-Sue to my folks at the crick. The young'uns there can't get enough, and all the older folks is saying we need to unearth what history we can. Along the way I just happened to run into an old flame o' mine who was kind enough to take me across the Si Wong. He's meanderin' hereabouts I think, less he got tired and went to take a forty." At that moment Wan Shi Tong fluttered by, looking tired but excited. He bowed to Gi, who greeted him with a wave.

"Forgive the delay. Here is a copy of the Avatar Lineage. I would have brought it sooner but I got into a very spirited discussion with your monk friend." He presented Ami and Makoto with an almost perfect replica of the scroll they had been reading, and said it was theirs to keep. He then settled into a comfortable squat and drew a deep breath. Gi leaned forward attentively.

"Wh, what's goin' on?"

"I am about to tell them the history of the Fomoriian people, and my relationship to them. You are free to listen in, but I must insist you do not interrupt me."

"Hoo doggie, story time!" Gi grinned and made herself comfortable, choosing to sit on the floor instead of a chair. She hugged her knees to her chest and rocked back and forth with excitement. Despite Wan Shi Tong's request, he was interrupted multiple times during his lecture, but as it was usually for a good reason, he forgave the intrusions.

…...

First know that when I say the Fomoriian people are an ancient race, I do so with a spirit's perspective. Our concept of time, history, and creation itself is very different from that of you mortals. I can recall the torrid love affair between Oma and Shu as if it were yesterday, and the day that Avatar Nami came to me for guidance as though it happened recently. Yet I cannot underscore how unimaginably long ago these people lived. The Fomoriians were, put simply, the first civilization in our world, even older than the spirits, and by a great many centuries. Where they came from is one of the few mysteries that has eluded me, and it is partly the reason why I started my collection. I have my theories, of course, but in all my interactions with their kind, I have never gotten a satisfying answer. It may be they do not know themselves. In any case, they are the Secondborn (this is where Ami interrupted, asking who the Firstborn were. Wan Shi Tong explained that they were the various animals of the world, and moved on).

The best way to understand the Fomorii is to think of them as neither human, animal, nor spirit, but an amalgamation of all three. At times they can exhibit traits of a human, and even appear as one, while other times, they resemble an animal, and still at times they can be a spirit. A...spirit made manifest, if you can understand that. That is why many of the ones you saw straddled the line between human and animal, adopting traits of each. They mostly do it in remembrance of their past, but at times they can become "wholly Fomoriian". They were undisputed masters of the world and its crafts, and knew the art of bending as innately as you know how to breathe—although perhaps calling it "magic" would be closer to the truth, as blasphemous as that may sound. They did not bend the world in the way that you may know it, no... They had a much deeper and more intimate connection. It was as though they each had a little "soul" of the world inside them. You say your friend saw one of them bend water, fire, and air? Yes, that was their "magic" at work. It is not an art I believe prevails today.

In time the Fomoriians met with the Thirdborn, what you call Spirits and what they referred to as Sidhe. We coexisted for a time but conflict was inevitable. As one who was born with an insatiable lust for knowledge and study, I devoted myself to learning about the Fomoriians in an effort to make peace between our two races. I achieved, if I may boast a little, a fair degree of success, and I became known as a Friend of theirs. That they still hold me in such high regard, even after so many ages, is more flattering and humbling than I can express. We swore our friendship on one of their sacred treasures, the Tear of Luonnotar, which you have very kindly given to me. But as you may have surmised, though peace did eventually blossom between our two races, it was not enough to save the Fomorii. When the Fourthborn arrived—that would be you mortals—the Fomoriians knew their time had ended. Gradually they faded out of existence until only very small pockets of survivors remained.

No, young one, they would not have you mourn their passing, nor would they have you harbor ill will against your own species. Each race has its own time to dominate the world before they must make way for the next. The Fomorii had existed for eons when we Spirits met them, and perhaps another age or two passed before the mortals, whom the Fomorii called Milesius, supplanted them. We spirits resisted, conflicts broke out again, and mortals sought shelter atop the four Guardian Kings. The Fomoriians would not have us fight another war, and looked to me for guidance and support. Though it burdened my heart tremendously, I asked for clemency on behalf of the mortals, and when I became aware of Avatar Wan and his relationship with Raava, the pact was put into full motion. We were given our own world to live in and rule over, leaving the animals and the mortals to do what they wished with theirs. Our friends the Fomoriians could pass between the two at will, such was the skill of their craft, but in time we lost all connection to them. They did not die out fully, as you are aware, but I reckon their time is nigh. In five or six of your generations, the last trace of their kind will vanish from this world forever (here, Wan Shi Tong sighed despondently, and did not speak for a long time. Eventually Makoto remembered Rei telling her about Kotono's experience with the Tears of Apsu, and asked Wan Shi Tong if there was a connection. He looked terrified for a moment before gradually regaining his composure).

Apsu! Apsu... Now that is a name I have not heard in a very long time. I dare not speak of the evil that Apsu is capable of. Suffice to say that no record in my collection could properly describe a tithe of her malice and power. I have had the displeasure of encountering a Tear of Apsu myself, and from what I know, it fits into her perverse designs: to take something beautiful and useful, and create ugly, destructive forgeries. Apsu first spread them in the conflicts between the Fomoriians and spirits, sewing discord as she pitted both sides against each other. I am not surprised to hear there are a great number of them still in circulation, for they were a bane to spirits and Fomorii both, and are difficult to destroy. What are they? Well, put simply, they are Apsu's malice towards benders made solid. That is why they inhibit the connection one has with the world. Stronger spirits such as myself and Raava are able to dispel their effects, which is why the Avatar is able to do so, but as for you, and a Fomoriian? The further you are from one, the better.

As for Apsu herself, I must be brief in my description, for the very thought of her is repulsive. Yet even she was once good. To put it very crudely, she is a spirit—or rather, a Primordial, one of the High Spirits that oversaw the creation of the world in the Beginning. You mortals would probably refer to her as a 'goddess', which is close enough to the truth. Apsu was a Primordial of sweet water and salt water, and formed the oceans, rivers, and lakes in the Beginning. For a long time, she was content with what she had wrought, but when Fomoriians came into being, she became upset, and spirits aggravated her even further. At first she tolerated the other species, but the noise they made frustrated her to the point of madness. She vowed to kill every last sentient and sapient creature in the world, and nearly got away with it, were it not for the intervention of a Hero. Regrettably, none of my records have preserved the name of this Hero, and I have never discovered their identity. It is my theory that Raava and Vaatu joined forces to defeat her, as her existence threatened them both. In any case, Apsu was banished, but her treachery lingered.

As for whether or not she is dead...I cannot say. I may hope, of course, but something that evil and that powerful does not perish easily.

…...

"That is the extent of my knowledge on Apsu and the Fomoriians," said Wan Shi Tong, letting out a sigh as he concluded his long lecture. "It is regrettably very little, but perhaps enough to satiate your curiosity."

"That it is," Ami said. She and Makoto both thanked Wan Shi Tong while Gi sat spellbound. Despite being the most talkative person in the group, she was the only one who had not interrupted the speaker. She raised her hand politely.

"One question: got any more books on Avatar Betty-Sue?" Wan Shi Tong laughed softly.

"I admire your insatiable zeal, child. I will go see what else I can pull up. We will overburden you yet!"

"Challenge accepted!" she waved as he flew off. Gi brightened as she noticed a dark-skinned young man standing patiently off to the side. "Hey, Kwame! How long you been standin' there?"

"I think I came in when Master Tong was talking about Fomoriian magic."

"Quite a lot to take in, ain't it?"

"It is indeed," he replied solemnly. "I had never conceived our world could hold such secrets in its history—but then again," he added with a chuckle, "what else could one hope for in this place?" He bowed, hands clasped, to the other two ladies and introduced himself (as Gi put her arm over his shoulder). "Spirits be with you. I am Kwame Olowe, Gi's longtime friend and traveling companion. I hope she has not been too much of a bother."

"Nah," Makoto assured him. She grinned and winked, "Well, maybe a little." Gi soured, which only caused Kwame to laugh.

"She's very good at that."

"They was talkin' about Avatar Betty-Sue, Kwam," Gi remarked defensively. "You know I can't sit still when I hear about our homegrown hero. How would you feel if somebody started chattin' about, uh...about Avatar, uh... Which one was it again? The one who was a sand-bender from Si Wong."

"You mean Avatar Almasafir?"

"Yeah, her!" Kwame smiled bashfully and admitted his interest would be piqued. Ami and Makoto explained the purpose of their visit; Kwame was impressed and a little daunted.

"I'm afraid I don't know any more than you do, but I'd be willing to help. Considering how long Gi might be here, I may as well keep myself busy."

"That's awfully kind of you," Ami said. "Our work will go by a little faster with three people helping."

"Don't you mean four?" Makoto said. "We should ask that monk who came with us to pitch in."

"Oh, good idea." Kwame volunteered to find him, and to keep an eye out for any other helpful information. Gi grinned and waved at him as he left.

"Hurry on back, sugar! I'm gonna need them strong muscles o' yours to help carry all them copies I'm gonna make!" Kwame shook his head as he left; Gi laughed at the other girls. "Oh yeah, he wants me."

Ami and Makoto just smiled at each other incredulously.

The end of "The Library of Wan Shi Tong"

Next time: "The Avatar and the Mariner"

Author's notes:

There's a lot to unpack here. Part of the beauty of the world of Avatar is that a majority of its history is unknown. Important events, such as the foundation of Omashu or Avatar Wan's life, are well-documented, but there are enormous gaps of time where little or nothing is known. Enter the fan-fiction writer, free to fill in those spaces however they choose (so long as they respect and observe the main canon, which I hope I've done). Obviously none of the Avatars I mention are official (although Bitasu should be, if only because we deserve a redneck Avatar), but imagining What If is what attracts me to fan-fiction writing. Most of the Avatar world is inspired by Asian myth and culture, but the Fomoriians are a Celtic creation, while Apsu is Mesopotamian (she is also the main antagonist in the aforementioned Sailor Moon RPG).

Yes, I am adding a third crossover to this story, that of Captain Planet. For those of you too young (or perhaps fortunate enough) to know, the characters of Ma-Ti, Linka, Gi, and Kwame are four of the Planeteers, with one yet to come. I have changed some of their personalities (especially Gi's), mostly because I don't remember what they were in the first place, but I feel they still fit—except for Gi, who I fashioned solely for the fun of it. Her "real" name is simply "river-water" in Korean, and is a hundred percent made up.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

11: The Avatar and the Mariner

Usagi was going over some charts with the helmsman when Captain Mathena entered the room. She announced that they had finally arrived at the port near Hei Bai's forest, which meant that Usagi, Ma-Ti, and Mariner would be leaving their company. Usagi thanked her and was escorted to the gangplank, where Mariner was already waiting. He was singing, as he always seemed to do, and playing with Mochi. Ma-Ti was nowhere to be found.

"Good morning, young lady!" Mariner greeted, his voice clear and melodic. "We have arrived at last. It has been awhile since I've been on good solid land, so you'll have to excuse me while I get my legs back."

"Where's Ma-Ti?" She looked around for him but didn't see him. Mariner stroked his beard nonchalantly.

"Oh, hereabouts, I believe. The lad wanted to wrap up a few responsibilities he had, so he asked me to go on ahead—keep the gangplank warm, as it were. Ah!" Mariner raised his hand, greeting Ma-Ti as he finally emerged from the mess hall. The boy was laden with supplies.

"I'm sorry I'm late. The ship's cook didn't want us to starve, so he gave me a few victuals. It's...a little too much for me to carry on my own, though."

"It's your wages," Captain Mathena spoke. "You worked hard and earned your pay. As for the rest of you, your debt's been paid off. Go wherever you will and stay out of trouble—if that's possible."

"I cannot make any promises in that regard, my dear lady," Mariner said. Usagi and Ma-Ti crossed over onto dry land while he bade everyone farewell, tapping his walking-stick on the ship three times before leaving. He let out a hearty sigh as the vibrant colors of the port town awaited them. "Ah, my destination! Ma-Ti, if I'm not mistaken, there's a good hotel in this town. If I could trouble you to make reservations, and to make good use of those victuals you've been given, I'd like to take a look around and listen to what the locals are gossiping about."

"Certainly," he smiled. Usagi froze.

"Um, would it be too much trouble if I got a room, too?"

"Not in the least," Mariner replied. "In fact, unless you have other plans, we would enjoy your company over the next few days as we make our way inland." Usagi was relieved and promised to follow them, at least until she got her bearings and could reunite with her friends again. She went touring with Mariner while Ma-Ti and Mochi searched for a hotel; it was a lovely, bright day, cool and windy with the promise of a rainfall in the near future. Mariner wandered the port town with very little purpose or direction, often stopping simply to drink in the atmosphere. He watched as children played, or as the town patrol made their rounds; he listened idly as women chatted with one another, or bartered for merchandise; he stopped inside alehouses and casinos to catch a Pai Sho match or learn a new song... He didn't seem to be in any hurry whatsoever, and though he sang frequently, seldom spoke unless spoken to.

"So who's this person you're going to meet?" Usagi asked. Mariner smiled, wedging his way through the market crowd.

"An elegant lady of most refined taste. She and I have enjoyed an acquaintance longer than either of us will admit."

"She sounds like a queen. I've known a few members of royalty in my brief time. They're very...diverse."

"Hmm, yes, and difficult to befriend, I shouldn't wonder. They're awfully distant, you know, out of necessity. And so is she. But she is good, and warm in her own fashion. Just as I could not easily describe myself, so can I not easily describe her. You'll know her when you see her, though, and you won't ever forget her."

"What's her name?" Mariner paused for a moment and tapped his forehead, as if struggling to recall such a simple detail.

"I couldn't say. She's had so many over the years, and she's always changing it to her mood. If I told you one she'd very likely say I was mistaken, so I shall let her identify herself."

"Sounds like a weird friend," Usagi muttered, and when Mariner gave her a sharp look, she blanched and added, "Um, n-no offense."

"Do not say she is weird when you mean she is unique, for you have seen much in your short lifetime, Usagi, that some would call common and others find very singular, but none would see as weird. I forgive you and she will only laugh if she heard, but be mindful of What you say to Whom." Usagi stiffened and nodded, a little intimidated by Mariner's change of tone. He went back to being a jolly, blithe old man an instant later, remarking on the color of several rugs on display.

Mariner led her out of the town, saying he wanted to feel fresh air on his face and cool grass at his feet, and after a few minutes of silent walking, they found an isolated plot of farmland abandoned by all save a few birds. Mariner found a smooth stone to sit on and called one of the birds to him; it perched on his finger and whistled beautifully. Usagi watched him, smiling quietly to herself, content to simply stand and let the world move on without her for awhile. This moment of peace was exactly what she needed to recuperate from all of her troubles. It was only broken by Mariner's gentle sneeze, scaring the bird away.

"Oh dear, I think I may have dropped something," he muttered, patting his cloak in search. "Usagi, my dear, could I trouble you to help me look? It was one of those odd trinkets I picked up in town; I thought it would make a good present for my lady. Dear me, I should have gotten something bigger for her." Usagi knelt down and helped him sift through the tall grass; just as she did, though, an object came whizzing by, missing her head by an inch. She stumbled onto the ground and turned around to see five girls running towards her, one with plumes of fire in her hands and another with more stones. Her heart sank as she recognized them as Suen, Nabu, Nergal, Marduk, and Ishtar.

"Oh no," she whispered, "it's them again. They found me!"

"Eh?" Mariner said. "Them who? Your friends you mentioned?"

"No," she hissed, her fists clenching as she stood to her feet. "They're not my friends, they're... Look, just get out of here, okay? They're after me."

"After you? What for?"

"Just go, all right? I don't want you to get hurt!" Mariner smiled and slowly rose to his feet.

"I'm not sure what's going on, but I'd never leave a young lady to face trouble on her own. Perhaps I can help mediate things between you all." Usagi turned pale and flinched nervously. There was no time to explain and no chance to run: the five girls had caught up with them.

"Fooooound yooooou!" Ishtar bellowed, jabbing her finger at them. Marduk and Nergal stood by while Suen marched ahead of them.

"Finally, you came out of hiding, deceiver. Are you ready to renounce yourself and acknowledge me as the One True Avatar?"

"Look, I really don't want to fight any of you," Usagi said, her voice and body trembling. "There's no reason for us to be enemies. I don't know how or why both of us have the Avatar power, and I really don't care—"

"Both of us, she said!" Suen barked. She looked to her friends, grinning haughtily. "She thinks we're both the Avatar! But we all know that can't be possible. Raava is inside me; she chose me to be her incarnation. You're not even a good imitation—or did you finally learn how to bend outside of your false Avatar State?" To demonstrate, Suen thrust her hand out, and a column of fire slithered up her body and settled on her palm. She blew on it, and it blossomed to encompass her. A quick jab of the foot put the fire out and raised an archway of dirt; her arms twirled again, and streams of water coiled around the archway, dissolving it. Usagi stood impassively while Mariner laughed and clapped.

"Wonderful! Simply wonderful! A fine display of mastery over the elements, young lady! Bravo indeed!"

"Who's this?" Marduk wondered. "Your grandfather or something?"

"What, me? Ho-ho, no, my dear, simply a tired old mariner whom this young lady chanced to meet on her journey. And what brings you charming young ladies here on this fine morning?"

"None of your business, old man," Suen snapped.

"We just wanna have a talk with that girl there," Ishtar pointed. "Suen's the Avatar and she thinks that girl's cursed by Vaatu or something, so we came here to see if we could help exa...exi...what's the word you used, Nabu? Exoskeleton?"

"Exorcise," she answered flatly. Suen froze where she was, growling and seething. Marduk and Nergal just covered their faces in shame.

"Ishtar, I swear..."

"What? He's a nice old man! We should always be polite to our elders." Mariner laughed out loud and agreed with her while Suen grabbed her by the ear.

"But it's none of his business, Ishtar! Next time keep your mouth shut, all right?"

"Ow, okay, I'm sorry." She winced and rubbed her ear once it was freed; Nabu eyed Suen incredulously.

"Did you really expect her to keep a secret?"

"I don't know, I guess I'm an idiot for thinking she would. Anyway, old man, you'd better move along if you know what's good for you. We don't want to hurt you, but we will if you get in our way." Mariner regarded her threat coolly.

"Seeing as you are involving a friend of mine, young lady, I have chosen to make it my business. I can certainly help mediate any conflict you may have—old men tend to be on the experienced side, you know—but if it comes to blows, then I must intervene."

"Let's not hurt him, you guys," Ishtar fretted. "Suen, you promised to go about this peacefully!" Suen hesitated, her teeth gnashing and her fists shaking. She obviously wanted to fight but there was an ambivalent conflict inside her that kept her from doing it. Usagi walked closer.

"Look, I met a few of the lion-turtles and they said...well, it doesn't matter. I really don't care which of us is the Avatar, or even if both of us are. There's been so many strange things happening lately that I'll believe anything's possible at this point. We should put all of that aside and focus on keeping balance in the world. My friends and I have been working hard to fight all these enemy groups—"

"Like you worked hard to stop the slaughter at the tournament?" Suen growled. Her eyes were filled with hate, her teeth bared in anger. "Like you worked hard to stop Beryl's forces from marching through my hometown, burning and killing everything they saw, including my parents? Or when Zoicite forcefully conscripted half the Southern Water Tribe into his army to fight on behalf of a queen who killed him? Where were you...where was the Avatar when the two Earth Kingdoms nearly tore themselves to pieces? Where was the Avatar when a plague killed hundreds of Air Nomads, or when famine struck, or when the last Earth King was assassinated? Huh? Where's the balance in that?!"

Suen struck Usagi fiercely with a fiery blow, setting her hair and clothes ablaze. Usagi was thrown back and didn't have time to recover as Suen shook the ground loose and raised an enormous slab. She threw it at Usagi, who instinctively went into the Avatar State and obliterated the stone. Suen paused to assess her foe, and glowed white as she too achieved the Avatar State. The two girls went to blows at once, slamming each other with crackling blasts of wind, calling out walls of flame, ripping the ground apart and hurling boulders at one another. They were not evenly-matched—Usagi was driving Suen back—but one had four friends at her side, and the other did not.

A wall of ice pushed Usagi back while a wall of rock kept her pinned. Usagi was crushed between the two and knocked to the ground. A serpent of fire crawled across the grassy ground and encircled her; Ishtar just watched, biting her nails.

"So much for negotiations," Nergal huffed. She looked to Suen, who was livid with anger, and just shook her head. Marduk called out two spires of rock and encased Usagi between them; Suen stood over her with a twirling blade of fire and ice. Nabu approached Ishtar and clasped her shoulders gently.

"Are you all right?" The other girl merely trembled. She looked into Nabu's eyes, her mouth quivering.

"W...we were...s-supposed to...m-m-make peace with..."

"I know. But maybe this is for the best. If she is possessed by Vaatu, she will not resist us now."

"No thanks to you!" Suen snapped. Nabu glared frigid daggers at the other girl as she sneered and raised the sword for a final blow. It was knocked clean out of her hand before she could blink, by the very same spires that had imprisoned Usagi. Suen stood dumbfounded for a moment, wondering what happened. She then noticed the old man, standing before them like a mountain.

"I think you have done enough damage, young lady. I suggest you withdraw. This one is under my protection."

"So you're an earth-bender," she snarled. Spouts of water erupted from the ground and swirled around her hands. "I have ways of dealing with you." The water tightened into daggers and surged after the old man, but he deftly jerked out of the way, hardly moving from where he stood. Suen roared and called forth an enormous plume of fire and launched it at the old man. It encased him but just as quickly dissipated, shrinking down into a compacted burning orb placed neatly on his palm. His hand twitched, and the fire went out.

"What the..." Suen's mouth hung open; she was unprepared as the old man blew gently, issuing a stiff wind that knocked her back several yards. The other girls were mortified by what they had just seen, and looked between the two in bewilderment.

"Did...did that just happen?!" Marduk shrieked. Ishtar perspired.

"Holy hogbear flops! He just bent fire and air, too! Does this mean...?"

"It...it would appear so." Even stone-faced Nabu was beside herself with amazement. Nergal swallowed, and ran to attend to Suen. She was still in the Avatar State, bruised and very dazed. She rubbed her head and slowly climbed to her feet, seething with fury.

"Another false Avatar?!" She called forth the flames and launched herself at the old man, who stood placidly. Suen closed in and swung, but before she could land a blow, he raised his finger, touched her forehead...

And the Avatar State vanished.

"No, my dear," he said, his voice still melodic and sweet, but brimming with untold power and authority. "I am not an Avatar, false or otherwise. I am something far greater." Suen groaned and collapsed in a faint; Mariner tapped the ground with his staff, and a band of thick grass covered Suen from foot to shoulder. He then stood waiting for the other girls.

Nabu and Marduk hesitated for a moment before pulling up enormous walls of ice and stone. They parted like doorways, though, as Mariner lifted his finger, and sank back into the ground. Nergal wound up and threw a fireball, but Mariner simply pointed up, and the fire dissipated into the sky. He tapped his stick again, and tendrils of grass coiled around the girls one after the other. Within ten seconds, four of the five girls were completely incapacitated, leaving only Ishtar. She panicked as Mariner eyed her.

"I give up!" she shrieked, throwing her hands in the air. "I surrender!" Mariner smiled warmly.

"You are very wise, my dear. However, since I cannot have you following us..." He drew a line in the ground with his staff, and the grass curled around Ishtar, holding her fast. She stiffened for a moment before offering a tepid smile.

"Um...thank you for sparing us, sir! Um, but...how long will we be, ah...stuck like this?"

"For the remainder of the day," he answered. "I could keep you indefinitely, you know, but I figured a few hours would suffice. We will be beyond your reach by then. You may get rained on, though, so there is that. Fare you well." He bowed politely and helped Usagi to her feet. She wasn't in bad shape, but it would be awhile before she could walk upright. She was too amazed to worry about it, though.

"Tha...that was remarkable! How did you do all that? Where did you learn to... I've never heard of anybody grass-bending before! I mean, unless you moved the water in the grass, or it was some kind of plant-bending like what my friend Makoto can do. And, and, you just...called it up from the ground, like...whoom!" Mariner laughed at her excitement.

"I did show off a little, didn't I? Of course, I had entertained the idea of imprisoning them in something more clever, but I was quite pressed for time. They are a strong team, you know."

"Tell me about it," she winced, nursing her bruises. "And then there was that thing you did to Suen. You just...turned off her Avatar State by touching her! How did you do that?"

"A simple matter of energy-bending, nothing more," he answered humbly. Even so, Usagi was floored. She stood on her toes and peered at his face.

"Just who are you, anyway?" The old man stopped walking, leaned on his stick, and smiled, though he had the countenance of a titan.

"I believe you already know who I am, Avatar. Like recognizes like." Usagi felt a thrill surge through her body, and she covered her mouth, her heart racing. He was right: she knew.

"You're the one who taught the four Guardian Kings. You're their Master." He took off his long red cap and bowed deeply.

"Vainamoinen, Firstborn of Luonnotar, Eldest of all living things, and Ancient Mariner, at your service." He let this sink in for a moment, then put his cap back on. "I think we have kept Ma-Ti waiting long enough. Come, let us return to the hotel. We will rest from our travels, and then we shall meet my friend." Usagi had too many questions running through her mind at the moment, but it seemed they would all have to wait. The old man was already on his way, his gait swift as a river but gentle as an evening breeze. Usagi followed him and nursed her thoughts until he bade her speak again.

…...

Rather than satisfy Usagi's curiosity when they finally returned to the hotel, Mariner—or Vainamoinen, as he was known—opted to sit back, eat dinner, and listen while Ma-Ti regaled his adventures of the day. While nothing as exciting as being attacked by four bending masters and their pseudo-Avatar companion had happened, his humbler experiences were refreshing to listen to, and kept Usagi engaged. Ma-Ti only stopped to eat, drink, and chide Mochi as the little lemur cavorted around, and when he was finally finished, evening had come, and with it, a respectable rain. Vainamoinen let out a yawn as the lulling rush of water made him drowsy.

"Forgive me, my boy. You young folk might chance another waking hour or two, but as for me? I must rest these old bones. Ah, but I'll be up and about all the sooner, and ready for a fine meal, if tonight's offering was any indication. A pleasant evening to you both." He bowed, and Ma-Ti and Usagi smiled as they watched him leave for his room. She had almost completely forgotten about the urgent questions she had been holding onto.

"He's too polite for his own good," Ma-Ti said, rather bashfully. "I know my day might seem a little dull, especially to one who's traveled the world as long as he has. The things he must have seen! What a storyteller he'd make! It's too bad I've only known him for a few days."

"Yeah," Usagi murmured, recalling what she had seen earlier that day. She decided to keep it to herself for the time being. "You know," she said, grinning humbly, "not to brag or anything, but I've been around the world a few times myself. Maybe I could tell you some things instead."

"Oh, really?" He leaned forward in his chair, putting his elbows on the table. "What's the most magnificent thing you've ever seen?" Usagi had to take a moment to think. Before she had met her friends and began all her adventures as an Avatar, she might have said the Aurora Borealis, or the Great Divide, or the volcanoes of the Fire Nation. But now? It was a tough call. But one answer came to her easily enough.

"Well, I did get to see some lion-turtles." Ma-Ti's face lit up in surprise.

"You got to see a lion-turtle?!" Usagi nodded.

"Yup. Four of them, at the same time." Ma-Ti leaned back in his chair, his jaw practically unhinged. Usagi chuckled and, since she wasn't feeling tired yet, decided to tell him all about it.

Usagi was so used to waking up early (never by choice) that she rose before the sun out of pure habit. It was no longer raining, and with the smell of Ma-Ti's cooking filling the air, she was eager to get up. After washing herself, she went to the hotel lobby, where Ma-Ti and Vainamoinen were already making breakfast. They chatted idly between themselves and greeted her cordially, announcing that they were almost ready. Usagi cleared a place for them (with some help from Mochi), and dug into a fine meal that nearly rivaled Makoto's skills.

"Today," said Vainamoinen as he cut up a sausage, "we will join up with my friend. Young master Ma-Ti has stated he may continue traveling with us for a time, but our paths will diverge eventually, which is a pity. I had wanted to introduce him to my lady, but alas."

"I know," he said, stuffing his mouth with eggs. "I wanted to...hmm, see her, too. After—whoo, excuse me—hearing so much about her, I was looking forward to meeting with her. But there was a messenger-hawk waiting for me with a letter from some of my friends, telling me where we should all meet up. It's too far out of my way to follow Mariner, unfortunately." He seemed genuinely crestfallen, but Vainamoinen gave him an encouraging pat on the back.

"Don't fret about it in the least, my dear boy! The friends you've known for years take priority over a silly old man you've only been acquainted with a week! Besides, I have a good feeling you'll meet my lady one day. Yes—in fact, I am certain you will. She would like you." Ma-Ti grinned and blushed a little, then went back to his meal. Usagi was a little sad to hear that Ma-Ti would be leaving them, but at the same time, the prospect of him reuniting with his friends gave her hope for her own situation. If he could do it, then she could, too.

It seemed they set out just when the rain started to fall again. Ma-Ti had only one parasol with him but kindly gave it to Usagi—in fact, when she refused, he insisted.

"Mariner likes all sorts of weather, so he'd never take it. As for me, I don't mind much, either. Call it chivalrous or courtesy, but I'd rather you take it." Usagi smiled warmly and thanked him, but the further they went, the harder the rain fell, and soon the parasol was next to useless. They took shelter for a moment underneath a rock outcropping, and Usagi wondered why Vainamoinen didn't light any fire—or for that matter, why he didn't bother controlling the wind or the rain. He was certainly powerful enough, and more than capable of doing so. She wanted to bring it up, but he seemed focused on something distant, and paid his companions very little attention. Usagi wondered what sort of thoughts could occupy a man of his nature, and leaned further away from the driving rain.

The torrent relented a little later, going from storm to sprinkle, but the sky was still completely overcast. Vainamoinen, true to Ma-Ti's description, enjoyed the weather regardless, and sang a song about picking mushrooms: ones that tasted sweet or sour, ones that cooked aromatically or stank to high heaven, some that opened up "a world of colors to the inquisitive mind", and some that lulled you into "the sleep of forever". It seemed a little too silly and inappropriate, but Usagi found herself enjoying it. Shortly after Ma-Ti got into his own melodic compositions, they came to a rushing river with a broken bridge. There seemed to be no other way to cross; Vainamoinen approached the bridge carefully, and Usagi braced herself for a miraculous deed.

"Ha! We are felicitous indeed," the old man exclaimed. "Thanks to some old habits, I managed to hang onto a little hatchet. We passed a few trees not too long ago, so with a bit of hard work, I expect we can improvise a way across. We must go backwards to go forwards!" He marched on and led the way, Ma-Ti following quietly. Usagi hung back.

"Can't you just...bend us across?" He paused.

"Eh? What's that?"

"I mean, can't you stop the river or something? Or maybe make a bridge out of rocks, or..."

"No need," he smiled. "We have the way, we just require the will. A good tree will take three people to lift, young lady, so hop to it!" He then laughed and sang a song about jumping, every word apparently made up on the spot. Glumly, Usagi followed, grumbling to herself. The tree wasn't terribly far away, but the rain had picked up considerably by the time they got there. Vainamoinen was a decent lumberjack (Usagi wished that Makoto was there), and with Ma-Ti taking over halfway into it, they felled their prize. Usagi was given the middle of the trunk to carry alongside Ma-Ti while Vainamoinen took the heaviest part. It was strenuous work, and all the more relieving when they finally set it over the river. Ma-Ti was the nimblest of the group, so he crossed first with Mochi. Vainamoinen had to guide Usagi over by hand, but the tree held fast. He smiled when they were across.

"There! It is the responsibility of the old to build bridges for the young."

"All the same, I really wish you had done something easier," Usagi replied. Vainamoinen looked at her sternly.

"You speak in ignorance. If a bender had worked their art, they could have passed, yes, but the river would have remained wild and the ground would have eroded away. We did not act for our own convenience but for the sake of many others yet to come. One day, that bridge will be remade into something sturdier, but for now, it may be crossed by anyone who comes to it. Come." He resumed marching, heedless of the driving rain, while Usagi stood pondering what he had said. Ma-Ti stared at her sympathetically.

"The sooner we move, the sooner we'll arrive. I don't mind being wet anymore. My clothes are too soaked through for me to care." Usagi nodded numbly and moved her feet.

"Yeah. I guess I've had worse, too. At least we're not going through all this on an air bison." His mouth hung open in awe.

"You've ridden an air-bison, too?! You have to tell me all about it! I've never been on one!" Usagi laughed and described some of her adventures with Artemis, temporarily forgetting about the weather.

It was very late in the day when Ma-Ti revealed that he must now part with his companions. Vainamoinen made sure he had everything he would need for a solo journey and bade him a quick but respectful farewell, but Usagi delayed it. She had grown fond of the boy, and hated to see him go. He just smiled and extended his hand.

"Wherever our paths take us, we will always have our experiences. I have a good feeling that we'll meet again, Usagi. Take heart for yourself." He laughed as an excitable critter scrambled up to perch on his head. "Mochi says good luck on your journey."

"Thanks, Mochi. You too." She put his paws in her hand, then shook Ma-Ti's. He waved at them as he jogged off down a different path, leaving Usagi with the old man. When she turned to look at him, she saw he had a torch burning. The rain had ceased.

"What a fine turn of events," he said. "The skies have cleared at long last. I would not like to travel anywhere in the dark. Come, we have a ways yet before we may rest." He led her further into the wild, but now that they were alone, Usagi felt bolder with her questions. She had held back with Ma-Ti in their group, but no longer felt such constraints were necessary.

"So...can I ask you a question?"

"That in itself is a question," he said, smiling wryly. "But do go ahead."

"Did you really teach the lion-turtles how to bend?"

"Aye, that I did, ages upon ages ago. Even they were but hatchlings once."

"And...do you really think you can teach me?"

"Of course! If I can instruct a few stubborn, upstart whelps still soaked and sand-covered from their nesting grounds, I think I can manage an enthusiastic young Avatar."

"But I've been training for weeks and I still can't bend. I've given it my very best, but..." Usagi's lip trembled and she looked away. Vainamoinen lifted her chin up, giving her a solemn expression.

"It was no fault of your own, or of your teachers. Don't ever think otherwise! They were excellent, kind, and patient, just as you were dauntless, eager, and respectful. Many Avatars in the past could only wish for the care you've been given. Your situation is merely...well," he muttered with a glimmer in his eye, "let us call your situation weird. But now you are in the company of one whose skill and ability hearken back to the very dawn of the world itself! I was birthed by Luonnotar, Primordial of creation, and knew the depth and breadth of the world's soul from my first breath! There are no secrets for me, no truths clouded, no obstacle formidable enough. You could even say that I am bending, personified, and were you a thousand times less qualified, hidden away behind a hundred impenetrable walls, and cursed with unfathomable blindness and deafness, I could yet teach you."

Usagi honestly didn't know what to say. This was a little too much for her finite mind to comprehend.

"Great! Awesome! Wonderful! So when can we start?"

"Start?" he grumbled, raising a thick white eyebrow. "I don't know what you mean. I have already started teaching you. I have been teaching you since the moment you were brought onboard Captain Mathena's ship. Whether or not you listened or understood, I taught you; whether or not you found it useful, I taught you; whether you remembered everything or retained nothing, I taught you. I am doing it now. I will continue to teach until one of us draws their last breath—and may it be mine, Avatar, for you are yet needed in this world, whereas my time draws to a close."

Vainamoinen stood there in the darkness of evening, his torch dancing, silent and imposing. Usagi was transfixed; she didn't know what to do, or even if she could do anything. Vainamoinen frightened her in a way that Beryl never could, but it was an attractive fear. She didn't want to run or fight him: she wanted to learn more, to listen, to be with him in his daunting presence. She was afraid but entranced all the same. He broke the spell and moved onward, calling out for her to follow. She followed.

Neither one of them spoke the rest of the evening. When they stopped, Vainamoinen lit a campfire with his torch, not by bending, and Usagi studied him earnestly. He went to sleep like any other man, with his long cap as a pillow. Usagi drifted off without even knowing it, and woke as refreshed as if she had slept in the world's most luxurious bed. He smiled at her gently and poked the fire for awhile, seemingly content to do nothing else. Usagi wondered what sort of secret lesson all of this was leading to, and strained herself to uncover any hidden meaning. As if sensing her distress, Vainamoinen grinned and put his little brand away.

"We learn by watching. We learn by listening. We learn best by failure, though. The greater the wisdom, the greater the failure behind it, and my failures are many fathoms deep. Do not fear failure and do not be discouraged by it. It is always an option. Come. I am hungry." He kicked dirt in the fire until it was completely put out, then took out a little bottle of water he kept hidden in his cloak and poured it over the ashes. Vainamoinen led her to a little river, where he and Usagi both drank their fill (he also refilled the bottle), then stooped down low until his great beard was submerged. The old man muttered a fishing-song to himself, then let out a merry little cry and stood. Attached to his beard were three small fish, which he removed and kept in a cloth. Later, they came across an apple tree, which Vainamoinen had but to shake a little to produce fruit. He carved up the fish and ate them raw, while Usagi took the apples. Famished though she was, she only ate two.

"Are we still meeting your friend?" she asked after they resumed their journey.

"Yes. Not long now." He led her on—the rain came back but was spent just as quickly—they stopped again for a rest, then marched silently for an hour or so. Usagi had tried to figure out where she was—she believed they were still in Hei Bai's region but couldn't be more specific than that—but it felt like they had completely walked out of reality itself, where time and space had no meaning, where there was just forest and sky and grass and rivers. They stopped again later, when Vainamoinen wished to admire an innocuous cluster of pines, and while he was doing that, the Lady appeared at last. The old man was right: there was no mistaking her.

She was splendidly tall, but fully feminine, for she moved with the grace of nobility and the patience of saints. She had a swarthy complexion and eyes that glimmered with a mysterious reddish light, outwardly jovial but hiding great depths of sorrow, wisdom, and experiences beyond mortal comprehension. She seemed utterly cold and distant, but warm in her own way, as the old man had said, and bowed to Usagi when their eyes locked. Usagi bowed back; Vainamoinen merely waved.

"Ah! Perfectly on time, as usual! I hope we have not kept you waiting, my dear."

"Not at all, Grandfather, I only just arrived myself. I see you brought the Avatar with you." Usagi flinched and blushed a little.

"Ah! Y-you know me? Um, I mean, I know I'm famous now, but..." The Lady chuckled softly.

"No, Avatar, I don't know you: I merely know of you. But I have met your family before."

"You have?" The Lady nodded.

"Yes. I was the one who freed them from their cell in Beryl's palace. I'm also the one who gave King Endymion his royal signet ring." Usagi was utterly flabbergasted, and couldn't help but squeal with excitement.

"Haha, then I owe you a big one! You really get around a lot! Um, I mean..." She blushed again, but the Lady just laughed. Vainamoinen quietly withheld criticism and merely leaned on his staff.

"I do tend to wander around. It's in my nature, though, just as it is yours, and the Mariner's. But I'm being too formal. Please allow me to introduce—or is it identify—myself?" She raised her eyebrow and gave Vainamoinen a sly expression. He just coughed. "Your family," she resumed, "knows me as Persephone, and you may call me that too, if you wish. But most people will know me as...

"Setsuna. The Bender of Time."

The end of "The Avatar and the Mariner"

Next time: "The Time-Bender"

Author's notes:

Vainamoinen is a hero of the Finnish epic Kalevala, and alongside Merlin, is a prototype for practically every wizard since. Whether or not I beefed up his skills is open for debate, but hopefully I encompassed his character properly. I hope I don't have to point out the connection between Persephone, the wife of Hades, and Setsuna, alias Sailor Pluto. And finally, Pluto is absolutely a planet and you will never convince me otherwise.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

12: The Time-Bender

"What the heck's a time-bender?" Usagi blurted. Setsuna smiled mysteriously.

"Someone who is difficult to describe. You know there are four elements that make up the world, the ones that the Avatar masters."

"Not this Avatar," Usagi cringed. Setsuna gazed upon her, amber eyes glistening.

"You will. I have foreseen it. Time-bending is one of the four greater powers of creation, the ones that compose and conduct the universe itself. Without them you would not have earth or fire, air or water. You have already seen energy-bending in action, I believe."

"Oh yeah, Vaina-whatsis here said that's what he used on Suen."

"Vainamoinen," the sage corrected. "However, as I have had many names in my long life, you may address me as you wish." Usagi smiled sheepishly.

"Right, sorry. Y-you were saying, uh...Setsuna?" The lady nodded.

"There is Time and Energy, alongside Space and Matter. All benders to some extent use energy and matter-bending, but time and space are reserved for very select people...or entities. A few spirits have them; master Vainamoinen has them; the Primordials used them to shape our world. To bend time or space is a very serious affair, and not to be channeled unless great need dictates it. Even ordinary matter or energy bending is not to be used frivolously, or it will upset the balance of nature. It is your calling to maintain that balance."

"I think I understand," she muttered, but with some frustration she added, "or maybe I don't. I mean, I can't even get the basics down. All this advanced stuff is way too far over my head." Setsuna laughed.

"As it should be. The Avatar was not meant to wield so much power. That is why there is only one time-bender, and very few space-benders. But do not distress over your apparent lack of progress. You already wield mastery over a power both Vainamoinen and I have very little skill in."

"What's that?" Usagi asked. Setsuna stood silently for a moment.

"I have spoken enough. Now it is time for you to learn how to bend the world, and I know of no better teacher than the man who has been waiting patiently beside you." Usagi looked to the sage, who bowed reverently.

"As much as I could listen to your voice all day, my dear, you are correct. Let us find a comfortable place for you to sit, Avatar, and then we will begin the lesson." They walked a little ways and came across a broad, flat stone in the middle of the grass. The stump of a tree stood watch over the area, which Vainamoinen offered for Setsuna to sit. He perched on the flat rock, and asked Usagi to do the same.

"Close your eyes," he began. "Make yourself comfortable. Don't think about what has happened before, or what will happen later. Concentrate on what is going on now. Do not dwell upon success or failure. Do not even entertain them as possibilities. You are merely doing. You are in no hurry to go anywhere or do anything—simply sit there, relax, and close your eyes."

"Um, all right," Usagi said as she sat down and obeyed him. "But I gotta warn you: if I get too relaxed, I might fall asleep."

"That is all right," Vainamoinen laughed. "People are very susceptible in their dreams. Don't concern yourself with sleeping or waking. Just listen. Can you hear my voice?" Usagi nodded. "What else can you hear?" She was silent for a moment. The wind gently whistled against the grass and trees. Crickets and cicadas were calling. Birds were chirruping. Usagi's lungs drew in air, and expelled it. She told him all of this.

"Good, good. Now, listen."

…...

The world is comprised of the four elements, and maintains its balance with them. Excess or absence of one will result in disaster, decay, ruin. But your body is also comprised of the four elements, and maintains its own balance. The world could not exist without all four of the elements working together in harmony, just as your body could not exist. Avatar Wan's first element was Fire, then Air, Water, and finally Earth. But in terms of the world, and your body, we must consider Earth before anything else, for the land holds everything together, just as your flesh holds your body together. The rocks that comprise the mountains, the sand that covers the shoreline, the soil which brings up our food: this is earth. So is it with your skin, muscle, and hair. But remember the balance! Too much earth and we would be choked; the land would wither and turn arid. Too little and we would not be able to grow food, or find space for living. What was given must be returned: as it is with the earth, so too will it be with our bodies.

Next we must consider Fire, for while the earth holds the world together, fire gives it energy, gives it life. Earth without fire is a meaningless rock floating in space, but earth with fire yields a possible world. Deep beneath our feet is a sweltering cauldron of energy with a heat so unbearable, it rivals the sun, yet we are maintained by it. We are heated by the fire below us and the fire above us, thus life can exist. Sit still and feel the warmth of your skin. The blood in your veins is your fire; it surges through your whole body and provides you with energy, with life. It protects you and maintains the balance. Remember the balance! Too much fire and everything burns to ash; too little and it freezes. Proper use of this energy requires great wisdom, and yields great reward.

Now we must consider Water, for though the world is held together and has the spark of life, its thirst must be quenched. Water cools the flames and makes this world bearable. It fills our lakes, oceans, and rivers, just as it fills every cell in our bodies. Our blood could not flow without the surge of water directing it through our veins, and we could not eat without water to aid in the digestion. Heat causes the water to dissipate and congeal in the sky as clouds, only to be purified and return to the earth as rain. How simple this cycle is, and how vital! Life could not grow without water, but remember the balance! Too much and we would drown; the earth would erode and the land would be untenable. Too little and all would be a dusty, dry wasteland.

Now we may consider Air, for while it is last on the list of creation, it is still an absolute necessity, and were it taken away, the previous three elements would be wasted. After all, we must breathe, must we not? But air is more than that: it moves the pollen, the seeds, and the spores, spreading life across the world. It stirs the water and stokes the fire. Its sweet breeze removes stagnation and refreshes foul odor. Winged creatures depend on it to migrate, sailors need it to travel, and those oppressed by heat are relieved by its kiss. We drink it every moment of our lives, and yet it never runs out. But remember the balance! Too much air and nothing could remain upright; our trees would break and our structures would collapse. But too little and life could not spread; stagnation would choke us to death. No, do not dismiss the importance of air, for the only thing separating our fragile species from extinction is a thin ribbon of atmosphere.

Now you understand that the world is comprised of earth, fire, water, and air, just as your body has earth, fire, water, and air. The world and your body both require the perfect balance of all four to exist; any more or less and both would cease to function properly. The earth holds it together, the fire gives it energy, the water feeds its life, and the air spreads the life. Now imagine that there is no distinction between your body and the world. Usagi is the planet, and the planet is Usagi. Your body is the earth, and the earth is your body. Your energy is its fire. Your blood is its water. Your breath is its air. Now...move your body.

…...

Usagi raised her arm and part of the stone they were sitting on broke off.

"Join the two. Call it."

Usagi's body drew the stone to her hand. As soon as she grabbed it, she opened her eyes and lit up in the biggest grin imaginable.

"I did it!" she exclaimed, laughing for joy. Vainamoinen laughed with her.

"Now, call upon your energy. The world's fire is your fire." Usagi focused, imagining the heat in her body as a tangible force. A spark ignited and a little plume of flame spiraled up from her hand.

"Oh my gosh," she warbled, tears forming in her eyes. "I'm fire-bending. I'm really fire-bending!"

"Good, good! Now call forth your water. Don't think of it as the world's! It's yours, Usagi, yours to command." She took a deep breath, imagining blood rushing through her veins, every cell pulsating with life...

The surrounding dew that had been clinging to the grass now raised into the air, and gathered into a single spot before her. Usagi could see her beaming reflection in it.

"Now the air!" Vainamoinen proclaimed. "Breathe in, breathe out! That is the breath of the world! Guide it! Control it!" Usagi imagined the world inhaling, exhaling, inhaling, exhaling...

A breeze surged over the grassy land and gathered to a single swirling point in front of her. She squealed with laughter and bounced with excitement. Vainamoinen clapped.

"Wonderful, Usagi! Now command the four in unison! You are the world; you are its master!" Usagi focused: it was as if a great doorway in her mind had been opened at last, allowing light to shine through and clear away all of the darkness. She let go of the stone and it whirled around her; the fire leaped from her hand and joined it. The water-mirror twirled around faster and faster, while the column of air played with her long golden pigtails. The four elements flew around her in perfect orbit; she extended her hands and called them to her one at a time; she juggled them, playing, smiling and laughing. Vainamoinen motioned for her to "throw" them at him, and she lobbed them one at a time, earth and fire with water and air. He laughed and shrank them until they were small enough to hover over his fingers, then caused them to dance merrily as his hand twitched and twirled. The sage gently tossed them back to Usagi, who caught them and held them close for a moment before dispelling them.

Master and student proudly beamed at one another for a long time. Finally he bowed.

"You are Yourself now, Avatar. Call upon it whenever you are in need, and it will serve you diligently. Only never forget the balance, dear one. Bear this gift well."

"I will," she whispered, wiping a tear from her face. "Thank you."

Usagi was given free reign to practice her new abilities while Vainamoinen and Setsuna talked. They apparently had a lot to catch up on, for Usagi took a long time to accustom herself to bending, and didn't stop until hunger pangs set in. Setsuna had a perfect grasp of time, no surprise there, and noted they had some moments yet before they could eat a proper dinner. Usagi groaned, but Vainamoinen had her back. He had kept some of the apples they had eaten earlier, and directed her to a tree where a honeycomb hung in waiting. Usagi hesitated to involve herself with bees, but Vainamoinen assured her that all was well. He asked her to bend a little fire, then use air to fan the smoke up to the hive so the bees would be sedated. Carefully, he extracted some honey, and gave it to Usagi. She had never eaten raw honey before, and aside from one or two grubs she avoided, it tasted wonderful.

"So now where do we go?" she asked, licking her sticky fingers clean. "I mean, I'd like to reunite with everyone if that's possible. Do you think they're still in Ba Sing Se?" The sage and Setsuna looked at each other anxiously, expressing volumes without a single word.

"If they are not, where else would you go?"

"Hmm? Well, probably Omashu. I could get in touch with King Motoki and ask him to help me find everyone. I'd also like to check up on my friend Naru."

"I think that's a wonderful idea," Setsuna said. "Omashu isn't very far from here, if I remember correctly. We may even get there in time for dinner."

"It's not that close," Usagi muttered, sucking the last of the honey from her fingers. Setsuna looked up at Vainamoinen and smiled at him, but he didn't return her jovial stare. He just grumbled and lowered the brim of his cap.

"I know what you would have me do, my lady, but it is not something I'd consent to without good cause."

"The cause is good, Grandfather," she replied, eyes sparkling. He only grumbled.

"What do you see that I do not?"

"I see three very good friends meeting up after a long absence."

"That would not..." He issued a little squeak as Setsuna continued to implore him with her piercing gaze. Usagi had taken notice and glanced between the two.

"Hmm? What's going on? I don't mind walking if that's the problem. Omashu's not that far away, you guys."

"No, but speed may be essential," Setsuna replied. "Or perhaps I should say, space may be essential." More confused than before, Usagi could only stare as the will of two very enigmatic people was contested before her. Suddenly Vainamoinen straightened.

"Very well, I shall trust in your wisdom. Usagi, take hold of the sleeve of my cloak." Still puzzled, she hesitated until Setsuna did it first. The instant Usagi touched the old man's sleeve, their surroundings changed from an empty, bucolic grassland bordered by forest to a closed city road, lined with trees in full bloom, and the city of Omashu looming only a few miles away. Usagi shrieked and jerked back, loudly demanding to know what was going on. Vainamoinen sighed, shaking his head while Setsuna chuckled at him.

"That is not why I was reluctant to do it!" he insisted. "The girl's fears and confusion I can handle. You said yourself that space-bending is not to be used lightly, and I did not foresee any great need for it. But now we are here safely and the deed is done. Usagi, be silent." The sage held his hand before him, and Usagi's shrieking ended. Startled, she could only stand there as her two companions took to the road. Setsuna at least gave her an encouraging look.

"That is a taste of what space-bending can do. Vainamoinen moved us from Hei Bai's forest to the outskirts of Omashu, all in an instant." Usagi's jaw nearly became unhinged.

"Wha...wait, he can actually do that?!" Setsuna nodded. "Then why doesn't he do it all the time?!"

"If you must ask that, my young Avatar," Vainamoinen called as he marched ahead of them, "then you have completely neglected the entire point of my studies! You may as well surrender your bending and the Avatar State now." Grumpily he marched on, leaving them behind. Usagi froze for a moment before realizing what he meant.

"Oh, right, the balance! So you didn't want to space-bend because it would upset the balance, and we were close enough to Omashu that we didn't really need to—but you did it anyway because, umm...because why?"

"You may yet find out," Setsuna said as she took off after him. Usagi still had plenty of questions, but the only way to get an answer was to follow them. She called out for them to wait and ran like the wind, the banners of Omashu flying closer with every step.

…...

"Hold on, stop squirming. I need to concentrate." Nergal carefully burned the grass binding Ishtar's body, even though the other girl wasn't comfortable being so close to fire. Nabu and Marduk were already freed; only Suen was left. Whether Vainamoinen had planned it that way or it was pure coincidence, Nergal had been the first to escape her binds, and she had set about freeing everyone else in turn. Ishtar let out a yawp and stretched her weary limbs, but Suen didn't move even when her binds were burned off. Nergal shook her.

"Hey. Hey, Suen, you're free. Come on, get up. I'm going to start a fire so we can warm ourselves. Hey, are you okay?" Suen grunted, but made no movement. Marduk and Nabu gathered around her curiously.

"You have no one to blame but yourself for getting into that predicament, you know," Nabu reminded her. "I understand we needed to restrain and apprehend the false Avatar, but I thought you had forsworn violence. Attacking that old man was especially unjustified. If I believed in karma, I would say you had more than earned your fair share."

"I know," she whimpered. Nabu blinked and peered closer. Suen wasn't just prone, she was trembling, even crying a little. "I know I screwed up. I know I did awful things. I said awful things. All I could feel was an overwhelming rush of power and...justification, like...everything I was doing was good and right. It was like there was a voice in my head that urged me to do and say all these things, and...it didn't have control over me, but the moment I started to believe them, it felt like it was guiding me. It kept telling me that I was the Avatar, and that I was always fighting for righteousness, and everything I did was just. I...I know that's not a good excuse, and it sounds like I'm just blaming my mistakes on something else..."

"What do you mean, 'a voice in your head'?" Marduk asked. Suen slowly sat up, her face downcast. She rubbed her forehead as if dealing with a migraine.

"There's...someone who talks to me, tells me what to do and why I'm doing it. I think it's this Avatar power."

"Do you mean Raava?" Ishtar said. Everyone looked at her and she elucidated, "I read in one of my Air Nomad sutras that Raava formed a symbo-whatsis relationship with Wan, the first Avatar—"

"Symbiotic," Nabu corrected.

"Right, symbiotic. Basically, she went into his body and became a part of him. She's the one who gave him all his Avatar powers, and she's the one who lives inside all the other Avatars."

"That sounds right," Suen murmured dreadfully. "The voice in my head...told me it was Raava, and that she'd always be with me and help me. She chose me as her Avatar to cleanse the world and make it a better place. And...she told me about the false Avatar, too. She told me that that other girl had to die, and that anyone helping her also had to die..."

"Okay, I'm starting to not like this Raava character," Marduk spat. "Is that what happens to everyone who becomes the Avatar? Are they subjected to this...whatever it is?"

"Raava said that she was a spirit—one of the strongest ever."

"Whatever she is," Marduk snorted, "she sounds like bad news. I mean, just look at what happened here! I know you feel angry at the last Avatar—you feel robbed and cheated, beaten down and trampled on... We all do. But feeling angry and acting as violently as you did are two separate things, and frankly, I detest it."

"I know," Suen groaned, "I'm starting to not like it, either. But...I don't think we need to worry about it anymore."

"What do you mean?" Suen carefully stood, though she felt dizzy and a little sick. She had to steady herself on Nergal and Marduk.

"I...I don't think I feel her inside me anymore. Whatever that old man did, it knocked me clear out of my Avatar self. I don't know how else to describe it, but...I think my Avatar powers are gone, or at least sealed away."

"Whoa, seriously?" Nergal turned pale as she recoiled from this news. "That's some strong bending he performed! To be able to take away your Avatar powers... Can you do anything?" Suen shook her head.

"I don't think so. I can barely stand up." She tried nevertheless, but couldn't so much as summon a whisper of wind, or a puff of mist. Suen slumped over despondently. Marduk sighed and crossed her arms.

"Maybe this is for the best. If the Avatar power is making you crazy, then you shouldn't have it—and all the more reason for us to stop that other girl." Suen reluctantly agreed, but that didn't solve one crucial problem:

"There's no way we can do that with that old guy following her around," Nergal pointed. "He wiped the floor with us without even trying. Even if he's not following the fake around, if Suen doesn't have her powers, then we'll never be able to find her, anyway." The four of them were completely stumped, and stood pondering over their next course of action. From out of the silence of her misery, Suen heard a soft, gentle voice calling to her:

I haven't left you, my dear.

"What?" she blurted emptily. The other girls glanced over at her.

I said I'm still here. I told you when we first met, my child, that I would always be with you.

"You mean you're still here? Then why do I feel so cold and empty? Why can't I do any bending?"

"Who ya talkin' to, Su?" Ishtar said. Nabu gestured for her to be quiet.

Never fear, my child. I was temporarily sealed away by that man, but I have not left you. I must admit, I didn't expect to see him. He used a technique that your body didn't know how to counter, and caught me off guard. Unfortunately, the way things are now, I won't be able to return to you.

"No! What do you mean?"

"Suen, you're scaring us," Nergal murmured. Nabu hissed for her to be quiet.

"Just listen. She is conversing with Raava."

"Raava? But I thought..." Realization struck and they all paid close attention to their friend as she conversed with the spirit.

I mean that I can no longer attach myself to you the way I used to. He used a technique that prohibited that. To put it simply, he used the freedom of will I gave you against me. Because you could still choose your own words and actions, I could not keep my hold on you and was expelled. But if you submit to me fully—if you bend your will to mine, and give me total control over you—then I may return, and with such power and authority that even he will kneel before you.

"But I don't want that anymore!" she screamed. "I could barely control myself before! I said and did things that went against everything I believed in! I...I hurt my friends, and put them in danger..."

I know, my child, I know. But with great power comes sacrifice, and mine is the greatest power in this world. All that I do is just and good, and those whom I work through are themselves just and good in all their deeds. Your anger was always righteous, but if you accept me fully, it can be focused!

"I still don't want it," she cried, clutching her head in agony. "If taking the Avatar power means I lose control, then you can count me out!"

I see. Well, that is your choice, and I respect it. But answer me this: how will you stop the false Avatar now? Do you even know where she is? What about your brother? I promised I'd help you find him, remember?

There was a pause.

"Yeah. I remember."

But I can't do that if I'm not a part of you. And you are close, Suen, so very close!

"Where is he?" she demanded. "Where's Anshar?!"

He's nearby! I promise that's all I know! Accept me and we can find him together! We can put an end to the deceiver and bring true balance to this world!

"I...I don't know," she wept, feeling her knees weaken as she struggled. "If...if he's close, maybe I can find him on my own."

Perhaps. But there's still the matter of the false Avatar. Even alone, she is powerful, and without me, you and your friends will surely fall. You at least want to protect them, don't you?

"Yes, but...I still don't think this is a good idea. Maybe we can go about this another way."

There was another pause.

Spoken like a true Avatar, always looking for alternatives. You know, the deceiver's friends are separated. If you wanted to hold an advantage over her, you could strike at her friends first. They're weak and isolated. Endanger her friends and the Avatar would willingly submit to you!

Suen thought about it for a moment. Raava had a good point, but she wanted to talk it over with the other girls. She revealed everything Raava had told her, and while the group was skeptical, Nabu conceded that Raava's logic was sound.

If this really IS Raava, she thought to herself. There was another problem, though.

"We don't really know where any of them are," Nergal gestured. "But even if we did, we have no way of getting there. We don't have enough money for a boat rental, and Ishtar's air-bison..." She trailed off uncomfortably; Ishtar grumbled morosely but said nothing.

Tell your friend not to worry, the voice assured her, and Suen said as much. As one of the great spirits, I can bend not only the elements of the world, but the very space around it. I know where the false Avatar's friends are, and I can easily send your group to their locations.

"I'm still not sure about letting you take over me," Suen stated. Raava seemed to laugh.

But of course. Permit me to do this out of good faith. No strings attached.

Suen asked for a moment to think about it and talk it over. Even now, some of the girls were unwilling to throw themselves into a confrontation. One or two were questioning whether it was really Raava inhabiting their friend. There was still a lot they didn't know, and not much to show for their efforts. They at least agreed that they needed to confront the false Avatar, and remove the spirit possessing her before it could do any serious harm. If, by going after her friends, she could be drawn out and separated from her symbiotic relationship, then it was worth trying.

Nabu's scientific curiosity won her over and she volunteered to undergo the "space-bending" first, providing someone went with her (Ishtar wanted to go, but she lost the lottery to Marduk). Nergal agreed to go as well, which left only Ishtar, the most reluctant of them all. Nergal and Marduk were about to convince her to go along with them, but Nabu stopped them, stating that this was a decision Ishtar needed to make on her own. Ishtar debated with herself, but ultimately believed that she might find a way to settle everything peacefully if she was allowed to talk to one of the other girls face-to-face, with nobody else interfering. She kept this thought to herself, though.

"Okay," she said softly, after a moment's thought, "I'm ready. I'd like to go after the air-bender, though."

"Good idea," Nergal said. "We should all go after the girls that correspond with our elements. That way, if it comes down to a fight, it'll at least be fair. Uh, Marduk, I guess that leaves you out of it."

"I guess so," she shrugged. "I'll just have to come up with something to do while Nabu's off chasing their water-bender." The girls exchanged hugs, handshakes, and fond farewells all around; Suen got to witness firsthand the effects of space-bending as she watched her four friends literally vanishing into thin air. Raava assured her that all was well, and that no matter what happened, or what she decided to do, that she would always be with Suen:

Even to the end of the age.

"Right. I think I'll head towards that port town and pick up some information. After that...maybe I'll just take a walk. I need some time to think."

Take all the time you need, my dear. Once your friends have finished their business, I will call them back, and together, we may remove the blighted deceiver from this world and bring about true peace.

Suen nodded emptily and set off towards the town. Inside of her, the spirit who called itself Raava smiled craftily.

If Apsu had learned any truths from her time observing humans, it was that they were so wonderfully easy to manipulate when their emotions were clouding their judgment.

The end of "The Time-Bender"

Next time: "Return to Omashu"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

13: Return to Omashu

Usagi hadn't been to Omashu since she took off after Motoki atop a reluctant donkeydillo; as always, the city had changed during her absence without ever really changing. For one, there were a lot of fliers for a play called The Avenging Shadow posted around (as performed by the Ember Island Players); the theater had expanded in response for the demand, and the marketplace had gotten noticeably more active as well. What really alarmed Usagi was the sharp increase in security, both inside and outside the city walls. The guards at the main gateway recognized her and let her in immediately, but they were checking more people than they let pass. Inside the city proper, Usagi could barely go three steps without seeing a patrol march through, and many streets were being cleared of people. There were large boards scattered around detailing a mandatory curfew, as well as recruitment posters for neighborhood watches and volunteer soldiers. It all portended something rather dire. Usagi wanted to visit the king so she could make sense of it all, but she was more worried about Naru. She made a beeline for Osaka Jewelry and found the shop almost completely emptied out.

"Oh, no," she murmured, spying the cleared-out shelves and display cases. She tentatively knocked on the door and got an answer sooner than expected.

"Oh, you're here earl—oh my goodness, Usagi!" She found herself embraced by Maiyumi Osaka, who seemed frazzled and exhausted but still vibrant. "I have no idea what brought you here, Usagi, but your timing couldn't have been better! Come inside, won't you? I'm afraid the place is a disaster. Oh, who are these two?"

"Madam," Vainamoinen said, removing his cap. "I am Mr. Trout, and this is my associate Miss, ah..."

"Persephone," Setsuna said.

"Yes. We're all traveling companions who came together under very mundane circumstances. The young lady was heading to Omashu, and we, well..."

"We couldn't let her go unattended," Setsuna offered, smiling politely. "I hope we're not intruding."

"Oh no, no. At this point I'll welcome any company I can find. Please, come in and make yourselves comfortable. I'm afraid I don't have anything to offer you."

"All I require is a place to sit," Vainamoinen said. He found a chair and grunted happily as he sat down. Maiyumi told Usagi that her daughter was in another room, and that she should fetch her; she also found Gurio Umino there as well, of all people, helping Naru pack and move boxes. Usagi and Naru hugged while Umino hung back awkwardly. She gave him a relieved smile.

"So what the heck happened since I left? The town's swarming with security guards."

"Yeah, it's been real crazy these past few days," Naru said. "My mother's had to close down her jewelry shop because of it. At least we got to see The Avenging Shadow before all this."

"Oh yeah? I heard about that from an air-bender, but I didn't think it was this popular."

"It's a radical new concept called serialization," Umino piped up, sensing his chance to act as the fount of all information. "The play first started about two or three months ago, and every week it's a new story. The actors put on three performances a week, and always leave off on a cliffhanger. It's an amazingly effective way of keeping an audience coming back for more."

"That certainly doesn't sound like any play I've ever heard of," Usagi said. Naru smiled at her. "Maybe once all this is over, the three of us can check out their newest one."

"All this what?" Usagi asked. Naru and Umino looked at each other and decided it would be better if Maiyumi Osaka explained everything. Everyone gathered together in the den, and once introductions were made, Maiyumi explained what was going on. King Motoki's campaigns against all the fanatics, zealots, bandits, pirates, and other assorted riffraff that had sprang up since Beryl's passing was going well, but that meant he was often away from Omashu. Survivors and splinter groups from various gangs had been making skirmishes against the city in his absence, and the latest report (which was made public a week ago) stated that the largest assault yet would come later that same day. Princess Unazuki, who had been ruling Omashu in her brother's absence, was taking every precaution to protect her city and her people, and if that meant a little inconvenience, well...she believed Omashu was up to the task.

"Wow," Usagi whispered. She looked at Naru's mother anxiously. "You weren't kidding. I arrived right when I was needed the most. I'll bet having the Avatar defend the city will make a huge difference."

"That's what I'm hoping," Maiyumi said, "but that means you need to head to the palace as soon as possible." Usagi agreed and plans were made for her departure. She hated to leave Naru just as she had arrived, but it couldn't be helped. Naru understood and gave her a tight hug to send her on her way, promising to do something fun together later. Usagi even hugged Umino, who blushed considerably.

"Take care of Naru for me, all right?" She gazed at him desperately; he stiffened and saluted.

"Aah...y-yes ma'am! Y-you can count on me, Avatar Usagi! I'll protect the Osaka name and the Osaka store w-with my life!" Usagi chuckled and hailed the nearest patrol, asking them to escort her to the palace (which they were more than willing to do). As they were going through the city, Vainamoinen gave Setsuna an inquisitive look.

"Is this why you...?"

"I'll tell you later," she answered, smiling vaguely. He stroked his beard in thought and picked up the pace.

Usagi was quickly escorted to the war room, where Princess Unazuki and several of her Generals were already gathered around a scale model of Omashu and the surrounding area. The new Captain of the Tellurians, Reika Nishimura, was there as well, along with several high-ranking members of her order. They all looked up when Usagi, Setsuna, and Vainamoinen entered the room; Unazuki lit up and took Usagi in her arms.

"Avatar! Thank the spirits! You couldn't have arrived at a better time! We're in desperate need of your help."

"I'm yours to command," Usagi stated.

"Good, thank you. How much do you know about our situation?"

"The mother of a friend of mine told me a little. Apparently all the surviving members of the people we've been fighting the last few months are joining forces for an all-out assault on Omashu."

"That's the long and short of it," Unazuki nodded. She indicated the table, where several figurines bearing little flags of Omashu had been positioned. "We've learned a lot from our last battle, so we've positioned our troops at various key positions. We're going to leave a few choke points open to lure the enemy inside, where artillery units will bombard them. Three waves of soldiers will be positioned out of range to sweep the survivors away, while Tellurians will be kept inside various points of the city proper. Meanwhile, our navy will be scouring the coastline here, with units positioned here and here to engage in skirmishes. Most of the monks from the Northern Air Temple will support us from above, and we've also conscripted several former members of Zoicite's people to aid us."

"Wait, really?" Unazuki nodded.

"A portion of them surrendered once Beryl fell, so my brother offered to reinstate them into his navy. Others volunteered for the job. Not everyone who worked for Beryl was a bad person, you understand."

"Yeah," she whispered, recalling Princess Kotono's countenance during Jaedite's funeral. "So you've got your navy and the air-benders as a line of defense, and footmen all around the area... Where do you want me?"

"Right here," she said, putting her finger on a wide-open area. "This is where our defenses are weakest. We expect at least a third of their forces to attack from here. Reika and my Generals will be scattered around, but I'd like to add you in there as well. I can even give you a few soldiers to command if you want." Usagi turned pale and sickly at the thought of commanding people in a battle (despite the fact that many Avatars before her had done the same). She knew that even with her newfound abilities, she'd need all the help she could get, but she hated the thought of leading strangers in a combat zone. If she was by herself, or with her friends, it would be a different story, but...

"That won't be necessary," Setsuna announced. She put her hand on Usagi's shoulder and smiled. "We will fight by the Avatar's side."

"You will?" Usagi said, filled with hope.

"We will?" Vainamoinen grumbled, filled with incredulity. Setsuna chuckled softly; Unazuki looked confused.

"Umm, that's great, but...may I ask who you are?"

"Princess, if I may?" Reika approached her and bowed. She looked to Setsuna, whose eyes twinkled with recognition. "The lady you see before you is Setsuna Meioh. The two of us have known each other for a long time, and I can personally vouch for her abilities. If she is with the Avatar, then they won't need any additional support."

"Oh?" Unazuki grinned wryly. "Well, if you say so, Captain, then it must be true. And what about...ah, this gentleman here?" Vainamoinen nodded slowly, his face grim.

"If it is the will of the Avatar and our mutual friend here," he paused to acknowledge Setsuna, "then whatever humble services I might have to offer are yours."

"And what services might those be, Master, ah..."

"Master Trout, if you will. I can perform a little earth-bending that may be of benefit."

"Oh? Well, we could always use another earth-bender on our side."

"Don't be fooled by his humility, your highness," Setsuna said. "Master Trout here is more than capable of holding his own. Your weakest link has just become your strongest." She nodded at Reika, who nodded at the princess (Usagi just kept her mouth shut, having seen "Trout's" skills in action). Unazuki trusted her Captain, so it was settled.

"Very well. Reika will escort you three to your positions. She will debrief you further when you arrive. Well...good luck, everyone, and may the spirits, and the Avatar, be with you." Reika saluted and bowed; the others simply nodded. Usagi had to admit, she felt a lot less nervous about the situation now that Setsuna and Vainamoinen had volunteered. The old man alone could probably wipe out most of the enemy army by himself. When she asked him about it, though, Vainamoinen merely crooked his eyebrow, giving Setsuna a piercing look. Setsuna, enigmatic as ever, said nothing, content to smile. Usagi was beginning to feel a little frightened of her traveling companions.

…...

A wide-open field of grass, orchards, and farmland was all that stood between the army of fanatics and Omashu's safety. This was the city's weakest defense, where the enemy would strike hardest and where the bulk of Unazuki's forces were kept—including Usagi. Although she had no squad of her own to command, Captain Reika's unit would be close by, and Setsuna had vowed to stay by the Avatar's side whether in victory or death. Vainamoinen had wandered off on his own after briefly assessing the battlefield, to some dismay and frustration. Reika had called him back but Setsuna convinced her to stand down. "Trout" would not abandon them in their time of need, nor would he be idle. In fact, it would be better for all involved if he was left alone.

"He's going to be facing a bare minimum of two-hundred foot soldiers," Reika stated tensely. "We've also gotten reports of Thunderhorns and other cavalry, plus several siege weapons. Are you absolutely sure he should face all that on his own?"

"Quite certain, old friend," Setsuna answered. "Master Trout will be the least likely to succumb to any danger. Even if he faced half the enemy forces, it would make no difference to him."

"I've never heard of any earth-bender being that powerful, not even Kalkin—but I'll trust your word. Well, Avatar, here is where we part. All that's left is for us to stem the tide of five-thousand or so zealots, bandits, pirates, loyalists, and all manner of disreputable people. May we all give ourselves to a greater cause with dignity and honor. Fight well!" She spurned her mount on; it galloped away, leaving Usagi and Setsuna alone. The entire world was utterly silent for a few heartbeats.

"Don't be nervous," Setsuna assured her. "This is the worst you've ever faced, but you'll come through it. Stay with me and tomorrow we'll see a new dawn."

"I sure hope so," Usagi sighed. She then thought about what Setsuna had said, and added, "How do you know so much about me, anyway?"

"Because I'm a time-bender. I can see your past, your present, and many of your futures."

"I have more than one future?"

"We all do. There are as many futures as there are dreams of the future. But don't ask me to tell you yours, for it may be false, or misleading, or give you too much hope, or too much despair."

"I get it," she said, quietly but resolutely. "I don't think I want to know, anyway." Actually, she had wanted to ask if she would ever see her friends again, but deep down she knew the answer already. The ground began to tremble as she distanced herself from that thought, and the vibrations became more and more pronounced as time went on. Usagi took a deep breath and braced herself.

"They're charging in with their Thunderhorns," Setsuna stated coldly. "Smart move: bring out your biggest weapon first to shock and awe the enemy, then plow your way through their ranks. Clean up with artillery or infantry. They didn't count on us having the Avatar, though." Her lips curled; Usagi just nodded.

"Or a time-bender. Or the guy who taught the lion-turtles!"

"No..." Setsuna made a gesture, and for the first time, Usagi noticed that she wielded a metallic staff, as long as she was tall, tipped with a crimson orb not unlike the Tears of Apsu. Where she had gotten the staff from, how long she had possessed it, and why Usagi had never noticed it before were unclear, but mystery seemed to be the modus operandi of this lady. Usagi didn't feel like questioning it anyway: the ground was shaking violently, and she could hear trees and barricades being knocked over in the distance. Not long now.

"Bring it on, come on," she hissed under her breath, taking one of the earth-bending stances Mamoru had taught her. The Thunderhorns appeared in the distance, kicking up a large cloud of dust, their stampede underscored by the battle-cry of thousands of warriors. Now that Omashu's defenses had a visual on the enemy, the first stage of their plan would commence. Long-range artillery fire and additional barricades would be erected; the earth would twist and shape to hinder enemy advancement. Reika and the other front-line Generals would order an all-out artillery fire, launching arrows, boulders, ballistas, catapults, and trebuchets. The ground would be ripped apart as gargantuan stone slabs boxed the hordes in; huge holes would open and shut; stones would rain down on the enemy. They kept charging anyway, the first of the Thunderhorns breaking through.

"Not yet," Setsuna whispered. A second volley was launched at close range. Sharp stone spikes protrudes from the ground, snagging the Thunderhorns. Columns of rock shot out, lifting scores of men into the air, and were toppled over, crushing more. Waves of arrows pierced through the ranks. Boulders smashed and squashed the enemy swarm. They kept charging. Reika and her Generals gave the signal to brace their forces, and hundreds of Tellurians, earth-benders, and soldiers formed ranks, massing together with shields and spears to form an impenetrable wall.

"They come to us like a surging ocean," Reika announced, "but their fury will smash itself against our defenses and be proven utterly futile!" The enemy forces did exactly this, rushing headlong into the wall of shields and spears where they were cut down one by one by tireless soldiers. Earth-benders swept away line after line with huge pillars of stone; archers spent their last and fell back to the city as fresh reinforcements took over. Two Thunderhorns and at least eighty soldiers broke off from the main group and came hurtling towards Setsuna and the Avatar, sensing easy prey. Setsuna gave Usagi an intense stare.

"Now," she whispered. Usagi's arms raised fluidly, molding the world to her desires. The land shifted around the first Thunderhorn, raising and lowering, upsetting its balance and sending it crashing to the ground. The enemy fired at Usagi with arrows but she drew up a rock barrier, then took potshots from behind its safety. There were a few earth-benders and even water-benders in the enemy army, and they broke her wall down—but then they got the greatest surprise of their lives as they were repulsed with a crippling wind, and fire sprang from her fingers. She shot them down in a blazing maelstrom and repulsed more enemies with blast after blast of a furious gale. Usagi then made a waving motion with her arms, summoning the very perspiration off the enemy's faces, and shooting it back at them. She took a moment to bathe in her newfound might.

"Vainamoinen taught you well," Setsuna remarked. She looked at the remaining Thunderhorn, held her staff parallel to her body, and let out a deadly scream. Her body flickered for an instant, shifting slightly; Usagi then noticed that the great strap wrapped around the Thunderhorn had been loosened. It slipped off the creature's body, toppling everyone riding it. Three of the men landed on its tusk while two more grabbed hold of its ear, their combined weight causing it to veer off awkwardly and trample many more foes before falling to the ground. Setsuna dusted her hands off, whirled around suddenly, and smashed her staff into the face of a surprise attacker. Usagi whistled.

"You're not so bad yourself! Was that time-bending you just did?" Setsuna winked.

"Yes, but don't tell Master Vainamoinen. Even though all I did was stop time so I could loosen that strap, he still wouldn't approve. The balance and all."

"Right, right." The fight resumed, the enemies now swarming willy-nilly around the two ladies. Usagi called forth tendrils of water and lashed at anyone who got too close for her comfort. "So how long does it take to learn something like that?" Setsuna twirled into a cartwheel, kicking and slamming her way through the enemy ranks.

"Oh, I'd say only about three or four centuries."

"Really?" Usagi bleated, knocking enemies together as she bent gusts of wind. "That long?"

"Yes," Setsuna said, vaulting over a javelin and knocking its thrower to the ground. "Why, would you like for me to teach you?" Usagi smiled sheepishly and brandished fiery plumes.

"Um, no thanks, I think I'll stick to this!" Setsuna chuckled and knocked more enemies to their feet; in no time at all the two of them had disposed of nearly everybody that had went after them (and those who survived quickly turned tail). They took a moment to catch their breath and assess any injury, but were interrupted by Reika and one of her lieutenants, galloping back to them on large oxadillos.

"You two, I need you to fall back to the city at once. I just received word that the Princess is requesting more reinforcements."

"Will you be all right here?" Usagi said. Reika assessed the number of enemies who had fallen around Setsuna and Usagi, including the Thunderhorns. She was impressed, but didn't show it.

"I believe we can spare two fighters. We've accomplished a lot but this battle is far from over. Here, take this." Usagi and Setsuna mounted the lieutenant's oxadillo while he took Reika's, and though it wasn't quite as fast as Artemis or the donkeydillos, it was much steadier and sturdier. They arrived at the main gate of the city about ten minutes later, finding plenty of smoke and some destruction, but very little fire. Setsuna handed the oxadillo off to some archers who were returning to the front lines, while Usagi was briefed by one of the Tellurians.

The city's weak side and its choke points had successfully held against the enemy forces, but the one thing Unazuki and her council didn't count on were the tunnelers. Remnants from Beryl's Fanatic Battlers had used earth-bending to dig long tunnels underneath the battlefield and the city wall, and had emerged in the heart of Omashu. The town watch and many Tellurians who had been kept as a last line of defense now found themselves fighting an unexpected battle, and though they had been holding their own, they were slowly being whittled away. The Tellurian officer led Usagi and Setsuna to where the fighting was the thickest, an open square overrun with foes. It had gotten so bad that even a few civilians were pitching in, firing arrows or throwing pots of boiling oil. Usagi wasn't skilled enough to bend the oil, but she could light it on fire, and cleared the way with it.

She and Setsuna now had the enemy trapped, and just in case they felt that two would be easier to kill than two-hundred, she delved into the Avatar State before their eyes. Glee turned to panic quick as lightning: surges of water from nearby fountains swept scores of enemies away, while an updraft lifted twenty more into the air and scattered them. Usagi stomped her foot to the ground and formed a giant stone box around the remnants, neatly imprisoning them. There were a few earth-benders in the mix, so she guided more water into the stone box until it was flooded, then lowered the walls and let the water carry her enemies away. The town watch cheered and thirty Tellurians pursued the washed-out fanatics. Not wasting any time, Usagi leaped into the air, surveyed the area, and spotted several holes where more tunnelers were coming through. She redirected the water into the holes, surging with such might that everything was washed away and shot out the other end, then sealed the holes shut before gradually sinking back to the surface, phasing out of her State.

"Impressive," Setsuna remarked. As Usagi heaved for air, a cluster of forty bandits rode in on elk-turtles, fully-armed and filthy. Usagi winced and tried to summon her reserves, but Setsuna stood before her. "Please, allow me." Her eyes flickered along with the red orb on her staff, and faster than blinking, Setsuna dashed through the cluster. A moment later, forty bandits groaned loudly and fell to the ground, victims of her time-bending assault. The battle had taken its toll, though, and Setsuna fell to her knees, struggling to support herself with her staff. The town watch took care of the defeated bandits while Usagi tended to her partner.

"And you think what I did was impressive?" They grinned at each other, one too weak to stand and the other too weak to help her.

"I...may have overexerted myself. I've never had to use time-bending twice in one day before. The result of traveling alongside an Avatar, I'll wager." Setsuna chuckled softly, finally rising though her legs were like jelly. She stumbled again as the entire city seemed to shake: huge boulders soared through the air and crashed into streets and buildings. A few earth-benders united and repulsed the missiles; some rebuilt walls as fast as they were knocked down. Usagi herself, despite her weariness, was able to hold a boulder aloft before it could smash into a structure. She put it aside safely, but another made it through her defenses, burrowing a hole clean through a three-story housing complex. Gritting her teeth, she rushed to repair the damage, but the structure was doomed to collapse at any moment. Nevertheless, she went into the Avatar State again and held the entire roof up.

"Setsuna, help me! Get everyone out of there!" Setsuna nodded and dashed in, yelling for everyone to evacuate. A few earth-benders and soldiers came to assist, giving Usagi a breather. She went inside, bending stone and rock to patch up whatever she could. Part of the ceiling caved in as a group of people were running down the stairs; she thrust her arms out and growled harshly to keep the debris from falling on them. The stairs nevertheless gave way, so she air-bent the group towards her, then used another blast to rocket everyone outside to safety. The structure was almost completely destroyed by now, but there were still people inside. Usagi had just enough strength left to hold the exit open for four more, but stood by helplessly as a tremor knocked Setsuna to the ground. She was carrying a child.

"Oh no you don't," she muttered hoarsely, and with the last of her energy, called out a tendril of water and coiled it around the woman, jerking her out just as the building crumbled. A feeble wave of the hand called wind to clear the dust, and aside from some cuts, bruises, and dirt, everyone was safe. The child hugged Setsuna in thanks, then hugged Usagi. She held him tenderly, smiling though she was utterly spent. Their eyes met and she tousled the dust out of his green hair.

"That was a close one there, kiddo. Believe me, it's no fun being caught inside a building when it falls on you. What's your name?"

"Anshar," he said. A little bundle in his arms wriggled to life and let out a yelp. The boy opened his bundle and out came a cabbit, caterwauling and sneezing. Usagi laughed as the boy said, "Oh, and that's Kishar."

"Hello, Anshar; hello, Kishar. My name's Usagi, and that brave lady over there is Setsuna." The boy turned around and bowed as Setsuna gingerly laid herself down.

"Thank you, ma'am. Thank you both. Hey, are you the Avatar Usagi?"

"Yup," she sighed, smiling wearily, "that's me."

…...

The battle was winding down by the end of the day, and going very poorly for the enemy—but they had saved their most diabolical weapon for last. The leaders of each of the main factions gathered together and pooled all their resources for a terrible machine, a heavily armored mobile artillery unit powered by large batteries and long-lost fire-bender knowledge. While it could act as a vehicle of brute force, its main function was to channel conduits of stored energy into a single point, which could "fire" bolts of electricity at whatever its engineer chose. The "Lightning Ram", as it was called, was too slow, unwieldy, and unpredictable to use under normal circumstances, and even now, its functionality was called into question. But the leaders weren't about to suffer another defeat. The city that had orchestrated the downfall of Beryl and the rise of her usurper must suffer. Three of the leaders were chosen to pilot the vessel while the others rode in on triple-horned rhinos. Altogether their remaining forces amounted to three-hundred, plus the Lightning Ram.

Only Vainamoinen stood in their way.

The pilots of the Lightning Ram grinned savagely. The might of their army and their engine against a single, pitiful old man?

"Looks like we have our first victim," one of them laughed. The engine belched smoke and rolled forward, cheered by three-hundred bloodthirsty zealots. Vainamoinen's face darkened and he clutched his staff. Huge batteries, each as big as a man, whirred to life, directing their stored energy to the Ram's Lightning Cannon. More and more built up until the entire machine trembled under its unbearable power. Inside, the pilots each pulled the levers that would release the energy into a single concentrated bolt; the air crackled as huge tendrils of electricity coiled around the cannon, and were finally released, aimed directly at the old man.

"Manners," he muttered, holding his finger up. The energy blast flew directly at his finger, where it shrank and dissipated harmlessly. Before the army or the pilots could fully process the calamitous scale of their failure, Vainamoinen wound his arm around, thrust his finger at the machine, and emitted a blast of lightning with five times the power of the first, instantly obliterating it. He then smote the ground with his foot, and a crevasse great enough to contain a thousand people opened up. The earth shifted into a sharp decline, pouring every man and mount into the crevasse along with the remains of the Lightning Ram. He then gently passed his hand through the air, sealing the earth as neatly as a zipper, leaving only a hole small enough to breathe though. With that, he took a breath and fanned himself with his cap.

"That should hold them until the King decides what to do with them. I'll wager they'll take jail over the dismal cavern I've consigned them to. I believe that will suffice for my efforts." He put his cap back on and walked calmly back to Omashu; night had fallen and the battle was over when he arrived. When asked how he had fared by himself, Vainamoinen humbly muttered about having "turned away a man or two", only divulging his true prowess to the Princess later. Feeling that he would be more useful in the clinic, he was escorted there by two honor guards, and after spending the night tending to wounded, singing, telling stories, and passing out food, he was reunited with Setsuna and Usagi. The former was sporting a few bandages, but was otherwise in good spirits, while the latter was chatting with Naru, Umino, and her new friend Anshar. Setsuna offered him a smile as she sat next to him.

"You see? My vision came to pass: three good friends meeting up after a long absence."

"Yes, but I still do not understand why..." He trailed off as he noticed Usagi laughing with Anshar and Kishar. The little cabbit was chewing on her pigtails, causing her to squeal. The boy pried his pet away, said a few words, and Usagi laughed again. Realization slowly dawned on the old man. "You mean...the boy?"

Setsuna nodded. He stroked his beard in deep contemplation.

"I see... The defense of this city was important, yes, but the boy... Hmm, fascinating. Once again I must bow to your superior wisdom, my lady."

"Oh, don't make such a fuss," she said, waving him off. "I did cheat, after all. I'm as much in violation of the balance as you are."

"Not this time, I think," he said, carefully studying the way Usagi and Anshar socialized. A great deal more than the fate of an entire city might rest on their newfound friendship.

The end of "Return to Omashu"

Next time: "Makoto versus Marduk"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

14: Makoto versus Marduk

Makoto took a moment to rub her face and clear all the cobwebs out of her head. She and Ami had been compiling all the relevant information on Avatars, Kalkin, and mysterious circumstances that Wan Shi Tong could find, and even though they had nearly filled an entire book on their own, it still didn't seem to be enough. Gi, Kwame, and their monk friend (what was his name? Kun We?) had been an enormous help, and their gracious host was always eager to supplement their studies, but...it simultaneously felt overwhelming and insufficient. Ami had scrutinized and re-read everything carefully but none of it seemed like it would really help.

"Perhaps we've gleaned all that we could," Ami said as she wrapped up a scroll. "I think it's time we called it quits and headed back. I'm sure everyone else is worried about us. Maybe they've come up with something else."

"Yeah, maybe," Makoto sighed. She felt drained, lethargic, beleaguered. Worst still, she felt like all of this had been a waste of time. The Library contained a wealth of information but very little of it was helpful or even relevant. Still, as proud of his collection as he was, Wan Shi Tong was not the only fountain of knowledge in the world. If they combined what they had learned with Rei and Minako's discoveries, who knows what they'd uncover? If anything, it would ease Minako's concerns. Makoto packed up all the copies everyone had made together and assembled Ami, Gi, Kwame, and...Ou Ping? Jiu Pak? She felt embarrassed for never asking their escort's name before.

"An Shu, miss," he said.

"Right, sorry about that. Lately it seems like my mind's been slipping."

"That's perfectly all right. To this day I still don't know the names of all my brothers and sisters in the temple. But we are many, and I am young. So: I hear that you are ready to return to Ba Sing Se." She nodded.

"We've learned as much as we could here. All that's left is to rejoin the others and hope that Usagi is okay."

"At least now we know more than when we arrived," Ami noted. "I'd say our new knowledge of the Fomoriians, the Tears of Apsu, and the history of the Avatars has answered a lot of questions. Not all of them, but maybe enough for now."

"Excuse me," Kwame said, "but would you happen to be passing by the Kolau Mountains on your way? Gi and I will be meeting some friends of ours there." Ami and Makoto looked at each other and shrugged.

"We don't mind making a detour, but you'd better ask Mr. Shu there. It's his air-bison."

"The Kolau region isn't very far out of our way," he answered. "Seeing as how these two ladies aren't in any hurry, the delay of a day or two will make no difference."

"Thank you, my friend," Kwame said, clasping his hands together. Gi had been unusually quiet this whole time (she was thumbing through some art books), but when she heard they were leaving, she seemed a little crestfallen.

"Aww, already? I ain't never had so much fun in a li-barry before, but I reckon we best get. I got enough on Avatar Betty-Sue to last the crick a good ten or so years—but I'll be back if Wan Shi Tong ever gets more stories on her!" The spirit's plumage rippled with delight.

"Ho hoo, I shall scour the world in search of the most obscure tidbits, my dear. Seldom have I seen such excitement for knowledge. Well, my friends, it has been a great pleasure hosting you all. Indeed, you have made this old spirit quite happy with your enthusiasm and...hmm, contributions. Yes." He gazed once more at the jewel of the Fomorii, extricating himself from its gleam slowly as he escorted everyone out. The five patrons jerked to a sudden halt as they came to the entrance, as two more figures stood blocking their way. Ami and Makoto recognized them at once: Marduk and Nabu.

"It's you two!" Ignorant of their identity, Wan Shi Tong merely flapped his wings.

"Ah, more visitors? Goodness me, I haven't seen a crowd like this in years. Welcome to my most magnificent collection of knowledge, ladies."

"We didn't come here to study, lord spirit," Marduk stated. She pointed to Ami and Makoto. "We have a score to settle with those two."

"What kinda score?" Gi said. She adapted an unusual water-bending stance while Kwame stood by, placid but on guard.

"None of your business, whoever you are. We just want those two."

"EXCUSE ME," Wan Shi Tong thundered, his voice causing the entire building to shake. "I don't know what sort of umbrage you carry but you will NOT bring it in here. My library is a place of knowledge, not violence. Either leave of your own volition or I'll maker you wish you still had the option!" Nabu and Marduk gazed up at the intimidating creature and relented a little.

"Of course," Nabu said coldly. "It was never our intention to bring our conflicts in here. Forgive us, lord." She gave Marduk an icy expression and backed away first, followed by her friend. Makoto and Ami came out next, with Gi and Kwame following. Gi took Makoto by the arm.

"Hey, if you need me to step in for ya, I'm ready to brawl! Them two ain't got no hospitality, struttin' into a holy place lookin' for a fight."

"Nobody will be fighting anybody, Gi," Kwame said. "We need to solve this peacefully. Ma-Ti would want it that way." Gi frowned and grumbled, but acquiesced to his wisdom.

"Gol durn it, fine. But if it comes down to fisticuffs, then all bets're off."

"It won't."

"Oh, it will," Marduk snarled, calling forth a halo of stones. She felt a hand touch her shoulder, and turned to see a resolute Nabu.

"No, I think he's right. A battle now would be pointless."

"Why, because they outnumber us?"

"Yer darn right!" Gi roared. Nabu sighed.

"Think about it, Marduk: the last time we faced their group, that tall girl threw an entire tree at us. She was able to bend its branches and ensnare all five of us. I have never heard of such a technique, and if we were to go up against it again, the outcome would be the same." Marduk gnashed her teeth, but if Nabu was anything, she was straightforward and true.

"So...what then? Did we just come all this way for nothing?"

"No, but we need to think of a different way of settling things."

"Like what?"

"How bout' a rasslin' match?" Gi called. "I betcha I can pin both o' ya with one leg tied behind my back!"

"Or I could propose a match of Pai Sho, and your side would lose," Nabu countered icily. "I can assure you, I have yet to meet an opponent I could not defeat."

"I'll take that challenge," Ami said boldly. "I can't guarantee I'll be any good, but I can give it my best."

"Very well. What does your side propose for Marduk?"

"I don't know," Makoto murmured. "What's she good at?"

"Earth-bending, for one," she grinned, but Makoto was forced to admit her opponent would have the upper hand. Marduk then mentioned her skills in cooking, which immediately enticed Makoto. They would conduct a cooking contest, with Nabu, Ami, Gi, Kwame, and An Shu acting as judges. Gi actually liked this idea even more than wrestling, and the whole group declared a temporary truce while they flew off to the closest town to gather supplies. Each contestant was given fifteen minutes to gather any ingredients she wanted, ten minutes to prepare their dishes, and forty-five to cook them. They would each make one appetizer, one entree, and one dessert, and to make judgment fair, nobody would know who had made what dish until the end. A few of the locals got wind of the event and decided it would be something fun to spectate, so they were given a good kitchen in one of the best hotels and free reign of all the equipment. Rumors spread that two "friends of the Avatar" were going up against a "rival group", and soon a crowd had gathered. They even managed to find a Master of Ceremonies.

The hotel was soon stuffed to capacity with onlookers, with the panel of five judges in the background and a station for cooking on each side. A small band of musicians struck up a jaunty tune as the decorated emcee walked to the center of the stage.

"Hello everybody, and welcome! Now, let's get started with today's cook-off! I will be your host today. My name is Fu Tan Chen." The crowd applauded as the emcee bowed. "First, I'd like to introduce today's panel of judges. Her expression and her taste in food are completely stone-cold! It's the calculating water-bender, NABU! Hailing from the Swampland of the southern Earth Kingdom, this feisty lass can't resist a good crawdad gumbo! Say hello to GI! Our third water-bender this evening is a blue-haired maiden of mild temperament and solid judgment who mostly enjoys seafood. Give it up for AMI! He enjoys exotic food with plenty of spices; give a warm welcome to the son of the Si Wong, KWAME! Finally, he's a monk from the Northern Air Temple, so it's a safe bet that he's vegetarian! Presenting AN SHU! These judges will be evaluating today's dishes! Okay, now let's introduce our challengers! This young lady is an undisputed master of sculleries across the northwestern territories. She's gone from waitress to hostess to master chef, and is rumored to have cooked for General Nephrite himself. It's MARDUK!" The crowd applauded again as Marduk walked out and bowed.

"And now the other challenger: this tomboyish wood-bender is strictly amateur, but rumor has it her dishes are the favorites of kings and generals alike. A close personal friend of Avatar Usagi, it's MAKOTO!" Stagehands focused their lights on Makoto as she walked out, and the crowd cheered. "The judgment will be based on three dishes. Now please take your places and get ready to cook." Makoto and Marduk approached their stations, each assisted by a volunteer chef, surrounded by the ingredients they had chosen. Makoto knew exactly what Ami liked to eat, and Gi hadn't been shy about her favorite foods, but Kwame and Nabu would be much harder to please. Makoto didn't think she'd be able to satisfy everybody, but she certainly made an attempt at it. Once everything was prepared, they signaled the emcee.

"It looks like they're ready," he announced. "Okay, go ahead and cook. C'mon everybody, let em' hear it! Let the cook-off...BEGIN!" A gong sounded, and the two women raced to chop, stir, fry, dice, mix, boil, bake, and garnish their dishes. While they were doing this, Ami and Nabu had their Pai Sho match. Nabu hadn't been boasting about her expertise: she opened her match with the careful deliberation of a master studying her opponent. She had played Pai Sho with countless people across several countries, and had indeed never lost a match before. Ami played very defensively, keeping guard over her most valuable pieces while forming intricate webs of offense and support. She drew blood first by claiming two of Nabu's pieces in one move, but Nabu paid her back by taking five.

Neither spoke a word during their match; they were too entrenched in concentration. Ami didn't have nearly as much experience as her rival, and couldn't boast the same winning streak, but she learned quickly and made several unusual moves that Nabu wasn't prepared for. The match soon became so intense that may of the spectators were turning their attention away from the cooking, and soon bets were being made on the winner. Neither girl let the pressure get to them, though Ami's emotional barrier was much softer than Nabu's. She showed concern whenever one of her pieces was in danger, or taken away, and sighed with relief when she escaped, or took a piece of her own.

Eventually their back-and-forth became rapid-fire, and it was difficult to tell who was winning. Seasoned Pai Sho players were fully absorbed in the match, their hearts racing as they spotted familiar moves, their shouts boisterous as the girls made mistakes or emerged triumphant. The cheering died as Nabu made a move that almost guaranteed her victory, but Ami came back and leveled the playing field again—this time, for good. Nabu sat transfixed as she studied the board, all pieces save two lost. Stalemate. She wasn't sure what to make of it.

"Fascinating," she murmured, carefully considering the events that had led up to this. "I have never ended any of my games in a tie. Well, you have earned my respect. What was your name again?" Ami introduced herself and Nabu did the same. She then reached her hand out, and Ami shook it. Then, in an act rarer than flowers in winter, she smiled. "I have never been challenged like that before. I would like to play you again sometime."

"That would be lovely," Ami said, feeling relieved. "But let's not worry about settling scores and just have fun, okay?" Nabu nodded and the smile went away. Just in time, Makoto and Marduk finally completed their dishes and were ready to present them. The emcee came back out:

"It looks like they've finished cooking all three dishes. First, let's see what the judges thought of Marduk's appetizer: spinach cake! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 3, 4, 2, 3, and 4. "Now let's see how they judged Makoto's appetizer: tofu gumbo! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 1, 3, 4, 4, and 4. "Next, we'll see how the judges liked Marduk's main dish: vichyssoise! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 4, 4, 1, 2, and 5. "Now we'll see what they thought of Makoto's main dish: artichoke lasagna! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 2, 4, 3, 3, and 5. "Let's see now how the judges liked Marduk's dessert: mango custard pie! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 4, 3, 2, 4, and 4. "And finally, let's see how they liked Makoto's dessert: baklava! Okay, show us your scores!" The judges scored 3, 3, 3, 4, and 4. "The judging is complete. Let's see how those scores total up." After tallying up all the numbers, Marduk had a total of forty-nine while Makoto had a total of fifty. A fanfare went off, to Makoto's amazement as much as Marduk's.

"As you can see, the winner of today's cook-off is Makoto! Well, I'm afraid it's time to say goodbye for now. Thanks for joining us and we'll see you next time. Buh-bye!" The emcee walked off the stage, leaving the crowd to cheer. Stunned, both chefs approached each other.

"I can't believe it all came down to a single point's difference," Makoto said. Marduk nodded.

"Yeah. The scores were all over the place, too. I guess this means we're basically even." Makoto nodded numbly, crossing her arms as she processed all this. Finally, Marduk said, "So where did you learn how to make tofu gumbo?"

"I didn't. This was my first time making it."

"Wow, really? You could have fooled me!"

"Me, too," Gi said. "It tasted just the way maw-maw made it, cept' she uses gator meat instead o' tofu."

"Well, I didn't want to upset An Shu. I'm glad it turned out okay. Where did you learn to make mango custard pie?"

"A few kitchens across the northwestern Earth Kingdoms specialize in it."

"Really? I've never even heard of it until now. Could you give me that recipe?" Marduk chuckled.

"Only if you give me that tofu gumbo recipe!" The two girls grinned and shook hands, all thoughts of settling scores long forgotten.

…...

As the spectators left the hotel, the seven travelers dined together on the leftover food. Makoto and Marduk constantly complimented each other on their dishes, while Gi simply devoured them, her table manners leaving much to be desired. Over the course of time, everyone began chatting with everyone else, and it soon became clear that there was no need to be enemies. Makoto and Ami told the others about their harrowing adventures several months earlier, of how they had all met and banded together to right wrongs and triumph over evils. Usagi's spontaneous ascension as the Avatar was of particular interest, as was her fight with Beryl. When they came to the present moment, detailing Usagi's sudden departure and their mission to uncover the mysteries surrounding her, Nabu and Marduk exchanged a meaningful look.

"We're doing almost the exact same thing," Marduk said. "Suen wanted to learn more about Kalkin, so we followed his trail out to the Hinterlands—those four islands between the Southern and Eastern Air Temples. I think we ran into those Tears of Apsu you mentioned."

"Really?" Makoto hissed. "What happened?" The girls took a deep breath and told their story, which—albeit more brief—was just as compelling. Makoto and Ami turned pale and looked at Gi and Kwame. "Have you two ever seen anything like that?" Gi shook her head, but Kwame's face darkened.

"Not personally, but I've heard rumors of their existence in the black market. Traders either buy them or smuggle them in. I hear even one costs a small fortune."

"Beryl had them all over her prisons," Ami murmured grimly. "She even wore them in her jewelry. There's no telling when she first learned about them, or for what else she used them for."

"Most likely they were defensive tools she utilized in her campaigns," Nabu reasoned. "A bender who was suddenly robbed of their ability would make for easy prey." She looked at Marduk, who was hanging her head in contemplation. Marduk's parents had been killed in one of the many wars waged back then, and she was wondering if they were victims of Beryl's deadly gems. Nabu drew a sharp breath. "In any case, now we know what they are and what they are capable of. We can defend against them accordingly should we encounter them again."

"Which hopefully we won't," Ami said. "So what do you two plan on doing now?"

"I honestly cannot say," Nabu replied softly. She closed her eyes, trying to sort out all the clack and bracken. The more she thought about it, the more she was convinced that whatever had taken over their friend Suen, it wasn't the same entity that now possessed Usagi. Whatever it or its purpose was, one thing was abundantly clear: one was far more malicious than the other. Usagi had attempted to reach out to them, make compromises, and wanted to avoid fights; Suen had been the type to strike first and speak later. Both Nabu and Marduk knew that wasn't their friend's inherent nature, and nothing else seemed to account for the radical shift. But they wanted to be absolutely certain before they committed to anything.

"Tell me: what all did you learn at Wan Shi Tong's library?" she asked. Ami turned glum.

"Not very much, I'm afraid. There's never been an instance of two Avatars existing at the same time, and nothing could explain why Usagi can't bend outside of the Avatar State. We don't even know what happened to Kalkin, except that he must have died around sixteen years ago. We did learn about the Tears of Apsu, though, so that's something."

"I see. And you say you have friends searching Fire Temple and Air Nomad archives as well? Well, as it just so happens, two members of our group, Nergal and Ishtar, were heading towards those areas as well. They'll probably run into your friends."

"Oh dear," Ami whispered fretfully. Nabu gave her an encouraging, if unemotional, expression.

"I would not worry too much. Ishtar is an air-bender, so she is very pacifistic. The last thing she would seek is a fight. As for Nergal, she may be annoying and a bit of a hot-head..."

"You can say that again," Marduk muttered. Nabu smirked.

"But she has a good heart. I do not believe she would engage your friend without good reason. I will not make account of Suen at this time, and I would prefer to keep my reason in private, but my point is that it would be of more benefit for all of us if we could pool our discoveries and solve this issue together."

"That's exactly what we want," Makoto said. She explained that they would be returning to Ba Sing Se, after a brief layover in the Kolau Mountains, and Nabu and Marduk were welcome to come along, so long as it was all right with An Shu. He, of course, was thrilled with the idea of a peaceful discourse, and stated that he and his bison would be ready to leave whenever they wished. Before they left, though, Marduk took Makoto's arm, an apologetic look in her eye.

"Hey, um, so, uh...I just wanted to say that I was sorry for earlier. And I don't just mean at the library: I'm sorry for fighting you all and for going after your friend. I...I don't want to make excuses, I just want to do the right thing." Makoto's mouth warmed into a slow smile, and she pulled Marduk in for a hug. The other girl stiffened, not used to such spontaneous shows of affection—or forgiveness.

"Thanks, Marduk. You're a good chef and a great friend. Sorry for throwing a tree at you all." Marduk snickered and even Nabu let out a little chuckle. On the way to An Shu's bison, Gi pulled Makoto aside.

"Hey, izzat true? Didja really throw a tree at them?"

"Uh, yeah, a pine, root and all." The other girl blanched and whistled through her teeth.

"Got dang. That is awesome beyond my capacity for description."

…...

Ami and Makoto waved farewell as Gi and Kwame walked off into the distance. Their goodbyes had been brief, but only because Kwame saw it as temporary. Extraordinary people, he believed, had a habit of meeting ("How else would you explain how you met Gi?" he had added with a smile). The day had worn too far into evening to think about pressing on, so the remaining five travelers decided to camp out and set out the next morning. An Shu knew the area a little and volunteered to look for food, while everyone else settled in. Having spent a good portion of her life outdoors, Makoto could make a campfire almost as well as any fire-bender, and soon the four girls had a merry one crackling. Marduk and Nabu wanted to take a bath, so they wandered off to a nearby river, leaving Makoto and Ami completely alone.

This turn of events was definitely not lost on the young water-bender. She blushed as she imagined what new developments would come of it.

"Yeesh," Makoto cringed as Ami sat next to her. "Maybe I should've gone to bathe with the others. I smell like bison." Ami giggled.

"Well, we have been riding on one for several hours. I'd say all those onions and garlic you two used are overpowering it."

"Really?" Makoto smelled herself and shrugged. "Not exactly lilac and hawthorn, eh?"

"It's fine," Ami chuckled, "we'll be back in Ba Sing Se before long. There you can take a nice, long, luxurious bath in the palace's washrooms." Makoto shivered in delight at the thought of it; then, having nothing else to do, she called a small log to her hand and began whittling it. Ami sat in perfect, silent contentment for a long time, wishing to be nowhere else, with nobody else, doing nothing else.

"I wonder how those five met," Makoto murmured eventually. Ami sat up. "I mean Nabu and Marduk and the other three. I wonder what drew them together and made them friends."

"Maybe you could ask them when they get back. You know, now that you mention it, they remind me of our group."

"Yeah, a little, except they have an earth-bender and we don't."

"We've got Mamoru."

"Yeah, but he's a king now. He really can't travel with us like he used to." Ami smiled humbly and edged closer, fulfilling a secret wish by touching the back of Makoto's hand.

"We've got a wood-bender with us, though. Nobody else can say that." Makoto smiled humbly, and there was silence between them again. Ami was now beginning to feel a little awkward, and anxious. She knew that Nabu and Marduk would be back soon, bereaving her of this private moment. She thought back on what Minako had told her, and how encouraging she had been. If ever there was a time to let Makoto know how she felt...oh, but she couldn't just blurt it out, and she was terrible at romance, and her own feelings felt jumbled and misconstrued... Oh, she wished that Minako was here again to advise her on what to do—but if she was, then they wouldn't be having this moment. Ami was on her own.

"Mako," she began nervously, a lump forming in her throat as she addressed the other woman informally, "I...I'm really glad you came along with me. I...I'm happy I could have you for company."

"And I was happy to come along," she smiled as she whittled. "I didn't think I'd have much to do at a library, but I learned a lot, and I met some great people. I even got to have a cooking contest! I can't say that happens every day."

"I know," Ami laughed. She looked directly into Makoto's eyes—or forced herself to, rather, as she was embarrassed to stare. But Makoto kept her focus. Ami took a breath. "You're...a really great friend, Mako. I admit I was a little nervous joining you all—and not just because I was leaving the Northern Tribe, or that I was going into a dangerous situation. I wasn't sure how you all would react to...a stranger coming into your circle like that. But now I can scarcely imagine my life without it. Ah...I'm really...umm, really, ah..." Makoto chuckled softly and lightly tapped her fist to Ami's shoulder.

"You don't have to say it. We're grateful too, you know. I can't count the number of times you've saved our bacon. But it's more than that with me. I really didn't have too many steady friends in Omashu, and even fewer girl-friends. It was either Minako or nobody. Now I've got three...no," she amended after giving it some thought, "I think now I have six more. I want to add Nabu, Marduk, and Gi to that list." Ami smiled sweetly, nodding in agreement. So far so good.

Just tell her already. She might feel the same way! It certainly sounds like it—and even if she doesn't, Makoto isn't the sort to break anyone's heart. It's better for her to know than for you to be eaten alive with regret. And really, what better time than now? Who knows when you'll get an opportunity like this, when it's just the two of you? So tell her now, and come what may.

Ami swallowed. She might regret doing this...but she knew she'd regret it more if she didn't.

Here goes nothing.

She scooted closer and took Makoto's hand.

"And hopefully their other three friends as well. We can get rid of this animosity between our groups and work together. I'd really like that. You know, Mako... That sort of warmhearted optimism is what I love about you. You accepted me as a friend right from the moment we first met, and you've encouraged me and stood by me ever since. I'm always having fun with you, no matter what we're doing, and, well..." She blushed, braced herself, and refused to look away. "Makoto...I, I'm in love with you."

It took half a moment for Makoto to register what Ami had said, and another half for her to stiffen. Ami noticed the change and became crestfallen.

"Oh...uh, so you don't...feel the same?"

"Um, now wait just a minute," Makoto fretted, smiling and cringing at the same time. "Do you mean that like...in a friendly way, or..." Ami looked away timidly.

"Well, yes, but also..." She blushed. Makoto swallowed. She felt completely trapped, embarrassed, and worst of all, awful for what she must say.

"Oh! Um... Gee, Ami, I'm sorry, uh... L-listen, it's, uh..."

"No, it's fine," she murmured. "I rushed into it and blurted it out like a fool. I...I don't have any experience with this sort of thing at all, and..."

"H-hey, no, you got it all wrong!" she insisted, waving her hands. "Ah...I mean, I...I l-like you and all, b-but, um... This is going to sound awful, but I can't return your feelings. It's not that I don't want to, it's that I can't."

Ami didn't say anything. The frigid silence was unbearable. Makoto sagged forlornly.

"What I mean is that I'm in an arranged marriage, and I've been in one since before I was born. I know it's a stupid, awful excuse, but I clearly never told you, and I'm sorry for that. I thought I did, but...I guess I never told anybody. Usagi didn't know, either."

"Does Minako know?" Ami said quietly. It still stung.

"Yeah. She and Mamoru might have been the only ones that did know until recently. I...I know I screwed up, and I know it's a bad excuse, and...you can be mad at me if you want—I just..."

"It's okay, Makoto," Ami whispered, now almost fully turned away, "really. It was just a silly first crush of mine. I didn't think it would go anywhere."

"Hey, don't say that. Anybody would be happy to..." She cut herself off as Ami glanced back at her, and was unable to finish her thought. The two sat in dreary discomfort for a time.

"Say, Makoto..." Ami still hung her head but seemed a little bit livelier. "If...you weren't in an arranged marriage...would you..." She stopped herself, sat up fully, and shook her head. "You know what, don't answer that. It's pointless to think about what might have been. I'd much rather focus on whats happening now, and what will happen in the future. That would be best."

She finally smiled, which eased Makoto's conscience. She attempted to smile, too.

"You're a lot smarter than me, Ami—and stronger, too."

"Well," she whispered with a twinkle in her eye, "I don't know about that second part." They finally grinned, removing the tension that had built up. Ami felt some boldness rising and dared to take an impossible chance: "Makoto, could I ask for one request, just to get some closure?"

"Of course, what is it?" Ami steeled herself and took the plunge.

"Would it be all right if I kissed you? Just one time?" Makoto paled a little, then blushed. She had kissed only three people in her life, and all of them had been boys. But the request seemed simple, and harmless, and a good way of giving Ami some peace of mind. Makoto had braved swords and arrows for her friend; surely she could do this little service.

"Sure," she smiled. Ami's face brightened and her eyes sparkled. Little tears formed but didn't fall as she breathlessly drew closer.

"Thank you," she whispered, caressing Makoto's ponytail. She gently placed her lips on Makoto's mouth for an instant, drew in a little breath as their eyes met, and kissed her fully, savoring the sweet sensation. Makoto's heart fluttered a little upon first contact but went fully berserk as Ami held nothing back. She was taken completely off guard, not sure whether to reciprocate or just sit there dumbly. After a few seconds she silently admitted to herself that kissing Ami was fairly pleasant, and even kissed her back, until she was satisfied and withdrew. Both their faces were deep pink, their eyes shimmering in the firelight.

Then they noticed Nabu and Marduk standing there, watching them, towels wrapped around their hair.

"Don't let us interrupt you, ladies!" Marduk crowed. Calamity ensued.

"GAAH, IT'S NOT WHAT IT LOOKS LIKE!" Marduk laughed, and even Nabu grinned and let out a chuckle. Everyone soon stared at the usually aloof young woman, until the mirth left her and she was stoic again.

"What?" she said, then walked away calmly. Marduk looked amazed.

"And that, out of everything that's happened so far, has been the strangest of them all. Unreal. Well, I'm off to bed. Have fun, you two." She waved and wandered off as well. Ami and Makoto were too dumbstruck to do anything but sit there.

The end of "Makoto versus Marduk"

Next time: "Fire in the Sky"

Author's note:

The cooking contest was inspired by the cooking mini-game featured in Suikoden 2. The entire scene is nearly verbatim to the game, down to the name of the emcee.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

15: Fire in the Sky

The tranquility of Hikawa Shrine was broken by an explosion of flames and screaming. Flocks of birds screeched in protest as they flew out of the forest; steel clanged against iron and flesh. Kartta pressed her attack against the hideous creature, her gleaming sword against its deadly claws. Sparks flew as she slashed as the monstrosity again; another slash clipped its talons off, and a third removed the head. Without so much as drawing another breath she whirled around, defending herself against two more that had sprang from behind. A precise cleave, a parry, a retort issuing vile blood, a defensive brandish, a strike: it was over. Her eyes darted around fiercely, looking for more. She noticed she had gotten separated from the others and ran off where she had seen them last. Kartta skidded down the path, hearing a grunt, and ran towards it. She jumped out of the way as another creature leaped from the woods, narrowly missing her with its talons. She cut it instinctively, pausing only to observe the tip of a spear thrusting through its body.

"You beat me to it." Oboro stood on the other end, smiling dryly. He nodded towards the overgrowth, just as a tree shuddered and fell. Ku Sheng, Kotono, Salamander, and Suo had knocked it over and were now carrying it like a battering ram, bowling their way through a large cluster. Some creatures were knocked out or flattened, but most leaped away. A circle of fire trapped them and closed in; the flames leaped up into the hands of a boy, who shot them back at another crowd. The monstrosities let out a piercing wail as they were incinerated, but more supplemented their numbers. Kartta and Oboro plowed into their ranks, perforating a dozen, scattering the rest. A huge wall of fire blocked them from retreating; standing before it was a young woman with long black hair and blazing lavender eyes.

"There will be no escape for any of you," she called. "Prepare to be chastised!" As the creatures writhed in fear, trapped between a conflagration and a band of warriors, the birds they had scattered returned and descended upon them in fury, leaving none of them alive. Another young man stood off to the side, gasping for air.

"That was good, right? That was part of the plan? I didn't mess anything up?"

"You did great, Lark!" Ittou waved. Lark let out a sigh of relief.

"Thank goodness! I wasn't sure if it would work. Is everyone all right?"

"We're fine," Kotono answered. She glanced at Rei and nodded. "We make quite a good team. Hopefully we got them all this time."

"No kidding," Rei said, dusting her hands off as she joined her cousins. "I thought we had seen the last of them when we sent the spirit of decay back. I guess more slipped through than we thought."

"Whoa, there." Ittou spotted a stray ember and dissolved it. Nobody wanted any forest fires, so he and Rei had been very careful about setting and extinguishing them. Kotono watched with some pride as her little brother meticulously checked the area for any sparks. There had been a time when his mastery of fire-bending might have made her jealous, but she had long since moved past all that and had grown into her own person. Now she actually embraced her inability to bend, and would dare anyone to call her out on it. Suo helped stamp out a small blaze but panicked as a much larger pillar of flame shot out from nowhere.

"Look out!" He tackled Ittou to the ground and shielded the prince with his body. The column missed them but set a huge swath of the forest on fire. Rei immediately leaped into action and subdued the fire before it could spread; meanwhile Oboro and Kartta drew their weapons. Several more of those nasty monsters had appeared, but nearly all of them were now being consumed by the blaze.

"Careless," Kartta remarked as she covered her face from the smoke. "I haven't seen such an unrefined technique in a long time. What sort of bumbling fool could—"

"And take THAT!" A second line of fire streaked through the forest, killing many monsters but also taking much of the forest with it. The group heard someone laughing, but the joy quickly turned to panic as the unknown fire-bender realized what he had done. The damage was hastily undone, leaving behind only charred plants, plenty of smoke, and a coughing young man stumbling his way through the woods. Kartta advanced towards him but it was Ku Sheng who captured him. He let out a choked grunt as her fingers closed over his collar.

"Ye be still now," she warned him, "lest I crack your skull like an egg."

"Whoa, whoa! Hey, I'm still, I'm still!" He held his hands up in surrender while everyone else got a closer look at him. The young man's most remarkable feature was his bright red hair, a genetic rarity if ever there was one; he also wore a tan vest over a blue shirt, and had a ring on one of his fingers. Kotono glared at him with bridled fury.

"Tell us who you are, and what you're doing here, and what in the world possessed you to burn half the forest down like that."

"I didn't burn down half the forest," he squealed defensively. "The fires just got a little out of hand, is all. I put them out!"

"Oh, really? This boy and I did most of the work there," Rei snapped. The young man grinned, but his smile faded as he saw who she was referring to. Ittou looked just as surprised.

"Hey...I know you. Ku Sheng, let him go." Ku Sheng stiffened, wanting to obey her prince's order but unwilling to loosen this reckless knave. She grunted and let go of his collar.

"Okay, sire, though I don' feel comfortable doin' it."

"And give him space, everyone. He may not look like it or act like it, but this man's a very skilled bender."

"Hey, thanks, prince!" he grinned. "That's a high compliment coming from you."

"Wait," Kotono said, "you two know each other?"

"You mean you don't remember him?" Ittou said humbly. "This is the man who defeated me at dad's tournament." Kotono's mouth hung open as the redhead bowed.

"Joe Wheeler, at your service."

…...

Wheeler, as he insisted on being called, was quick to account for himself and his actions. He had been "running around" the Fire Nation on several mercy missions for the last two years, and Hikawa Shrine was his last stop before reuniting with his friends. He had avoided Beryl's forces during the chaos at the tournament and had worked in secret with several resistance members, striking back at small enclaves and rescuing several prisoners. When Jaedite's massive prison break took effect, he had helped rally and organize many hundreds of incarcerated citizens, and had even fought a little in the skirmishes that followed. He apologized for accidentally setting the forest on fire, but claimed that in his defense, "I probably took out twenty or thirty of whatever those ugly things were". After hearing his full story, Kotono decided to show some leniency, but warned him that any further mistakes would not be tolerated.

"Yeah," he exhaled, "I learned my lesson. Thanks for taking it easy on me, princess. I owe you one."

"You can pay me back by being more careful in the future. Anyway, I'd like for all of us to perform another sweep later today. Somehow I doubt we've seen the last of those monsters."

"Just what are those things, anyway?" Wheeler asked. Rei frowned.

"Minor evil spirits that crossed over after a spirit of decay broke into our world. We exorcised the spirit and destroyed most of those creatures, but like Kotono said, there's no telling how many more are out there." Wheeler grinned and flexed his arm.

"Well, if you need some help getting rid of them, then I'm your man!"

"No!" Kotono stated sharply. "I'm not going to risk another incident. I know you meant well, and I'm grateful for everything you've done for this country, but I can't fully trust you."

"Aww, come on," he groaned, "I'm good for it." Before Kotono could object, Oboro held up his hand.

"Might I suggest an alternative? He seems eager enough, and there's more than one way of helping. Let's have him patrol the shrine with Kasei and Yuichiro. I'm sure they'd be glad to have another strong pair of arms around." Kotono smiled.

"Great idea—but how about one more stipend? We should send Rei to keep an eye on him."

"What?!" she blurted, "Why me?!"

"Because I trust you to keep him on a short leash. He'd never behave himself if he went there by himself."

"What?" Wheeler shrieked. "Yes I would! I'm not a child, you know! Err, your highness."

"Be that as it may," she continued placidly, "she should go with you. Think of this as a way of proving yourself." Wheeler frowned, but he (and Rei) ultimately relented, and the party split up. Rei guided him back to the shrine, but she couldn't help but feel that this was some sort of punishment on Kotono's part. For one, Wheeler never stopped talking. Rei politely answered a few of his questions but that only seemed to encourage him. Plus, he was loud, and he made too many bad jokes. He had a few good stories from his time spent fighting Beryl's forces, but it wasn't worth putting up with him the rest of the time. He didn't even shut up when he climbed the long staircase up to the temple; he was still talking as he wheezed for air.

"Man! Who...in their right mind...built a temple...on a hill this...big?"

"To be closer to the heavens," Rei deadpanned. Unfortunately, Wheeler regained his breath.

"Ah. So what's your grandpa like, anyway? I never knew any of my grandparents. My mom and dad told me they had a cattle ranch out somewhere. Oh, wow, the cherry trees are in full bloom! Man, it feels like forever since I've seen one!" Rei let out an exasperated sigh but felt relieved as a figure approached her. For the first time since she could remember, she was honestly happy to see her nosy grandfather.

"Welcome back, Rei. Oh, and who did you stumble across while you were away, hmm? He doesn't look like a monster."

"Yeah, well, looks can be deceiving," she muttered.

"Hey, I heard that! I'll have you know I saved more people than you can count on my travels."

"I wonder how many forests you took out in the meantime," she countered. The two snarled at each other like wolves while Kasei Hikawa peered closer, rubbing his chin.

"Hmm? Oh, I see! You found yourself a boyfriend while you were away! Heheh, you work even faster than I do, Rei!"

"WHAT?! Grandpa, will you knock it off?! He's not my boyfriend! He's just some pyromaniac we found on patrol!"

"Hey, watch who you're calling a pyromaniac, lady!" Wheeler snapped. "Jeez, ya lose control once and you never hear the end of it."

"Maybe you should have paid better attention to your bending instructor!"

"I'm sorry, how many of those monsters did I take out just now?" Kasei chuckled softly.

"Are you certain you two aren't dating?"

"YES!" they both shouted. He backed off.

"Okay, just checking. In all seriousness, though, you should have better discipline, Rei. It doesn't become a shrine maiden of your standing to lose her cool like that."

"I know, but—"

"No!" Kasei exclaimed. "Exercise discipline, restraint, and wisdom at all times, Rei."

"Says the lecherous hypocrite," she grumbled through her teeth. She closed her eyes and took a deep breath, though. Her grandfather was right: she was not behaving properly to their guest, as uncouth as he was. If she could not show him a higher state of mind, then how was she any better? She turned to Wheeler and bowed humbly. "I'm sorry, I acted rashly. Please forgive me for how I behaved. You are welcome here, Wheeler."

Wheeler was so taken aback by the sudden change in this fiery damsel that he stiffened like a board. Words, for once, failed him.

"Um...yeah, I mean, uh...it's...no problem, I guess. Uhh, I mean, yeah, umm, I'm sorry too, for, uh...being a jerk and all."

"Good," Kasei said. "Now shake hands." They did so. "Good. Now, where shall you go on your first date? I'll need to chaperon, of course..."

"Oh, grandpa, will you let it rest? Wheeler's here to help around the shrine, and I need to get back to my studies." Kasei grumbled and puttered off, beckoning Wheeler to join him. The young man ran his fingers through his bright red hair.

"Is he always like that?"

"I'm afraid so," Rei sighed. They looked at each other and shared a genuine smile. "I guess we could try to get along." Wheeler winked and flexed his arm again.

"Hey, I can get along with anybody, especially a fellow fire-bender! Um, just so we're clear, you're not actually interested in me, are you?"

"Not even remotely," she grumbled. He sighed with relief.

"Whew! Good to know. I got a girl out there somewhere, and she isn't exactly the easygoing type. She'd really lay into me if she thought I was chasing after someone else. You know, you sort of remind me of her." Rei rolled her eyes.

"Ho boy, that old line. What, does she argue with you incessantly?"

"Sometimes," he muttered sheepishly. His face turned soft as he elaborated, "But mostly...you're both very strong people. I don't know you as well as I know her, but I get the feeling you're the kind of girl who doesn't back down without a fight. It's the same with her. She hates bullies, and isn't afraid of anything, but she can also be really gentle and compassionate. She also puts up with all my yammering," he added with a grin. Rei chuckled a little.

"Hey, you lovebirds! If you can tear yourselves away from each other long enough, I've got a lot of chores I need help with!" The two turned pale as Kasei yelled at them. Wheeler shrugged.

"Better not keep the old guy waiting. I'll catch you later, umm... Hey, you never told me y—"

"It's Rei," she answered blithely. He nodded.

"See you around, Rei." Wheeler ran off after her grandfather, leaving Rei to reflect. Wheeler was still a pain, but...maybe not such a bad person. She soon returned to the temple archives and pulled down a manuscript detailing more of Avatar Han's life. If there were any clues to be found, Rei felt that this would be the place to look.

She slept badly that night and didn't even get a chance to wash up the next morning: her grandfather was shouting something about a guest come to see her. She couldn't even guess who it might be: her friends had scattered to the four corners of the earth, while her enemies... A cold feeling punched her gut as she remembered there were five very powerful benders who had tried to kill Usagi earlier, so she dressed in a hurry and ran outside. She spotted her grandfather and Wheeler chatting and laughing with a red-haired girl on a nearby bench. Rei had only met the girl once in her life but would have recognized Nergal from anywhere. Their eyes met and Nergal leaped to her feet.

"It's you!" Rei took a defensive stance while Nergal did the same. "What do you want?"

"That's sort of a loaded question, isn't it?" Nergal countered. "I was hoping to run into your pig-tailed friend, but I guess I'll settle for you instead. Where is she, by the way?"

"As if I'd tell you," Rei growled. "What about you? Where's your false Avatar?"

"I wouldn't know, ours is the real thing."

"Funny, I was just thinking the same about Usagi." Kasei had been following their banter for awhile but now he had heard enough. He clapped his hands loudly and stepped between the two girls.

"All right, that's enough! Rei, what did I tell you about discipline?"

"Grandpa, not now."

"Rei!" he barked. "Exercise discipline, restraint, and wisdom at all times. All times, Rei!" Rei gnashed her teeth, frowning grimly, her eyes aflame. Nergal matched her expression perfectly. Wheeler grunted.

"Do...you two know each other?"

"In a sense," Rei said. Nergal nodded.

"We've met once." He scratched his head and looked to Kasei.

"Is Rei always like this?"

"I'm afraid so," he sighed, nodding his head. "And I have no idea where she gets it. Her mother was so refined and mild-mannered..."

"Grandpa, not now."

"ALL TIMES, REI!" He cleared his throat meekly. Slowly, Rei relaxed her guard.

"My grandfather considers you a guest to our temple, Nergal, so you'll be treated like one. As a guest, however, you ought to act accordingly. Do you understand?"

There was a tense pause.

"Yes." She relaxed as well. Wheeler glanced between the two girls and grinned.

"Wow! This discipline stuff really works! Heh, maybe I should try it out on Linka sometime!"

"So now that we're all friends," Kasei said, rubbing his chin as he leered at the newcomer, "or at least not trying to hurt each other, what's your business here, young lady? Are you, uh, going to work at the shrine, too? I could definitely use another pretty face around here."

"Grandpa, I swear," Rei grumbled, covering her face in exasperation. Even Nergal cringed.

"Eww, no, I'm here for your granddaughter."

"Oh?" His eyebrows wiggled and a little ruby tinged his cheeks. "Are you two dating? I had a suspicion that Rei was like that." Fire sprang out of Rei's mouth as she berated the old man.

"Grandpa, don't you have chores to get to?! Next time keep your dirty mouth shut!" Kasei ran away shrieking, Wheeler in tow. Nergal's face was a cross between perplexity and disgust.

"Is he always like that?"

"Sad to say, he is. Well, now that we're alone, what did you want to see me about?" Nergal clammed up, clenching and unclenching her fists, grumbling shyly. Her eyes darted from the ground to Rei and back again.

"If I'm being completely honest...I have no reason to treat you like an enemy. Suen—that's the blonde girl we all follow—she thinks your pig-tailed friend is a false Avatar. I agreed with her at first, but lately...I'm not so sure. She's been acting...strangely. She's more violent and prone to unprovoked outbursts. Please bear in mind, she's normally a very kindhearted person, and probably the best friend you could ask for. She always knows how to brighten your day, and...she's had a hard life, so she really empathizes with people. I don't even think I'd be alive today without her. Something's made her change, and we all—the other three girls and me, I mean—we think it has to do with whatever took residence inside of her, if that's the correct term. The thing that makes an Avatar the Avatar."

"You mean Raava."

"Yeah, that's what she called it. Raava...if it really is Raava...changed her for the worst. What we're afraid of is...maybe whatever is in your friend now is going to change her, too, and work horrible deeds through her."

"That's absurd," Rei muttered sharply. "Everything I've read or heard about Raava says that she's the good one; she works wonders through everyone she comes to embody. Think about it: have you ever heard of an Avatar going sour?"

"No," Nergal admitted numbly, "but I'm not exactly an expert on the subject." Rei studied her counterpart for a moment, remembering a lesson taught to her by her grandfather many years ago, seeing an opportunity.

Aha, very good. A natural martial artist and a fire-bender, yes. You definitely take after my side of the family! But Rei, there's one more lesson I want to share with you, and I want you to remember it first and foremost. Any old fool can strike someone else, but only a true master can turn an enemy into a friend. It is the highest form of martial arts you can achieve.

"My grandfather is," Rei said, and as she spoke, she slowly extended her hand, palm opened, to someone who had once tried to kill her and the Avatar. "He has an amazing library in the temple, and it's filled to the brim with all sorts of history and lore: about the Avatars, the Spirit World, anything you could imagine. I was actually looking through a few documents myself yesterday. If...you want, I could let you look around, too. We could...try and find some answers to all of this together."

Nergal looked at Rei with a mixture of doubt, bewilderment, humility, and joy. She didn't know what to say, so she was silent. Finally, she took a breath.

"You'd...trust me like that?"

"What do you mean?" Rei said, smiling softly. "You're a fire-bender, I'm a Fire Priestess, and this is a Fire Temple. My grandfather called you a guest, so it's my duty to accommodate you and see to your needs. But it would also be my pleasure, Nergal." Nergal felt her throat constrict as a tear formed in her eye. She rubbed it out and smiled shakily as she approached Rei.

"That...would be wonderful. But I don't know your—"

"Rei." The two girls smiled at each other, and together, they entered the temple archives. "You know, Nergal, there's this scroll about Avatar Han that I've been looking at. I think you may be interested in it..."

…...

"There!"

Minako and Linka swooped in on the galleon, swerving around cannon fire and flaming arrows. As Linka expertly guided Ivanushka through the hailstorm, Minako vaulted off his back, calling a small typhoon to shatter the ship's masts. The sails buckled and burst under the pressure; ropes snapped and flailed; the ship's cargo was blown off into the ocean, along with a few deckhands. Knowing better than to get too close, Minako landed atop the mainmast, kicked the watch before he could draw his sword, and ripped the flag off. She signaled to Linka and hurled herself off, using a gust of wind to propel herself away. A few cannons still shot after her, but Linka caught the iron orbs in a swift breeze and hurled them back, punching holes in the ship and even destroying one of the cannons. The girls made one more pass and united their bending to tip the broken galleon on its side, tossing everything not tied down into the sea. Minako let out a loud cheer as Ivanushka circled around and headed back to the temple.

"That's the last one, baby! Whoo! We are smokin'!"

"That is right!" Linka chimed in. "Do not mess with air-benders! We are the greatest people in the world!" She and Minako exchanged a high five, grinning all the way. Their exuberance was wrested away when they returned home, though, as they saw five air-bisons circling around with a buzz of benders surrounding them. Ivanushka landed just outside of the fray; Linka and Minako hopped off and ran to the center of the commotion to see what the excitement was about. They heard it long before they saw it.

"Hey, what do you think you're doing? Not so rough there, guys, I told you I come in peace! Ow—hey, is this how you treat a lady?! And a fellow air-bender, at that? Don't you have any manners? C...come on, ow!"

"What is this?!" Linka demanded as she shoved her way through. The other benders parted a little, showing four men holding fast to a wriggling young woman. She had long blonde hair and wore the traditional orange robe and blue arrows of an air-bender. Linka glared at their behavior and wasted no time berating them. "Since when did it take four men to subdue one girl? And look, she is an air-bender! How dare you show our kinswoman such discourtesy?!"

"Yeah! You tell em'!" the prisoner exclaimed.

"You do not understand, Linka," one of them replied. "We were all minding our own business when she appeared suddenly from out of nowhere. You must concede that anyone who does that—"

"What do you mean, appeared suddenly from out of nowhere?"

"Exactly that. One moment there was nothing, and the next, there she was! It was as though she had been invisible this whole time."

"What nonsense!" Linka snorted. "You all have been drinking too much rice wine."

"But Linka—" She glared and crossed her arms.

"Even if you expect me to believe this incredible tale, she is still one of us. She should not be treated so roughly. Hand her over to me and I shall take her to see Boris." The other monks grumbled to themselves, but Linka had a lot of influence around the temple, and going against her was seldom a good idea. They released the girl, who instantly returned the favor with a rude gesture. The monks snarled like wild apes but Linka silenced them.

"Enough. I sincerely apologize for their behavior, miss. We are all very agitated around here, and I am afraid these men have taken their battle-fury home with them."

"Bah," she huffed, smoothing out the wrinkles on her clothes. "I guess I can't be too mad at them. I really did pop in from out of nowhere. Anyway, who's this Boris guy? Is he cute?"

"I... What?" Perplexed, Linka stood there as the girl marched onward, humming to herself. She only stopped when she crossed paths with Minako. The two stared at each other incredulously for a moment.

"Hiya!"

"Um, hi. You're, uh..."

"Ishtar! And you?"

"Mi...Minako."

"Ah, how do ya do?" Ishtar grabbed Minako's hand and shook it. "Yeah, sorry about my friends attacking your friends awhile back. A lot of crazy things have happened since then and...hey, do you have anything to eat around here? I'm starving!"

Minako and Linka looked at each other, positively stunned.

Boris had to work very hard to keep himself from laughing. The story behind Ishtar's spontaneous appearance had now spread across half the temple, but having it confirmed by the very subject herself was nothing short of comedic. On top of that, she was a genuinely funny person (as some air-benders had proven themselves to be), and her thoughts seemed to be all over the place (plus, she flirted with Boris, calling "dibs" the moment she saw him). She was welcomed, in any case, and once most of the mirth had left him, Boris asked the purpose behind her surprise visit.

"Oh yeah, I almost forgot. This is very important, now, so hopefully I don't forget anything or say anything weird."

"Please, take your time and relax," Boris gestured. "It would be a pleasure to endure your charms."

"Oh, why thank you," she tittered, playing with her hair. Ishtar then explained her relationship with Suen, and Suen's relationship with the entity who had come to inhabit her. She related how their second encounter with Usagi had resulted in a total group defeat and (what she assumed) the loss of Suen's connection with the entity. She then told of how the entity had changed their friend over time, of how violent and vitriolic she had become, and quickly glossed over all the various theories her friends had on the nature of this creature. Finally, she spoke of how she had come to cross vast distances in a single moment, just to be here.

"Suen thinks I'm going after Minako there," Ishtar concluded, pointing her thumb at the other girl. "She wants to draw the other Avatar out and thinks going after her friends is the key. But I'm against that." She turned to see Minako's reaction, and found relief gracing her features. "I've been against a lot of the things that Suen did. I almost didn't even join her group. I'm very much a pacifist, you see."

"That is good to hear," Boris said. "So what made you change your mind?" Ishtar blushed shyly and smiled, glancing away.

"My best friend Nabu went along with her. Nabu and I have been close since childhood. I figured...if I didn't go with her, what sort of friend would I be?"

"And that is the only reason?" Ishtar shrugged.

"I didn't need any other reason. I didn't even know Suen or any of the other girls. If they were all right by Nabu, then they were all right by me."

"I see." He sat back, contemplating this humble but heartfelt reasoning, smiling slowly. He leaned forward again and said, "But you came here by yourself. Did you have a falling-out with your friends?"

"No," Ishtar murmured, "I had my reasons for coming here alone. I wanted to try and make peace between Suen and the other Avatar. Um...gosh, I'm sorry, what was her name again?" She looked over fretfully at Minako, who answered. "Right, right, Usagi, gotcha. Anyway, the way I see it, our two sides shouldn't be fighting at all. It shouldn't matter who's the fake Avatar and who's the real one, right? Aren't they both working for the same thing? Don't they both have the same goal?"

The room was silent as each person considered what Ishtar had said. Boris and Linka weren't as familiar with her as Minako was, so they could more readily acquiesce to her way of thinking. For her part, Minako was glad to put all the animosity behind her. She didn't fully trust Ishtar just yet, but she wanted to give her the benefit of the doubt. She seemed sincere, and furthermore, she was an air-bender. If Minako couldn't trust that, then what could she trust?

"Usagi would definitely agree with you there," Minako said. "And for what it's worth, I feel the same way. But what about the rest of your friends? You said you wanted to come here alone; am I to assume they don't all feel the same?"

"I honestly don't know," Ishtar whispered. "But I had to try, right? Suen thinks that...whatever causes people to become the Avatar is dangerous, and I think everyone else agrees. We've all noticed a lot of horrifying changes in her—even me, and I've only known her a few months. What about your friend? Is she behaving strangely?" Minako wanted to say that she wasn't, but then she remembered how Usagi had parted from them: the voices only she could hear, the irresistible urge to answer a summons, the vague color of her eyes, the shifting amble in her walk... And then there was the issue of her being unable to bend outside of the Avatar State. Was Raava really a part of Usagi, or was it some other creature? If so, who? Was this spirit dangerous? Minako wanted to stand by her friend but there were far too many unknown factors. She took a deep breath and decided to answer in the only way she could:

"Yes, she has. But I believe in Usagi, just as you must believe in your friend. Lately, we...we all split up so we could solve this mystery of the two Avatars. My path led me here. I still don't have any answers, but I refuse to believe my decision was wasted. After all, I've done a lot of good here, and I met Linka and Boris—and I met you. Your decision wasn't a waste either, Ishtar. I think we were all meant to find each other. Linka, Boris, how long do you think it'll take Artemis to heal?"

Boris hesitated for a moment. "I...could not say. Maybe another week, perhaps?"

"That's too long to wait. Linka, could Ishtar and I borrow Ivanushka for awhile?"

"Where do you plan on going?" Minako didn't really know, so she looked to Ishtar.

"We were in the Hinterlands southwest of here. We didn't exactly set up a time or a place to rendezvous."

"My group was in Ba Sing Se for the most part," Minako mused. "I think it'd be wise if we went there. At the very least, we can get the support of the king."

"What do you plan on doing?" Boris asked.

"My friends and I split up awhile ago. We all promised each other to meet back up again in a week. I don't know if everyone found what they were looking for or not, but something tells me that we should all get together again before long."

"And what do you base that on?" Linka said. Minako didn't have a solid answer. As much as she liked her new friends, and as much as she was needed, she knew she didn't belong here. She couldn't explain it any better than that.

"Serendipity. Nothing more." She looked to Ishtar and smiled. Ishtar mirrored her expression. Boris sighed.

"It would be more beneficial if you could stay here and help us keep the peace. We would even be willing to allow Ishtar to help as well."

"I know," Minako replied emptily, "I'm being selfish. I'll stay if it's your decision." She felt a hand touch her shoulder, and looked to see Linka grinning at her.

"It may be his decision, but it is my bison. We will travel together, yes?" Minako's face lit up with joy.

"Really? Ya mean it?" Linka winked and flashed the Air Nomad greeting, palm extended and finger pointing up.

"Of course I do. Consider it my way of repaying you for all your hard work."

"But air nomads don't carry debts."

"Then consider it an act of friendship." She glanced over at Ishtar and barked, "You! Girl! We are friends, too. This is agreeable, yes?"

"Huh? Um, sure, I'm easy!" Ishtar giggled to herself as she, Linka, and Minako linked hands with each other. "You know, it's funny: I used to think I was the only blonde air-bender in the whole world. I guess they're more common than I thought."

"Linka, please, you must reconsider," Boris pleaded. "There are still countless brigands in the area, and we cannot afford the loss of two nomads and a bison."

"Very well, I will reconsider." She closed her eyes and paused for a moment before opening them again. "No, I am still going to help Minako and Ishtar! That is the end of the discussion!" Minako and Ishtar laughed as Boris sighed and rubbed his face.

"Very well. I suppose I only have myself to blame for how stubborn you are. If this is your decision, then all I ask is that you take care of yourself and our guests, and to return alive and well."

"But of course!" she exclaimed, and the two hugged each other. Minako shook his hand, but Ishtar went in for a hug as well.

"(Send a messenger-hawk my way sometime, cutie!)" she squealed in his ear. Boris blushed heavily as she waved good-bye and sat down, wondering how he would explain this to everyone else.

"Women," he sighed.

The end of "Fire in the Sky"

Next time: "Suen Alone"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

16: Suen Alone

Hungry, cold, and a little wet from the sprinkle of rain, Suen stared at the sign in front of the restaurant: HELP WANTED, Inquire Within. She had no money and hadn't eaten since...since... She couldn't remember. She went in and inquired; the proprietor needed dishwashers since the last one had quit abruptly. The pay would be low, he warned her, but to a girl with nothing, even a small amount seemed like a fortune. Besides, she would get paid every day at the end of her shift, and that enticed her more than anything. She was put to work almost immediately and all the concerns and troubles of the last few days were (literally and figuratively) washed away with the numbness of labor. Cleaning dishes was taxing and monotonous, but it was honest, and Suen got into the rhythm of it quickly. It was her very first job, and the very first time in her life where she had been alone.

The drizzle that had been coming down earlier had turned into a tolerable rainfall when her shift was over. Suen could imagine herself strolling in this weather very pleasantly in other circumstances, but now she had no means of escaping it. There were no shelters in this little town, and she couldn't afford any hotels. She couldn't stay at the restaurant, and her manager didn't have any suggestions for her. Camping was completely out of the question, and her closest friend was another continent away. Several miles from the town outskirts was a small cavern, so without any better prospects, she went there, hoping it was habitable, or at least safe. Suen was exhausted when she arrived at its mouth, and completely soaked, but the cavern was unoccupied, and suited her needs. She sat down and wished she could get a fire going; her teeth chattered and her clothes stuck to her like a second skin.

I can make a fire for you if you like, said the spirit who called itself Raava. Suen was nearly desperate enough to accept, but she knew it wouldn't be worth the price of her independence. She said nothing and decided to remove her clothes. She had noticed a professional laundry service while in town, as well as an inexpensive boutique and tailoring service. If necessary, she could pay them both a visit before work tomorrow.

I could make it so that the rain never fell on you. You could be dry, and warm, and you wouldn't have to eat your meal raw. What did you buy with your day's wages, anyway?

Again, Suen said nothing. She had gotten some ramen in town but also purchased some vegetables for later, since she knew the rain would do them no harm. She ate them quietly, half-naked and trembling inside a cavern. Idly she looked around for loose pieces of tinder and found some just outside the cave entrance. They were thoroughly waterlogged, but she tried igniting them anyway, rubbing them together as she had seen other people do.

Is this the fate of the Avatar? To starve and freeze in isolation? Rubbing wet sticks together in a vain attempt at keeping herself warm? Kalkin and Kiyone were born into nobility! Sung Chiang led armies! Nami dined alongside emperors and kings! Even Wan, who was born into squalor, counted great spirits as his friends and allies. And what do you have, my dear Suen? Leeks and radishes, wet clothes, and fingers pruned from scrubbing plates all day.

Sometimes she couldn't tell if it was Raava talking to her or her own conscience. She tried ignoring it—her—them—and kept rubbing. She had nothing else to do and did not want to be left with her thoughts. Finally, her palms blistered and she dropped her sticks, cringing from the pain. It looked like she would have to spend the night in bitter cold. Shakily, she picked the tinder up again and slowly started over. The gentle hiss of rain was broken by the sound of wet footsteps on grass, and she looked up. Standing at the mouth of the cave was an older woman, her hair dyed green and held back in a ponytail, a sword by her side.

For an instant, Suen wondered if this was how she would die.

"That's not how you start a fire," the woman said. She let herself into the cave, knelt at the soggy pile of wood Suen had made, and set it aside. "This will only fill the cave up with smoke," she stated, then produced a flint and tinder from a pouch. She had a small bundle of firewood wrapped in cloth on her back, and placed it on the ground, then lit a fire with her flint. In what felt like magic, a merry blaze ignited and Suen immediately felt better. She looked into the face of her savior, not knowing what to say.

"Um, thank you."

"You're welcome." The woman put her sword aside and sat next to the fire, warming her hands. She then reached into her pouch, removing dried meat and a skewer, and started to roast it. She looked at Suen. "Are you hungry?"

"I'm good," Suen said, showing her vegetables. She then had a thought: "Do you mind if I roast these over your fire?"

"It's our fire now," said the woman, and she handed Suen several skewers. Soon the cavern began to fill with the sweet fragrance of roasting meat and vegetables, and despite having eaten already, Suen felt hungry. The woman said nothing, content to watch her food cook, not even glancing at her companion. Suen felt uncomfortable with the silence now, so she made the first move.

"Are you traveling as well?"

"Yes, in a sense," the woman answered.

"And you don't have much money, either?"

"No, but I've rarely ever needed it. I usually hunt or trade for my food. What little I have usually goes to maintaining my clothes or my sword."

"That sounds like a difficult life," Suen remarked softly. The woman shrugged.

"It's not if you're used to it. I've found that people can adjust to anything if they do it long enough. Ah, I think our food is ready." The woman took a few tentative bites of her meat before digging in; meanwhile Suen ate roasted mushrooms, carrots, and peppers in content silence. The woman offered a bit of her meat, and Suen returned the gesture with some vegetables, which were gratefully accepted. The woman then excused herself, went outside, and came back with a wooden bowl full of rain water. She let Suen sip out of it first, then finished the other half before returning it.

"That's probably the best meal I've had in a long time," Suen remarked. The woman smiled.

"Are you out here by yourself?" Suen thought about it for a moment.

I will never leave you or forsake you.

"Yes." The woman frowned.

"It isn't good for a lady to wander around by herself." Suen looked at her companion and smirked.

"Aren't you the same?" She looked embarrassed.

"Yes, but I can take care of myself. Still, I should probably follow my own advice. I'll accompany you if you like." Suen was honestly hoping she'd say that. It had only been a day or so since her friends left, but she felt terribly lonesome.

You will always have ME.

"Where were you going?" she asked. The woman shrugged.

"Nowhere in particular. Right now I'm just wandering around trying to find my own path. My sister already found hers, you see, and she invited me to join her, but...I really wanted to distinguish myself, I guess you could say. Where might you be going?"

"I honestly have no idea," Suen murmured fretfully. "I...I just wanted to go." The woman contemplated this for a moment before softening her expression.

"Well, we could do worse than two ladies without a destination in mind. What's your name?"

"Suen. It means 'moon'."

"I am Keya," she announced, bowing slightly. "It's one half of the name of an ancient Fire Nation war goddess. My sister Kartti has the other half."

…...

The next day was wetter than the one before, but Suen managed to buy some clothes and wash her old ones. She cleaned dishes while Keya went hunting, and when afternoon waned into evening, they met at their cave and shared another meal. This went on for a few days: slowly the two wanderers opened up to each other, trying to figure out where they were going and what they wanted to do with their lives. Eventually Suen earned enough money to quit her job and return to the road, though she still had no idea where she was heading. She confided in Keya that she was looking for information on Kalkin and other Avatars, but didn't say why. Keya didn't pry, and she didn't judge. She rarely spoke at all unless spoken to, and while her tone was dry and straightforward, she was a refreshing companion, and just as welcome in silence as she was in conversation.

The two ladies were waylaid by ruffians one evening, and while Suen made account of herself, Keya did most of the fighting. Suen apologized for not being helpful in the skirmish, but Keya told her not to feel sorry: after all, even in times of war, not everyone could be a warrior. All the same, she thought it was a good idea if Suen could defend herself, and decided to teach her the basics of combat so she wouldn't be at a disadvantage. Suen wanted to laugh at first—after all, wasn't she the Avatar? Couldn't she, with a flick of her wrist, conjure up powers greater than a hundred warriors and sweep all but the fiercest foes from her sight? Her inner voice assured her she could, and far more besides, if only she would agree to embrace it fully. That was a line Suen honestly did not know if she wanted to cross, or even if she could cross it. She wanted the power but not at the expense of her free will.

She therefore agreed to be instructed. Keya found some bamboo growing alongside the path and cut off two poles, tossing one to her "student". As she taught Suen how to hold her weapon, and how to make a proper stance, she couldn't help but smirk a little.

"You know, I've been learning and training with the sword all my life. I never even considered being able to teach someone. Anyway, I'm going to begin striking at you. I want you to parry my attacks. I'm going to move very slowly so you can get it right. Are you ready?" Suen nodded, grasping the pole like she was taught. Keya was very gentle with her first assault, moving her bamboo pole in wide, deliberate strokes that could be blocked with ease. After seven or eight of these, she complimented her "student", then went in for more blows: one-two, one-two, one-two. She told Suen how to move her feet, shift her balance, and focus her strength to maximize the effectiveness of her strikes, then asked Suen to try it on her.

"Slowly, at your own pace. Gently...that's it... Good, keep going, just like that. Watch your feet. Bend your waist a little more—good, good. Again. One, two; one, two; one, two. Let's try it a little faster now."

They sparred for two hours, Keya providing tips and advice, complimenting Suen when she saw improvement, reprimanding gently when she noticed a mistake. While it was true that she had never taught before, her own teacher had been patient and wise, and most of his lessons were now being repeated. She also incorporated several techniques she and her sister used on each other during their own sparring sessions, and noted that while Suen would probably never reach that level of mastery, she caught on quickly and kept up with the more experienced fighter. When they finished, the bamboo poles were threadbare, and Suen's muscles ached. But Keya also noticed a glow of pride about her.

"That's enough for today. We'll continue tomorrow if you want."

"I'd like that," Suen said, nodding vigorously. Keya smiled and even chuckled a little.

"I may have found my calling just now. Do you think I'd make a good sword instructor?"

"I don't know," Suen said, gushing from weariness. "You seem to enjoy it, though." Keya looked at her hands, calloused from long years of fighting and training. She caressed the pommel of her blade.

"I did, didn't I?" She had nothing more to say, but plenty to think about, as they retired for the evening.

The next morning, they found a river to bathe in. Keya undressed and stepped in with practiced deliberation; Suen leaped, curled into a ball mid-air, and made a huge splash. She laughed as the water saturated Keya and scooped up huge waves to splash at her, making her shriek. Keya may have been a master swordswoman, but was helpless against Suen's superior splash technique, and quickly surrendered before she was drowned. Eventually they settled against the bank of the river, watching the rain sputter on and off, their clothes safely dry under a rock outcropping. Suen noticed her companion had quite a few scars on her body, and froze when their eyes met.

"I hear men like them," Keya remarked with a smirk. Suen chortled.

"How's that going for ya?"

"Very poorly. I'm much better at scaring them off than I am at attracting them. People tell me I'm too straightforward, that men enjoy a woman who's more coy and alluring. I say a man's not worth it if he won't love me for who I am. What about you?" Suen blushed and looked away.

"I-I'm not into that..."

"I mean, how are you with the opposite gender?" She frowned and shook her head.

"I've never had the time for it. Usually, whenever I was with my other friends, they did all the ogling. Except for Nabu, I mean; she's never shown an interest in anyone." Keya shrugged.

"There's nothing wrong with that. Another thing I've picked up in my travels is that people can be attracted to anyone, or no one. The only true vice is being attracted to yourself...though I did know one girl who was attracted to her brother."

"Gross," Suen gagged. Keya laughed.

"Speaking of which, do you have any family? I only have my twin sister. I think our parents were killed in one war or another, and we were too young to remember it." Suen felt cold as she recalled the deaths of her own parents. She envied Keya's inability to recall her family's demise, and wished she could do the same sometimes.

"I have a little brother, Anshar, but I haven't seen him in years. We were separated when..." She trailed off, and Keya immediately understood. She offered a sympathetic smile.

"I think it should be your quest to find him first. When you only have one person left in the entire world, everything else fades in the background. I know you didn't ask my opinion, but it's a matter I feel very strongly towards. And yet," she said, issuing a melancholy sigh, "here I am, alone in the world, my thoughts focused on myself and not my family. I can be a real hypocrite at times, can't I?"

"No more than the rest of us," Suen assured her. She drew her knees to her chest, staring at the flow of the river. "Especially not me."

There was a lengthy pause as the two women meditated on what they had said.

"So," Keya said blithely, "is your brother cute?" Suen snorted.

"He's thirteen!"

"Just thought I'd ask," she shrugged. Suen made sure to give her an extra-large splash for that.

…...

A tremendous peal of thunder welcomed them into the next village. The rain that had been sprinkling down a few moment ago was now gushing in torrents, making travel difficult and dangerous. Keya and Suen tried to shield themselves from the stinging storm as they sought shelter, but were surprised to find a number of people running around outside—and not for cover. Over the whipping wind and surging rain the ladies saw people scurrying with ropes, ladders, planks, poles, nets, bags of sand, and large stones. A small group noticed them and approached, carrying the trunk of a tree on their shoulders.

"Hey, could you two help us, please? This storm's caused a lot of flooding and there've been people trapped."

"Certainly," Keya answered immediately. "Tell us what you need to do." Suen was taken by surprise by the suddenness of the request, so she was more reluctant to help. Regardless, she knew it was the right thing to do, and braced herself for whatever task she was given. Keya was assigned sandbag duty while Suen would be transporting all the equipment. She was given a large fishing net first and told to follow two other villagers to one of the rivers. Thanks to the flash flood, the river had swelled to three times its size and was eroding the land. The nets would be used not to catch floating bits of flotsam, but people who had been swept away.

This could all be easily solved if you would accept my power.

Suen didn't reply. She just took the nets and followed the villagers to where she needed to go, then was sent back. Now she had to help transport planks so people could cross over freshly-carved tributaries to safety. She and a young man her age had five boards piled onto their shoulders and hiked through the slippery mud, their eyes stinging and their breath stolen away by the high winds.

Earth, water, wind... Not a problem at all for the Avatar.

She grit her teeth and laid the boards down where she was instructed. More villagers needed her help fixing a broken dam. Suen was weighed down with two very heavy buckets of homemade caulk, and just barely managed to trudge her way over. Workers immediately troweled the caulk into the dam, and Suen couldn't help but think that an earth-bender would make this job so much easier. They could fortify the dam, restructure it, build redundant safety measures, or even shape the land so that all the water flowed away from the village.

Why stop there? Why not bend the very rain itself? Or blow away those awful clouds?

A horrible crash of thunder broke her away from her thoughts. A bolt of lightning flashed against the black sky, striking a large tree and setting it on fire. The tree fell onto a house, and the fire spread in spite of the rain. The villagers, stretched thin as they were with the flood, rushed to put out the fire and save the house. Raava didn't need to say a word this time. She simply let Suen stand there, watching and wondering. She forced herself to turn away from the blaze and return for more supplies. This time it was two large coils of rope which were hung over her arms. The physical strain this was taking on her body was nearly unbearable, but she issued no complaint, willing to bear it if it meant saving lives.

That's right, one person can do quite a lot when they're put to the test. But think about...ah, I don't need to say it, do I?

Suen stumbled and got a face full of mud. She was helped to her feet by another villager, and he took one of her coils, burdened though he was. He led Suen to what appeared to be an island in the middle of the river. A crowd of villagers armed with poles were trying to reel someone in: it was a girl about her age, struggling against the current, barely clinging to life. She was dragged onto shore and carried away.

"M...my brother! Please, someone save him!" The girl pointed to the little island, and Suen's heart clogged in her throat as she saw a boy standing isolated on the island, trembling and wailing as the river chewed the land around him. Instantly she thought of Anshar, her own brother, and how she would feel if he were in this situation. Then she thought of what lengths she would go to save him.

What are you going to do?

Suen tied one end of her rope around a sturdy tree and the other end around her waist, then she dove into the raging current and swam for the island. Against all odds, she mustered up her strength and actually defied the elements long enough to brush her fingers against the island, but the river burst as the flood intensified, and she was carried off. In no time at all she felt her stomach lurch as the rope squeezed taut, and she was dazed for a moment. Her vision blurry, her senses lost, she could do nothing but hang there, completely at the mercy of the flood. She tried swimming back to shore but the going was unmanageable. The look of pure terror on the boy's face haunted her as the river closed in around him. The surge overcame her and pushed her underneath, where she remained trapped and helpless.

If you don't save him, how are you any better than that false Avatar?

Suen closed her eyes, and the world became dark and silent. There was only one option left.

She accepted.

Almost at once the rope burst apart, and she floated into the sky, the lashing wind and rain deflecting off her body. As the villagers stared at her in slack-jawed wonder, she turned around, gesturing for the earth to close and form a bridge. The boy was now free to run; she sent a gust of wind to help him on his way. With one sweeping gesture, a gale force blew the clouds away; another and the fires died down; another and the dam was fortified to triple strength; another and the river was diverted harmlessly. Suen worked furiously to repair all the damage, and within the span of five minutes, it was as if the storm had never happened. A quick scan of the area revealed her job completed, so she descended to the earth, radiating with a brilliance only the Avatar could claim.

The villagers were much too stricken to celebrate, or even thank her. But that was fine; she needed no thanks. She was the Avatar.

Breathless, Keya ran up to her, wide-eyed and soaking wet. Nothing was said for a very long time; she simply tried to catch her breath and understand what all of this portended.

"Suen," she called, "is that...you?"

"Of course it's me," she answered, though not quite in her own voice. "Who else would I be?"

"But you're glowing! You're... You look like..."

"What do I look like, Keya?" Keya swallowed heavily. She wasn't frightened...but she was getting there.

"You look like the Avatar," she said steadily. Suen smiled with unnatural mirth.

"That's because I am the Avatar. Avatar Suen, at your service. Sorry I never told you before."

"That can't be," Keya insisted. "I've seen the Avatar before, with my own eyes, months ago: Avatar Usagi."

"Ah, I see. You're confused. I'm sorry to alarm you like that. The truth is, that girl is a false Avatar. I'm the real one. She has a...rogue spirit inside of her—a very powerful one, but also...how do I put this? Incomplete? Incorrect? Maybe it's a little of both. In any case, she is a counterfeit, and while it may be no fault of her own, I must...correct her before she does any significant harm. You understand."

Keya bristled. "No, I don't. I don't understand at all. What exactly are you going to do?"

"The same thing a doctor does to any gangrenous limb. It's not a task I enjoy, but as the true Avatar, it is my duty. You can come along with me if you like. Ladies shouldn't wander around these parts by themselves."

"No," she whispered, trembling with fear and disgust—true fear, for the first time in her life. Her hand went to the hilt of her sword. "This is wrong. I can't explain why, but it feels wrong. You're...not acting like yourself, Suen."

Suen—the thing glowing before her with the purest light—laughed merrily. It felt to Keya like thorns were being pushed into her.

"How could it be wrong, Keya? I'm the Avatar, and the other girl is a fake. Truth must fight falsehood for it to triumph, must it not?"

"Yes, it must," she stated, slowly regaining control over herself. "But I wonder...which is true and which is false?"

She drew her sword. The grin on the other girl's face didn't go away.

"Are you going to stop me? Did you even see what I just did? I single-handedly stopped a flood, calmed a storm, and saved the entire village." Keya grit her teeth, remaining steadfast. She knew she didn't stand a chance. Twenty people with twenty times her skill wouldn't stand a chance. But she could not back down. She valued their newfound friendship too much. She had to...

"Suen, please, don't do this. This isn't you. We haven't known each other long, but I can tell this isn't you. I...I'm asking, as a friend—"

A muddy hand erupted from the earth, wrapped around Keya's neck, and dragged her down. Stone shackles enveloped her limbs and waist, and her sword was consumed. The glowing creature's grin widened as she pointed her finger at Keya's exposed head, summoning a great fireball. Keya was forced to watch helplessly as the creature stood over her, ready to incinerate. The ball of fire rotated in midair, checked only by a tiny voice lost deep inside the thing that had consumed its host.

Please...stop! Please spare her! She's my friend! She didn't do anything wrong!

"She got in my way," the thing spoke. The fireball grew.

I'm begging you! Have mercy!

The creature's eyes widened, her mouth almost stretching ear to ear, teeth glistening. The fireball launched and missed Keya's head, impacting harmlessly off to the side.

"Next time," she announced, "I won't miss. But just so you don't follow me..." She snapped her finger, and the fireball coiled around Keya, forming a circle. The flames shot up, creating an impenetrable wall. Their eyes met one more time.

"THAT is how you start a fire."

With that, Apsu's Avatar turned around and walked away.

The End of "Suen Alone"

Next time: "A Story About Kalkin"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

17: A Story About Kalkin

The warrior-woman Liath was busily cutting weeds when a startling sensation came out of the blue and struck her, causing her to bolt up in alarm. All her senses immediately went on full alert as she tried to discern where this feeling had come from, and what it was. A few paces away, her friend Bodmall, who had been digging ditches for their new irrigation system, also stood upright.

"Bodmall, did you...?"

"Yeah, I felt it too," the shaman confirmed. She removed her headdress, pensively running weathered fingers through her long dark hair.

"What is it?" Liath whispered. "What does it mean?" Bodmall frowned heavily.

"The Destroyer is manifest. I never thought we'd live to see this day..."

"I'm more worried about living to see the day after," Liath muttered. Bodmall nodded dismally.

"So am I, old friend, so am I."

…...

Rei sat transfixed before the fire, staring deeply into it, trying to divine some secret that was eluding her. Lately she had been getting very bad premonitions, sensations that a great disturbance had befallen her world, or that some long-forgotten horror had been brought back from the depths. As a fire priestess, she had learned to trust her intuitions, and often sought answers in a sacred bonfire. The flames seemed reticent at first, content to dance vaguely and leave her feeling pensive. She was patient, though, and continued studying the fire in hopes that she would find some meaning in...

There! It hit her all of a sudden: an intense feeling of dread, a malevolent shape rising up and swallowing the world in a blanket of destruction. It felt like she had consumed some wriggling slimy thing that burned as it tried crawling out of her throat. There was more, though: the Avatar had completed the quest for which she had been summoned, and would be returning to them shortly. Even without the flames guiding her, Rei felt her place was no longer here at the temple, but with the Avatar—with Usagi—helping her face whatever catastrophe was in store. She continued studying the bonfire for any further signs, but the flames began to wane; there were no more answers to seek. She gave the fire a graceful bow and put it out, then rose and sought out her grandfather. She told him everything.

"I felt something very similar," he confessed, rubbing his chin. "I couldn't say what it was exactly, but I could tell it didn't bode well for us. But if the Avatar has returned as you say, then there may be hope. Take what you've learned here and go to her."

"Right. I'll go pack my things while you call Yuichiro." Rei only had a few possessions she wanted to take with her, but when she returned, there were two other people there besides the air-bender: Wheeler and Nergal. She already knew what they wanted, but heard them out anyway.

"Yo! Your grandpa says you're heading off now. Mind if we hitch a ride with ya? I just got a letter from my friends telling me to meet up with them, and, uh..."

"I'm not the one you need to be asking," Rei said, indicating Yuichiro. He blushed a little as their eyes met—evidently he had warmed up to the young priestess during their brief time together—and said there'd be plenty of room on his bison for all four of them.

"Thanks, man, you're a lifesaver!" Wheeler exclaimed, slapping Yuichiro on the back. Nergal smiled thinly as he elbowed her, and approached Rei with a meek expression.

"So...you're going to see the Avatar."

"That's right." Nergal fidgeted anxiously. She wasn't quite sure how to express herself.

"I'd...like to hear things from her side. I want to decide for myself what's real and what isn't. I promise I won't bring any harm to her, or to your friends."

"I know you won't," Rei answered gently. "I trust you." She nodded solemnly, and with that settled, everyone mounted Yuichiro's bison. Rei and her grandfather exchanged a hug and some words; she asked him where Kotono and her company were.

"Oh, they left while you and Nergal were studying. They said something about needing to investigate some strange volcanic activity somewhere, and headed off."

"I see. Well, grandpa, I hope you can do all right here by yourself."

"Oh, I'll manage, though it sure was nice having so many people over here for company, heheh...especially all the young ladies!" He grinned and rubbed his hands together, causing his granddaughter to roll her eyes. She gave him a quick peck on the forehead and waved farewell, Wheeler letting out a yawp as they soared through the sky.

Kasei Hikawa took a deep breath, let it out, and mopped his forehead.

"Be careful, Rei. In all my years, I've never seen the flames cast such a dreadful omen."

…...

It felt like ages since Ittou and Kotono had been sailing. Even though their last sea voyage had only been a few months ago, during the raid on Beryl's palace, it felt like much more time had passed. Perhaps it was because they were not heading towards something so dire this time, or with such high life-or-death stakes. Reports of "strange volcanic activity" could mean anything, and several members of their crew felt optimistic of the outcome. Maybe there was an angry spirit inhabiting the volcano, and it needed to be placated, or there were rogue fire-benders living on the foothills who were causing trouble. Serious matters all the same, but nowhere near the level of gravity that they had undergone before. The voyage could be pleasant, if they wished it, and the royal children definitely wished for a relaxing time.

Suo kept himself occupied for a little while with some self-appointed duties, but it was soon clear that the captain and crew wished their passengers would leave the work to them. Royalty, they stated, should not have to earn their way on a ship, least of all when they were already doing so much great work. It was an honor to ferry them to their destination—and anywhere else they wished to go, the captain added. All the same, Suo ingratiated himself with the crew, picking up gossip and news whenever he wasn't investigating the ship or checking on their supplies. He stopped after the first day and became fairly restless halfway into the second, despite Lark and Salamander's attempts at entertaining him.

"Do you think there are dolphins in these waters?" the young animal-trainer asked. As always, he had paired up with Ittou, and they were busy trying to spot various sea creatures that swam past them. So far they had only seen gulls, though Salamander swore she had spotted a manta.

"I don't know," Ittou replied. "It's been a long time since I've been out here. The last time we sailed through, I wanted to go fishing, but my dad wouldn't allow it. Then I wanted to go swimming, but my mom wouldn't allow that." Lark laughed.

"Imagine someone telling a prince he's not allowed to do things!"

"They were still my mom and dad," he grumbled. "And I get why they said it now."

"Oh? The swimming I can understand, but why no fishing?"

"Because it's illegal." Lark looked amazed.

"Seriously? How is fishing illegal?"

"My dad told me that a lot of endangered species live in these waters. Poachers used to come here a lot when he was younger, and his father, the previous Fire Lord, had to crack down on them a lot. They already drove the drill-nosed turtles to extinction and probably would've done the same for the four-finned whale. Besides, there aren't any edible species in these waters. The closest are a few bonitos, and we passed their schooling grounds yesterday."

"I see." Lark contemplated what he had heard in silence for a moment. "I guess you need to know these things when you become Fire Lord."

"Yeah, even though Tono will ascend the throne before me. It always goes to the eldest, whether it's a boy or girl."

"But what will that make you when you grow up?" Ittou offered a lopsided smile.

"A Regent Prince. I'll still have authority, but I'll have to answer to my sister and whoever she marries." Lark made a face.

"Does that make you uncomfortable?"

"No, not really. I admire and respect my sister, and she's already proven herself to be a great leader. I don't think she'll pull her rank around me too much when we get older—right, sis?"

"What's that?" she called, as she laid out tanning. Ittou smiled.

"I'm just asking how mad with power you'll be when you become Fire Lady."

"Positively despotic, why?" He laughed.

"Just checking." They went back to spotting gulls and whatever fish swam by, and the day wore on. Eventually, Salamander got tired of entertaining Suo and joined the boys, groaning wearily.

"Man, am I bored! We can't even throw a ball around here. What do people do on these long voyages?" Suo, overhearing her, laughed.

"We'll only be at sea today and tomorrow, Sal. I didn't hear you complain when we paid Beryl a visit, and that journey was much longer."

"Yeah, but I was way too excited to care. Arrgh, if I don't do something soon, I'm gonna tear my hair out!"

"I could always teach you how to read star charts."

"No thank you," she grunted. An idea flashed in her head, and she called out to Oboro, who was reading peacefully. "Hey, old man! Weren't you going to tell us how you and Avatar Kalkin became friends?" He looked up from his book, noticing her restless expression.

"So I did. I guess now's as good a time as any to tell it. It's a long story, so it should keep you entertained for awhile." He asked that everyone gather around; Ku Sheng had been taking a nap while Kartta had been training. Several members of the crew who were off-duty also gathered around, as they wanted to hear about how the old warrior became acquainted with the Avatar. Oboro was given water and cleared his throat.

…...

The two Earth Kingdoms were in the middle of their worst period of national crisis. Skirmishes were sprouting up everywhere, and sometimes full-on battles occurred. One warlord in particular had united a lot of the smaller bandit gangs into an army, and had conquered and pillaged huge portions of both kingdoms. It got to the point where he could regularly contend with most of the king's units on an even basis. History books usually omit his name, but it was Durga, if that means anything. Anyway, King Endymion I and King Omar Furuhata called upon Kalkin to rid them of Durga once and for all. They didn't expect the Avatar to win all their battles for them, but if he could get Durga out of the picture, it would go a long way to keep both kingdoms from destabilizing. Kalkin agreed.

This was only a few years after he and I first had our...disagreements, mind you. Kalkin slowly started to see the plight of those around him, and he realized that he had been incredibly fortunate his whole life, while so many others had suffered around him. He started giving away what little money he had left, but even at the height of his family's wealth, it wouldn't have been enough. The only way he could truly help people was to be the Avatar—to restore balance and bring peace to the world. I thought better of him from then on, but we still weren't what you'd call friends—coworkers, perhaps, or acquaintances. Anyway, with all this in mind, he set out to confront Durga and brought me and a host of soldiers with him. When Durga heard that the Avatar was looking for him, he set off with ten-thousand of his warriors, practically his entire army, and the two forces met shortly. I was prepared for an all-out battle, but what actually happened took me by surprise. Kalkin offered a parley and was brought to Durga with only myself and two other retainers. Durga recognized him as the Avatar at once, and gave him an awful grin. I still remember parts of their conversation, decades later.

Durga said something like, "Well, Avatar, you have my attention. Are you going to surrender, or do I have to kill your army first?" Kalkin, for all his earlier faults, wasn't intimidated in the least. He looked at Durga like he was looking at a painting, and not the leader of a bloodthirsty horde.

"I would prefer not to engage in bloodshed, Lord Durga. However, this conflict must be resolved. I do not wish this entire country burned to the ground, nor its people slaughtered in the process."

"Do you think I care about any of that?" Durga leered. "My men are hungry for the spoil! I have united more warring clans than you can count, and I will not stop until my backside is perched on one throne while the other burns in my hearth!"

"As you say," Kalkin replied. "But I'll wager having the Avatar himself as your personal servant for life would be an even better prize." Durga tried not to look intrigued, just as I tried not to look disgusted, but neither one of us were very good at hiding our emotions.

"I wouldn't object to it," he huffed. "What do you have in mind? If you think giving yourself over to me will stop my conquest—"

"No, Durga. I won't give myself to you for free, just like you won't stop for free. Therefore, I propose a challenge: I will thumb-wrestle you for the fate of this country. If you win, then I will submit myself to you, and you can kill me, enslave me, torture me, or ransom me as you see fit. If I win, however, then you will stop your advance, turn around, and go home. What do you—"

But Durga was already laughing boisterously. He didn't think it was a very fair exchange—putting everything he had worked for on one silly child's game. Kalkin agreed, and revised his challenge: he would thumb-wrestle every single member of Durga's army for the same stakes. If even one person beat him, he would submit—but if Kalkin managed to defeat all ten-thousand of his warriors, then Durga would have to turn around. This was a much more enticing proposal, because as Kalkin pointed out, "I could get lucky after one or two hundred people, but ten-thousand? It would be impossible, don't you think?" So after a little more negotiating and defining all the rules, Durga agreed. Two chairs and a table were placed, and Kalkin set himself to his arduous task.

Needless to say, everyone on my side was sick with anxiety. We had figured that Kalkin would offer some non-violent solution to the problem before being forced into battle, but thumb-wrestling an entire army, one man after another? It was absolute madness. But there he was, sitting opposite a long line of Durga's men, challenging each and every one to a thumb-wrestling match. He even said that he could take two people at once, since doing it one at a time would take too long. Even so, going two men at a time, it would take him hours upon hours.

Ten wins became twenty, then fifty, then a hundred. Kalkin was beating every single one, and I began to hope, but Durga just sneered cruelly. He knew the odds were in his favor, and no matter how good Kalkin was, all it would take was a single slip, and he'd lose. With Kalkin out of the way, the two Earth Kingdoms wouldn't take long to fall, and Durga would have half the world under his control. A hundred-fifty. Two-hundred. Three-hundred, four-hundred. Kalkin was still winning at five and six-hundred, and wasn't losing steam as he passed seven-hundred, eight-hundred, nine. Finally, he defeated his one-thousandth opponent, a remarkable feat under any other circumstance...but he had barely just begun. Nine-thousand eager men stood waiting in line, all of them ready to claim the Avatar for their own, fresh and eager while Kalkin sat there growing tired.

He was offered a break and looked to Durga for permission. "Keep going," he growled, so Kalkin kept going. Twelve-hundred. Thirteen-hundred. Fourteen-hundred. Fifteen-hundred! It was astonishing! Sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen—two thousand! It was remarkable! I had never seen anything like it—and he still wasn't anywhere close to finishing! Kalkin was definitely getting weary by that point. His hands were sore, and his thumbs ached. He looked to Durga to see if he could take a break yet. Durga, who had been sitting there patiently, watching every single match, scratched himself and grumbled, "Keep going."

Kalkin kept going.

We had to spoon food into his mouth since both his hands were fully occupied. One of us kept flies off him, and scratched him if he got a bad itch. We put a straw in a glass of water so he could drink whenever he wanted to, but since he was not allowed to take bathroom breaks, he had to be very careful about what he took in. The day wore on as Kalkin defeated three-thousand people, and he was almost collapsing from exhaustion when he surpassed four-thousand. Not even halfway through, and the man looked beaten. His hands were almost destroyed, and he seemed pale and sickly. When he finally defeated his five-thousandth opponent, Kalkin looked over to Durga, his eyes begging for a reprieve. If there was any humanity in the other man, then surely...

"Keep going," he barked. Kalkin drew a deep breath...and kept going.

Fifty-five hundred...six-thousand...sixty-five hundred...seven-thousand...seventy-five hundred...eight-thousand! One after the other, a man for each hand, hour after hour, with no breaks in between. Even if one match only took five seconds, it would take him eight full hours of nonstop thumb-wrestling to get through Durga's army. We did everything we could to make Kalkin comfortable, but as long as Durga forbade him from resting, he was compelled, by his own word, to keep going until he won, lost, or fell down dead. And even after defeating eight-thousand men, I did not think Kalkin could win.

As soon as he had defeated eight-thousand, three-hundred fifty-five people, Kalkin let out a loud groan, and his right hand fell limp. All of the muscles in it had been worked far beyond their limit. His hand was cramping and convulsing uncontrollably, and there was little we could do to restore it. Durga broke into a fury and demanded to know what the problem was. Kalkin, despite his injury, smiled feebly, and assured him it was nothing. The challenge would commence; it would just take a little longer.

"Are you sure?" I said, breathlessly.

Kalkin looked at me, smiled...and said, "Yes, my friend. My creators, in their wisdom, saw fit to give me a spare hand. I think I can finish the job with just my left."

He called me his friend. In all the time that we had known each other, we never addressed ourselves as friends. Well, you could have knocked me over with a feather, and I nearly did fall down, I was that amazed. Somehow I mustered up enough dignity to sit down while someone came to massage Kalkin's hand. He kept going, too, facing a thousand men and more with only one hand. I guess my concern for his well-being gave him the strength he needed, because despite losing one hand and endangering his other, he made it past nine-thousand and stared down the end of a long, grueling road with more fortitude than I had ever seen before.

Well, his other hand finally gave out at ninety-four twenty-two, so he gave one last look at Durga. Durga just shook his head, so with all his might, Kalkin brought his cramped, mangled, trembling right hand back up while his left was treated. He had to switch them every fifty or so people, and neither hand ever got enough rest, but through some miracle, he made it through the last of Durga's commanders, captains, officers, and lieutenants, until there was no one left but the leader himself. Kalkin sat there patiently, saying nothing, both of his hands ruined, as Durga sat opposite him. The two men studied each other for a long time, Kalkin's face tranquil in spite of his pain.

"Would you like me to use my left hand or my right?" he asked. Durga nodded.

"Whichever is strongest." I don't think it mattered to Kalkin, so he brought up his right. The judges stood by for one last match. I stood there too, completely transfixed. By all accounts, he shouldn't have been able to move his thumbs at all, much less beat anyone. His arm was trembling so much that I had to hold it steady. We counted down: one, two, three, four. Durga immediately pinned him.

…...

"Ah, it seems we're ahead of schedule," said Oboro as he glanced up. A chain of volcanic islands could be seen off in the distance, the faint glow of twilight causing the ocean around them to ripple with gold and ruby light. "We should find a place to stay and head out in the morning, if that suits your majesties."

"Wait, what?!" Salamander blurted. "You can't just end the story there! What the heck happened to Kalkin? Did he really lose to Durga?"

"What do you think?" Oboro shrugged, then walked away. "We need to get ready to disembark. Suo, Ku Sheng, could you load up our supplies? Lark, Kartta, you too. Sal, you're with Kotono. Ittou..." He stopped, looking down at the agitated face of the prince. The boy was at least mature enough to understand that time was of the essence, and the less of it they wasted here, the better. The needs of the citizens came first, and besides, if he had studied his history, then he would have known what happened.

But he had to know how the story ended.

Oboro sighed, his mouth slowly curling into a lazy smile.

"Kalkin beat him, my prince. He put forth all of his strength, slipped out of Durga's grasp, and defeated him in one last thumb-wrestling match. He collapsed shortly after, and was borne to the medical tent by Durga himself, who was impressed beyond the capacity for words. Kalkin had kept his word, so Durga kept his, and withdrew his forces. After that, he never darkened the doorstep of any nation, and we never heard from him again. Kalkin never regained the full use of his hands after that day, but word of his deed spread, and people began to rally behind him. He became a hero; the kingdom started to stabilize. Some people even said he did more for the Earth Kingdoms through peace than a million soldiers could have accomplished through war. The whole experience was humbling for him, and he became a better man for it. As for me, I swore lifelong fealty and loyalty to him. Any man who could accomplish what he did was more than worthy of that." Ittou smiled.

"Thank you, Oboro. I'll go help everyone load the supplies."

"Good man. Kotono, might I pause to freshen my cup? Storytelling's thirsty work." Kotono smiled and gave him leave, then exchanged one last word with the captain. The sun sank lower, setting the entire ocean on fire.

…...

Wan Shi Tong had just finished organizing everything on the second floor's east wing when a terrible sensation overwhelmed him. A fear unlike anything he had experienced before, save once in his long life, hammered upon him with such force that he trembled from the shock of it. Cautiously he turned his head to the nearest window and stared out.

"Oh my... Apsu!"

Unable to say anything else, he stood transfixed, peering out across the distance. Suddenly his massive collection of knowledge—indeed, the entirety of the physical and spiritual world—all seemed so ephemeral to him now. The worst part was that, in spite of his wisdom (or perhaps because of it), he was completely helpless to do anything but watch, and wait.

…...

Reconstructing Omashu after its most recent battle was considerably easier with Avatar Usagi and Vainamoinen helping out. Alongside the city's many earth-benders, plus several air-and-water benders culled from various places, Usagi cleaned streets, extinguished fires, rebuilt structures, paved roads, and replanted upset trees and orchards. The city's metal structures were a different matter, though, and at first, hopes were grim for restoring them. Vainamoinen had been busy in the clinic until he got word of their dilemma, so he quietly set about wandering around the city, repairing plates, tiles, poles, fences, nails, bolts, anything that a blacksmith might have otherwise labored weeks to fix. Rumors of a "metal-bender" quickly spread, and the old man chuckled at his newfound celebrity status. People inevitably begged him to teach them the art.

"I'm afraid that now isn't the proper time, my friends. In some future scenario, perhaps metal-bending may be more common, but..." Suddenly, as he spoke, Vainamoinen bolted upright, like a cat who is suddenly disturbed. His eyes widened and he stared intently into the blue void of sky.

"Uh, sir?" his onlookers said, startled by the change. "Mr. Trout? Is something the matter?"

Vainamoinen didn't answer. His focus was completely invested in something else, something...distant, and powerful.

Something very, very powerful.

"She is here," he whispered fearfully to himself. "So she has found a way through, at last."

"Um, Mr. Trout, sir?" The people called out to him again, and Vainamoinen broke out of his stupor, clearly shaken by his experience. He stared back at the crowd grimly.

"I apologize, but I must leave here at once. The world will soon need the Avatar as it has never needed them before, or perhaps ever will. Excuse me." The crowd parted before him and he stormed through the city with a speed unmatched by any human. He wasted no time with greetings or ceremony as he found Usagi, helping mend one of the larger buildings, with Setsuna and Anshar by her side. The boy was telling Usagi about his sister, regaling tales of how they had grown up together. Vainamoinen was in a hurry but decided to wait and listen.

Suen and Anshar had spent only part of their childhood on Whaletail Island, the place of their birth. The rest of the time, their family went on countless trips to other countries. Their parents had wanted to give them a worldly education, so they immersed their children in many different cultures. This was how Suen had first met her four friends...and how, during an uneventful tour of the northern Earth Kingdom's Provinces, their parents had been killed in a battle and the two siblings had been separated. Anshar had been picked up by monks from the Northern Air Temple and taken back to Whaletail, but soon another battle broke out, and he was forced onto the mainland. He ran into the riverfolk of the Southern Swamp, who eventually took him to Omashu, where he rode out the rest of the wars in a neutral country. Usagi couldn't help but see the similarities between her life and Suen's, and felt a little more empathy towards her. If she had been in the same situation, she probably wouldn't have handled it any better. She then asked what kind of a person Suen was, which prompted a huge brotherly grin.

"She's the kindest person in the entire world," Anshar exclaimed as Usagi helped solder steel pipes together. "When we were growing up, she always looked out for me and always had time for me. Sue's the kind of person who'd give you an extra slice of cake when your parents weren't looking, or would help you with your homework even when she was tired."

"She sounds wonderful," Usagi observed. Too bad her own brother would never heap acolytes like that to his peers. As Anshar went on promoting the merits of his older sister, Setsuna noticed the old man waiting patiently on their behalf. Vainamoinen had a grave countenance about him, so she excused herself and stood up, ready to leave at a moment's notice. Usagi just looked over and smiled casually.

"Oh, hey there Marin—"

"Avatar, it is time for our departure. We must leave immediately." He touched her shoulder, and though his grip was gentle, it carried the weight of supreme urgency on it. Usagi's offer of protest was cut off when she looked into his stormy eyes.

"Um, all right... Where are we going?"

"To your destiny." She flinched.

"Oooh...kaaaay, um...does my destiny have a direction, or..."

"We are leaving, Usagi," Setsuna told her, coldly but patiently. "Master Vainamoinen will guide us to where we need to go. Right?" He nodded and withdrew a little.

"Conclude what affairs you must and bid your friends a brief farewell. We may have time yet but every moment will be precious. The boy will be coming with us, too."

"I will?" Anshar said. Vainamoinen nodded and smiled, though his face was heavy with care. Usagi still didn't understand what was going on, but the urgency in his voice, and the trust she had put in her new companions, compelled her to act. She finished her work on the building, excused herself, and found Naru and Umino with a civilian cleanup crew. There was so much she wanted to say and do, but Naru understood her friend's urgency, and gave her a tight hug.

"Just take care of yourself," she said, touching Usagi's face, "and come back soon."

"I will. Come on, Umino, you too."

"Uh, m-me?" Blushing and stammering, he awkwardly returned her hug.

"Take care of her for me, will you?" she whispered in his ear. He nodded stiffly.

"Uh, y-yes ma'am! I mean, yes Avatar! Ah, I-I mean, yes Avatar Usa—"

"Just Usagi, okay? I'll come back when I can." Crestfallen, she forced herself not to look back as she hurried off to rejoin her companions. A number of Air Nomads had heard of their plight and had volunteered their fastest air-bison to aid them. Vainamoinen bonded with the creature immediately, and was even murmuring to it in a language it seemed to understand. Setsuna greeted Usagi with a nod as they all mounted, and the air-bison took off like a shot.

The end of "A Story About Kalkin"

Next time: "A Reunion of Friends and Foes"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

18: A Reunion of Friends and Foes

"We're not lost, are we, Mochi?" Confused, Ma-Ti studied his map again, tracing and retracing the path he had taken. The map was a gift from Captain Mathena, and he had studied it zealously until he had nearly worn the parchment out. He knew there was a path away from the little port town, and a divergence where he had parted ways with Mariner and Usagi. He also knew that the path he had taken wound around a small forest, a river, and some landmarks, but most of those landmarks weren't there, and the river had apparently changed course since the map had been made. Ma-Ti knew where he needed to be and was sure that he was in the right area...

"This is where we're supposed to meet," he said, pointing to the map. "The letter said: northwest past the five stones, a day east, then meet here at a pond. This is the only pond I've seen since I started walking east past those stones." Mochi chittered quietly, just as bewildered and nervous as his companion. Ma-Ti patted his head in an effort to comfort them both but was startled when a dark shape passed overhead.

He shielded his eyes from the sun and looked up; the shape was moving, growing larger, getting closer. His face lit up as he recognized it as an air-bison (he had only seen pictures up until now), but there was no time to get acquainted with the beast, as it lifted back up into the air and flew off before he could get closer. Something even better was there waiting in its stead, and he grinned and laughed at her.

"Linka!" She grunted a little as he hugged her, but soon embraced him.

"Hello, Ma-Ti. It has been too long. Are you the first one here?"

"Yes." He released her and stepped back, taking a good look at a friend he had not seen in over a year. Linka was always stern and severe, but beautiful, strong-willed, and inflexibly loyal. "You've hardly changed at all! How are things at your temple?"

"Difficult and tempestuous, but when have they been otherwise? I keep hearing that peace is coming soon, but it is like trying to grasp at a rainbow, no?"

"That may be, but I've heard plenty of rumors in my travels. Word has it that..." He stopped himself to look up; another air-bison had flown overhead, and was settling down nearby. This time Ma-Ti was determined to see it up close, so he called for Linka to follow him and ran for it. He was just able to peer into the eyes of the noble beast as it took off again, leaving two very worthy consolation prizes.

"Kwame! Gi!" He laughed and hugged them both, and they laughed in return.

"Well howdy there, handsome! I ain't seen you in a spell! Hey, and there's my favorite air-bender!" Gi waved at Linka, and the two embraced while Kwame settled for a respectful bow.

"You two look to be doing well," he said. Linka nodded proudly.

"As well as can be expected. It is good to see the two of you again. The times have grown unpredictable, have they not?"

"Indeed. Lately I have been studying and traveling, trying to learn what good we can all do. I can only hope it has not been fruitless. Gi has been helping me...in her own fashion."

"Oh yeah," she drawled, putting an arm over Linka's neck, "Kwame and I've had lotsa private moments together, if ya catch m'drift!"

"I think so," she muttered. Linka extricated herself and glanced around tentatively. "Ah, you have not, by any chance, seen, ah..." She was interrupted by the sound of cracking branches, shivering leaves, and querulous cursing. A young man burst through a nearby overgrowth, with more than enough of the forest still clinging to him as a souvenir. He pulled a brier out of his hair and cringed sourly.

"Darn it, just my luck that I'd get lost! You'd think that after an hour of wandering around this stupid jungle, I...oh, hey guys! Looks like I'm not lost after all!" He laughed loudly and threw his arms open as Ma-Ti and Gi both hugged him. He and Kwame clasped hands firmly, each one flexing a little. When it came to greeting Linka, however, he hung back.

"Oh, uh, hey there, Linka. You're lookin' good. So, uh...how's it hangin'?"

She just sighed. This was the one encounter she hadn't been looking forward to.

"Hello, Joriah. It is...eh, good to see you." He blinked, bewildered.

"Uh, I told you you could just call me Wheeler—or at least 'Jo'."

"Yes, I know," she answered coldly, crossing her arms, "but, eh, I would rather be formal with you, if you do not mind."

"Why?" he said, stepping closer. A chuckle was forced out. "Come on, Linka, we've known each other for years! Why the formality now?"

"It is just the way I would prefer it. I would like to keep our relationship professional."

"Whuh-oh, did somebody order a wet blanket?" Gi galloped between them and grabbed them in her arms, forcing them closer. "C'mon, y'all, it's been forever since we've been together and this is how y'act? We need to have a party! We should go out and do somethin' fun like the old days!"

"I don't think any of us are in the mood for fun, Gi," Kwame said respectfully. She gawked in disbelief, but even Ma-Ti seemed more serious than usual. She let her friends go and sulked.

"Oh all right, fine. But we should at least chaw on some vittles together."

"We can definitely agree on that," Wheeler grinned. Linka explained that the air-bison that had carried her here would come back shortly, after dropping one more person off, so they'd have some time to talk and catch up on everything. They all found a place to sit down—Linka distancing herself from Wheeler—and wove stories of their travels and adventures until the first dim light of evening was traced across the sky.

…...

Usagi squinted as the air whipped at her long golden braids. She hadn't thought about tying them up, and now the wind was too fierce for her to do anything about it. Vainamoinen's beard fluttered in the breeze as well, but he didn't seem to mind or notice; his eyes were focusing on something else, something elusive but definite, and very concerning from the look on his face. Setsuna was holding tight to the boy, Anshar, who was holding tight to his lemur, Kishar. The world was passing beneath them in a blur.

"Where are we going?" Usagi pressed. She figured they'd have some leisure before they arrived at their undisclosed destination, so now was as good a time as any for explanations. Vainamoinen gave her a grim, quizzical expression.

"If you mean the precise location, I do not know yet. If you mean the general location, I suppose we are heading northeast."

"But I thought... You said we..." She stammered, not sure what to make of this confusing rhetoric. Vainamoinen raised an eyebrow.

"I sensed the advent of a horrific threat, my young Avatar. We are going to confront that threat. I do not know precisely where it is at the moment, but as a hound will pick up a scent and follow it until it arrives at its quarry, so are we pursuing this enemy. That is what I meant."

"Oh." She sat back, sated a little. She glanced at Setsuna, who was solely focused on keeping Anshar and Kishar comfortable. What significance they held was still a mystery; evidently Usagi's companions knew more than she did. Well, Setsuna did say she could see into many potential futures. Did this boy and his pet bear some importance to one of them? Obviously they were more than they appeared to be; Setsuna was willing to risk throwing the balance of the world off-kilter for their sake. Unless things were already teetering out of control, and these two were meant to help set things right...

Frazzled, Usagi looked at Vainamoinen again. "What sort of threat are we dealing with here?"

"A Primordial of unimaginable power," he said directly. "Though it is possible I am mistaken, so one can hope. But I am familiar with their works, and their abilities. One of their kind bore me into this world, after all, at the very Beginning." He could tell that all this meant nothing to Usagi, so he relaxed a little and clarified: "No doubt you have heard of Apsu by this point."

"Oh, you mean like those Tears of Apsu? I saw a few of them in Beryl's palace."

"Yes, they are her handiwork—Apsu's, I mean. She is the threat we are most likely racing to confront."

"What does she want?"

"To return this world to a state of sterility and silence, the way it was in her time. Originally she was a Primordial of creation, responsible for sweet water and salt water, but when life became too abundant, she wished it wiped clean from this world—eh, and she nearly succeeded, too. A great hero put an end to her...for a time."

"Who was that hero?" Vainamoinen pursed his lips, stroking his beard in thought even as it buffeted against him.

"I don't remember," he murmured slowly. "Whoever it was, they are not in this world anymore. Perhaps they are dead, or spirited away somewhere else."

"Oh. Can we stop her?" He chuckled grimly.

"The three of us? We would but delay her a little."

"But you're really powerful," she insisted, looking at both the old man and Setsuna. "Both of you! And...being the Avatar's gotta count for something, right? A-and I've got friends..."

"It wouldn't do any good, I'm afraid," Setsuna said softly. "If every single bender from the four corners of the earth were to join forces, it wouldn't be enough. If they were aided by every spirit, every living creature in our world...maybe. But nothing less."

"Then how can we stop something like that?!"

"Have patience, now," said Vainamoinen, gently waving his hand. "We are not throwing ourselves heedlessly into this fire. Apsu's reappearance in this world is earlier than any of us may have wanted, but I have spent a bit of time and effort preparing for it. There is one countermeasure we may yet be able to employ. I cannot do it alone, however. That is where you—and this boy, I believe—come into play." He smiled warmly at Anshar, who was still struggling against the wind.

"Wh-what can I do, sir? I...I don't have any bending powers..."

"Oh, but you do, my dear," Setsuna assured him. "You and the Avatar here have powers that are far beyond the scope of anything Vainamoinen or I could conjure. When the time is right, you'll—"

"Ah, we've arrived, I think!" Vainamoinen exclaimed suddenly. The air-bison was slowing down, and had begun his descent. Usagi peeked over his furry side and recognized the place immediately: the royal palace of Ba Sing Se. In fact, they were close to the very same courtyard where Mamoru had tried instructing her in earth-bending. Even though little more than a week had passed since then, it felt like a lifetime ago. If only Mamoru could see her now! She could probably earth-bend on his level, maybe even teach him a thing or two! She couldn't wait to...

Oh...she couldn't wait. If only she could see him now.

Usagi jumped off impatiently, glancing around in hopes that Mamoru had seen the bison approaching and would be there to greet them. Vainamoinen studied her for a bit as he helped Setsuna and Anshar off, chuckled at the capricious nature of youth, and loudly cleared his throat.

"Apsu is not yet here, Avatar Usagi, just in case you were wondering. I noticed your earlier vigilance and thought you should be put at ease." Usagi giggled bashfully and tried to recover, but Vainamoinen let her misguided enthusiasm slide. "It is good that you should seek the King, for we must address this threat to him and see to it that he understands its severity, and prepares for it. Apsu is coming to Ba Sing Se, whether by design or chance, and we must use whatever advantage we have to...ah!" The old man lit up, and so did Usagi, as Mamoru and a retinue of guards burst into the courtyard to demand why an unknown air-bison had felt the urge to settle there.

"Excuse me, but what is the meaning of—"

"MAMORUUUU!" Usagi immediately threw herself at him and, not wishing to wait an instant longer, kissed him full on the mouth for nearly half a minute. She let out a triumphant yawp as she popped herself free, gushing and laughing. "Aaaah, I feel better now!"

"It's good to see you too, bun-head," Mamoru tittered, trying not to blush too much. His guards laughed and whistled, but stood to attention again as he cleared his throat. Vainamoinen approached him, and though the two had never met, the look in the old man's stormy eyes expressed volumes.

"I do not mean to interrupt the reunion of such passionate acquaintance, but I have come here, your highness, with the most dire and urgent business you are likely to hear in your lifetime."

"And me," Usagi piped up. "He came here with me, too."

Vainamoinen cleared his throat very loudly. Usagi meekly shirked away.

"Well, good sir," Mamoru resumed, "if you come here with the Avatar, then I must put my trust in your word. Ah, and I believe I recognize another member of your party. My lady, I owe you a great debt." Mamoru bowed to Setsuna, who returned his bow and smiled.

"The debt has been repaid, I believe. You have worked diligently to maintain this country in the wake of its previous ruler's end. How I wish we had come here to give you reprieve, Endymion!"

"You arrive with my most cherished companion," he replied, looking warmly at Usagi. "To have seen her smiling face, and to know her affections for me, is reprieve enough to last me years."

"Aw, shucks," Usagi giggled, blushing. Mamoru was soon formally introduced to the two, and also to Anshar, who hung back shyly. He had never met a king before, nor anyone of any rank. Mamoru greeted him very politely and stated that he and his facilities were at the boy's service. Vainamoinen then asked that an urgent meeting be called, with all the king's advisors and Generals in attendance. He, Setsuna, and Usagi had much to discuss, and little time to work with. Mamoru understood, and gave the order; Anshar was trusted with a servant, and events swiftly moved towards a conclusion that would either see the salvation of the world...or its complete annihilation.

…...

The skies were becoming pleasantly cloudy when Ivanushka settled beyond the massive outer wall of Ba Sing Se. This was as far as the creature would go, but that was fine with Minako and Ishtar; they didn't want to keep him apart from Linka any longer than necessary. They thanked him for bearing them so far; he permitted a single, brief nuzzle before hurling up into the sky. Now they were all alone.

"I've never been to Ba Sing Se before," Ishtar said, awed as she stared at one of the great wonders of the world. "It...really does take your breath away. Man, that wall is massive!"

"Yeah, it's really something, isn't it?" Minako mirrored. "You know, the first time I came here, I was invading it with my dad, back when Beryl was queen. Hard to believe that was only a few months ago."

"Wait, you invaded this place? Uh...are we going to be arrested?!"

"No, no, it's cool," Minako laughed. "The new king and I are tight. He'll listen to us."

"Oh, good." There was a pleasant pause in the conversation. "So is he cute?"

"Huh?" Minako looked over, noticing Ishtar's sparkling eyes, and grinned weakly. "Uh, sorry, Ishtar, but I think you're chopping down the wrong tree there. If Mamoru has eyes for anybody, it's Usagi."

"Really? Aw, crud! Pfft, the Avatar would get all the hot guys." She scowled and kicked the ground; Minako laughed and put her hand on Ishtar's shoulder.

"Don't worry, I know plenty of cuties around the world who'd line up for your affections." Ishtar immediately lit up.

"R-really? You'd introduce me to them?"

"You bet!" she winked. "As the ambassador of love, I would be honored to be your wing-girl, Ishtar."

"Really?! Ohmygosh, you're the best friend ever!" Ishtar laughed and hugged Minako, but then a thought occurred to her, and she jerked back suspiciously. "Hey, wait a minute! How can I trust you to not steal some of them for yourself?" Minako blushed and glanced away nervously, not doing her credibility any favors.

"Oh! Um, well, uh, ya see, it's, uh..." Just then, the dark shadow of another air-bison flew overhead, settling down close to them. Minako recognized some of the passengers and sighed with relief. "Saved at the last minute," she murmured, running off to greet them. Ishtar fumed after her.

"Wait a minute, I'm not done with you y—ah, Nabu! Marduk!" It was indeed her two friends, alongside Makoto and Ami. Minako threw herself around the tall brunette first, laughing and squealing for joy. Makoto was a little surprised by the reception but returned it quickly; Ami hung back, shy as ever. Minako noticed her and winked.

"Hey there, stranger! Welcome to the party." Minako hugged her too; she blushed a little. As the reunions settled, Makoto tensed as she noticed Ishtar, and worried that there'd be a confrontation. She noticed that Minako seemed at ease, though, and went up to formally introduce herself to the other two girls. In no time everyone knew everyone else...but there were some who were noticeably absent from the group.

"Has anyone seen Rei-Rei?" Minako said. Everyone shook their heads, and a dismal cloud of concern fell over her face. She optimistically tried shrugging it off. "W-well, I guess she's just taking her time with whatever she went off to do. Heh...and she always got on our cases for being late to something!" She wandered off a little, trying to assure herself that all was well, not giving in to concern or doubt—and doing a poor job of it. The girls all exchanged a knowing look before Makoto went to wrangle her back.

"You're right, Mina. Rei probably wants to finish whatever she's doing so that she has no hangups or loose threads. She wouldn't put a halfhearted effort into something she took this seriously." Minako was quiet for a moment before nodding.

"Yeah...I know...but Usagi's gone, too. She's what worries me the most, especially after the way she left us."

"Hey, Usagi's a lot tougher than she looks," Makoto assured her. "I mean, she took on Beryl all by herself, and she held her own when we saved Motoki."

"Don't forget how she helped break us all out of Kunzite's prison," Ami added. Minako's smile slowly returned, and she nodded in agreement. The other girls were impressed to hear such feats attributed to one person—but of course, Suen had more than a few amazing victories under her belt, too. Minako was about to guide them into Ba Sing Se when she spotted another air-bison landing outside the city wall. She was sprinting even as it flew away, and skidded to a halt as she saw Rei politely dusting herself off. The fire priestess offered a timid smile.

"Hello, Mina." The other girl's eyes watered over, her mouth trembling.

"Darn it!" She threw her arms around Rei and squeezed hard. Rei simply smiled and endured it. Minako finally let go when she heard someone clearing their throat.

"Look, if this is some girlfriend you need to keep secret because of your sacred priestess vows..."

"For the last time, Nergal, I'm not dating anybody! No boys, no girls, nothing! Got it? Okay?"

"Aww, seriously?" Minako moaned. "You mean you're not interested in anybody?"

"N-no!" she stammered, her face glowing crimson. "I...I've been too busy with everything to get into a relationship! B-besides, there's nothing wrong with being single, okay? Especially at our age..."

"Oh, well," Nergal sighed, chuckling quietly. She waved as her friends found her, and hugs and handshakes were passed all around. Makoto and Ami soon caught up, and they greeted Rei with more reservation. Minako just fumbled with her hands.

"So...if someone were to have a thing for you, you'd have to turn them down."

"Yes, Minako," Rei stated firmly. "I would do it politely and respectfully, but still: no romances. That includes having one with you."

"I wasn't asking for myself," she grumbled. "I just wanted to know for a friend."

Sorry, Ami! Looks like your chance with Rei just failed.

With that mystery evidently cleared up, the eight girls got acquainted with each other, and soon came to realize that, a few differences aside, there were genuinely good people on both sides who each shared similar goals. The whole conflict honestly stemmed from confusion over who the true Avatar was, and what manner of creature had come to possess the false one. All eight of the girls had her own theory, and while none of them could commit to anything definite yet, they were united in learning the truth. As they were talking, Ami noticed something odd.

"Where's your other friend? Ah...Suen, was it? Shouldn't she be included in this?"

"We would if we knew where she was," Marduk said. They explained how their group had parted; the similarities were becoming more and more striking. Nobody knew where Usagi was, and nobody knew where Suen was. Rei took a deep breath and stepped up.

"I received a vision a few days before I came here. It...revealed a lot of things to me, but the main point it made was that the Avatar had concluded her mission, and would be coming back to us. It didn't say when, or where...but I feel like this is the place." Of course, she didn't mention the overwhelming evil the vision had shown her. No sense alarming everyone unnecessarily.

"But that still doesn't help us with Suen," Nergal sighed as she crossed her arms. "Frankly, I'm getting worried. She...was going through some really rough things when she left us."

"Maybe we shouldn't have let her go off on her own," Ishtar murmured. Marduk shrugged.

"I think letting her have some time to herself was the best thing we could've done. Sometimes ya just need to figure things out on your own."

"I can sympathize with that," Makoto said, and all the girls nodded.

"Still, I wish I knew where she was," Marduk added.

"Ask and it shall be given!" Startled, the girls whirled around, beholding a figure silhouetted by the sunlight. Nobody could quite make our who or what it was, and while the voice was vaguely familiar, it didn't sound like anybody they...

"Hey," Nergal said slowly, "is that..."

The figure drew closer.

"Speak of the angel and she shall appear. Hello, friends. It's good to see you again."

"No way," Ishtar whispered in awe. "Suen! Ohmygosh, this is so weird, we were just talking about y—" She was interrupted by Nabu, thrusting her arm out, a stern look on her impenetrable facade.

"Stand back. Something seems wrong about this."

"Wrong?" Ishtar stared dolefully at the approaching figure. She looked like Suen—the same slight, golden-haired girl with piercing blue eyes—but she didn't quite sound like her, or move like her.

"You were talking about me?" the figure said, smiling broadly but emptily. "I hope it was something good." At last she came into full view, a creature who was only the facsimile of a human: gaunt, pale, wide-eyed, ceaselessly grinning, twitching uncontrollably, its joints bending at odd angles, casting no shadow. Any resemblance to their friend Suen was superficial at best. Nabu's eyes widened in horror as whatever this was drew closer.

"Stay back, all of you! That's not Suen. Whatever was possessing her before now has total control over Suen's body. For all we know...the Suen we once knew and loved is gone forever."

The end of "A Reunion of Friends and Foes"

Next time: "A Hot Time in the Old Town"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

19: A Hot Time in the Old Town

The cloudy sapphire sky of Ember Island turned furious orange and red for an instant as a volcano trembled, regurgitated, and was temporarily silenced. Ittou's expression turned grim.

"I see what you mean. How long has this been going on?" The local governor, a man somewhere between Fire Lord Kuni and Oboro in age, stroked the slate hair on his chin. The two stood a safe distance away from the volcano, on the veranda of the governor's manor.

"The volcanoes around here are never completely predictable, but we've always had expert earth and fire benders on hand to warn us of the worst eruptions," he answered. "About half a year ago, though, they've been increasing in frequency and intensity. Our benders can't make anything out of it—according to their studies, everything's running normally. We wanted to send for a few Fire Priests, but with everything that's happened lately, they've been a bit scarce." He then raised a stern eyebrow and stared at Ittou doubtfully. "I know you're considered a prodigy, your highness, but talent doesn't make up for experience. Is there...anyone else in your party who..."

"Well, I'm the only bender," he answered. "Master Oboro is the eldest, though I doubt he has the experience you're looking for. I'm afraid we don't have anyone in our group like that." The governor grunted, not bothering to hide his dissatisfaction. Oh, he was glad for the additional help, and honored that the Prince and Princess had personally volunteered their assistance, but if experienced benders couldn't help with their problem, what good would these people do?

"I suppose it won't do any harm for you to investigate, at least," he relented. "I'll have a guide take you up to the base of the volcano. There's a little area we have reserved for tourists when the mountains're calmer, but obviously we had to close that up."

"Do you think we could go there?" The governor's expression soured.

"I suppose... I'm not really comfortable letting royalty in there, though. Um, no offense meant, your highness; it's just a very dangerous area, and, well...I'm fearful of exposing you to unnecessary risks."

"We may need to take that risk," Ittou stated. He assured the governor that they would be careful, then thanked him for his time and made his way back to the governor's lounge area, where the rest of the group was waiting. Ittou explained what he had seen and informed them of the next step of their mission. Soon, another man, closer to Suo's age, arrived and offered to lead the group to the foothills. He was very talkative, and spared no detail about Ember Island, the volcanoes, and the ancient superstitions some people still clung to.

"I personally find it fascinating," he exclaimed as they ascended a steep, overgrown slope. "I know it's an anachronism, but I can't help but love all those old myths. Then again, the real-life science behind them is just as intriguing. I guess you could say we're really steeped in duality here."

"Yes," Ittou said. He, Lark, and Ku Sheng maintained their interest, but the others—even Kotono, who had patience to spare—were getting tired of their guide's enthusiasm and long-winded speeches. Salamander looked up at the palm trees, noticing a few were flowering.

"Hey, is any of this fruit edible?"

"No, not for a few more weeks. There's plenty of pork and game fowl, though: it's hunting season now."

"Any wild panther-boars?"

"Not in this area. Most of em' were either scared off by the volcanoes or the tourists. You know, some people think the spirit of Agni himself resides on this island."

"Even though he died in Mt. Makapu?" Kotono said. Their guide smiled and waved dismissively.

"That doesn't matter to the locals! Agni was born here and spent most of his life here. 'His soul is with the flames', as the saying goes."

"Maybe it's the spirit of Avatar Makoto," Oboro suggested. Their guide laughed.

"He hardly spent any time in the Fire Nation at all! No, no: Ember Island is Agni's home."

"It wun't be Agni if it's causin' all this havoc," Ku Sheng reasoned. "He wun't do no harm t' his people."

"No, which is why my theory and the governor's are the same: the matter is spiritual in nature." The guide sighed as he took a brief rest. "It's just a pity we couldn't find a Priest. Still, we appreciate the help." The group still couldn't help but feel insufficient for the job, and a little insulted. Hadn't they helped bring the Fire Nation back from the brink of extinction at Beryl's hands? Hadn't they already accomplished more for the good of the world than anyone else, save for the Avatar herself? Hadn't they fought terrifying enemies, ventured through dangerous lands, suffered countless perils, and negotiated through countless delicate matters? Salamander certainly voiced her indignation, but the others held their tongues. In any case, they were closing in on the volcano's base. Afternoon had long been waning, and though the sky above was still bright (plumed with clouds and the occasional phantom of volcanic ash), the light would not last much longer.

"Should we set up camp?" Kartta asked. Their guide shook his head.

"Nah, it's better to press on. If you need to rest, there's a base a few miles ahead—or we could peek into the restricted area Governor Hiroshi told you about." Salamander lit up at the prospect of venturing into forbidden territory, and leaped forward in excitement.

"Ooh, let's go there! I wanna see what all the fuss is about!"

"Okay," their guide grumbled reluctantly, "but don't get your hopes up. It's just a little path that winds into the volcano."

"So it's only closed off because of the unpredictability of the eruptions," Kartta reasoned. He affirmed her deduction and took them on a slowly-ascending path that wound around the foothills, past the first base camp and through a narrow passage that led to a precipice. A female earth-bender and a male fire-bender were there, chatting in muted voices. They immediately took notice of the group and called out:

"Halt! By order of Governor Hiroshi of Ember Island, no one is permitted to pass here."

"It's okay," the guide called, "these are VIPs with special permission. Here." He presented a scroll with the governor's signature and seal, and the benders relaxed.

"Very well. You may return to the town now. We'll take charge of them."

"All right, much obliged. Well, everyone, it was fun while it lasted. Don't go getting yourself killed, and say hello to Agni or Makoto or whatever's causing all this." He smiled feebly and headed back down the path; meanwhile the two benders watched him leave, arms crossed and faces grave.

"The matter is more serious than he would lead you to believe," the fire-bender said. "No singular spirit, however powerful, could wreak this much havoc. But enough of that: I am Orm, and my companion is Dulce."

"That's not a common Earth Kingdom name," Kotono noted. She bowed and introduced everyone; Orm knelt but was asked to remain standing. "Now's not the time to stand on ceremony. We're just here to help."

"We're honored, your highness. If you would kindly follow us, we'll lead you into the heart of the mountain, and there you may judge for yourself what ails this land." Dulce stomped on the ground, creating a stone bridge that spanned the precipice. After crossing it and making their way further up, they came to an opening barred with stone and jets of flame, both of which were dispelled. The cleft was large enough to allow four people to pass through abroad; once they were inside, the barriers were rebuilt and Orm lit a fire.

"Who in your group can bend fire?" he asked. Ittou raised his hand.

"Just me, sir."

"Not the princess?" Orm grumbled, casting a surprised expression. A few weeks ago, Kotono would have been humiliated by such a question, but now it caused no more concern for her than a stiff breeze.

"Not at all. In fact, my brother is the only bender our group has."

"Not exactly," Salamander said sheepishly. She grinned feebly, snapping her fingers. A spark flew out, casting a pathetic flame that rested on her thumb before she blew it out. "That's the extent of it, I'm afraid."

"I can teach you if you like," Ittou offered. Salamander just snickered, embarrassed though she was.

"Hee hee, no thanks! I get by just fine picking locks and pockets. Besides, if I knew how to fire-bend, then you wouldn't be very special, would you your highness?" Ittou laughed feebly; meanwhile everyone else just covered their faces.

"Now I see why they call ya Sallymander," Ku Sheng groaned: "Ya got a lizard's tongue in ya."

"No, I just hate the name Yukimura. Stupid parents!" She ribbed the muscular woman affectionately. "You can relate to that, right Chiao T'ing?" Ku Sheng blushed deeply and looked away; Kotono and Oboro both coughed, trying to keep everyone focused. Ittou brought up the rear with a torch as Dulce and Orm led them into the dark tunnel. They kept their hands pressed against the rocky wall as they went, and asked everyone to do the same so they wouldn't get lost. The tunnel had been dug out centuries earlier by Fire Priests as part of a religious movement. Back when many still believed that spirits controlled most of the world's natural phenomena, the priests felt that being closer to the source of their power would bring them closer to the spirits (that, or imbue them with advanced powers of their own). The tunnel had briefly fallen into disuse after the religious movement died out, but had been reopened when tourists and pilgrims flocked to the islands. Orm explained that parts of it used to lead even deeper into the mountain, to a point where one could actually look down and see a river of magma flowing far below them, but the eruptions had sealed those parts off, and no amount of bending could open them again.

"The Avatar could probably do it," Lark noted. Dulce shrugged.

"Probably, but the slightest mistake would do far more harm than good." The passage continued to wind through the mountain, and would eventually come out near the peak. At times when the volcano was most dormant, tourists could even make camp inside the mountain, but that was completely out of the question now. Just as they ducked underneath a low entryway, Lark noticed flickering orange creatures scurrying along the walls, disappearing as soon as they appeared. Every so often they would issue little belches of fire, and the more he studied them, the more he realized what they were.

"Hey, salamanders!"

"I'm right here, you don't have to shout," his similarly-named companion grumbled.

"No, look!" he pointed. The creatures were really two-tailed lizards, small and sparkling like rubies, and just as rare. They were rumored to eat gemstones and breathe fire, and could even scamper on lava for short periods. Lark laughed and reached out to them, but Orm held him back.

"Don't do that! They burn like hot coals, boy. Even metal melts at their touch." Somewhat crestfallen, Lark contented himself with gazing at them, hissing softly whenever they sang their songs of fire. Dulce and Orm just shook their heads; noticing their incredulity, Suo spoke up.

"The young man has an affinity for animals. He's tamed Thunderhorns and showed no fear in the face of scorpion-beetles or panther-boars." Then, addressing Lark, "What do they say, my friend?" Lark hissed and growled quietly for a moment longer, then faced his companions with a dire expression.

"There's definitely a presence behind these eruptions, but it's unfathomably ancient, maybe even older than the spirits themselves. They don't know what it is exactly, but they're sure it's deeper inside. ...What?" He leaned in, cupping his ear, grunting and whistling as little embers issues from reptilian mouths. Lark sighed. "We need to head to the area that overlooks the river of lava."

"Impossible," Dulce snorted. "You'd need at least twenty earth-benders to clear out the collapsed entrance, and ten times that number in fire-benders to hold the eruptions at bay." Just then, the volcano trembled. Dulce stood at the ready, adapting a defensive stance.

"Everyone, brace yourselves! There's trouble." The rumbling passed quickly and without incident, causing Ord and Dulce to sigh with relief. "Merely a tremor. We should leave and find shelter. What we felt was just the herald of something greater."

"But we're so close!" Ittou objected. Oboro sighed and put his hand on the prince's shoulder.

"It's getting late, sire, not to mention dangerous. There's nothing more we can do right now." Feeling impatient and dejected, Ittou looked to the rest of the group, who were all of the same accord. He sighed. "Very well. Show us the way out, please. We'll return at first light and see what the new day brings us." Dulce bent a shortcut through the mountain and led them outside, but not before Lark cast one more look at the salamanders. Most of them were scrambling for shelter, but a few issued some final secrets to him.

"I see," he murmured, before catching up with everyone. Salamander the human poked her head through the entrance, blinking quizzically at her namesakes.

"I didn't think they were that small..."

…...

A different guide, older and less chatty, took them back up the mountain the next day; Orm and Dulce were already waiting at the precipice. After retracing their steps, they came to a part of the inner passage that had been blocked up by enormous slabs of igneous, sealed tight by magma and settled over time into a nigh-impermeable obstacle. Ittou touched it; the stone wall was still warm. He looked over at Lark, who was communing with the salamanders.

"Are you sure it's this way?" he said. Lark didn't move.

"They're sure. I trust them. If it's facts you want, though, I don't have any."

"Ain't like we can bowl this over'n find out," Ku Sheng muttered, tapping the wall with her fist.

"No," Oboro sighed. "Kalkin himself would have had trouble with this. Orm, you said this was sealed up from all the sporadic eruptions, right?"

"That was our assessment, yes. None of the previous volcanology teams could have accomplished this, and they'd have no reason to." Kotono cupped her chin and nodded.

"Do you think another eruption would undo it?"

"Perhaps, but something of that magnitude would also envelop the whole town." Ittou studied his sister as the wheels of thought turned in her head.

"Do you believe the cause of all this is behind that wall?"

"Well, it's not outside it," Orm said.

"I don't suppose there are any other earth-benders in the area," Suo said.

"There are," Dulce said. "Two teams of three, plus three fire-benders in each team and a local scientist for each as well. We usually split duties; Orm and I were appointed guard duty this week."

"Would you be able to open it if you all joined forces?" Orm and Dulce shared a grave expression.

"Yes, but we'd require surgical precision to keep the mountain from falling on us—not that it would matter if the volcano were to erupt with us in it. Keep in mind, your highness, we can no longer tell when it will go off. The best warning we'll get is a tremor, and if we're lucky, we can escape and find shelter in an hour or two." She nodded, apparently willing to accept the risk. Kartta grunted.

"Listen, Kotono, there's no reason for you or your brother to put yourselves in danger. If we absolutely have to go through this barrier, then we can't allow you to follow."

"I must agree with her," Suo said. "This is a risk far beyond everything we've encountered so far. We can draw willing volunteers from the other teams." Kotono gave her teammates an appreciative stare, noticing how everyone else's faces bore the same message. Even Salamander was concerned. She sighed deeply and pulled five coins from her pocket.

"We'll let fate decide. If more coins show face-up, then we'll leave. However, if they show the opposite side, we'll stay." Oboro scowled and reached for her arm.

"Your highness, don't throw your lives away to something like—"

"Too late!" she shouted, tossing them into the air. One by one, they plinked on the stone floor, with only one showing its face. Kotono studied the results in resignation. "My friends," she announced, "we have shared our lives, our fortunes, and our perils with you ever since we escaped from Beryl's prison, and we're going to keep sharing them. Onward." Salamander scoffed as she picked up all the coins.

"You were gonna come along with us anyway, weren't you?"

"Definitely. I don't believe in fate." Not knowing whether to smile proudly or grumble in fear, Salamander shrugged and slipped the coins into her pocket. Suo, Kartta, Oboro, and Kotono left to go find the other teams while everyone else began the treacherous dig. Orm and Dulce directed them with excessive caution, asking them to work slowly and in small increments, shirking from the slightest hint of trouble. Ittou and Salamander cut the stones away with their fire-bending while Ku Sheng picked off the loose boulders and Lark kept his ear to the resident lizards. They had scarcely cleared ten percent of the way when the teams returned four hours later, and even with the additional numbers, the work was slow. Night had fallen by the time Ittou could slip his hand through to the other side; Orm and Dulce hesitated to go any further.

"It's late," he reasoned, "and we're tired. We've made it this far safely; let's not push our luck."

"But if it goes off while wurr away, then all our work was for nuf'n," Ku Sheng indicated.

"Better to be safe than sorry," Dulce replied. "If we have to do it again, then we have to do it again." There was nothing else for it, so once again the teams made their way out and down the mountain, back to the town to rest for one more night. The volcano shook ominously a few times, mocking and threatening them.

The damage wasn't nearly as catastrophic as everyone feared—in fact, if anything, the opening had gotten larger. Suo wondered if this was less of a stroke of luck than an invitation; Kartta suggested it might actually be an invasion. Had whatever was behind that rocky partition tore down the last obstacle separating it from the outside world for the purpose of meeting these intruders, or to make the transition to total destruction easier? In any case, there was nothing to be done but widen the opening a little more and squeeze through. There was no need for torches, at least: the river of magma far below offered sufficient light. Ittou ran as close to the edge as he could; there was a ledge that prevented one from accidentally careening over the side. He stared down and gasped at a sight that even royalty was not usually privy to.

"Amazing," he gasped. The fiery serpent was so far down that it looked like someone had caressed it into creation with a thin paintbrush, but it surged and pulsed with an energy drawn from the depths of the planet itself, a fury and a power greater than any Avatar, winding meekly below. Even from his high vantage point, Ittou could feel the heat layering on his face, like he was staring directly into a baking-furnace. His sister and the others joined him, wanting to witness the spectacle for themselves.

"Few are the poets who could have said better," Suo remarked. He smiled at Oboro. "Have you ever seen the like, friend?"

"I have," he nodded, "but not inside a mountain. I once had the privilege of flying overhead on a dragon, and bore witness to flowing rivers of molten fire crossing over the countryside. Heh, Kalkin dared me to spit in it, and was the first to make an offering. When I met his challenge, he revenged a few bruises I had given him by changing the wind, and made a mess of my uniform."

"Boys," Kotono grumbled. Oboro just laughed while Ku Sheg shrugged.

"I wudda done it. I've had worse'n spit make a mess o' m' clothes." To demonstrate, she spat over the side, but couldn't tell what sort of an impact her action had. Lark and Salamander spat as well, while the others just grumbled at their immaturity.

"Careful, you'll wake the fire spirit!" Ittou shouted.

"That or Lord Agni," Kartta added, "and I doubt he'd take kindly to being spat on."

"You're just sore because you know you don't have the guts," Salamander muttered airily. Kartta snorted.

"I have nothing to prove." Just then, the volcano trembled again, causing a few people to lose their balance and careen. Ku Sheng grabbed hold of Lark and Salamander while Kartta dug her sword into the ground and held on tight. The opening that had taken all of yesterday to create was now blocked off again by falling debris. Kotono cursed.

"Is there any other way out of here?"

"Yes," Orm shouted, "but we'd have to walk miles to reach it, and it's likely to be buried under as well!" The princess gnashed her teeth and ran to the only other opening, but was thrown off-balance as the volcano shuddered. The quakes were increasing in frequency and intensity; in no time at all they would be immolated or crushed to death. Caution was hurled aside as everyone attempted to reopen the passage, but a second issue of debris scattered them and rendered all attempts useless. Dulce did everything she could to protect the group from the larger boulders, but it was difficult to keep her balance, much less do any bending. Just when everyone thought that the end had arrived, a column of magma issued from below, dissipating just as quickly, and everything became still. The group remained paralyzed and breathless for quite a long time.

"Is everyone okay?" Ittou shouted. Universal affirmatives answered. He stood up, shaking almost as badly as the volcano itself, and tried to regain his composure. "Well! Uh...I guess that wasn't so bad—"

He shrieked as a black presence pushed against him, and the volcano shuddered once more. A figure streaked through the group, settling in the air directly over the river of lava. The volcano gave another jump as a bellowing sound issued from the figure. Lights flashed and a second pillar of liquid flame leaped up. Everyone stared at the entity in wonder and fright.

"What in the world..." The bellowing sound returned, the ground shook, they were brought to their knees. Kotono stood.

"Are you the spirit of the volcano?" The entity, a swirling shapeless mass of black smoke, growled, causing more tremors. Kotono was bowled over but refused to back down. "Speak to us! I'm a representative of the Fire Nation! We can come to an accord! What you are doing here is causing panic and destruction to the local population!" She grunted as another blast of fire spewed forth; Ittou did his best to protect his sister but was no more helpful than a paper umbrella in a hurricane. The entity thundered once more, its formlessness coagulating and coalescing beyond the boundaries of physics. Oboro called out next:

"Are you a spirit at all, or something else?" It answered much the same as it had before. He grumbled, realizing the governor's earlier bouts of disappointment. This was a job for a Fire Priest, not a retired old lancer. Lark attempted next, drawing out every means of communication he could think of. The magma flowed and a few stray droplets made their way to the floor, where they sizzled and smoldered. Finally fed up with this, Ittou swiped his arm, calling forth flames. He balanced one on the palm of each hand while a third hovered overhead in a halo. His breath burned and his eyes seared; the stony ground ignited under his heels, and fire walked with him as he approached the entity.

"Identify yourself, in the name of the Fire Lord, Agni, and the Avatars," he commanded. Kotono felt chills despite the sweltering heat. She had never seen her little brother like this before.

The entity spoke, or at least made sounds. It and Ittou traded words for a few moments. Apparently it saw the boy as an equal, or at least an adept.

"What's it saying?" Salamander called. Ittou ignored her temporarily and resumed his conversation. The black fog swirled and assumed a more familiar shape, that of a demonic humanoid male. Its eyes glowed with a heat beyond the reckoning of mortals.

"How do you know Agni?" it hissed slowly, its voice as wispy as its form.

"I am his descendant. The line of Fire Lords and Fire Ladies stem from his lineage. I am Ittou, Prince of the Fire Nation."

The creature pondered this for a moment. "From which land does the Avatar of this era hail?"

"From no land. The previous Avatar was an earth-bender, but the current one was born away from the four nations."

The silence this time went on much longer.

"Unexpected. How many lives have I taken?"

"None so far. We were hoping to keep it that way, your excellency."

"You will fail," it said, but in warning not in boast. "A calamity far greater than mine has awoken. From this fate, no one may escape. What difference is there in my presence or absence?"

"Maybe none," Ittou answered. "All the same, it's our duty to fight back. We may lose but we will not lose in silence. If you will not help us, then you are just in the way."

A terrible noise like grinding rock and fire and metal and smoke clapped the air and sent everyone to the floor, even Ittou. The entity was laughing, but the tone of its voice shifted to one of undisguised admiration.

"Your kind has grown bolder since I last walked these lands! Very well, Prince of the Fire Nation, we shall strike a bargain: if you manage to turn this calamity and escape unscathed, then I shall quit this land forever and return from whence I came. However, if you all fail, then I will have my way with the world before I am consumed. Are we agreed?"

"We are, if you're true to your word."

"My kind never lies, Prince. That is your specialty. I will keep my word if you can manage to survive." Ittou bowed respectfully, and through the inky haze, everyone witnessed the entity bowing as well, before it vanished. Then, all was calm. Sighs of relief issued from every mouth there.

"That may have taken ten years off my life," Oboro exhaled.

"Indeed," Suo groaned. "but by the spirits, what a courageous young man! I was beginning to fear our young prince more timid than his sister, but it seems she has a rival!"

"Mus' be somthin' in th' water," Ku Sheng remarked. Kotono approached her brother gingerly but proudly, beaming at him as he slowly recovered from his ordeal. She then bent to hug him, a gesture he sorely needed, as he was about to collapse. Once Ittou got his bearings, he returned to the group.

"Bravo, my liege," Kartta said, bowing deeply. "A thousand warriors could not have matched your valor. But what in the world was that thing?"

"It called itself a djinn. It claimed to be ancient, older than the spirits themselves. That matches up with what Lark's salamander friends said." The two boys smiled at each other.

"I've never heard of a djinn," Oboro said. He sighed and added, "Looks like we need to pay Kasei a visit—maybe eve Wan Shi Tong himself. Whatever that thing was, we need to learn more about it."

"We can leave that for another day," Kotono said. "Right now, we need to explain to Governor Hiroshi what happened, and hopefully assure him and the islanders that everything will go back to normal."

"Yeah," Salaamnder added. "We only need to worry about something even more dangerous than a djinn, something that could wipe out the entire world from the sound of it! Heh, no biggie, am I right?"

"One step at a time," Kartta told her. Ittou was congratulated and praised the whole way back to town, and while the governor still had reservations, he wanted to do something for the heroes who had calmed the volcano, so it was feasting and merry-making for the rest of the evening.

…...

Unable to sleep—mostly because the festivities were still going strong, even late at night—Ittou slipped away and made his way back to the terrace where all these adventures had begun. He wanted to see what the volcano looked like at night, but instead observed that someone else had chosen to forgo the celebration in favor of quiet solitude. Ittou smiled; perhaps "solitude" was the wrong choice of word, as several birds were resting on the balcony's ledge. The other boy turned to see who was joining him, and waved.

"Hey. I guess we had the same idea."

"Yup, two peas in a pod." Ittou smiled and joined Lark. The volcano was issuing a plume of smoke that was visible even in the dark of night, but the prince was honestly more engrossed with the company his friend kept. He chuckled.

"Lark surrounded by larks."

"I was hoping to find some owls, but I guess we're nestled too deep in the tropics for that. These are just regular nightingales."

"You sure do have a way with animals," Ittou chuckled. One of the nightingales was bold enough to hop onto his outstretched finger, and soon it was pecking at his hair. Lark whistled a bird-call, and his friends sang back.

"Hey, Ittou...can I ask you a personal question?" The prince blinked quizzically.

"Hmm? Sure, I guess."

"Do you think I'm useless? I know we're good friends and all, and I'm grateful for that, but...I'm not exactly robust in a fight. I couldn't do anything but hiss at a few lizards this whole trip. And what good was I when we were waylaid by those bandits? Even Salamander accounted for herself." Lark hung his head, clearly troubled by the thought. Ittou shook his head.

"You really shouldn't think that way, you know. Even forgetting the fact that you're my best friend, and probably the only person in the world I can talk to about anything—this includes my sister—you're not useless. You definitely helped us here on Ember Island, and...yeah, you're not a warrior like Kartta or Oboro, but you've got skills none of us do. We all bring something unique to this team, and I think that's what makes us strong. Sal may say some embarrassing things, but she had a point earlier when she mentioned my bending. If all of us could do that, then we wouldn't be special. If we were all fighters, we wouldn't be able to sail as well, or use diplomacy, or pick locks, or..."

"Or break down doors with a few kicks," Lark snickered. Ittou laughed softly, remembering when Ku Sheng had performed that service. No weapon or any amount of bending had been able to shatter that obstacle until she came along. The prince's face turned grave, and he shuddered a little as a foul memory resurfaced.

"Besides...don't forget what happened to Beryl." Lark withdrew, closing his eyes as he nodded bleakly.

"Believe me, Ittou, there's nothing I'd like more. I still blame myself for it a little, every now and then. But...what's done is done. I don't want a single moment in my past to define me." Ittou smiled, edging a little closer.

"Just like how I never wanted my 'prodigious bending skills at such a young age' to define me."

"Spirits, do people still say that?" Lark groaned. Ittou laughed louder.

"Yeah! You'd think they've never seen anyone younger than me throwing fireballs around!" The two boys shared a laugh, and Lark drew a little closer.

"Thanks, Ittou. I'm really glad you feel that way. Sometimes I just get the impression that I'm holding everyone back, is all."

"No worries," the prince smiled. "And you're not, believe me. You're always there to raise everyone's spirits and make us laugh. That's more important than anything a sword or fireball could do. And...I meant it when I said you were my best friend." His face glowed warmly, and Lark noticed. He blushed a little.

"Even though I'm a commoner?" Ittou snickered, rubbing his nose haughtily.

"You're also a year older than me, and taller, too!"

"I'm not that tall! Maybe like four inches! And I've never lorded my age over you!"

"Oh yeah? Well I've never lorded my status over you!" The two boys glared at each other with steely eyes before chuckling again. Lark put a hand on his best friend's shoulder.

"Thanks, Ittou."

And then he did the boldest, sweetest, and stupidest thing possible, by leaning forward to gently kiss him. Ittou jerked back in shock.

"Whoa!" Lark jerked back as well, appalled by what he had done...and the reaction he got.

"Ah...I, I'm sorry! I'm really sorry, ah...I-I-I dunno what I was thinking! I've just...had a crush on you for ages, and I know that's wrong of me, and I must be sick or something, but..."

"That's not wrong, Lark!" Ittou interjected passionately. He grabbed the other boy's hands shouting, "Trust me, you're not sick! Because...even if you were...then so am I!"

Ittou became just as bold and sweet, and perhaps as stupid, as his friend. Lark was astonished for a time but soon forgot everything but the pleasure of Ittou's closeness, his warmth, of feelings shared and returned against all odds. They kissed and held and forgot everything, everything, even the world outside and the party and the unlocked door and the fact that anybody could see them if they chanced to...

They heard it creak, broke their embrace, and stood dumbfounded as Kotono, one hand still holding the terrace door open, stared back at them in alarm. Nobody said or did anything for what felt like eons.

"Oh, excuse me, I thought Suo might be out here," Kotono said, disturbingly calm. "I was going to ask him if he wouldn't mind keeping us here for another day. Sorry to bother you two." She then walked away, leaving the boys still paralyzed. Ittou quickly ran after her without so much as an excuse me, finally catching up in an empty hallway.

"Ah...Kotono! Um...how much of that did you..."

"How much of what?" she said evenly. Ittou stammered, aghast at how utterly tranquil his sister was acting. She had just walked in on him kissing another boy! Wasn't she furious, shocked, alarmed, disturbed? Wasn't she at least bothered? She let out a sigh. "Look, it's none of my business, all right? I'm sorry if I made you feel uncomfortable."

"But...ah... Ah, are y-y-you gonna tell mom and dad?"

"Tell them what?" she scoffed. "That their son had his first kiss? ...It was your first, wasn't it?" Her brother, on the verge of nervous tears, nodded shakily. Her lips curved faintly, a hint of jealousy lining her face. Kotono was almost eighteen years old and had never kissed anyone before, boy or girl. She had never been attracted to anyone and nobody had ever been attracted to her.

Ah, of course that prodigy of a brother would have his first kiss before me!

"Do you want me to tell?" she asked blithely, trying to lighten the mood. Trembling, he shook his head, and she laughed kindly. "Then I won't. Oh, silly boy!" She hugged her brother again, kissing his cheek and tussling his hair. "He's a good catch! Treat him well, all right? I'm going to find Suo now. You should go to bed soon. We'll have an early day tomorrow if our boatswain has anything to say about it."

"Wait!" he called as she walked off. He glanced down nervously, then looked up, still fearful and embarrassed. "Y...you're really okay with it?" She scoffed.

"Why should my opinion matter? Don't worry what other people think, all right? You follow your heart, Ittou; do whatever makes you happy. But if you really want my opinion, I think you'd make a cute couple. See you in the morning." She gave an encouraging smile and waved good-night, leaving her brother stunned. Somehow he made it back to his bed before passing out.

The end of "A Hot Time in the Old Town"

Next time: "The True Hero"

Author's note:

This is actually a very late addition to the main story, and while it's not necessary to the overall arc, I felt that some time away from the girls and their troubles would be a good change of pace. The Fire Nation Royal Team has had starkly little screen time in this book, as opposed to the first, so hopefully this "filler" balances things out. Regarding Agni, my theory is that he was an ancient Fire Nation hero, or the first Fire Lord (or both), and the Agni Kai was named in his honor. Finally, if you're bothered by the same-sex relationship I portrayed here, remember that this is Sailor Moon and Avatar, and they're all over the place.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

20: The True Hero

At last she came into full view, a creature who was only the facsimile of a human: gaunt, pale, wide-eyed, ceaselessly grinning, spasming uncontrollably, its joints bending at odd angles, casting no shadow. Nabu's eyes widened in horror as whatever this was drew closer.

"Stay back, all of you! That's not Suen. Whatever was possessing her before now has total control over Suen's body. For all we know...the Suen we once knew and loved is gone forever."

"That's not a very nice thing to say," the creature drawled, eyes twitching as its grin widened. "I'm the same old Suen you've always known, Nabu—only I've gotten stronger since the last time you saw me. Much, much stronger..." She shuffled to the side a little, her head twisting until it was focused on the other girls. Her grin remained but now it was plastered with malice. "What are you doing with them? They're with the false Avatar. That makes them our ENEMIES!"

"They're not our enemies!" Marduk protested. "And neither is their friend Usagi. If you'd just listen to them for two minutes..." Suddenly a blistering surge of water, fire, wind, and stone bolted through the air and crashed into the four girls, knocking them flat on the ground. Suen's hand smoldered, trembling.

"I don't listen, I act. You don't extend a hand of mercy to your enemies, you blot them out of existence." Astonished, Suen's four friends gawked at what they had seen, and the creature who was before them, glee masking intense hatred. Ishtar stood in front of the other girls, crestfallen and terrified, but steadfast all the same.

"That's enough! I won't let you harm them or anyone else! M-maybe...maybe you're the fake Avatar! M-maybe you're the one who's wrong!" Suen's glare intensified, and she raised her hand, fingers curled cruelly into a claw. She was no longer smiling.

"You think so, huh? Does this feel fake to you?!" An earthen spear was launched at blinding speed; Ishtar was frozen to the spot.

"Look out!" She found herself shoved out of the way by Nabu, who took the blow in the abdomen. Blood issued and her eyes went dim as she collapsed to the ground in a lifeless heap. Ishtar nearly lost her mind.

"NABU!" Grief-stricken, she knelt down and wept profusely, begging for the brave girl's life. Appalled by what they had seen, Marduk and Nergal could stand by no longer.

"All right, you asked for it! There's no way our Suen would ever do something so cruel!"

"Yeah! Whatever you are, we want our Suen back! Give her back or else!"

"Or else what?" she purred, eyes narrowing with malicious joy. "You'll beat it out of me? Ahahaha... Actually, I have a better idea. Instead of me fighting the two of you..." She made a broad thrusting gesture with her hands, twirling her fingers like she was conducting a marionette. The bodies of Marduk and Nergal immediately began convulsing and jerking in accordance. Horrified, Makoto sat up.

"What...what did you do to them?!"

"Oh, just a little trick I like to call 'flesh-bending'! Yes...why fight me when you can fight EACH OTHER?!" The creature possessing Suen laughed and forced the two girls, step by agonizing step, closer to one another. They fought her for dear life, but were completely under her power now. Their bodies twisted into earth and fire-bending stances, calling out an orb of flame and a jagged blade of stone. Slowly, the two projectiles inched away from their origins, towards the other. Tears rolled down Marduk's face. Nergal began hyperventilating.

"Stop it! Stop it, Suen! Please, I'm begging you!"

"No! Don't make me do this! Don't make me fight my best friend..." A flicker of surprise ignited in Marduk's eyes for a single moment, but the fireball drew closer, and she was defenseless against it. The spear of stone edged closer to Nergal's throat...

"HEY!" Suen turned around just in time to receive a brutal punch in the stomach, breaking her hold. Ishtar stood quivering over her, eyes brimming with a ferocity nobody had ever seen before. She was still crying, but there was something...powerful behind the tears. "I told you to leave them alone!" While Suen's body was still reeling, Ishtar looked over at her friends—all of them—and shouted: "Don't just stand there, take Nabu somewhere safe! You need to warn the king about this! Go on, get out of here! I'll handle things here!"

"B...but Ishtar..." Stunned, Marduk stared at her friend, unable to process this radical change. Ishtar had always been the most carefree, bubbly, air-headed girl in the world. Violence frightened her, and conflict itself was anathema. To see her stand up to Suen—no, to this creature—all by herself...

"Just do what I said!" she roared, throwing everyone back with a gale force. She manipulated the wind with surprising mastery, carrying the entire group far away, setting them down as close to the entrance of Ba Sing Se as she could. Ishtar had never displayed that level of skill or power before.

She then turned around to face the monster her friend had become.

"Oh...that was a mistake, Ishtar. That was a VERY...BIG...mistake. Do you have any idea what you're up against? Do you have any clue about the depths of my newfound power? I am the Avatar! You're nothing but a weak, sniveling, spoiled, cowardly girl; you always have been! To think that someone like you would be anything more than a minor nuisance—"

"Shut up!" she screamed, brimming with righteous fury. "I don't care about any of that! You're going to give us back our Suen, even if I have to pry her away from you!" The creature laughed darkly, raising a hand crackling with energy.

"Ohohoho, it's so adorable that you think you can—" Suen was instantly blasted away by the force of a hurricane, skidding and bouncing along the ground until she came to a rough stop. Ishtar, her hair billowing in the wind, eyes brimming with tears, approached her with the conviction of a warrior queen.

"I told you to shut up!" Stunned, and a little surprised, the creature slowly sat up, rubbing its bruised face. She hadn't expected such a furious onslaught from the meek girl. Not a mistake she'd make again.

"Okay...have it your way, then." The entity blasted the earth apart with a searing shockwave of air; Ishtar batted it away effortlessly and soared into the sky just as the rent earth was flung at her. She sent down a shredding tornado, ripping the projectiles apart; Suen's body leaped out of its way just as it tore into the ground. She called forth intense flames, stretching them into immeasurably long columns and raised them to the sky; Ishtar diverted them, cleaving them in twain, then shot down, building up an immense pocket of air around her, smashing it into Suen's body. The attack was so large that even the creature controlling her could not avoid it.

As it bounced along the ground, Ishtar returned to the surface, drew the air around her hands, and formed them into long whips. With her feet only just skittering against the grass, she raced after the creature and tore into her, missing on the first strike but whirling around for a second. Suen weakly countered with a water wall, but it was cleaved in half; Ishtar whipped again, blasting stone projectiles as they were thrown, then threw a gust of air at the debris, pelting Suen mercilessly. Another whip strike unbalanced her, and a gust of air threw her against a tree, where a second gust followed, shattering the tree to pieces and sending Suen crumbling to the ground.

Whatever monstrosity had taken over her body now fought with superhuman endurance and ferocity. Two spires shot out of the ground, wreathed in flame, but Ishtar pushed them aside before they got close. The creature slammed her palms into the ground and summoned a hundred spires, spewing fire onto them all, and flung them in a relentless hailstorm. Ishtar glared.

"Not very creative, are you?" She instantly erected a bubble of air several atmospheres thick around herself, then multiplied her air-whips a hundredfold, the blades blurring as they destroyed Suen's salvo. A shredding tornado came after her, but Ishtar's eyes glinted at the challenge, and she held firm. She launched the bubble at the tornado, dispersing it with an earth-shattering explosion, then raised her arms to the sky. Suen saw an opening and shot a torrential flood, but Ishtar took a deep breath and bellowed as loud as she could, parting the waves with her breath. She then thrust her arms downward, the accumulated force of many atmospheres pressing down onto the tiny Suen like a slab of granite crushing a fly.

Suen recovered faster than any human could possibly hope to, blasting elements at random. Ishtar dodged out of the way, shoving herself this way and that with quick bursts of wind, or shielding herself with a wall of air. She skidded across the ground, unbalancing Suen as she guided the wind beneath her feet, lifting her off the ground, spinning her around and around. Suen fought with her own air-bending, regaining her posture and firing a quick barrage of water-needles. Ishtar diverted them with a wave of air but got pierced by two. Finally seeing blood, Suen moved in for the kill, ripping up the ground Ishtar stood upon. Ishtar was caught off guard for a moment but regained her composure gracefully; however, she didn't have time to return fire, and got knocked in the head with a solid block of stone. Her hand barely managed to wave away a wall of fire before she sought respite underneath an air dome.

"Just so you know," the creature spoke, "I may not feel any of this pain, but your friend Suen does! Can you imagine the kind of trauma you're causing her? Every blow, every burn, every bruise, every drop of blood spilled... It's all on your hands, Ishtar. You'll end up killing her long before I expire, and a corpse can serve my ends just as well!"

"I see," she muttered, wiping the dirt from her face. She spat as the air around her crackled. "I guess it's a good thing I've been holding back all this time." The currents surrounding Ishtar built up enormous static energy. Most fire-bending masters know that, with enough skill and power, they can form bolts of lightning and bend them to their will—but that ability was not exclusive. Charges of electricity sizzled and popped around Ishtar, and while Suen stood mesmerized with this unusual feat, she unleashed it upon the creature. The energy was nowhere near the level a fire-bender could demonstrate, but it was sufficient for Ishtar's purpose, and struck Suen with just enough force to seize her muscles and render her temporarily immobile.

Whatever had control over her body was still moving it, and was even attacking, but the efforts were feeble. Issuing an apology, Ishtar now formed an air bubble around her friend, and carefully drew the oxygen out of it, creating a miniature vacuum. Suen's eyes bulged, and she struggled to breathe. With her body rendered mostly inert, the creature could not escape, and even it was powerless against asphyxiation. The body dropped in a lifeless heap, the eyes glassy and dull. Fearing she had gone too far, Ishtar dispersed the bubble and fretfully put her fingers against Suen's throat, feeling for a pulse. For a terrifying moment, there was nothing.

"Please, Suen," she whispered, tears in her eyes, "come back to us. You're stronger than this. You're better than this! Please!" Relief washed over Ishtar as she felt a timid thrumming, and she released a breath she didn't know she had been holding. She wanted to get back to her friends, and was especially worried about Nabu, but there was no telling how long this thing would be unconscious. She had some ribbons, but they were a poor restraint; she didn't even think chains could hold this monster. All the same, she found two trees closely intertwined and air-lifted Suen into their shared canopy. It was tricky trying the branches around her using nothing but air, but Ishtar's perseverance yielded a crude cage. She used one more moment to stare up at her friend, offering a prayer and apology before jetting off towards Ba Sing Se, a gale at her heels.

…...

Landing face-first at the gates of Ba Sing Se was hardly the most dignified way to return, but the girls shrugged it off. With Marduk and Makoto bearing the wounded Nabu between them, they confronted the guards and begged to be allowed inside. Needless to say, the city watch was shocked at what they saw, but they understood that time was of the essence and let them through (it helped that they recognized four of the girls as close confidants of the king). One of the guards escorted them to the nearest clinic, and Ami took over immediately once they were inside. Marduk and Nergal refused to leave Nabu's side, so Makoto, Minako, and Rei rushed out to find Mamoru.

Ami had to explain to Marduk and Nergal that they'd just be in the way, so they found a private room where they could sit down and wait. Time seemed to drag on interminably as Marduk and Nergal hovered in that quiet space. There was nothing to occupy or distract themselves with in the room; they could do nothing but sit, or pace. Finally, Marduk couldn't take the silence any longer, and sat next to her red-haired companion.

"What if she doesn't make it?"

"Don't say that!" There was a pause.

"What about Ishtar?"

"Don't even think about it!" Another pause. Nergal was crying. Marduk wished she could do the same, but she felt sick and hollow. One of their friends was on the verge of death, another had been overtaken by a monster, and another was fighting her, just to buy them all some time. Suddenly the fragility of their tight-knit group and the uncertainty of their future struck Marduk, and she put her arms around Nergal. They held each other for a long time.

"Sorry," Marduk whispered at length. "I'm just scared. All of this seems so unreal." Nergal simply nodded, choking back her tears. Marduk decided that the other girl had been crestfallen long enough, and needed to take her mind away from gloom. "So...um, back there...you called me your best friend. Did you...mean that?"

"Of course I did!" she insisted. Their eyes met; desperation and terror brimmed in Nergal's tears. "I mean, who else is there? Not that the others aren't good friends and all, but...I like you the most."

"But you're always teasing me and saying the stupidest, most immature things..."

"Yeah, I...I do that with people I like." She sniveled, wiping her face. Marduk took a tissue and gave it to Nergal, who made short work of it. "And I'm gonna keep on doing it," she said, her face glowing with love, "because your reactions are always so hilarious. Y-you can m-make me...s-smile and laugh and...feel better about myself and the world, j-just by being you! A-and...when it looked like I w-was g-going to k-k-kill you... I've never been so f-frightened in all my life! I knew that if I...were to ever bring any harm to you, I'd n-never forgive myself!" She sniffled and blew her nose again. Marduk was stunned; she didn't know what to say. She chose to say nothing.

"I'm sorry for making a spectacle," Nergal whispered after collecting herself. "It all just came pouring out of me, and I couldn't control it, but I think it needed to be said. I...I don't have anybody else outside of you guys. I'm afraid for Nabu and Ishtar and Suen, too...but more than anyone else, I don't want to lose you." Nergal stared at her closest friend intensely, and once again, Marduk was dumbstruck. Rather that grasp for anything to say, she offered a slow smile, scooted closer, and shyly took her hands. Nergal didn't have anything left, so she just held onto her friend, feeling helpless and yet oh so blessed.

…...

Makoto, Minako, and Rei found Mamoru in deep discussion with Nephrite and several other Generals. He was glad to see that they were all well, and regretted he had no time to spare for a reunion, but the entire city was being braced for an unknown (albeit certain) threat. A few of his Generals and advisors were questioning his decision, as it came off nothing more than the word of a girl and an old man, but Mamoru trusted Usagi implicitly—and besides, considering all the previous attacks and encounters that had taken place over the last few months, an extra degree of caution was always prudent. Besides, he added, Usagi was the Avatar...and there was another guest whose insight was just as good.

"May I introduce Setsuna Meioh," Mamoru said, presenting the lady. She bowed, offering a mysterious smile. None of the girls had ever met her before, but there was something familiar about her, something they couldn't quite place. Perhaps in another time, another world, another life...

"I won't ask for your trust, ladies," she said. "You have already placed your faith in his highness, and in the Avatar, and that is enough for me. Simply understand that I am on your side in this struggle, and I shall remain so in the struggles to come...though in truth, you are more on my side."

"What does that mean?" Makoto said. Setsuna's eyes twinkled with a strange light.

"We have the same goal, for the time being, or perhaps I should say the same desire." This answer wasn't entirely satisfactory, but they pushed through, as there were more important issues to discuss. They told Mamoru about Suen and the others, distilling their encounters up until their current status. Mamoru agreed to treat Nergal, Marduk, Ishtar, and Nabu as guests—but as for Suen, he hesitated, glancing away to stare ominously out a window. Rei swallowed nervously at his silence.

"Mamoru, you said that Usagi was here, right?"

"Yes," he replied slowly, "she arrived before you, along with Lady Meioh and Lord Mariner. I'm sorry that you missed her; I know she would've been elated to see you all again."

"What do you mean, 'missed her'? Where is she now?" He pursed his lips and closed his eyes.

"She left on Avatar business. This time, though, she had company: Lord Mariner and a boy named Anshar went with her. He could not guarantee her safety, though." The girls looked at him, and at each other, their faces creased with anxiety. His grim expression matched theirs as he braced for what was to come. "Right now none of us are safe. We are beyond certainties now. We can only act, and hope."

"What can we do to help?" Rei said.

"If I may?" Setsuna interjected. "I would like to visit Nabu first. Perhaps I can offer her some aid. I would also like to know for certain if Ishtar is safe." Mamoru stared at her quizzically; he hadn't expected Setsuna to express such concern over two total strangers. Then again, her motives had always been unclear, albeit for good thus far. He decided to trust her, and sent the girls to accompany her. Ami was still hard at work trying to heal Nabu, but the stone spear had penetrated deep, slashing open her liver. Nabu had lost a great deal of blood, and though Ami was skilled, she doubted even her mother could do much better.

"Is she going to make it?" Makoto pressed. Ami stared tersely at her patient.

"I honestly don't know. This goes beyond anything I've been trained to heal. Her internal injuries are what concern me the most. If my mother were here...a-and probably three or four more healers...and if w-we had plenty of time to..."

"Time is my specialty, Miss Mizuno," Setsuna stated. She asked to see the patient, which was highly irregular, but Ami was desperate and running out of options. Setsuna studied the gaping wound and the sickly-pale girl for a moment, then gently placed her hands over the injury. An eerie greenish-white glow emanated from her body; her eyes flashed; the entire room went dark. A low groaning sound gurgled from Setsuna's throat; her brow furrowed; Nabu twitched. To everyone's amazement, the hole in Nabu's body gradually shrank smaller and smaller, the skin and flesh stitching itself together. Finally, the hole closed, but Setsuna's body continued to glow and tremble. Little by little, the color returned to Nabu's face, and she began breathing regularly. Setsuna let out a sharp breath, and the glow was gone, the room brightened, and everything was back to normal.

"Whoa," Minako whispered in awe. "What was that?"

"Time-bending," Setsuna answered, her voice thick and strained. "It was the only way she could have been saved. I had to reverse time around her so that the injury never took place. Of course, focusing time around only one person and not all of existence is meticulous and exhausting work, so I'm a little tired." She looked more than "a little" tired: her whole body was shaking, she was perspiring and breathing heavily, and her swarthy complexion had gone pale. She was given a seat and some water, and the girls were left to marvel at what they had seen. Ami took a moment to examine her patient, and despite everything she knew about medical science, was forced to declare her healthy. She, too, wandered off to have a moment to herself.

"We should probably go," Makoto suggested. "The city's going to need us."

"You guys go on ahead," Minako said. "I'd like to stay behind and make sure Ami's okay. I'll also let Nergal and Marduk know what's happening, and Ishtar too, when she comes back." The girls agreed, and Makoto and Rei left her in the clinic. She studied Setsuna for a few moments, still perplexed and amazed at what she had witnessed.

"I'll be fine," the lady assured her. "Go see to your friend. She could use someone to listen to." Minako smiled faintly; as she left, she noticed the clinic door opening, ushering in a panicked, frantic, dirty blonde girl, who rushed over to Nabu's side, tears in her eyes. Minako's face brightened as a gentle hand rose to wipe the tears away, and knew that they'd be all right. She found Ami outside, staring off into the sky, oblivious to everything save the thoughts in her head. Minako quietly sidled next to her and gave her a friendly nudge.

"Hey. You okay?"

"Hmm? Oh, yes Minako, I'm all right. I'm just a little jarred from what happened...and a bit tired from everything that's been going on...and more than a little nervous about what we're about to face."

"That's understandable," she replied, casually placing her hands on her head. "It's definitely been a crazy week for everybody. I wish we had the time to catch up."

"We will, once we're finished with this latest crisis," Ami said, putting on an optimistic face. Minako studied her for a moment, reflecting on how very steadfast the petite young woman was. She'd be hard-pressed to believe this was the same meek, self-effacing girl who stammered her way into their group not so long ago.

They shared a comfortable silence for awhile.

"Oh," Minako said, "before I forget, did anything ever happen between you and that girl you had a thing for?" Ami stiffened, the memory of her bittersweet experience coming back full force. She blushed a little but felt a bit gloomy, too.

"Ah...y-yes, um... Well, I managed to confess my feelings to her, and..." Minako jerked to attention but her enthusiasm was wasted; she didn't need to pry to know how it all turned out. Seeing her friends hurt over failed attempts at love was just as bad as feeling it herself.

"I'm sorry, Ami. I was really rooting for you." Ami nodded somberly. Then, all of a sudden, her face brightened.

"It's fine, don't worry about it. I'm still glad I did it, even if it didn't turn out the way I was hoping." Minako smiled serenely. That was some form of happiness, at least, and more than most people could claim.

"So who was it that you liked? Maybe I can still talk some sense into her."

"Don't bother," Ami grinned, "I'm really fine with it." Minako shrugged.

"If you say so, but at least satisfy my curiosity." Ami giggled quietly and shut her eyes, fully at peace with herself.

"If you must know, it was Makoto."

"MAKOTO?!" Minako almost fell over; she had to struggle to stay upright. "You mean our Makoto? Makoto Kino?"

"Um, y-yes, why?" Dejection set in. What a tragedy!

"Oh, Ami, I'm so sorry! Why didn't you tell me sooner? I could've told you she was engaged! Gah, why didn't I see it before? I'm such a blind, stupid, idiotic numbskull!" She beat herself on the head with her fists, which Ami naturally couldn't allow. She restrained Minako's arms and begged her to stop.

"Minako! Minako, please, stop! It's not your fault! It's nobody's fault! We just had a misunderstanding! Really, Mina, it's fine! I'm FINE with it." Tears streaming in her eyes, Minako looked into Ami's face, seeing nothing but the same kind, gentle, quiet strength that always seemed to grace her features.

"Ah...are you sure?"

"Of course I'm sure, silly!" she laughed. She caressed the other girl's face tenderly. "Who did you think I was talking about?"

"Rei," she sniffled, causing Ami to turn a little pink. Minako noticed and decided to break it to her immediately: "It turns out she's not interested, either. Sorry about that."

"Oh. Darn." She laughed, and Minako laughed, too. Warmth and love emanated from Ami. "You are so good to me, Mina."

Minako sniffled and wiped the tears away. "A...and y-you're good, too—for putting up with me, even when I act like a dummy and can't seem to do anything right."

"Oh, Mina," Ami sighed, "I like you just the way you are." The two girls stared at each other, inexpressibly happy, content to do nothing else. Sapphire jewels glinted and reflected each other; they leaned in, sharing in their warmth, their fragrance, their apprehensive breath...

Minako cleared her throat. "W-we...should probably go and help the others. I-I mean, with the city and...all." Ami found it difficult breaking out of her reverie.

"Hmm? O-oh, right, yes." They smiled bashfully and parted, Minako gaining some distance. She stopped and looked back.

"Keep me company?" Ami beamed and walked up to her.

"I'd love to."

The end of "The True Hero"

Next time: "Heart"

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

21: Heart

"Avatar, the time has come."

Vainamoinen spoke softly and sympathetically to Usagi as she squeezed Mamoru tightly. She stole one more longing look into his face, memorizing as much of it as she could. Apsu was very close to the city now, and Usagi would have to confront her—or rather, Apsu's Avatar. She knew there was no way any creature could stand up to Apsu and live, but Vainamoinen gave her no guarantees about Suen, either. "We go into raw uncertainty," he had told her. "Remember, we must not concern ourselves with failure or success, only doing."

Finally, she withdrew from Mamoru and announced she was ready. Vainamoinen took her hand, and Anshar took hers. She was beginning to fully understand his significance in all this, and the part he would play. Why else would Vainamoinen be willing to risk the world's balance to shift them through space, at the exact moment where Anshar's life was in danger? He was going to help Usagi save his sister: he was the only one who could, now that Apsu had taken over.

"Though we are pressed by the urgency of this dire matter," Vainamoinen announced to those gathered around, "we have a moment yet to spare. Your highness," he said, bowing to Mamoru, "I wish you a long and prosperous life. If you take anything away from our brief encounter, remember this: that not all light is good, and not all darkness is evil. Ah, my dear lady," he sighed at Setsuna, "our parting is bitter. The loss of this old heart's first love was like the loss of a pebble, when it considers what sort of sorrow your absence will bring. Do watch over this young Avatar in my place. She is...good." He smiled wistfully, bowed one more time, then turned away from them forever. In another instant the space around the three had opened and closed, and they were placed upon a wide-open field, miles away from the city.

"Whoa!" Usagi jolted in surprise, but calmed just as quickly. "Oh, right, space-bending. I thought we were just gonna walk out of the city or something."

"We did not have that luxury," Vainamoinen replied, his voice no longer melancholic. "Arriving at this very spot at this very time was absolutely necessary. This is where I will confront Apsu." He planted his staff in the ground, where it stood fixed like a tree, then sat upon the grass, crossing his legs as he put his hands on his knees. Usagi recognized the meditative stance.

"Um...you mean...here?"

"To be precise, in the Spirit World. Apsu is almost entirely a Spirit, so that is where we shall meet—and she will meet me there, of that I can be certain. It is where she is strongest, and I at my most vulnerable."

"Wait, so you're gonna fight her in a place where she's more powerful?"

"Correct. I must draw her to me, and to do that, the bait must be enticing. I made certain to stoke her ire when I broke her connection to her host, so she will certainly want revenge. But more than that, I am the greatest obstacle to her vile desires, aside from Raava herself, so if I should arrive at her doorstep, so to speak, then she would make all haste to, eh, greet me, as it were."

"So...let me get this straight," Usagi said, wanting to be sure she was clear on everything: "You're going to face Apsu, someone you've already said is way more powerful than every bender in the entire world put together, in a place where she's stronger; you made her angry, and you're the only thing standing in her way? And you're doing all this by yourself?"

"Yes," he said with annoying serenity.

"That's insane!" she screamed. "It's worse than insane, it's suicide!"

"Perhaps," he said, still frustratingly calm, "but there is no alternative." He saw the helpless, despondent look on her face, the strain and desperation. He saw, and was glad of it, for it showed that her heart was great. "Don't despair so much over me," he assured her. "I may die, but that does not mean I plan on losing. Besides, you have your own battle to attend to, one that is far more important than mine." Usagi let that thought linger in silence for a moment. She didn't want to leave this man, her mentor, alone to face the worst horror the world had ever known. She hadn't even thanked him.

She went in for a hug. Vainamoinen laughed and patted her head

"If only all souls had such encouragement when they faced perilous times! The most craven wretch in the world would march straight into their doom whistling all the while. Go now, my dears, and save that poor girl's soul. Let this old man build a bridge for you to cross over troubling waters." He waved his hand, and with that gesture, bent the space around them, sending them where they needed to be. He then drew a breath and closed his eyes to the mortal plane.

…...

Usagi stumbled as the space around her changed from an open field to the outskirts of a forest. She glanced around her new surroundings and gave a little shudder.

"I don't think I'll ever get used to that. Are you okay, Anshar?"

"Yeah. That was weird." He didn't look nearly as jarred as she was. Usagi offered a crooked smile.

"Heh, that old guy probably wouldn't like it if you used that word. Anyway, since this is where he put us, I guess this is where we'll find Apsu—and your sister. Uhh, or maybe they'll find us?" She cringed and checked around more carefully. Usagi had explained as much of the situation as she knew to Anshar (with Vainamoinen filling in here and there), but she still felt nervous about being here with him. Suen had been powerful, violent, and unpredictable before, but that had been when she was still mostly in control of herself. Now Apsu had completely taken over, and would certainly employ far deadlier attacks, with little regard for her host's safety. Usagi's stomach churned as she wondered if Suen was so far gone as to attack her own brother. Vainamoinen and Setsuna seemed to believe she wasn't, so if there was any chance at all she could be saved, then Usagi would take it.

Don't think about succeeding or failing, she told herself, echoing her mentor's words. Only do what you must. I have to talk to Suen and convince her to surrender her hold over Apsu once and for all. Mariner's off keeping Apsu busy, so I SHOULD have an easier time—plus, I have Anshar with me. I know Shingo and I don't usually get along, but if he were ever in a dangerous situation, I'd do everything in my power to save him...even if I was the danger. I know I'd never hurt him. Well, maybe I'd give him a good solid pinch, or pull his hair, or...

A noise drew her attention towards the forest. The wind was lashing against the trees, and the smell of burning leaves and resin wafted in the air. The ground trembled beneath her feet. Usagi shielded Anshar with her body, bracing herself for what was to come. In only a few moments, the forest withered away into ash, and the ground parted into a deep rut as the creature slowly hovered towards them, its feet levitating several inches off the ground. Whatever injuries Suen had sustained in her fight against Ishtar were now fully mended—Apsu's doing, and more out of necessity than kindness—but her eyes were sickly white, while the rest of her body radiated a foul, pallid glow. She wasn't even bothering with subterfuge: this was a counterfeit Avatar, one whom even Vaatu would not employ. Usagi met her dead stare unflinchingly.

"Suen, it's you," she stated. The creature snarled.

"So I've found you at last. You don't have your friends to protect you this time, or that old man. Are you surrendering, or submitting to me?"

"I'm here to save you," she announced steadfastly. The creature let out an awful howling sound.

"Pretentious little filth! How many people have died because you chose to do NOTHING?! And now you want to save ME? Me! The most powerful person in the world!"

"Apsu, stop. I want to hear what Suen has to say. Let her talk."

"Stupid girl, I AM Suen! I am Raava's chosen, not you! I am her arm, I am her voice, I am her judgment on this rotted world!"

"I know you won't listen to me," she murmured, "so I brought someone to speak in my place." She stepped aside a little, revealing Anshar. For the first time in over a year, he beheld his older sister, a mix of horror, sorrow, sympathy, and delirious hope on his face. Suen's change was far more drastic: the sickly aura that had been emanating from her body went away, and the color of life flushed in her face. Her fierce, empty white eyes were filled with the shimmering blue spheres of humanity, her feet touched the ground, and for a moment, she was herself again.

"Ah...Anshar? Is that...r-really you?" Her voice cracked in mid-sentence, its harsh cold tone giving way to the shy warmth she once enjoyed. They approached each other cautiously, Usagi keeping a respectful distance. "A...Anshar...I, I th-thought I'd n-never see you again..."

"I'm here now, Sue," he said, taking her hands, looking into her eyes, "and I promise we'll be together again. We can start all over, live together as a family, maybe do some traveling or start a little business together. Remember when we made that lemon-drink stand? Wasn't that fun?" Suen trembled with happiness.

"Y-yes, I remember. W...we always drank most of it ourselves, though. Gosh, that...that takes me back." They smiled together, perfectly content. Anshar's face turned incrementally solemn.

"Listen to me, Suen: I've spoken with Usagi. She explained everything to me. There's a monster inside of you, an evil spirit called Apsu. She's the one who's been deceiving you and controlling your actions. You need to get rid of her."

"Ah... Anshar..." Suen's voice croaked; her face twisted and warped; the whites of her eyes blotted out all color. "So you've been spending time with that false Avatar? I see she's already filled your head with her malicious lies. How could you say such horrible things about your own sister, much less believe them?! Or are you turning against me, too?"

"Suen, listen to yourself! Listen to me! Do you really think I've spent the past year looking for you just so I could lie to you? I love you! This monster inside of you is the only one who's deceived anybody." The creature growled; her hands tightened around Anshar's with an iron grip. He grit his teeth in pain but refused to back down. "Suen, tell her to stop!" he grunted. "She's...hurting me!"

"Stop it, you're hurting him!" Suen screamed, in her own voice. Usagi stood aghast as the most horrific spectacle she ever witnessed played out before her: Suen was shifting back and forth between herself and Apsu, her face and body warping with each shift, the two forces waging internal war.

"He's on HER side! He thinks I'M the false Avatar! Anyone who gets in my way...yaaaiii... Anshar, help me! F...forgive m-meeeeeeeyeeaaagh! She's twisted his mind and turned him against you! If that's not evil, then tell me whah... I, I, I don't know what's happening! I can't see, I can't feel anything, I... Anshar, where are y...you fool, what are you doing? Drench the forest in the bluh...the blood of...ugh... It hurts, it hurts, it hurts so much!"

"Fight it, Suen!" Anshar called, pulling himself closer until he embraced his sister. "Fight it with all your heart and soul! You're the strongest, bravest, kindest person I've ever known! I just want you back so we can be together again!"

"I'll kill her and everyone she's ever known! I'll wipe all of you off the face of my world! Anshar, I can't! She's so powerful! If you can't even trust your own flesh and blood, then this world deserves to be cleansed! Shut up! I don't need you now that I've found—But you don't have any say in this, fool! Remember, you gave yourself to me WILLINGLY! I was wrong! You're wrong! But where would you be without me? You wouldn't have any friends, any power, any chance for survival... Remember how miserable you were after just one day without me? Yes—and I still managed to get by. I made a friend. I...oh, spirits! Keya, what have I done..."

Suen wept bitterly; the tears ran down to her chin and fell dripping into the earth. Even as she cried, the creature, Apsu, screamed, issuing waves of rage and frustration. Anshar held tight but it was too much for his small body. He was being forced away from her, his clothes ripping, his skin slowly peeling...

"I got you!" Usagi held fast to Suen, embracing her with all the love she could muster. She held onto Anshar as well, and together they braved the storm.

…...

There was a look of solemn reflection of the faces of the Cult of the Avatar as Ma-Ti spoke to them. They had endured pain, suffering, hardship, and even their idol's own righteous fury, yet still refused to abandon their zeal, but two hours listening to this boy speaking from his heart calmed their fires and opened their ears. He spoke with compassion, not anger; sympathy, not fear; his words were tempered with justice, but mercy also. Though many of them carried wounds from their battle with his friends, it was Ma-Ti's words that ultimately won the day.

"The Avatar still needs you," he said to them, "but not as you are. Blind obedience is not loyalty, just as fanatic devotion is not love. Her ways are steeped in balance, understanding, sacrifice, and the will to cast aside personal desires for the greater good. Sew discord and your harvest will be bitter, but give out of love, my friends, and it is love you will receive."

He stood there and let them meditate for awhile. Ma-Ti may not have been a bender, but he had a way with words, and could burrow into a person's heart and touch their soul in a way few others could. As the cultists reflected on their lives, and how their actions and decisions led them to this disappointing end, Ma-Ti suddenly felt as though the Avatar was calling out to him. He felt he was needed.

"Usagi," he whispered, the sensation of dread growing stronger. He steeled his resolve and turned to his friends. "Kwame, Linka, Gi, Wheeler! Right now, Avatar Usagi is facing her greatest challenge. Though we cannot be there for her in person, I want our hearts to be with her in spirit. Let her know that she has friends with her in this fight." He closed his eyes, clasped his hands, and bowed his head, praying. Wheeler pursed his lips and stepped forward.

"You got it, buddy! Come on, everybody, let's send her our best wishes." He took Gi's hand, and she took Kwame's.

"The whole crick's behind ya, Avatar, and so's Betty-Sue!"

"Let what little we have help you in some way," Kwame said. He look Linka's hand, and she took Ma-Ti's.

"You are strong, but we will make you stronger." Even the cultists stood and offered their prayers to Usagi—a symbolic gesture, maybe...

Or perhaps it was just what she needed.

…...

Kenji Tsukino was busy writing a report on the Ember Island incident when his wife, who was organizing his materials for him, abruptly stood up and looked through their hotel room window to the sky.

"Usagi!"

"What's that?" Kenji said. Ikuko Tsukino clutched her hands to her chest.

"Kenji, I suddenly got the feeling that Usagi was in danger, and needed our help." He stopped what he was doing and looked outside. A mother's intuition was a powerful thing, but he...

He felt it, too.

"Yes... I get the same feeling. But what can we do for her?"

"Pray," was Ikuko's only answer. "We can send our hearts to help her. Shingo, come here, darling. Your sister needs us."

"What?" he grumbled, sticking his head into the room. "How badly did that bun-head screw up this time?"

"Shingo, this is serious!" his father snapped. "Your sister's life may be in danger. The whole world is counting on her!" He frowned, but ultimately relented.

"Oh, all right...but she owes me for this." Luna, too, joined the family circle as they gave their daughter, their sister, their Usagi the strength she needed.

…...

"Do we really have to hold hands?" Salamander grunted. Ku Sheng grunted and forcefully palmed the petite woman's fingers.

"Jus' do it already. I reckon tha's err'one, Kotono. We all ready."

"Thanks," she nodded. The Fire Nation princess looked to her brother, then to Oboro, Kartti, Lark, Suo, Ku Sheng, and finally Salamander. They all stood in unison to send their thoughts to the Avatar. She smiled proudly at the tight-knit group—at her family and friends. If she could feel so emboldened by their love and devotion, she could only imagine how the Avatar must be feeling...

…...

"It's time, Liath." Bodmall looked up from her compounding mix, eyeing her longtime companion with trepidation. "The day we've been dreading has finally arrived: the Avatar has met with Apsu. She's putting all of her virtues and all of her shortcomings on the line. The whole world depends on the outcome of this. If you ask me, it's way too much pressure for any one person." Liath, smoking and drying herbs for storage, weighed this news with intense solemnity. Suddenly she and everything around her felt so very ephemeral.

"Yes..." Blinking, she stared at her companion, flushed with determination. "What can we do for her?" Bodmall smirked and raised an eyebrow.

"In the old days, we might've burned a holly tree, mixed the ashes into our ale, painted ourselves all over, and stood around the bonfire in a circle, chanting to the Primordials. Naked, of course, and drunk out of our minds."

"Good times," Liath muttered wryly. "So what's the alternative?"

"It isn't nearly as exciting," Bodmall grunted, rising to her feet, "but I have a few tricks up my sleeve." She called her staff to her hand and hobbled to an area that had not been touched by any tool. There, on the pristine grass, she raised her staff with both hands and shouted to the sky: "Cyflafareddwr, ni yw'r Fomori! Yn enw Luonnotar, Lugh, a'r Tuatha, rydym yn eich rhoi gyda'n pŵer! Derbyniwch ef a byddwch yn fuddugol! Derbyniwch ef a dewch â heddwch i'n byd!"

"It's a good prayer," Liath said, taking her spear in hand. She approached Bodmall, grinning: "Mind if I join you?" Liath gave her a coy glare.

"Normally this would be reserved for Derwydd, but I guess I can make an exception for you. You know the words." Liath smiled, raised her spear, and chanted along with Bodmall. Throughout the region of Taku, the last remnants of the Fomoriians joined their Derwydd in prayer, adding their strength and spirit alongside so many others...

…...

Even though they were in the middle of watching another performance of The Avenging Shadow, Naru and Umino could sense that their friend needed them. Silently, they looked at each other, and slowly, bashfully, held hands. Umino offered a timid smile, and Naru returned his skittish expression. They both blushed and squeezed their hands a little tighter.

…...

Even as the struggle between Apsu and Suen became increasingly more violent, Usagi could feel a refreshing wave wash over her, invigorating and strengthening her. She didn't yet know where this energy was coming from, but she was grateful for it, and thanked whatever force was responsible. She turned her focus to the girl she held in her arms, her face twisting and straining.

"Suen, I know you can fight this. I believe in you. I know you don't think very highly of me, and to be honest, I can't say that I blame you. But I want to get to know you, the real you, the Suen that your brother and your friends love so much. Maybe we can even be friends one day!"

"Ha!" Suen screamed, or rather, the voice of Apsu. There was no longer any lack of distinction. "That's a fine joke! Us, friends. The Avatar has ruined this world! Their neglect has sent it spiraling into chaos! My parents are dead because you did nothing!"

"Suen, don't let her speak for you. I want to hear what you think; I want to hear what you have to say!" Suen's face warped, as if it were being pulled in two different directions: half fearful, half consumed by wrath.

"Go ahead. Humor her!" A tear fell down her face. "I...I...d-don't...believe...a-any of th-that."

There was a very ominous pause.

"What? ...I s-said I d-don't believe any of that. Y-you...never did anything good for me. It...it's true that I was angry, that I felt helpless, that I wanted...to be able to do something, to...fight back. But your way was wrong. You only made things worse! I said horrible things, lashed out violently, hurt my friends, killed people... Y...you've caused me nothing but grief!"

Before Anshar and Usagi could make any capital out of this, the Apsu-side started writhing and screaming, cursing wildly, issuing obscenities and spasming uncontrollably. Usagi and Anshar weathered the storm, clinging even tighter, calling out to Suen. Just as abruptly as it began, Apsu's screaming stopped, and the creature glared at Usagi. The glimmer of a single sapphire eye blinked as more tears welled up.

"Usagi, Anshar," she whispered timorously, "help me."

"I'm here for you, Suen," Usagi replied, smiling bravely as she hugged the other girl. "I refuse to give up on you, no matter what. We will get through this together. I promise."

…...

When Vainamoinen closed his eyes to the physical plane, he opened them in the Spiritual. He sat there for a moment, enjoying the stillness of his surroundings: the frosty air blowing off a distant mountain, the little glowing creatures that flitted through the air, the pink flowers that waved their stalks when there was no wind... In the far distance, something like a mirage wreathed and coiled, circling the hazy horizon as it drank deep from frothy clouds. The head of a three-eyed horned wolf could just be seen crowning the long serpentine body—and then it was gone, billowing further away until even the ancient mariner's eyes could no longer see it. Vainamoinen would miss this place.

Then he called to Apsu in a voice only the Primordials could hear, in a language steeped in the soul of the world, taught to him by Luonnotar herself upon his birth. He called, revealing himself to her, and Apsu came, revealing herself to him. She was good enough to assume a fair human form, a mere twenty or thirty feet tall, resplendent in a lavender dress from the waist down. Gold and blue bracelets adorned her arms, her chest bare save for a humble sarong and a cascade of silvery hair that brushed against the ground. A large golden Tear of Apsu, the mother of them all, hung from her neck, and a tiara shaped like a blackish-purple sun wreathed her forehead. She was stern, beautiful, proud, and betrayed no emotion. Vainamoinen stood when she arrived, unmoved by her majestic appearance.

"Your eminence," he greeted her, bowing slightly, for though she was the foe of every living creature in the world, she was still, by all accounts, a goddess.

"What are you doing?" she demanded, her voice soft but powerful enough to split mountains. "You stand here alone, waiting for me. You call me here by name, using the ancient tongue of Summoning, openly declaring yourself. You cannot be here to bandy wits with me, and there are easier ways of killing yourself, so I wonder: what are you DOING?"

"Your eminence, I have called you here to discuss that Final Problem which beleaguers every soul that walks across the living world. To put it another way, your grace, I am here to ensure that you are separated from your host, stopped in your murderous ways, cast down into the Emptiness, and forgotten for all perpetuity."

"Ah," she said, sounding disappointed. "I had thought that out of all those souls you mentioned, yours would be the wisest when it came to your demise. I can foresee no victory in this discussion save mine, unless you have begged another Primordial to assist you?"

"No, I've not!" he announced, laughing coldly. "It has not yet come to that! But I shall make some small account of myself, your grace, while I am able. Of course, we needn't come to blows. You will find many friends willing to take you into their company if you would but give up this mad quest of destruction."

"Would I," she wondered flatly. "As I recall, I attempted diplomacy before, and with your esteemed mother, no less. My pleas fell on deaf ears. Life, she told me, should not bend itself so out of proportion as to cater to the 'whims' of a single Primordial. 'Let them have their noise', she said, 'for there is joy in it.' I cared not for joy, or any other form of expression. I wanted my world, my waters, and peace, and I couldn't have it."

"Because it was no longer your world to mold, your ladyship. Tenancy had been given to another the moment your work was finished, just as a house belongs to its occupants and not the architect."

"But it was MY WORLD," she snarled, her voice pealing like thunder. "It would be nothing more than a miserable rock floating lifelessly in space without me. If I wanted it a certain way, I had that right."

"No, Apsu," Vainamoinen said softly, eschewing formality, "you did not. None of the Primordials did. They all took a vow to never interfere until the life of their creation had been spent. For better or worse, the fate of this world rests upon those who live in it. You were prevented from carrying out your evil deeds before, and with the spirits of this realm as my witnesses, you will be prevented again—forever."

The ground rumbled. The sky flashed, lightning flickering violently. The mountains burst open with magma, and all spirits retreated. Apsu's body was shaking, and the vibrations alone were enough to bring disaster to the Spirit World. But it was worse than rage: she was laughing. It built up quietly inside of her and gradually grew more boisterous, until even Vainamoinen bent under the weight of it. And it was relentless. She laughed on and on, louder and longer than any human or spirit could conceive. The folly of anything standing against her was enough to drive her mad.

Then, as quick as a snap, it was over. She was now glaring at him.

"Very well, amuse me. Show me the kind of power you think will stop me. I could use a diversion, before I mutilate you." Vainamoinen's eyes glinted, and he removed his long red cap.

"I assure you, foul wretch, you will not be amused by my efforts—but you will have a very bad time." He then did the last thing Apsu expected, letting out a long, clear note of song that rose swiftly into the sky, surrounding the mountains and the horizons, penetrating deep into the earth and the oceans, enveloping everything and embalming the souls of all who heard it. The song was powerful without being loud, consistent without monotony, beautiful but unbearable. Apsu let out a grating screech and slammed long regal hands over her ears, wincing and backpedaling as she cursed. Fire and ice she could withstand, edge and point she could defend against, time and space were mere constructs she could bend to her will—but not this noise, this clawing burrowing noise, this relentless flaying scalding degrading melange of noise! And he kept singing, he didn't stop: one melody after the other, each starkly different from the last but effortlessly weaving into each other so that one couldn't tell where one ended and the other began. He kept singing! This man had command of the high arts, could alter the world as he saw fit, could call down thunder and move continents, rearrange matter and energy, pass through time and space—he could employ any number of countless offenses, so why did he have to choose that infernal SINGING?

"Fool!" she roared, hardly daring to open her eyes, the song was that painful. "I am older than you, stronger and more steadfast! Whatever trick Luonnotar passed on to you will do nothing more...than...than..." She let out a gurgling scream and bent over, keening in agony. Vainamoinen merely walked closer to her, still singing, his song changing but always the same, neither aggressive nor passive. He sang, sang, sang Apsu into submission, and watched as she endured his song long enough to offer rebuke. The black bolt passed directly through him and pinned him to the ground, and there his song ended.

The end of "Heart"

Next time: "Life Will Change"

Author's note:

Yep, I threw in a nod to Earthbound there. Apsu's description is as close to her features in the game as I could make them, but there are images available of her and the Opposito Senshi in case I was insufficient. I was going to have an over-the-top climactic battle between Vainamoinen and Apsu, but after doing a little more research on our boy, I decided to stay true to his character. Ultimately, Vainamoinen's penchant for song worked beautifully against Apsu's hatred for noise, and really, was the best weapon he had in his arsenal.

Bodmall's prayer translates as "Avatar, we are the Fomori! In the name of Luonnotar, Lugh, and the Tuatha, we bestow you with our power! Receive it and be victorious! Receive it and bring peace to our world!" The language I'm using is Welsh (or Cymraeg, if you prefer), so hopefully anyone who can actually read it will forgive any errors. Blame it on Google translate.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and the world is ready to enter into an age of prosperity. But there are many forces unwilling to welcome her, or the new era she will usher in. As the Avatar and her friends struggle to maintain balance in the world, powerful enemies are emerging, set on ruining the new Avatar and everything she holds dear. She has but one advantage over her foes, and hopefully, it will be enough to save her and the world she cherishes. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and this is her story!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

22: Life Will Change

Even with the last vestiges of Vainamoinen's song dissipating, Apsu bent over wheezing and snarling, trying to recover from the blow she had been dealt. Vainamoinen lay where she had pinned him, a pole of pulsating energy impaling him to the ground, tendrils sparking with obsidian light. All was still in the Spirit World, silent save for the gruesome hum of her energy and the gravely gasps she drew.

"Fool," she snarled, too weak to pretend at airs anymore, "this accomplishes nothing. You have aggravated and delayed me, nothing more. Whatever pretense at pain I may be experiencing will be long forgotten when at last I scour this world of its repulsive life and reclaim it."

"And how will you do that, Apsu?" His voice, feeble though it was, still carried a melodious authority in it. He coughed quietly, eyeing her with a patient, and (if she didn't know any better) an amused stare. Apsu's breathing settled a little, and if she could perspire, she might have wiped a sheen of sweat from her brow. "Surely," he added with a few bloody coughs, "surely not through your avatar?"

"No," she answered, cold and quiet. "The girl was merely a means of me finding Raava's vessel so I could snuff her and Vaatu out. If I could have done it without her, then I wouldn't have gone through the trouble of such a pantomime. As for the rest of the world, I merely have to call forth the Everlasting Army." Vainamoinen winced, mostly from pain, but partially from anxiety. He knew full well what the Everlasting Army was, what it could do, and how it operated. What he didn't know was why Apsu had waited until now to call on it. He decided to ask her.

"Why do you think I'm even bothering with Raava at all? As long as she held some form of resistance, I couldn't tap into the vast wellspring of energy needed to call forth such a force. But with her occupied with my little Suen, I'm free to conduct my affairs. Were there...any other questions you had? Any...last requests?" Now fully recovered and once again reveling in her inevitable victory, Apsu approached Vainamoinen, glowering over him in sickly glee. His world began to fade as he looked up at her.

…...

Mamoru was busily preparing Ba Sing Se's defenses when a patrolman came running up to him, his voice steady even if his composure wasn't.

"Your highness, we've spotted a large mass of unidentified creatures approaching the southwestern area of the wall. They have not responded to any of our calls or warnings." Mamoru glanced over at Nephrite, who pursed his lips. He then looked back at the patrolman.

"Thank you for the report. Inform your commander that the king wishes all available forces be put on full alert. Secure any civilians and prepare to defend the city. The thirty-seventh and eighteenth divisions will be reinforcing you, so coordinate with them. Dismissed." The patrolman saluted; as soon as he left, two more came storming in, one from the main northern defense and the other from the northeast. They both gave the same report as the first: large masses of creatures were approaching the city, disregarding any attempts at communication—peaceful or otherwise. Mamoru gave them the same orders, and asked them to relay the information to all command posts. The message was clear: Prepare for Battle.

He just wished he knew who—what they were fighting.

He still had a lot of preparations to make when the reports came in that the unidentified force had numbers beyond counting, covering the width and breadth of the land as far as the eye could see. They were now very close: slow, but persistent, and any killed by a stray arrow or stone were replaced tenfold. Mamoru's face tightened; his time was up. There was nothing to do now but defend Ba Sing Se. He looked to the four girls who had fought alongside him and had accompanied him through many perils. He knew how they would respond to his request even before he asked it:

"My friends, thanks to your efforts, this kingdom has been given a better chance for survival. Now I must beg you to help improve our odds. I have sent a company of my best soldiers to the secret entrance that Fire Lord Kuni once used, along with General Nephrite, which leaves the front gate as the only other access point. Will you help me defend it?"

They all smiled, nodded, and rallied to his side.

"You can count on us," Ami stated boldly.

"Lemme at em'!" Makoto roared.

"Oh HECK yes!" Minako cried.

"Whoever they are, we'll make them regret ever coming here," Rei added hotly. Mamoru smiled, and together, they hurried to the enormous gate that had withstood time, the elements, and hundreds of invasions. They were already being opened, thanks to some advance orders, countless gears and levers and benders working together in unison. The keepers were a little surprised to see only five people going out—they had expected a legion of King Endymion's finest—but Mamoru assured them that every soul marching out from that gate accounted for ten times their number.

"Don't flatter us too much," Makoto smirked. She caressed the large gate as she passed through it, and a thought crossed her mind. "Hey Mamoru, you've got ballistas, right?"

"Yes, why?"

"Could you arm the ones pointing out the main entrance with wooden artillery?" He looked to the gatekeepers.

"You heard the lady. Tell your commander that on my signal, launch wooden stakes from the ballistas. Cut down the mightiest tree in the city if you have to!"

"Oh, and arrows," she added, stripping off the bark and limbs from a nearby pear tree. "Lots and lots of arrows!" She quickly fashioned the bark into body armor and cut a heavy quarterstaff from the limbs—all with her bare hands. Mamoru nodded.

"Arrows, too, as many as you can fire!" The gatekeepers saluted and rushed off to deliver the message—then, the enormous gate ground to a close behind them. The approaching army was now so close that Mamoru could see their silhouettes on the horizon. In no time at all they would overwhelm the five defenders, and the city. Ami stared at the approaching legion in awe.

"By the spirits, look at how outnumbered we are..."

"I know," Minako whispered, equally amazed. "Just think of all the songs they'll make about this!"

"I hope we're around to hear them," Ami murmured ominously. Minako beamed and placed an assuring hand on her shoulder.

"We will be. Don't forget, Usagi's out there fighting the real battle. We're just here to hold down the fort." Everyone prepared themselves for the onslaught. Mamoru erected huge walls while Minako called a whirling orb of air to her palms. Rei ascended one of the walls, preparing to snipe the enemy as it came near. Ami was too far away from a body of water to be effective, so she brought jars and flasks with her; she opened one and sprayed the air with a heavy mist, concealing her allies. As soon as the first of the invaders came within firing range, Rei summoned the energy inside her and loosened a curling serpent of flame. It incinerated the invaders instantly; they stopped shuffling and broke into a run. Mamoru threw a red flower-shaped stone into the air, signaling the archers. The sky blackened as countless bolts leaped over the wall and perforated the advancing forces, missing a few but mowing down many more. They kept running.

"Okay, ladies," Mamoru called, unable to fight the spreading grin on his face, "it's party time!"

It's not a game, I'm not a robot

A.I. challenging you

I'm not a phantom

I'm in your face and

I'm here to see it through

Rei clapped her hands together and called forth the largest wall of fire she could produce, shaping it into a firebird and guiding it through the swarm. Her arms waved and thrust from the safety of the wall's parapet, controlling the screeching fury as it burrowed into the masses. As it was consumed by their sheer numbers, she drew her hands into a wide arc, calling two lines of fire to connect them, shaping it into a bow. Still maintaining its shape, her right hand ignited three arrows; she pulled back, loosened, and repeated at will, scorching dozens in rapid-fire succession.

Minako hurled her air-orb into the army, shooting dozens into the misty air, where they were caught by Ami's fog and shredded to pieces as she solidified the haze into daggers. Minako threw two more orbs before the creatures fully closed in on her and she could get a good look at them. The first one was so hideous that she immediately cleaved it from head to toe with a razor wind; the next three were no less bearable. They were vaguely humanoid-shaped, featureless faces mounted atop bodies that looked to be constantly melting and oozing. They made a nasty gurgling sound whenever they shuffled around, and a howl when they were struck: Minako back-flipped out of their way, sending a shockwave that cut them apart. Whatever they were made of, it wasn't very sturdy.

Ami emptied one of her flasks on the ground, bending the water until it was underneath a large mass. She waited until more of the creatures clustered before lifting the water into the air, upturning it, and slamming it into the ground, flattening them all. She called out spires and spikes from the remains, breaking two off to form a sword and shield, then kept her distance and carefully picked them off one at a time. Despite her care, Ami was quickly overwhelmed, and felt sharp pain as the monsters smothered her.

"Ami!" Minako disengaged to help her, but checked herself as a whirling water-whip surged out, skewering some and repulsing others. Ami emerged and wasted no time slicing through the throng, pausing only to catch her breath and wipe a bit of hair from her eyes. "Oh," Minako squeaked, "never mind." She turned around to face the enemies she had left behind, Ami fighting beside her, jets of water billowing in the breeze, razor-edged snowflakes shredding in a storm, rainfall perforating in gales and squalls. They paused to assess the carnage and smirked at each other.

Right before your eyes

Watch us multiply

Come to claim our rights

It's time

As our power grows

Tryin' to stop us shows

Might as well go try'n

Stop time

"We make a good team!"

"That we do. Watch it!" Ami spun around to throw a quick gush at three of the creatures, but her movement was unsteady and she stumbled. She threw her arms up to absorb the blow but still landed very ungracefully, face in the dirt and rear in the sky. Minako's eyes bulged: her friend's posterior was pointed almost directly at her. She leaned in—to check on Ami's condition, of course! Not to get a better view, obviously.

Well...maybe both.

"Uh...are you okay?" she croaked, trying hard not to stare. Ami rolled over, ending the free show. She winced and rubbed her forehead.

"Yes, my elbows took most of the fall. Ah, Mina!" The air-bender was too preoccupied with Ami and her...ah, less wholesome traits, to notice the creature sneaking behind her. Rei blasted it with a firebolt but the impact knocked Minako forward. Luckily, Ami's body broke her fall. Unfortunately—perhaps—Minako's chest landed only a few inches away from Ami's head. Her eyes bugged out, too.

They looked at each other awkwardly. Neither really felt like moving much.

"Uh, sorry," Minako squeaked.

"Eh, it's all right," Ami croaked. They blushed at each other, oblivious to everything else.

"Are you sure you aren't hurt?"

"Ah, n-no, I'm fine. Wh-what about you?" Minako grinned sheepishly.

"I'm all hunky-dory!"

"Hey, you two can flirt later!" Rei shouted from above. "Right now you need to focus on the fight!"

"I resent that!" Minako answered, jumping back to her feet. "I'll have you know that love is the ultimate battlefield!" She helped Ami to her feet and quickly blasted foes with several devastating air blasts.

"B-besides," Ami stuttered, blushing as Rei's accusation took over her thoughts, "w-we weren't flirting!" She put up an ice-shield and shoved several enemies away, where Makoto's wrath awaited them. She was still blushing as several more creatures sprinted after her, howling and babbling. She fired a few water-bullets but couldn't stop thinking about how Minako felt, pressed against her, her scent and her warmth permeating. She quickly stole a glance around, watching the young woman dancing and flailing, her long golden hair flickering in the wind, eyes merry and smile infectious. Minako eventually stopped what she was doing and looked back. Ami blushed hotter than before and jerked around.

Come on, Ami, focus! Now isn't the time! Besides, Mina's just a good friend! A very beautiful, very funny, very warmhearted friend who's always encouraged you, has always been honest and open with you, genuinely listens to you, and always makes you happy. And she likes other girls. And she's single.

"So what if we were?" Ami shouted, partially at Rei but mostly at herself. "There's nothing wrong with a little friendly banter on the battlefield! It helps alleviate the pressure!" She lashed out violently, cutting down clusters of monsters with huge sweeps of water, eyes sharpened and firm. Ami cleared out close to thirty before the path was open, huffing and puffing and daring anyone else to make a move. Minako was certainly impressed.

"All righty then!"

So you know that we're out there

Swatting lies in the making

Can't move fast without breaking

Can't hold on or life won't change

Makoto was already tearing up the battlefield with her quarterstaff, shaping it into spikes or blades or enormous clubs as needed, layering it to deflect blows, even extending it to wipe out huge swaths at once. Her armor was becoming threadbare quickly, though, so after a few more blows, she abandoned it completely. Luckily, there were hundreds of arrows embedded into the ground; she scooped up two armfuls and stitched them together to form a pair of wings, looping them around her arms and body. Nodding to Mamoru, he called a stone pillar under her feet, shooting her into the air. With a little help from Minako, Makoto glided over the battlefield, flinging pieces into the fray. Mamoru tossed her stones, which she also threw; even Rei chipped in, setting the projectiles on fire, raining destruction everywhere.

Mamoru mostly focused on defense, walling off huge sections of the invading army and forcing them into tight corridors so they could be mowed down by one of the girls. Sometimes the enemy would make piles of themselves against the walls, either to climb them or topple them over, but he just tipped the walls over and crushed the hapless creatures. Even with all this, the enemy never seemed to diminish; in fact their numbers appeared to be growing by the minute. The girls soon found themselves cut off from each other, despite all their efforts; now it was a question of how long they could survive before they were completely overwhelmed. Rei was forced to abandon her post, and tried scorching a path to Makoto or Mamoru, but the crowd was impossibly thick: burning one layer of foes merely caused the ones behind them to crowd forward. She was starting to feel tired when the enemies suddenly stopped in their tracks; in a flash, hundreds fell, giving her some breathing room.

"Sorry for the delay," called a mature woman's voice. The girls were elated as Setsuna ran into the fray, armed with her long metallic staff. She balanced it defiantly against the horde.

And our voices ring out, yeah

Took the mask off to feel free

Fought it out in the debris

Now we know that life will change

"Actually, you're right on time," Makoto smirked. Setsuna mirrored her bravado.

"I do my best. What's the situation?"

"Oh, you know," Minako called, thrusting dozens of creatures into the sky and flattening them again. "Overwhelming forces, impossible odds, the fate of the city and possibly the world at stake..."

"Then let me see what I can do to reverse our fortunes!" Setsuna leveled her staff and flickered into action, shifting in and out of time to cleave through the enemy ranks. Some she slowed so the other girls could take their time leveling them; other times she sped them up so they would collide into a wall, or a fireball, or merciless frost. Manipulating time, even in short bursts, took a physical and spiritual toll on her, and before long she was perspiring and breathing heavily, her balance greatly upset. She stumbled as two foes got a lucky shot in; Makoto threw a barrage of arrows at them while Minako flew in and helped her to her feet.

"Thank you," Setsuna gushed, flustered and weary. Minako winked.

"Gotta shape up there, girl, if you wanna be part of our team! We don't allow any slackers!"

"Part of the team, eh?" Setsuna chuckled softly to herself and closed her eyes, dwelling on the idea. Ah, if only they knew... But now wasn't the time to reflect. She girded herself and found her second wind as Mamoru and the girls joined her to renew the assault.

"Together," he said, and they nodded. All six of them struck at the swarm with renewed vigor: searing waves of fire ripping the hideous creatures apart, immense boulders flattening them by the score, gusts of wind slicing them to pieces, arrows shredding them apart, fog coalescing into an iceberg and grinding their numbers into dust, the merciless fangs of metal biting with unrelenting hunger. They kept marching. The girls and Mamoru fought hand-to-hand: Makoto tossing them one after the other or breaking them against her knee, Rei striking with practiced accuracy, Minako a blur of weaves and dances, Setsuna flailing and kicking with effortless grace, Mamoru methodically striking and charging; even Ami's clumsy punches and shoves knocked a few down. They kept marching. Mamoru slammed his hands to the ground, summoning the largest wall his strength could offer, and with a mighty shout, knocked it over, smashing hundreds upon hundreds of the monsters. The battlefield cleared, but they kept marching.

They were surrounded in no time. Bruises formed and blood sprayed. Clothes were ripped, hair yanked and torn, bodies beaten. They kept marching. Minako repulsed them with blast after blast of air; Rei put up walls of flame. They kept marching. Ami ran out of water, Makoto exhausted the hundreds of arrows loaned to her by Ba Sing Se's finest marksmen. They kept marching. Setsuna stumbled, leaning heavily against her staff. They kept marching. Grim looks were exchanged. This wasn't even the whole army. The entire city was facing this dreadful onslaught. The girls offered a token resistance, exhausted themselves, and stood on wobbly legs as the enemy kept marching.

"Come on, Usagi," Rei muttered, her voice worn and husky from the long battle. "You can do it. We believe in you."

"I hope you're not getting tired," Makoto grunted, one eye squeezed shut from a nasty bruise. She grinned and tapped Rei's shoulder with her fist. "Got one more round left in ya?"

"Possibly," she countered, trying to sound strong. They prepared to give everything they had for one final charge when the sky lit up brighter than it had ever been. Countless flaming meteors rained down, utterly destroying the enemy horde, wiping them out with such prejudice that the entire battlefield was cleared of them—for the moment. Everyone wondered where such a powerful attack could have come from...

"Heeeey! We're here to help!" It was Marduk and Nergal! They rode down on a chunk of the outer city wall that Marduk had "borrowed", standing before the weary warriors looking rather flustered.

"We didn't mean to be so late to the party," Marduk stammered, slouching a little in penitence. "There were...complications."

"Look, let's just drop the excuses," Nergal added. "We want to fight alongside you." She paused briefly and puffed her chest out with pride. "We want to fight with our friends." Everyone else looked at each other; Makoto and Rei marched up to them and shook their hands.

Ain't it a shame

I'm not a figment

Of your ailing old mind

I'm just as real as

I'm just as dangerous

As you will soon find

"Welcome aboard! Think you could hold them off a little while we catch our breath?"

"Can we hold them off, she says!" Marduk crowed. She grinned and took an aggressive earth-bending stance as the enemy army renewed itself. "Just watch...us...rock! ...HA, get it? Cuz' I'm an earth-bender and aaaaah, ya know what, never mind, that was dumb." Nergal snickered anyway and wreathed her entire body in flames. She dashed head-first into the cluster, laughing as the creatures tried to grab at her only to be incinerated. When Marduk gave her the word, she thrust her arms out and blasted everything around her, then launched herself into the sky, dousing the survivors with a column of fire that kept her afloat. She landed next to her friend and saluted.

"Top that!" Grinning maliciously, Marduk pressed her fists together, summoning the earth to cloak her entire body. She tripled in size, her legs like trees and her arms battering rams. She stomped into the army, effortlessly batting the hideous monsters away, kicking ten at a time, squashing the rest. She finished by launching her enormous fists into the fray, opening a wide swath, then flipped until she was balancing only on her hands, firing solid granite missiles from her feet. She dusted her hands and smirked.

"I don't think you're coming back from that," she leered smugly. Nergal scoffed.

"Watch and learn how a real pro handles it!" She blew fire in her hands, rubbed them together vigorously, bent over in a starting sprint position, and streaked furiously around the army, searing blue fire burning in her wake. When she completed a lap she leaped aside with a flourish, tossing a burning sphere into the direct center. It exploded on impact, sending waves of fire out to the edge of the circle, which she then "rotated" like a huge wheel, immolating everything. A few droplets of sweat found their way to her forehead, and she was gasping a little.

"Hmm," Marduk chirped, "not bad, not bad. But you didn't quite get all of them. As always, I have to clean up after you." She spread her arms, palms upward, and ascended, straddling a small stone platform. Perfect orbs of stone orbited her body, whirling faster and faster until they were a blur. Then, it was only a matter of propelling the platform forward and smashing everything she came into contact with. She finished by grouping all of the orbs and the platform together into a single hammer-shaped stone, crashing it to the ground and wiping out hundreds. Nergal applauded.

"Very elegant! I like the whole 'conservation of energy' thing ya got going on there."

"Why thank you. So that means I won, right?" Nergal's competitive glint turned warm, and her smile softened.

"No, I think we tied again."

"Are you sure? There's plenty left over for another round." Nergal looked out at the swelling army, its ranks replenishing at a disquieting rate. All of the work she and her friend had put into the fight was almost completely undone. Her smile faded.

A taste of your own meds

Fire in every breath

Fire inside your head

Your heart

And as your crippled brain

Tries to fight in vain

Your empire will fall apart

"Just how many of them are there, anyway?"

"I think they're infinite," Mamoru said. Nergal and Marduk looked at him in alarm; he could only offer them a grim reality. "We can't win this fight. We can only hold them off."

"For how long?" Marduk demanded. He took a deep breath.

"For as long as the Avatar needs us to." The two friends shared a worrisome expression. They then looked out at the teeming masses closing in on them.

"A losing battle, huh?" Nergal adapted a defensive stance, her hands glowing with energy. "Well, this is one fight I don't plan on losing! Are you with me, Marduk?"

"There's nowhere else I'd rather be!" she called, taking an earth-bending stance. Nergal's cheeks glowed, and she resumed the battle with renewed energy. The others rejoined them shortly, weary but determined; entropy tilted the scales against them eventually, though, and they were forced into a corner. Things looked bad until the sky darkened once again—not with multiple smaller projectiles but a gigantic one, easily the size of a tree, its tip hewn into a point like a spear. Everyone cleared out of the way as the massive missile sailed through the air and plummeted into the ground with a force even an Avatar could not easily replicate. Countless monsters were crushed underneath it, and Makoto gave a howl of victory.

"All right, I got my ballista!" She ran up to the enormous missile, easily fifteen times her height and three times her width, hopped up, and started rolling it with her feet. She bowled over countless creatures, staining her new toy with pus and ooze, saturating it until it could no longer move. Not discouraged in the least, she slammed her fist against the trunk, splitting it into four quarters, then split those quarters into quarters until she had sixteen boards roughly her size. Makoto attached two of the boards to her arms but reanimated the others into obedient warriors, sending them into the crowd to cull their numbers. The boards on her arms squashed anything unfortunate enough to get too close to her.

"Wow," Marduk laughed, "I'm so glad we never fought each other!" Makoto winked at her.

"I know, right?" Between Makoto's extensions and soldiers, the group was given a much-needed breather. Rei and Nergal covered Mamoru and Marduk as they dug deep trenches into the ground. Diamond-sharp spikes lined the bottoms of a few, while fire-pits filled in others. As Marduk dug a particularly deep ditch, Ami paused her for a moment and slid down to the bottom. She was very excited.

"I think there's an underground reservoir in here! Could you dig a bit deeper, please? Right there."

"You got it!" Marduk focused on the area Ami was pointing at, and after sifting through a few extra feet of earth, a fountain burst forth, issuing clear water. Ami laughed and rode the spurt back up to the surface, then immediately went to work repulsing the enemy army. Makoto was called back, though she kept her remaining wooden soldiers on the field. The tide has turned, and even though this was a Sisyphean effort, it didn't feel quite as hopeless. The situation took an odd turn, however, when they heard the enormous gates opening behind them.

"I distinctly gave orders to keep all entrances and exits shut and closely guarded!" Mamoru shouted. A piercing voice called out in apology as two figures squeezed through the opening, one supporting the other. Marduk and Nergal beamed for joy: it was Ishtar and Nabu!

"Sorry about that! We're here! I didn't want to, but she insisted! I told her she still needed a lot of rest, and she shouldn't strain herself, but she wanted to fight, and I couldn't say no to her..." Ishtar had to stop and catch her breath, all the while supporting a semi-invalid Nabu. The blue-haired stoic grunted, a sheen of sweat already on her strained face.

"And there you have it. I swear, I have climbed mountains that were more negotiable than this girl. The things I had to...prove to her, to show I was...capable." Nabu didn't seem capable of anything as she winced and clutched her side. Thanks to Ami and Setsuna, she had fully healed from her wound, but recovery was still a long way away. Still, her friends were glad to see them, and welcomed them without reservation.

"You're here, and that's all that matters," Nergal said. She hugged Nabu, which surprised her, and put her arm around Ishtar's shoulders. "We're glad you're safe. Thanks for having our backs, Ish. We owe you one big-time." Ishtar's lips trembled and she sniffled a few tears away. Fierce determination set in as she looked out into the mass of monstrosities marching mindlessly towards them.

"So is that what we're up against?"

"I'm afraid so," said Marduk gruffly. "This is a mountain that has no summit. Apparently, that girl Usagi is tangling with whatever monster took over Suen, and we have to hold these guys off for her."

"So will they go away if she—I mean, if Usagi wins?"

"I hope so." Ishtar glared at the creatures, adapting an unusual air-bender stance. A whirlwind surrounded her, billowing her long golden hair.

"That's all I needed to know."

And you'll know that we're out there

Swatting lies in the making

Your empire for the taking

Can't hold on or life won't change

Ishtar thrust herself into the horde, a living whirlwind shredding the creatures apart. Nabu, though still weak, called upon the fountain Ami had uncovered and launched huge ice-drills, plowing holes through their ranks. Nobody was content to sit on the sidelines and watch, so they all banded together into a single force of destructive nature, battling the creatures even as they regenerated and slowly took over. Nabu was forced to stop as a sharp pain erupted in her chest; she keeled over and clutched her wound, teeth gnashing. Ishtar took notice immediately and ran to her side.

"Nabu! Oh, I told you this was a bad idea!" Straining, Nabu gingerly rose to her feet again, though her face was twisted in agony.

"You do not...have to w-worry about m...me. Just f-focus...on..." She grunted and collapsed again; Ishtar knelt by her side, laying hands on her.

"Don't be silly! You've taken care of me my whole entire life! Now it's my turn." Nabu looked up into the eyes of her friend, shimmering with a steely resolve that very few even knew she had. It was love, as only the strong in spirit knew, unconquerable and everlasting. Nabu's features softened, and she offered Ishtar the largest, warmest, most genuine smile her strength could offer.

"Thank you, Ishtar. You are the best thing that has ever happened to me."

Ishtar sniffled and wiped the tears from her eyes. "Enough mush already. Now stand up and kick their butts like I know you can!" Nabu grinned, and powered by her friend's love, rose to her full height, inured to the pain, and opened the floodgates of her wrath.

And our voices ring out, yeah

Took the mask off to feel free

Fought it out in the debris

Now we know that life will change

…...

Furious flames and crushing winds issued out of Suen, but Usagi and Anshar held tighter, refusing to let go. The ground beneath them quaked, buckling under fantastic pressure, creating new hills and fissures where there had once been flat earth. Usagi's face was bleeding from a stray piece of debris that had struck her, and her pigtails were now completely undone, sending her golden hair billowing uncontrollably. She was indomitable, though, drawing strength not only from her own reserves but also from all the friends and allies who were praying for her success. She continued to reach out to Suen, just as Apsu continued to draw her back—and she had saved her dirtiest trick for last.

"Face it, Suen, you've done some very horrible things. All that pain and suffering you say you've caused wasn't my doing. You accuse me of giving you grief, but think about your own actions for a moment. You can never take any of that back. You'll never be welcomed into any society. You may as well help me clean this world of all the filth—or do you think people will just forgive and forget?" Suen froze, her teeth bared and eyes livid in anguish. Apsu knew exactly which of Suen's fears to prey upon, and she had hit the most vulnerable nerve. It didn't matter if she had been possessed or not when it happened: she had killed those smugglers, had nearly forced Marduk and Nergal to fight each other, had almost killed Nabu and Keya, and had been nothing but abusive towards Ishtar. Actions like that didn't simply go away.

"You're right," Suen said hoarsely. "And I don't expect them to. I can't blame you for any of that. I'm willing to accept the consequences of my actions. But I'm doing it without you! I'm not having any part of your genocide! That's just running away from the problem, and if that's your solution, then you're even more pathetic than I thought."

Apsu cursed her, but Suen went on: "I don't want any part of you, and you're no longer a part of me. Get out of my body, get out of my head, and go back to the hole you crawled out of!"

"That a way, Sue!" Anshar shouted, beaming with pride. "You tell that ugly monster!"

"Stupid girl! I will always be a part of you! The things you did will haunt you for the rest of your life! Your memories of me will never fade! Repulse me if you will, but the world will never let you forget! You'll be a pariah for as long as you live!"

"No I won't," she growled defiantly, peering across the void of madness into the faces of her brother and the One True Avatar. "I've got the greatest little brother in the world and a new friend by my side. They've seen the worst I have to offer and are still here with me! That's a lot more than I can say about you!"

Apsu still fought, but now it was only a token resistance. The Primordial of creation was reduced to childlike whimpering and flailing.

"You need me, Suen. You're helpless without me."

"No, Apsu. Truth be told, it sounds more like you need me. Well, that's too bad! I command you to leave me, immediately! Oh, and don't worry if the door hits you on the way out. I won't."

Apsu was an immortal entity older than the world itself, imbued with the powers of creation, a veritable goddess—yet she was cast out of Suen with all the anticlimactic affair of a quiet sneeze. Even then, she might have done some real damage, but there more important matters to attend to, across the planes of reality to where a dying old man was breathing his last.

…...

With the Everlasting Army slowly chipping away at Ba Sing Se, Raava's Avatar weakened from her confrontation, and Vainamoinen nearly expired at her feet, it was only a matter of time before Apsu's ambitions were realized—and for a being millions of years old, time was relative, malleable, inconsequential. Whether her schemes took an epoch or an evening to bear fruit made no real difference, so long as it happened—and it would. What else was there to stop her? She said all this to the Mariner, wondering what sort of response he would humor her with.

"So you...lost your avatar, eh?"

"Yes, but the loss of a single tool means nothing to me now. The Everlasting Army is already on the move. Vaatu is sealed, Raava's puppet can barely move after her ordeal, and you will soon find the Solution to your...what did you call it? That Final Problem? Yes, and swiftly, too. The end is at hand. You, at least, will not live to see it. I wonder how the rest of those noisome mortals will take it."

Vainamoinen coughed. "Wonder as much as you like, Apsu, it will do you no good! You will bear no more witness to it than I will." She peered at him curiously. The slightest twinge of pity creased her brow.

"Still going on about that? How do you propose to stop me, nephew? You no longer have a voice for singing." He laughed through intermittent coughs. The way his eyes twinkled was more disquieting than any open threat could hope to be.

"I plan to stop you by dying, Apsu, a facet which you have been gracious enough to provide for."

There was another foreboding pause.

"Excuse me?" Vainamoinen laughed.

"Did you honestly think I came to this Spirit World in the hopes of contesting my powers against yours? Or that I alerted you to my presence so that I could negotiate? No, no," he chuckled, coughing until he spat blood, "I set your demise up long ago. I admit I had a great deal of assistance in this regard, and cannot take full credit for the petard you have so ignorantly hoisted yourself upon."

"Speak plainly, fool!" she shouted, looming over him with all of her fury. It is difficult to intimidate the dying, especially when they know, or at least feel, they have won.

"Tell me, Apsu: where do you think you are at this moment, now that you no longer hold any sway over that poor girl?" Apsu snorted, wondering what sort of mockery he was daring to attempt. Where else could she be but the Spirit World? He only laughed again as she said this. "You are mistaken. Oh, we certainly met in the Spirit World, but from the moment you arrived, I have been drawing you into a...hmm, how do I put this? I have, ah...drawn you into my Self, as it were."

She looked confused, so (mortally wounded though he was) he tried to elaborate: "Our opening conversation was a ruse. I kept your attention while secretly bending the space around us both. You were so distracted by what you perceived to be my foolishness that you didn't take notice. I bent the space until only you and I existed, then I drew you into my Self—my soul, I suppose you could say. Luonnotar could explain it better, but put simply, Apsu, your entire Self is inextricably fused with my Self. Whatever happens to me happens to you. It is not so dissimilar from the relationship Raava has with the Avatar, or what you enjoyed until recently. Of course, I could not accomplish this so long as you were tethered to that girl, so her brother and the Avatar saw to that problem—and they were triumphant. Their hearts swayed what no weapon or bending-art could. Then it was only a matter of perishing, which—as I have said—you were kind enough to contribute. Just as Raava would die if her Avatar were killed in their highest state of consciousness, so now must you expire as well." He smiled sweetly at her, but she was horror-stricken.

"You lie," she whispered, no longer looming over him, nor trying to intimidate, nor even in very much control. Apsu, in fact, was backing away from him, fear and disbelief overtaking her. "You don't have that kind of power."

"Oh? Then why have you stopped gloating? Where is your assurance of victory now?"

"You dare..." She crossed the distance between them in an instant, clutching a pulsating black spear, raising to strike—but checked herself all the same. Doubt overcame her, and he laughed at her in all her helpless glory.

"Strike, Apsu, strike! Become the fulcrum of your own eternal destruction!"

He was taunting her! Her, Apsu, a Primordial, immortal and all-powerful! Yet she didn't dare retaliate. She could already feel herself fading, teetering over the gulf that separates the living from the dead. She had felt this before, once, during the early ages of the world, when a Hero bound and sealed her away—only now there would be no breaking of the seal, no returning from the Emptiness. Death in the Spirit World would consign her to oblivion beyond reach, an endless Nothing which even she could never escape. Being anchored to Suen was the only thing that had kept her from this fate, but now? Now she was but a candle in the rain.

In a last-ditch effort, Apsu returned to Vainamoinen's side and put forth all her power in keeping the old man alive. She got the same results as every other mortal who had tried to suppress their final end, and could only wail as they both slipped away from all worlds forever: one to the annals of legend and song, among the valiant dead; the other, to nothing, nothing, endless nothing. He issued a few final words before passing, drowning out her fading screams:

"Setsuna, goodbye! Avatar...I am no longer needed in this world. You are! May your great heart serve it well. And...do remember: moderation in all things. Farewell!"

Anyone who happened across the spot where Vainamoinen's body sat in the physical plane saw only a pile of dust, some rotting red clothes, and a staff firmly planted into the ground, leaves slowly budding from its slender shaft.

…...

Makoto was just about to swing her fist into another hapless ooze-monster when it dissipated into smoke before her eyes. Confused, she looked around, only to see the entire army following its example. Every last one of the creatures evaporated en mass, until the battlefield had been emptied completely. Not quite grasping how all of this was happening, but exuberant just the same, she jumped up and let out a loud war whoop. Soon everyone was rushing at each other, smiling and embracing; the city let out a cheer as its gates opened and their King returned in triumph.

Suen, meanwhile, let out a short cry as Apsu was cast into the Emptiness, and fell to her knees. Her brother and Usagi kept hold of her, and comforted her as she trembled.

Sobbing.

Free.

The End of "Life Will Change"

Next time: the final chapter

Author's notes:

The song "Life Will Change", featured in Persona 5, is written by Lyn Inaizumi and Shoji Meguro—because if you're going to end something with a climactic action scene, you may as well do it correctly.

Chapter Text

Fire...Air...Water...Earth... The Avatar has been revealed, and after many months of hardship and struggle, the world is poised to enter into an age of prosperity and peace. With the tyranny of Beryl brought to ruin and the great evil of Apsu abolished forever, the balance has been maintained, and the world has been saved. The Avatar's name is Usagi, a warrior of love and justice, and despite all the great deeds she has accomplished, her story is not over yet!

AVATAR

The Celestial Sailors

BOOK TWO: HEART

23: Entr'acte

For the longest time, they sat together in silence, resting from an exhausting battle. None of them had gone unscathed: clothes were torn and threadbare, hair was loose and unkempt, bruises were everywhere, cuts were prevalent, and the weariness of war weighed heavily in their eyes. It was a solemn moment, one filled with relief and joy, but also anxiety. Suen was glad for the silence, and Usagi was glad to let her reflect in silence. She felt like she was looking at the other girl for the first time.

"Apsu was right, you know," Suen spoke at last, her voice heavy and sorrowful. "I did horrible things...inexcusable things, especially to my friends. I can't justify any of it; I can't make excuses. I meant what I said, you know, back then—about me being willing to face the consequences. I'm just...afraid of facing my friends, you know. I know I don't deserve their forgiveness..." Usagi and Anshar looked at each other glumly, then she scooted in close and put an arm around Suen's shoulders.

"I think everything will be fine. Everyone deserves a second chance. I don't know your friends as well as you do, but I feel like they'll forgive you. I certainly do."

"Thanks," she whispered, smiling sadly. She hung her head and wiped a tear from her face. "But I won't blame them if they don't." Usagi smiled warmly at her.

"Have a little more faith in them. We'll leave whenever you're ready."

"I don't think it will matter," she said numbly. "I'm as ready as I'll ever be." She and Anshar held hands—she didn't ever want to let him go—as they made the long walk back to Ba Sing Se. It was almost evening when they reached the front gates. Suen expected to be stopped and arrested by the guards, but she was allowed through without any fuss. Her eyes darted around the city nervously, expecting someone to attack her, or curse her at the very least. People were too busy rebuilding the war-torn streets and buildings to pay her much mind.

"At least the cabbage stand survived," Usagi observed, pointing to two stalls. She winced as she noticed a radish salesman bemoaning his ill fate, and hoped he'd get back on his feet soon. It took them the better part of an hour to make it back to the palace; Usagi hesitated only slightly as she approached it. No matter how many times she came here, it still felt like she was invading Beryl's territory. The guards let her through; she asked where Mamoru was; a page escorted her to the king's chamber. On the way, Suen stopped in her tracks, jerking at her brother's hand. There, only fifty feet away, her four friends were gathered, chatting gaily among themselves. Suen felt ill and hung her head, hoping they wouldn't notice. Usagi saw her and gave a little shove. They noticed.

"Suen?" Ishtar took a tentative step closer, clutching her hands. Suen kept her head down, scarcely daring to glance up. She waved timidly.

"U-um...h, hello Ishtar. H-hello, everybody."

"Is it really you, Suen?" Marduk whispered. Suen fought back tears of sorrow and regret.

"Y-yeah, it's me. Ah, I'm here...a-and I'm s-so s-s-sorry, I..."

She was cut off as three girls rushed at her, calling her name, throwing their arms around her. Suen was completely paralyzed, unable to process this unexpected reaction. The tears fell of their own accord, and she completely broke down. Words caught stiffly in her throat.

"I'm so sorry, I...I'm so sorry..."

"Shut up," Ishtar wailed, her eyes also brimming, "j-just shut up, okay? I told you..." She kissed the tears away, even aiming one at Suen's lips, which startled her. She felt a hand on her shoulder and looked to see Nabu, her normally stoic face glowing with warmth.

"Apparently Ishtar is even more flagrant with her expressions now. I got the same treatment not so long ago. It is good to have you back, old friend." She then smiled and, in a completely unprecedented move, went in for a hug. Suen didn't know what to do, or say, so she just knelt there and sobbed. Anshar soon joined them, and Usagi discreetly crept out, laughing from sheer happiness.

It wasn't long before Usagi was finally, finally, finally reunited with her own friends—and Mamoru. Hugs, kisses, and tears abounded. It would no doubt take days, weeks to tell all their stories, but that could wait for later. After all, they had been through a great tribulation, and had earned a little bit of unfiltered happiness. About an hour or so later—there really was no way to tell how much time passed—Suen's group settled to the point where they could approach Usagi's group for a talk. There were still plenty of red eyes going around, but everyone was flushed with joy. Suen stared at the floor, wringing her hands, before looking at Usagi.

"So, uh...we've been...talking—my group and I. Um...we have a lot to...sift through. Clearly. I don't just mean with our group: there's a lot...to do. What I mean is...this world is still full of problems. There's a lot...to fix, to make better, and, well...I think it's time I stopped blaming other people for not doing anything. I guess what I'm trying to say is, if I want this world to get better, I can't depend on other people to do it for me. I have to be the one to make that change—umm, no offense, of course."

"I understand," Usagi grinned. "I think it's a wonderful idea...and frankly, I need all the help I can get!" They both laughed.

"I don't know about that," Suen tittered. "You seem pretty capable. We'll just help out wherever we can. I think...it would be good for us. I had a lot of fun traveling with these wonderful girls, and I want to keep doing it. So will you give us your blessing?"

"Of course!" Usagi exclaimed, taking Suen's hands. "I know you'll do a lot of good together. And don't worry too much about what people think of you. Five beautiful girls and a cute boy traveling together? You're gonna be very popular!" They chuckled again and Suen thanked her. She grew more serious as she pulled Usagi aside and lowered her voice.

"Look, I know they've forgiven me and everything, but...I still don't feel worthy of them. I mean, we're all friends, but they're all experienced benders, and now that Apsu's gone, I'm...I have nothing to offer." Usagi smiled warmly, fully sympathizing with Suen's plight. It wasn't so long ago when she had faced a similar personal crisis.

"Are you kidding me? I did some of my best work before ever learning I was the Avatar. I escaped from Beryl's attack on the tournament, survived a house falling on me, saved King Motoki's life, broke my friends out of a maximum security prison, and even fought Beryl, all without any special abilities—and I'm just a clumsy, indecisive, lazy little crybaby who's still afraid of bugs. Think of what someone as awesome as you could pull off!" Suen laughed sweetly, and admitted that Usagi had a good point. The Avatar then pulled her into an embrace, which she happily returned.

"Keep in touch, Suen. I know you'll do good out there."

"Thanks, Usagi. You're...a good Avatar. And a good friend." They smiled at each other one more time, and with Anshar and a bouncing Kishar soon following, the five girls took their leave of the king and the city, venturing out into the wide world. They had scarcely made it two steps outside, however, before Ishtar peered at her friend's little brother.

"Hey Sue, you never told us how cute your brother was. I call dibs on him!"

"What?" Ishtar squeaked and grabbed onto his arm.

"Dibs! I call dibs!" Suen growled.

"He's thirteen, Ishtar!" The other blonde stared in awe.

"Oh? Well then, I call dibs five years in the future!"

"You're not calling dibs on my brother!"

"Yeah," Marduk rallied, "show some tact! Besides..." She grabbed his other arm and stuck her tongue out. "I'm calling dibs two years from now!"

"Hey! What did I just say?!"

"Thirteen's not too young to date," Nergal reasoned. "I had my first date when I was ten. Therefore, I call dibs right now."

"Is anybody listening to me?!" Suen roared. Poor Anshar found himself in a tug-of-war between three girls (sometimes four, since Suen was trying to wrench him away). As always, Nabu just rolled her eyes.

"I'm pretty sure he's not going to date any of us."

"That leaves her out of the running!" Nergal exclaimed. She balled her fist and stared at her two "rivals". "Now it's just the three of us! And since guys love fiery redheads, I'm sure to win!"

"In a flying pig's eye!" Marduk spat. "A man loves a woman who can cook, and I'm the best cook!"

"But I'm the most experienced with men," Ishtar announced proudly. Suen nearly tore her hair out in frustration.

"Urgh, how'd I get stuck with crazy friends like you?!" Nabu shook her head, unable to hold in the laughter any more. She let out a big long guffaw, and soon, everyone else was laughing along.

…...

With Apsu gone, there were fewer truly dangerous threats left in the world, but still plenty of mundane ones. Scarcely three days after their victory in Ba Sing Se, the girls got word that Tears of Apsu were disintegrating the world over, and unrest among black market traders and smugglers was rising in accord. Wishing to investigate further (and to leave the palace for a few days), Mamoru journeyed with the girls, and after a few scrapes and adventures, they ran into Ma-Ti, Linka, Gi, Kwame, and Wheeler, who had been hunting badger-mole poachers. Together they either settled or put to route most of the troublemakers; a few days after solving matters with a particularly nasty kingpin, Minako got word from Boris that Artemis was nearly recovered from his injury, and he would be heading her way soon. Heartened by this good news, and with several prospects ahead of them, they parted ways with Ma-Ti's group, each one encouraging the other.

Usagi took some time to proudly flex her newfound bending abilities for her friends. She easily countered Minako's breezes, rode around with Ami on ice blocks she created herself (still falling off sometimes), knocked several stones off their pedestals before an impressed Mamoru (claiming every one stood for a date he owed her), and even breathed fire for Rei. She still had difficulties keeping up with Makoto's martial arts, but the taller woman was still proud of her progress. She even entertained the idea of learning earth-bending from her pupil.

After helping to quell the restless djinn, Asanuma, Kotono, and their company took a few days off to relax in the Ember Island tropics. Lark and the prince grew closer, and everyone generally had a good time. Word of local pirates eventually found its way to their ears, so they cut their vacation short and went hunting out on the open sea. They happened across a rueful kraken, but more intriguingly, came across what Salamander thought to be a vast undersea kingdom—something to consider looking into later during their travels.

The first place Suen and her company visited was the town she had saved from a flood. She wanted to find Keya, if for no other reason than to attempt a reconciliation, and while there was still plenty of work to do in the area, her search always focused on the wandering swordswoman. She found her a week later, in a nearby country, throwing rowdy drunks out of a bar. Their meeting was bittersweet; Suen kowtowed in humility and begged for forgiveness. Keya, upon discovering her friend's state of mind, gave it without question, throwing arms of camaraderie around her. The six travelers then became seven, and they continued their journey, bringing light to a world long under darkness.

After making a few quick stops to several Air Temples, Usagi and her friends swung by Omashu to give their respects to Motoki, Unazuki, and everyone else. Minako conspicuously avoided reuniting with Gurio Umino and would not say why; she chose to help out Unazuki instead, insisting that Makoto spend her time with the king. Just in case anybody was still puzzled over their relationship, they both made it clear to everyone (which was just Rei at this point); in fact, the day of their wedding was approaching soon. Motoki had wanted to delay it since his fiancee was still devoting most of her time to helping the Avatar, but his councilors and the general public could only be patient for so long. Makoto was at least open to the suggestion, but playfully warned her groom-to-be he might have to wait for a honeymoon.

While they were in Omashu, Usagi caught up to her family again. They had gotten word of the upcoming marriage and "wanted to get in on the ground floor", as her father put it. She was overjoyed to see them (she even hugged her brother) and spent a good day with them while everyone else relaxed and kept up-to-date on world affairs. The whole gang, including the king and his sister, went to a production of The Avenging Shadow together, where Usagi also ran into Naru. Two more days passed before it was time they moved on, but before they left, Shingo tossed his sister a mewling black bundle.

"It's your turn to take care of Luna now," he said. Luna protested as Usagi scrambled with the poor cat, but eventually found her way to Usagi's head, where she curled up between her trademark buns and fell asleep. Everyone laughed and agreed the black cat with the crescent mark on her forehead would make an excellent addition to the team. Hugs and handshakes were passed around; Makoto even kissed the king on his royal cheek, promising to keep in touch.

"I wish I could go with you," Naru sighed as she and Usagi embraced. The other girl smiled sadly.

"I know. I hate leaving my friends behind. I did it for only one week and the whole world almost got wiped out. But I think it's best if you stay here. Who knows, maybe you and Unazuki could be friends."

"I wouldn't object to that," the princess winked. She also nudged Umino, who had been trying hard not to stare (he had never seen the princess in person, and the rumors of her beauty were woefully inadequate). "Say, how would you like to join the Tellurians? I've been given a command and I'd love to have some cute new volunteers."

"Uh, r-r-r-r-really?!" he blurted, turning furiously red. Unazuki giggled and winked.

"Sure. You'd be serving your king and country, and you'd get to spend a lot of time with me."

"Ah..." Umino froze; his brain had probably short-circuited. "A-a-a-ah, y-yes ma'am your majesty, I'd be honored your exalted highness, bah-bah-bah-but I don't know if my parents will let me have another job, I mean I could probably convince them, especially if I have a reference from the princess, your worship, buh-buh-but I d-don't think w-w-we should date or anything like that, it w-wouldn't be professional, and besides..." He hesitated and, amazingly, held in what very little breath he had left before releasing it in one final explosion: "I...I ALREADY HAVE A GIRLFRIEND!"

"You do?" Minako sputtered. Usagi recoiled in disbelief.

"You do?"

"Oh?" Unazuki said. "And who might this lucky young lady be?"

Then, to Usagi's surprise (and honestly, only to hers), Naru looped her arm around Umino's.

"That would be me, your majesty." Usagi's jaw became unhinged, and her eyes twitched.

"WAH WAH WAH WHAAAAT?! Since when?!"

"Since a few days before you arrived. We bonded over our love of The Avenging Shadow."

"Must be some play," Mamoru remarked. Unazuki nodded, smiling impishly as she winked at Naru.

"Ah, a woman after my own heart, and a rival for my affections! This should prove to be very interesting in the future! Anyway, you know where the recruitment office is if you're serious, cutie. See ya then!" She winked and blew a kiss as she walked away. Motoki gave his sister an incongruous stare as he joined her.

"You really have no shame, do you?"

"Well I'm only human," she said gaily. "He's really cute, likes the same plays I do, has excellent manners...and he has a nice rear end."

She said that last part loud enough for Umino to hear, and all his faculties failed him, prompting him to faint. Minako stared as Naru tried reviving him.

"I mean, she's not wrong," the blonde reasoned. Naru chuckled feebly.

"Yeah, tell me about it."

"Girls are weird," Shingo grumbled, crinkling his nose. Usagi nodded.

"For once, little brother, I agree with you completely."

…...

Artemis and Minako arrived at Ba Sing Se at almost the exact same time (with a message from Boris and Linka attached). She positively spoiled the creature, cuddling and scratching him and feeding him all his favorite foods. Upon seeing Luna, the air-bison brayed, but the cat dauntlessly hopped off Usagi's head, bounded up Artemis's thick shaggy neck, and found a new home atop his own noggin. Artemis grumbled at first, but a few pleasant scratches from Luna settled him.

"I had a feeling those two would get along," Usagi sang. Setsuna was there as well; she greeted everyone with a solemn bow, smiling but somehow still sad, as her ruby eyes shimmered in the afternoon sun.

"Is something wrong, my lady?" Mamoru said (Usagi was no longer jealous of him addressing anyone in that manner). She smiled wistfully.

"No...all is as it should be. I must part from your esteemed company, though. I have business to attend to elsewhere."

"That is still unfortunate. We all owe you a great debt."

"Don't worry about it," she assured them, chuckling softly. "I do what I do not for thanks or reward, but because it must be done. A task completed successfully is gratitude enough for me. Besides, we will meet again...in the future." With that, enigmatic as always, she strolled past them, but cast a final glimpse at Usagi before disappearing from their lives: "Oh, Avatar, I think you should pay Master Vainamoinen's grave a visit. You'll know where it is. Take care of yourselves." And with that, she was gone, long emerald hair swinging to and fro like the pendulum of an enchanted clock. Minako shielded her eyes from the sun as she watched her leave.

"Come to think of it, Setsuna's got a nice rear end, too."

"For crying out loud," Rei grumbled, "is that all you think about?"

"What?" she shrugged. "I call em' like I see em'! Mamoru's got one, Boris has one, you, Usagi, Ishtar, that Kwame guy..."

"Discipline at all times," Rei muttered to herself as the group walked away. "All times, Rei, all times..." Usagi laughed to herself, then offered Mamoru a quick kiss as she excused herself. Visiting the final resting place of her master was the very least she could do.

A little tree had begun to blossom from the staff he had planted. That was the only article of Vainamoinen's left in the entire world, the only proof that he had lain his life down here, on this spot. Usagi approached it and knelt reverently, clasping her hands in prayer though she couldn't think of anything to say. In all likelihood, the old drifter probably would've appreciated silence more, and that she had in abundance.

"Excuse me, young lady," a voice from behind called out, "could you tell me how to get to Ba Sing Se from here? I'm afraid I'm a bit lost." She was so focused on her silent prayer that she hadn't heard anyone approaching. The voice belonged to an older man, pleasant and warm; she stood up and smiled.

"Sure, it's not too far away, you just..." She caught herself as she stared at him. He was short, fairly plump, with a thin graying beard and mustache. He wore what looked like a magistrate's miter, a thick cloak or robe that only accentuated his round figure, and heavy wrinkles borne from many years of laughter and mirth. Most striking of all, though, was the hazy glow surrounding him—and the fact that she could see right through him. Usagi trembled as a tear fell down her face.

"Who...are you?" she whispered. The vision beamed beatifically.

"You know who I am, Usagi." She nodded shakily.

"Avatar...Kalkin." He nodded slowly, still smiling.

"I know what you're thinking: 'why, he's even more handsome than I imagined.'" She gave a bittersweet laugh, and his merry eyes twinkled before turning solemn. "My dear, you must have...so many questions for me. Come, let us make ourselves comfortable. It's long past time for us to chat." Usagi was far too excited to do anything else; she barely managed two wobbly steps before she sat back down. Avatar Kalkin sat facing her, crossing his legs, adjusting the sleeves of his long robe in the fashion of a nobleman sitting down for his tea. He nodded at her to begin—but where could she possibly start? At the time, only one thing came to mind:

"Avatar Kalkin...how did you die?"

"Ah," he announced, tipping his cap with a fan. Hesitating, he studied his successor closely, then sat back and relaxed. "I would much prefer to talk about how I lived. Tell me, did you ever hear the story of how I defeated an entire army using only my thumbs?"

"Uh...no," she said, fully intrigued. Kalkin laughed politely and began his story.

"Well, it was many years ago, during the tumultuous time of war where the entire world looked ready to rip itself apart. A very ornery customer named Durga got it into his head that he could be just as great a conqueror as his contemporaries, and a stuffy, selfish, spoiled whelp of an Avatar was the only thing standing between him and his pillaging..."

Kalkin and Usagi talked throughout the whole day, and were still talking as the sky darkened and the moon conducted the ballet of stars. Meanwhile, Ami was sitting on a bench next to the main courtyard fountain, content to listen to the rippling water and the soft chirrup of crickets. She turned her head as she heard someone, smiling as Minako approached her.

"Hello, Mina. Lovely night. Care to join me?"

"Don't mind if I do." Ami scooted over; Minako sat next to her; they studied the sky in content silence for a moment. "Summer's almost here. You can tell because the Firebird is rising in the east. See, there's a bit of the constellation."

"Ah," Ami observed. Astronomy may not have been her strongest pursuit, but she did carry an interest in it. "Did Usagi teach you that?"

"Ahuh. She even told me where my astrological sign is. You can't see it now; I'm a late winter, early spring kinda gal."

"Hmm," Ami hummed. She knew where her own sign, the Wise Salmon, was, and wished she could see it. "The sky looks so different down here. Up north, we have some very unique constellations. I hear they're different in the south as well."

"Oh really? I wonder why that is. You'd think they'd be the same no matter where you were."

"Well, your perspective changes depending on latitude. The planet also tilts on its axis, so you can only see some stars in the winter and some in the summer. Because we're so small and the world is always obstructing our view from some angle, you'd have to get out into space to be able to..." She trailed off, realized that she was rambling, saw the overwhelmed look on Minako's face, and stammered. They both burst out laughing. Then, sweet blissful silence.

"Some adventure we've had," Minako spoke. Ami nodded imperceptibly.

"Yes. It's hard to believe so much happened in only about two weeks."

"Well," Minako said, grunting as she stretched her arms out to the stars, "I'm glad we have some time to rest. Still, I can't help but wonder what we'll do next. We've pretty much been everywhere already."

"I know," Ami replied. She turned her head and gave her neighbor a perky smile. "Say, if you could go anywhere in the world, anywhere at all, where would you want to be?" Minako smiled as their eyes met. She didn't need to think about the answer. She just moved closer and took Ami's hand in her own.

"I'm already there."

The End of Book Two: Heart

Author's notes:

Two down and one to go. This last one's going to be huge. Hopefully it will answer all the lingering questions, or at least clear up a few things. I'd like to spend some extra time working on it, so expect delays. In the meantime, aside from thanking the usual people, I'd like to give thanks to the Kalevala for Vainamoinen, Captain Planet and the Planeteers for Kwame, Wheeler, Linka, Gi, and Ma-Ti, and of course, the video game Sailor Moon: Another Story for Suen/Sin, Nabu, Ishtar, Nergal, Marduk, Anshar, and Apsu. And now, a preview of the final Book in this saga.

Next time:

"Battle games can be dangerous."

"I couldn't imagine something worse than Apsu...but then again, a man's imagination can only go so far."

"Avatar, it is time we spoke of your true purpose...and of The Bent One."

"Rei, you're about to live out your dream."

"I want to spend the rest of my life with Usagi...but I don't know how that's going to work out."

"You've got to have a name! You're NOT just some harbinger of death! Think! What did your parents call you?"

"I can remember...fireflies."

"Avatar, you know why I'm here. You know I have to kill him. I ask one last time: will you help me?"

"Your allies have forsaken you, and for good reason. They would be mad to contest the Light."

"My name is Avatar Usagi Tsukino! I fight for love and justice! In the name of this world and all those who live on it, I will right wrongs and triumph over evil—and that means you!"

To be concluded in The Celestial Sailors, Book Three: DEATH